You are on page 1of 606

GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

Super CAP T and Super CAP II T


for Series 16/18-TB, 16/18-TC, and 16i/18i-TA
Operator's Manual
B-62444E-1/04

October 1997

GFL-001

Warnings, Cautions, and Notes


as Used in this Publication
Warning
Warning notices are used in this publication to emphasize that hazardous voltages, currents,
temperatures, or other conditions that could cause personal injury exist in this equipment or
may be associated with its use.
In situations where inattention could cause either personal injury or damage to equipment, a
Warning notice is used.

Caution
Caution notices are used where equipment might be damaged if care is not taken.

Note
Notes merely call attention to information that is especially significant to understanding and
operating the equipment.

This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts
have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all
details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide for every possible contingency in
connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein
which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes
no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made.
GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory
with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for the accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or
usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for
purpose shall apply.

PowerMotion is a trademark of GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.

Copyright 1997 GE Fanuc Automation North America, Inc.


All Rights Reserved.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

When using a machine equipped with the FANUC Super CAP T and FANUC Super CAP II T, be sure to observe
the following safety precautions.

s1

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62444E1/04

DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE

This manual includes safety precautions for protecting the user and preventing damage to the
machine. Precautions are classified into Warning and Caution according to their bearing on safety.
Also, supplementary information is described as a Note. Read the Warning, Caution, and Note
thoroughly before attempting to use the machine.

WARNING
Applied when there is a danger of the user being injured or when there is a damage of both the user
being injured and the equipment being damaged if the approved procedure is not observed.

CAUTION
Applied when there is a danger of the equipment being damaged, if the approved procedure is not
observed.

NOTE
The Note is used to indicate supplementary information other than Warning and Caution.

 Read this manual carefully, and store it in a safe place.

s2

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62444E1/04

GENERAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

WARNING
1. Before starting to use the conversational functions (such as creation/run of machining programs,
measurement of tool compensation, and specification of a chuck barrier), close the doors of the
machine, and take any other necessary safety measures.
Failure to take a necessary safety measure may bring about the death of, or a serious injury to,
the user.
2. Before going to the next step of handling or operation, check the display on the screen carefully
to assure that the intended data has been entered correctly.
If the machine is used with incorrect data, the tool may bump against the machine and/or
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
3. When you are using a tool compensation function, before starting the machine, check the
direction and amount of compensation so that the tool will not bump against the workpiece or
machine.
If the tool bumps against the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be
damaged, and even injuries may occur.
4. After you create a machining program using a conversational function, do not run the machine
on that program immediately. Instead, carry out machining simulation to make sure that the tool
path and machining operation are correct and that the tool will not bump against the workpiece
or machine (including the chuck and tailstock).
If the tool bumps against the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be
damaged, and even injuries may occur.
5. After you convert a machining program created using a conversational function to NC program
format, do not run the machine on that program immediately. Instead, confirm every step of the
resultant NC program, and make sure that the tool path and machining operation are correct and
that the tool will not bump against the workpiece or machine (including the chuck and tailstock).
Before starting production machining, run the machine with no workpiece attached to the
machine to make sure that the tool will not bump against a workpiece (when attached) or the
machine (including the chuck and tailstock).
If the tool bumps against the machine and/or workpiece, the tool and/or machine may be
damaged, and even injuries may occur.
6. Before starting to create a machining program using a conversational function, make sure that
all necessary data among the tool data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
list, and chuck and tailstock data, and all parameters necessary for the conversational function
are set correctly.
If the necessary data is not set correctly, any required cutting conditions will not be set correctly,
possibly causing damage to the tool, and even injuries.

s3

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

B62444E1/04

WARNING
7. When you run the machine using a machining program created using a conversational function
or a machining program generated by converting another machining program to NC program
format, be sure to use the correct tool geometry compensation data measured on the relevant
measurement guidance screen provided by the conversational function.
If the machine is used with incorrect data, the tool may bump against the machine and/or
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
The method to measure the tool compensation amount may be provided by the machine tool
builder. If this is the case, before starting measurement, read carefully and understand
sufficiently the applicable users guide from the machine tool builder.
8. Before using a chuck barrier or chuck/tailstock barrier, perform a manual operation (such as jog
feed or manual pulse generator feed) to make sure that the barrier area data is set correctly, that
the barrier function occurs at the correct position, and that the tool will not bump against the
chuck or tailstock.
If the tool bumps against the chuck and/or tailstock, the tool and/or machine may be damaged,
and even injuries may occur.
9. When pressing the power ON button, do not touch any key on the keyboard before a display
appears on the screen. Some keys on the keyboard are allocated to maintenance or other special
operations. Pressing any of these keys may cause the machine to behave unexpectedly.

s4

Table of Contents

B62444E1/04

SAFETY PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . s1

I. GENERAL
1. OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
2. SYMBOLS USED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
3. FLOWCHART FROM CREATING A PROGRAM TO EXECUTING IT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
3.1
3.2
3.3

CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7


CHECKING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
SELECTING A MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EXECUTED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

4. SELECTING THE MENU AND INPUTTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10


4.1
4.2

SOFT KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CALCULATION FUNCTIONS SIMILAR TO THOSE OF A HANDHELD CALCULATOR . . . .
4.2.1
Operation for Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Keys for Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

11
12
12
14

5. HIERARCHY OF THE CONVERSATIONAL SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15

II. OPERATION
1. OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
2.1
2.2

KEYBOARD TYPES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
DETAILS OF THE KEYBOARD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23

3. OPERATION MODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
4. TYPES OF SCREENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
4.1
4.2

ONEPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
TWOPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

5. DESCRIPTION OF COORDINATE SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43


5.1

ONEPATH LATHER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.1
Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.2
Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1.3
Program Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c1

44
44
45
46

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

5.2

TWOPATH LATHES WITH TWO OPPOSING SPINDLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


5.2.1
Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.2
Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2.3
Program Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3
FOR TWOPATH LATHES WITH ONE SPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.1
Machine Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.2
Workpiece Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3.3
Program Coordinate System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

47
47
48
49
50
50
51
52

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53


6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5

6.6
6.7

6.8

FORMAT OF MACHINING PROGRAM USED FOR THE ONEPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . .


FORMAT OF MACHINING PROGRAM USED FOR THE TWOPATH LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SELECTING THE CONVERSATIONAL MODE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4.1
Entering the Number and Name of a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
INITIAL SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.1
Details of Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.5.2
Operation for Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PROCESS DATA SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.6.1
Operation for the Process Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FIGURE DATA SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.1
Operation on the Contour Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.7.2
Operation for Data other than Contour Data on the Figure Data Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CREATING A NEW PROGRAM USING OTHER PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.1
Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.8.2
Copying a Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

54
55
56
57
57
58
58
64
65
66
68
68
70
72
72
72

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73


7.1

CHECKING INPUT FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


7.1.1
Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.2
Specifying the Program to be Edited . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.3
Displaying the Contents of the Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.4
Enlarging the Part of the Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1.5
End of Checking Machining Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2
CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS USING THE SIMULATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.1
Selecting a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.2
Simulating Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2.3
Enlarging a Figure and Displaying Other Screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3
SIMULATION OF YAXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.1
Simulation of Yaxis Machining by a Onepath Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3.2
Simulation of Yaxis Machining by a Twopath Lathe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4
OFFSET DATA SAVE AND RESTORE FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1
Generals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2
Parameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3
Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4
Execution Selection State Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5
Tool Changing Position Temporary Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.6
Alternation of G30 Command in Macro Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c2

74
74
74
74
76
76
77
78
80
83
85
85
86
87
87
87
88
89
90
90

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

7.5

MACHINING SIMULATION BASED ON A SOLID MODEL (SUPER CAP II T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91


7.5.1

Simulating a Cutting Operation Based on a Solid Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

7.5.2

Simulation of C/Yaxis Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94


8.1

SELECTING THE MACHINING PROGRAM TO BE EDITED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95


8.1.1

Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

8.1.2

Selecting a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

8.2

EDITING A MACHINING PROGRAM IN UNITS OF PROCESSES (PROGRAM SCREEN) . . . . 97


8.2.1

Deleting a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

8.2.2

Adding a New Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

8.3

CHANGING THE PROCESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

8.4

CHANGING PART OF THE CONTOUR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99


8.4.1

Changing Entered Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

8.4.2

Changing the Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

8.4.3

Adding a Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

8.4.4

Deleting a Figure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

8.5

CHANGING FIGURE DATA OTHER THAN CONTOUR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105

8.6

EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS IN UNITS OF PROCESSES


(PROCESS EDITING SCREEN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
8.6.1

Displaying the Process Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

8.6.2

Moving a Process for a Tool Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

8.6.3

Moving a Process between the Two Tool Posts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108

8.6.4

Copying a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109

8.6.5

Deleting a Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

8.6.6

Searching for a Process (Editing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

8.7

AUTOMATIC SCHEDULING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111


8.7.1

Operation of Automatic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

8.7.2

Details of Automatic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

8.8

DELETING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

8.9

EDITING NC PROGRAMS (CROSS EDITING) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

9. OUTPUTTING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118


10. READING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
11. CONVERTING MACHINING PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
11.1

CONVERTING A MACHINING PROGRAM TO AN NC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

11.1.1

Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Conversion to NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

11.1.2

Converting a Machining Program to an NC Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

11.1.3

Entering Setting Data Before Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

11.2

ALARMS DURING CONVERSION OF THE MACHINING PROGRAM


INTO THE NC PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

11.3

SETTING THE READER/PUNCH INTERFACE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125


c3

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR MACHINING PROGRAMS CREATED


CONVERSATIONALLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
12.1

OPERATION BEFORE EXECUTION


(SUCH AS SELECTING A PROGRAM, MOUNTING A TOOL, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 Displaying the Registeredprogram Directory Screen for Direct Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 Specifying a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Setting Data on the Setting Screen Before Execution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.4 Mounting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.5 Measuring Tool Geometry Compensation when no Tool Setter is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.6 Measuring Tool Geometry Compensation when a Tool Setter is Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.7 Chuck Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.8 Chuck/Tailstock Barrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2
EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 Starting Execution of Machining Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 Override Playback Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 Execution of a Conversational Machining Program After Conversion to an NC Program . . . .

127
127
128
129
135
137
143
146
155
156
156
157
159

13. SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160


13.1
TOOL DATA FILE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.1 Displaying the Tool Data Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.2 Operations on the Tool Data Directory Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.3 Tool Data for Machining Outer Surfaces, Inner Surfaces, End Faces,
and Inner Bottom Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.4 Tool Data for External Threads and Internal Threads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.5 Tool Data for Grooving on Outer Surfaces, Inner Surfaces, and End Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.6 Tool Data for Drilling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.7 Tool Data for Tapping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.8 Tool Data for Center Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.9 Tool Data for Throwaway Drills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.10 Tool Data for End Mills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.11 Tool Data for Side Cutters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.12 Tool Data for Chamfering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.13 Tool Data for Reamers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.14 Tool Data for Boring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.15 Automatic Tool Specification Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.16 Tool Geometry Data for Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1.17 Details of the Automatic Setting of Tool Geometry Data for Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2
MACHINING CONDITION DATA AND SURFACE ROUGHNESS DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.1 Machining Condition Data for Generalpurpose Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.2 Cutting Condition Data for Threading Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.3 Cutting Condition Data for Grooving Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.4 Cutting Condition Data for Drilling Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.5 Cutting Condition Data for Tapping Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.6 Cutting Condition Data for Caxis/Yaxis Machining Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.7 Coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2.8 Surface Roughness Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3
PRETOOL LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c4

162
163
164
166
170
172
176
178
180
182
184
186
188
190
192
194
196
198
203
203
205
206
207
208
209
211
221
222

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

13.4
CHUCK/TAIL STOCK FIGURE DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.1 Chuck Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.2 Chuck Data Extension Function (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4.3 Tail Stock Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.5
PUNCHING OUT SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.6
READING SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.7
CLEARING SETTING DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

223
223
224
225
226
226
226

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227


14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4

DATA THAT CAN BE ENTERED AND OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


DATA OUTPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DATA INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O PARAMETER DISPLAY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

228
229
234
236

15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (Super CAP II T) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237


15.1
HOW TO CHANGE DISPLAY COLORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2
STORING AND CALLING DISPLAY COLOR DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.1 Storing Display Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
15.2.2 Calling Display Color Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

238
240
240
241

III. TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS


1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR 2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
1.1

BAR MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.2
Details of Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.4
Details of Contour Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.5
Partially Enlarged Drawing of a Contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.6
Automatic Residual Machining Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.7
Details of Bar Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.8
Entering Contour Data for Machining on the 2Path Lathe with Two Spindles Facing
Each Other . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.9
Entering Contour Data for Machining on the Singlespindle 2path Lathe (16TB) . . . . . . . .
1.1.10 Null Cutting Cancel Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.11
Compensation by Tool Cutting Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1.12 Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without Using G41/G42 Command . . . . . . . .
1.1.13 Improving the Machining of Figures that Differ Slightly in Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2
PATTERN REPEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2
Details of Setting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.3
Figure Data Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.4
Details of Pattern Repeating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.5
Automatic Reverse Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.6
Compensation by Tool Cutting Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c5

247
247
249
256
260
273
274
276
279
281
282
287
290
291
292
292
293
293
294
296
296

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

1.2.7
Improvement of Pattern Repeating Cutting Retract Movement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.8
Pattern Repeating Approach to Shape Start Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.9
Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without Using G41/G42 Command . . . . . . . .
1.3
RESIDUAL MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4
Details of Residual Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
END FACING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.3
Details of End Facing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5
THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5.4
Details of Threading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6
GROOVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6.4
Details of Grooving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7
NECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.3
Automatic Tool Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.4
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7.5
Details of Necking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8
CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, BORING, AND TAPPING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.2
Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.8.3
Automatic Pretool Determination Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9
SINGLE ACTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.4
Figure Data Input Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.5
Selecting the Type of Machining (Single Action II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.6
Process Data (For Single Action II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.9.7
Figure Data (For Single Action II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10
CALLING SUBPROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.1 Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.2 Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.3 Notes on Subprograms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.4 Selecting the Type of Machining (For Subcall II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.5 Process Data (For Subcall II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.6 Subprograms to be Called (Subcall II) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.10.7 NC Program Conversion For Subcall II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c6

297
300
304
305
305
306
308
312
313
313
313
314
315
315
316
323
326
328
329
330
337
343
345
345
346
351
352
352
354
355
356
364
365
365
365
366
367
368
368
369
370
370
370
371
371
372
373
374

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

1.11
AUXILIARY AND TRANSFER PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12
MCODE AND PROGRAM END PROCESSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.1 Mcode Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.12.2 Program End Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

374
375
375
376

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES WITH CAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377


2.1

2.2

2.3

2.4

2.5

2.6

2.7

CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, AND TAPPING FOR END FACES . . . . . . . . . . .


2.1.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.4
Automatic Pretool Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, AND TAPPING FOR SIDE FACES . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4
Automatic Pretool Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GROOVING FOR END FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS GROOVING FOR SIDE FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS NOTCHING FOR END FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.4
Details of Caxis Notching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5.5
NC Program Conversion for Caxis Notching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS NOTCHING FOR SIDE FACES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.2
Details of Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6.4
Details of Caxis Notching for Side Faces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS CYLINDRICAL MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.2
Details of Set Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.3
Details of Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7.4
Details of Cylindrical Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

378
378
379
382
384
385
385
386
388
390
391
391
392
394
398
398
399
400
405
405
407
408
411
413
415
415
416
416
417
418
418
419
421
423

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR A LATHE HAVING


THE YAXIS MACHINING FUNCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
3.1

YAXIS CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, AND TAPPING (ON THE END FACE) . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.1
Selecting a Machining Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.2
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1.4
Automatic Pretool Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c7

425
426
427
430
433

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

3.2

CENTER DRILLING, DRILLING, REAMING, AND TAPPING (ON THE SIDE FACE) . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Machining Type Selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.2
Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.4
Automatic Pretool Selection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
YAXIS MILLING (ON THE END FACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
Process Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4
YAXIS MILLING (ON THE SIDE FACE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.1
Machining Type Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.2
Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.4.3
Figure Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

434
436
437
439
442
443
443
444
446
448
449
450
452

4. CONVERTING A MACHINE PROGRAM IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE


SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFTHAND COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
4.1
4.2

OVERVIEW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DETAILS OF CONVERSION TO MACHINING PROGRAM IN THE LEFTHAND
COORDINATE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.1
Conversion of Machining Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2.2
Restrictions on Conversion to Machining Programs in the Lefthand Coordinate System . . . .

455
457
457
458

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS FOR A LATHE WITH A SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . 459


5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7

SELECTING THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


BACK MACHINING WITH THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COORDINATE SYSTEM FOR CAXIS MACHINING WITH THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . . . . . . .
ANIMATED SIMULATION FUNCTION FOR MACHINING WITH THE SUBSPINDLE . . . . .
FUNCTION FOR CONTROLLING THE CAXIS BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CAXIS MACHINING FUNCTION UNDER CONTROL OF SPINDLE POSITIONING . . . . . . .
AUTOMATIC OUTPUT OF THE M CODE FOR CONTROLLING THE SUBSPINDLE
(AND THE M CODES FOR CALLING SUBPROGRAMS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

460
461
462
463
463
464
465

IV. EXAMPLES OF CREATING PROGRAMS


1. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 469
1.1
1.2

SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING TOOL DATA AND CUTTING CONDITION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.1
Setting Tool Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2.2
Setting Cutting Condition Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3
EXAMPLES OF PROGRAMS FOR MACHINING THE CYLINDRICAL SURFACE
OF BARS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1
Creating a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2
Entering Initial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3
Specifying the Primary Machining Process (For the Leftside Tool Post) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4
Specifying a Transfer Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c8

470
474
474
475
476
476
477
478
480

TABLE OF CONTENTS

B62444E1/04

1.3.5
Specifying the Secondary Machining Process (For the Rightside Tool Post) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.6
Displaying the Figure of a Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.7
Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.8
Returning to the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4
SETTING UP MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.1
Setting the Workpiece Shift Amount . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4.2
Another Setup Operation for Machining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

481
483
484
484
485
485
486

2. EXAMPLE OF INPUTTING CONTOURS FOR BAR MACHINING AND


PATTERN REPEATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES WITH THE CAXIS . . . . . . . 505
3.1
3.2

SETTING PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING TOOL AND CUTTING CONDITION DATA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2.1
Setting Tool Data for Machining Around the Caxis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3
EXAMPLE OF CREATING A PROGRAM FOR NOTCHING AND
CYLINDRICAL MACHINING AROUND THE CAXIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1
Creating a Machining Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2
Entering the Initial Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3
Specifying Process 1 (End Face and Cylindrical Surface Machining) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4
Specifying Process 2 (Notching the End Face Around the Caxis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5
Specifying Process 3 (Cylindrical Surface Machining Around the Caxis) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6
Input for the End Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.7
Animated Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.8
Returning to the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

506
507
507
509
510
511
512
513
516
518
519
521

APPENDIX
A. PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
A.1
A.2
A.3
A.4
A.5
A.6
A.7
A.8
A.9
A.10
A.11
A.12
A.13
A.14

DRILLING PARAMETERS (1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


PARAMETERS FOR CONVERSATIONAL PERIPHERAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENTERING WORKPIECE MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR THE MFUNCTIONLIST SCREEN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
REGISTERING THE TOOL MATERIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
USER PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ENTERING SUBPROGRAM NAMES ON THE SUBPROGRAM CALLING SCREEN . . . . . .
TOOL POST NAME PARAMETERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS NECESSARY FOR USING THE CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION (BITTYPE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS NECESSARY FOR USING THE CONVERSATIONAL AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING FUNCTION (COMMON DATA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR BAR MACHINING, PATTERN REPEATING, END FACING,
AND RESIDUAL MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR NECKING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR GROOVING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR THREADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
c9

526
527
528
532
537
537
538
539
540
554
562
567
568
570

TABLE OF CONTENTS

A.15
A.16
A.17
A.18
A.19

B62444E1/04

PARAMETERS FOR YAXIS MACHINING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .


PARAMETERS FOR DRILLING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR NOTCHING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PARAMETERS FOR OTHER CONVERSATIONAL FUNCTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SETTING PARAMETERS IN THE NC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

572
573
577
578
584

B. ALARMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589

c10

I. GENERAL

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

1. OVERVIEW

OVERVIEW

Overview of the manual

This manual describes the functions related to the one/twopath lathe


Super CAP T and Super CAP II T of the FANUC Series 16/18TB and
FANUC Series 16/18TC Series 16i/18iTA. (The Super CAP II T is
usable only with the FANUC Series 16/18TC, Series 16i/18iTA.)
The one/twopath Super CAP T and Super CAP II T differ from each
other only in conversational programming screens and machining
simulation. All other aspects such as screen displays, key operations, and
machining operations are identical. Therefore, this manual mainly
describes the former Super CAP, and explains the conversational
automatic programming function of the latter Super CAP as required.
For other functions, refer to the operators manual for the FANUC Series
16/18TB or FANUC Series 16/18TC Series 16i/18iTA.
The specifications and usage of the conversational automatic
programming function may vary according to the specifications of the
operators panel of a machine tool. Be sure to read the manual provided
by the machine tool builder.
The functions of the CNC machine tool system are determined not only
by the CNC, but by the combination of the machine tool, the power
magnetic circuit in the machine tool, the servo system, the CNC, and the
operators panel.
It is impossible to cover all possible combinations of all functions,
programming methods, and operations in a single manual.
This manual explains only the conversational automatic programming
function provided for the CNC. For individual CNC machine tools, refer
to applicable manuals from the machine tool builders.
The manuals from machine tool builders take precedence over this
manual.
This manual explains as many detailed functions as possible. However,
it is not possible to describe all of the items which cannot be done or which
the operator must not do. Therefore, please assume that functions other
than those described in this manual cannot be performed.
Detailed information and special conditions are explained in notes. The
readers may encounter new technical terms in the notes not previously
defined or described. In this case, read this manual through first, then
review the details.

1. OVERVIEW

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

The models covered by this manual, and their abbreviations, are:


MODEL

About the Super CAP II T

ABBREVIATION

FANUC Series 16TB

16TB

FANUC Series 18TB

18TB

FANUC Series 16TC

16TC

FANUC Series 18TC

18TC

FANUC Series 16iTA

16iTA

FANUC Series 18iTA

18iTA

The Super CAP II T is added with the following functions, as compared


with the Super CAP T.
1 Background color of the display screen, and stereoscopic frames of the
window/soft keys
2 Stereoscopic display of a soft key when it is in a depressed state
3 Machining simulation based on a solid model
4 Tool trajectory drawing based on isometric projection in C/Yaxis
machining simulation
5 Changes to screen display colors, and storage of additional four groups
of screen display colors
All other functions such as screen displays, key operations, and
machining functions are the same as conventional ones.
Moreover, machining programs, tool data, and conversational function
parameters created on the Super CAP T can be used also on the Super CAP
II T.

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

2. SYMBOLS USED

SYMBOLS USED

The following explains how keys and buttons are indicated in this manual.
(1) Function buttons are indicated in bold type:
Example) PRGRM, OFSET
(2) Numeric keys to be entered from the key board are underlined:
Example) 12.345
(3) The input key is indicated in bold type in the same way as the
function buttons. Generally, the input key follows numeric key
input.
Example) 12.345 INPUT
(4) The edit keys are also indicated in bold type:
Example) ALTER key: ALTER
INSRT key:
INSRT
DELET key: DELET
(5) Soft keys are enclosed in brackets [ ]:
Example) [NEW], [NEW-PR]
(6) The cursor keys are indicated by the following symbols:
, , , and .
(7) The page keys are indicated by the following symbols:



and

3. FLOWCHART FROM CREATING


A PROGRAM TO EXECUTING IT

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

FLOWCHART FROM CREATING A PROGRAM TO


EXECUTING IT

This chapter shows a flow indicating how a machining program is created


and executed using the conversational automatic programming function.

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

3. FLOWCHART FROM CREATING


A PROGRAM TO EXECUTING IT

3.1
CREATING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM

Press the PRGRM function


button.

NC-format programming input


menu

Select the conversational mode.

To select the conversational mode, press the conversational key on the


machine operators panel or press the [CAP-I] soft key after entering the
EDIT mode.

Main menu

Press the [1] soft key to create a new machining program on the main menu.

Program input menu


(initial settings)

Enter necessary data, such as the number and name of a machining program, the material of tools used in common in machining programs, and
blank figures.
Moving the cursor forward automatically creates processes.

Program input menu (process data)

Select entries for necessary items, such as the type of machining and the
area to be machined. The tools and cutting conditions used for the machining are then automatically determined.

Following the operation guidance on the screen, specify a contour figure.


Program input menu
(figure data)

Press the [PLOT] soft key, if necessary, to display and check the contour
figures previously entered for other processes.
After specifying all necessary figures, press the [FIGURE END] soft key.
After specifying all necessary processes, press the [PRGRM END] soft key.

[FIGURE END]

[PRGRM END]

3. FLOWCHART FROM CREATING


A PROGRAM TO EXECUTING IT

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

3.2
CHECKING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM

Press the PRGRM function button.

NC-format programming input


menu

Select the conversational mode.

To select the conversational mode, either press the conversational key on


the machine operators panel or enter the EDIT mode and press the [CAP-I]
soft key.

Main menu

Press the [2] soft key for creating a new machining program on the main
menu.

Registered-program directory
screen

Move the cursor to the program to be edited. Press the [EDIT] soft key.

Program screen

If the program does not fit on one page, press the page key to scroll the
screen.
Pressing the leftmost soft key [

Page key

] returns to the main menu.

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

3. FLOWCHART FROM CREATING


A PROGRAM TO EXECUTING IT

3.3
SELECTING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM TO BE
EXECUTED
Press the PRGRM function button.

NC-format programming input menu

Select the conversational mode.

To select the conversational mode, press the conversational key on the


machine operators panel or enter the EDIT mode and press the [CAP-I] soft
key.

Select the automatic operation mode on the machine operators mode.


Main menu

Press the [4] soft key to operate a conversational machining program directly after entering the MEM mode on the main menu.
[PRE-EX]:

Press this key to specify a chuck barrier, workpiece shift, and


position where the tool is changed (tool change position).

[EXEC]:

Press this key to select a machining program to be executed


only when the power is turned on or when a new program is
selected.

Registered-program directory
screen

Setting screen before execution

On the setting screen before execution, specify the chuck barrier, workpiece
shift, and tool change position. This operation is required only once for each
machining program.

Program screen

Check that the selected machining program is correct, then start automatic
operation.

Program execution screen

While the machining program created conversationally is being executed,


the program execution screen is displayed.

End of execution

When another machining program is selected

4. SELECTING THE MENU AND


INPUTTING DATA

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

SELECTING THE MENU AND INPUTTING DATA

Whenever you are uncertain of the operation to be performed next, check


relevant part of this manual. Alternatively, press the [GUIDE] soft key
to display the operation guidance screen for the current operation.
When the screen selected on the conversational main menu is displayed
and you are at a loss what to do next, press the leftmost soft key [ ]. The
main menu then appears on the screen and you can start from the
beginning.

10

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

4.1
SOFT KEYS

Example

4. SELECTING THE MENU


AND INPUTTING DATA

Soft keys displayed on the conversational screens have different colors


depending on their functions as follows:
(1) Green soft keys
Used mainly for displaying other screens.
[MCHNC]

: Displaying the cutting condition data screen

[TOOLD]
: Displaying the registered tool directory screen
[DETAIL DATA] : Displaying process data not shown on the
machining program screen
[GUIDE]
: Displaying operation guidance
(2) Yellow soft keys
Used for selecting the menus.

Example

[1 BAR]

: Selecting the type of machining

[1 OEND]

: Selecting the area to be machined

[]

: Selecting a figure pattern

(3) Purple soft keys


Used for editing.

Example

[DELETE]
[INSERT]
[COPY]

: Deleting a process or figure


: Inserting a process or figure
: Copying a program or process

When the [+] soft key appears at the right end of the screen, there are soft
keys other than those displayed on the current screen. Press the [+] soft
key to display the other soft keys, if necessary.
The leftmost soft key [<], which is called the super return key, is used to
return from a conversational screen to the main menu.

11

4. SELECTING THE MENU AND


INPUTTING DATA

GENERAL

4.2

B62444E1/04

Data can be entered for items on the conversational programming menus


(except for the detailed data screen) while calculation is performed on the
same menu.

CALCULATION
FUNCTIONS SIMILAR
TO THOSE OF A
HANDHELD
CALCULATOR

The four arithmetic functions, addition, subtraction, multiplication, and


division, operate on two numbers. By substituting the result as one term
at the next calculation, calculation can be iterated indefinitely.
Data to be entered for an item must conform to the type of data in the item.
If data contains a component less than the minimum input limit, the
component is ignored.

4.2.1

The following shows key operations for each function.

Operation for
Calculation
Addition
Subtraction

100. +200.
200. 100.

Multiplication 100. * 20.


Division
200. /10.

INPUT
INPUT

The result reads at the location where input


keys are displayed.

INPUT
INPUT

To enter the calculated result for the desired item, press the INPUT key
again after checking the result.
Pressing the CAN key deletes characters successively in the input field
from the last character entered.

Example of operation)

Key input operation and input key display when the following expression
is calculated:
210. 65.3 + 1.25

210.065.3

INPUT

INPUT INPUT

START POINT X

DELETE INSERT FIGURE WINDOW PROCES MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


ON/OFF EDIT
DATA

(INPUT key)
144.7

GUIDE

START POINT X

DELETE INSERT FIGURE WINDOW PROCES MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


ON/OFF EDIT
DATA

12

GUIDE

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

Second key operation for the calculation


144.7+1.25

4. SELECTING THE MENU


AND INPUTTING DATA

START POINT X

DELETE INSERT FIGURE WINDOW PROCES MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


ON/OFF EDIT
DATA

(INPUT key)

145.95

START POINT X

DELETE INSERT FIGURE WINDOW PROCES MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


ON/OFF EDIT
DATA

(INPUT key)

GUIDE

GUIDE

The result, 145.95, is entered for the item START POINT X. The cursor
automatically proceeds to the next data item.

13

4. SELECTING THE MENU AND


INPUTTING DATA

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

4.2.2
Keys for Calculation
Example of a keyboard)

For the 10 LCD

Addition (+)
SHIFT

L
+

CAN

SHIFT

INPUT

14

(1)

(2)

Subtraction ()


(3)

Multiplication ()
SHIFT

T
*

(4)

Division (/)
/

5. HIERARCHY OF THE
CONVERSATIONAL SCREENS

GENERAL

B62444E1/04

HIERARCHY OF THE CONVERSATIONAL SCREENS

Main menu

Direct operation Converting NC programs Tool/cutting condition data

Creating programs
PROGRAM
NO

Editing programs

Machining simulation

PROGRAM LIST
FOR EDITING

PROGRAM LIST
FOR
SIMULATION

PROGRAM LIST
FOR DIRECT
OPERATION

PROGRAM LIST
FOR CONVERTING
NC PROGRAMS

Selecting processes

Program screen

Setting
before execution
Chuck
barrier

Setting
before execution
Chuck
barrier

Setting
before execution
Chuck
barrier

TYPE OF
MACHINING
=

Inputting figures

Animated simulation

Editing processes

Tooling data

Animated simulation
Measuring tool offset
plus path drawing

Path drawing

Position screen

Tool list

Animated simulation
plus path drawing

Tool data file

Cutting condition data

Pre-tool list
FINAL TOOL
PRE-TOOL

Chuck/tail stock data

15

Tool offset

TOOL DATA
MENU

Editting NC programs

II. OPERATION

1. OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE

The following shows the general procedure from creating a machining


program to executing it using Super CAP for the FANUC Series 16TB.
Reference

APPENDIX

Setting parameters

II.13 SETTING DATA

Setting cutting condition data

II.13 SETTING DATA

Setting a pre-tool list when drilling is included

II.13 SETTING DATA

Setting the figures of a chuck and tail stock

II.13 SETTING DATA

Setting a tool data file

II.6 CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Creating a machining program

II.12 EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Selecting a machining program

II.12 EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Mounting tools (and referring to the tooling data)

19

1. OVERVIEW OF THE PROCEDURE

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

II.12 EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Measuring the tool offset

II.12 EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Specifying a tool change position

II.12 EXECUTING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Setting data before execution

Checking the machining program with the check drawing

Trial machining

Specifying tool wear compensation

Actual machining

20

II.8 CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD

DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD

21

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD

2.1

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

The CRT/MDI panel consists of a display unit, such as a color 14 CRT


or color 9.5 LCD, and a keyboard.

KEYBOARD TYPES

(1) CRT/MDI panel with the 14 color CRT


RESET key

Address/numerical key

HELP key

FANUC Serlee 16T


RESET

HELP

O(

N)

GE PQ

XA

ZB

CD

Y?

U.

WJ

H,

M#

S=

T*

L+

I[

K]

R&

FSP

4
1

SHIFT

ALTER

INSERT

DELETE

EOB

CAN

INPUT

POS

PROG

OFFSET
SETTING

CUSTOM

SYSTEM

MESSAGE

GRAPH

SHIFT key

Program edit key


INPUT key
Cancel (CAN) key
Function key

POWER

PAGE

Power ON/OFF button

Soft key

PAGE

Cursor move key

Page change key

(2) CRT/MDI panel with the 9.5 color LCD

Function key

Address/numerical key

FANUC Serles 16T


O(

N)

GE PQ

POWER

XA

ZB

CD

Y?

U.

WJ

H,

M#

S=

T*

L+

I[

K]

R&

FSP

POS

PROG

OFFSET
SETTING

CUSTOM

SYSTEM

MESSAGE

GRAPH

PAGE

PAGE

Power ON/OFF button

Soft key

Page change key

3
.

EOB

CAN

INSERT

DELETE

INPUT

HELP

RESET

Program edit key


Cursor move key

22

SHIFT

ALTER

Cancel (CAN) key


SHIFT key
INPUT key

HELP key
RESET key

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

2.2
DETAILS OF THE
KEYBOARD

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD

The keys mainly used for the conversational automatic programming


function are explained here. For other keys that are not dealt with in this
manual, refer to the relevant operators manuals.
When the conversational automatic programming function is used, the
operator sometimes has to perform certain operations manually from the
machine operators panel. There may include reference position return
operation and turret turning operation (tool replacement). The operators
panel varies depending on the machine tool builders and the individual
machines. For the use of the operators panel, refer to the appropriate
manual provided by the machine tool builder.
Key

Description

Function buttons
Displays the ACUTUAL POSITION.
POS

When a machining program is created or edited using the


conversational automatic programming function, press this
button first.

PROG

When a machining program created using the conversational programming function is being executed, this button
is also used to display the conversational automatic program execution screen that shows the program, current
position, and actual speed.
When the conversational programming screen is displayed,
enter the EDIT mode and press the [END] soft key to display
the NCformat programming screen.
To return from the NCformat programming screen to the
conversational programming screen, press the [CAPI] soft
key or press the Conversation key on the machine operators panel.
Sets and displays tool offset data, workpiece shift, and custom macro variables.

OFFSET
SETTING

Pressing this function button twice displays the screen used


for setting and displaying tool data files and cutting condition
data.
Sets and displays parameters, and displays diagnostic
data. Parameter 9000 and subsequent parameters are
used for the conversational automatic programming function.

SYSTEM

Displays an alarm number, and displays and sets the state


of the software operators panel (only when the appropriate
option is provided).

MESSAGE

When a machining program created using the conversational automatic programming function is executed, if an error occurs in the program, some alarms from 3000 to 3099
are issued and indicated.
Displays the machining simulation screen. The conversational function supports a special function that displays the
machining simulation screen, eliminating the need to press
this key.

GRAPH

23

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD

OPERATION

Key

B62444E1/04

Description

Data input key


Address keys
(alphabetical
keys)

Used to enter alphabetic characters and symbols on the


NCformat programming screen.

Numeric keys

Used when numeric data is entered. In the conversational


automatic programming function, the numeric keys are
used whenever machining programs are created and
edited, and tool data and cutting condition data are entered.

In the conversational automatic programming function,


these keys are used only when the name of a machining
program is entered. They are not used on the other program
input screens.

Program edit keys


On the ordinary NCformat programming screen, this key
rewrites word address data consisting of an address and
numeric data.

ALTER

On the ordinary NCformat programming screen, this key


inserts word address data consisting of an address and numeric data.

INPUT

On the ordinary NCformat programming screen, this key


deletes word address data consisting of an address and numeric data.

DELETE

Arrow keys
: Moves the cursor forward for each setting on the conversational programming screen, cutting condition data
setting screen, tool data file setting screen, and so forth.

Cursor keys

: Moves the cursor backward for each setting on the


screens mentioned above.
: Displays the next page when the conversational programming screen, cutting condition data setting
screen, tool data file setting screen, or an other screen
is displayed.

Page keys
PAGE
PAGE

: Displays the previous page when the one of the


screens mentioned above is displayed.
Soft keys
Leftmost soft key

When a function is activated by a certain soft key in a mode


other than the conversational mode, this key returns to the
previous state (the state immediately before the function
button was pressed).
On a screen displayed by the conversational function,
pressing this soft key causes processing to return to the
main menu screen of the conversational function.

Rightmost soft
key

When there are soft keys other than those displayed on the
screen, pressing this soft key displays the next set of soft
keys.

Other soft keys

Various functions are assigned according to the applications. The function assigned to each soft key is indicated at
the bottom of the CRT or LCD.

24

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Key

2. DESCRIPTION OF THE KEYBOARD

Description

Other keys
Reset key

Resets the NC to release an alarm.


This key can also be used to stop automatic operation of the
machine or machining simulation.

RESET

Input key

Sets data entered into the key input buffer in an appropriate


data area.

INPUT

Cancel (CAN) key Deletes one character at a time from numeric or character
data stored in the key input buffer.
CAN

Pressing the cancel key then the input key on the conversational programming screen deletes the input data.

25

3. OPERATION MODES

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

OPERATION MODES

Before performing the desired operation listed below, enter the


corresponding mode.
In the following table, an asterisk (*) in the mode column indicates that
the corresponding operation can be performed in any mode.
Operation

Reference

Mode

II. 6

EDIT

Creating a machining program

II. 6

Checking input figures for a machining program

II. 7

Checking a machining program using the animated simulation

II. 7

MEM

Editing a machining program

II. 8

Outputting a machining program

II. 9

EDIT

Reading a machining program

II. 10

EDIT

Converting a machining program to the NCformat program

II. 11

MEM

Selecting a machining program to be


executed

II. 12

Specifying a chuck barrier on the setting


screen before execution

II. 12

JOG/HANDLE

Specifying a tool changing position on the set- II. 12


ting screen before execution

JOG/HANDLE

Switching from the NC-format programming


screen to the conversational programming
screen
The screen can be changed in any mode
when the Conversation switch in the machine
operators panel is used.

Executing a machining program

II. 12

MEM

Setting tool data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pre-tool list, chuck/tail
stock figure data

II. 13

Outputting tool data, cutting condition data,


surface roughness data, pre-tool list, chuck/
tail stock figure data

II. 13

EDIT

Reading tool data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pre-tool list, chuck/tail
stock figure data

II. 13

Emergency-stop

26

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

Operation

3. OPERATION MODES

Reference

Mode

Punching and reading the data by using the


batch data input/output function

II. 14

EDIT

Measuring tool length offset on the tooling


screen

II. 13

JOG/HANDLE

Entering offset on the tooling screen

II. 13

Setting parameters

APPENDIX

27

MDI

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF SCREENS

The screens displayed by the conversational automatic programming


function are shown below. For details of data and operation on each
screen, see the related explanation in this manual.

28

4.1
ONEPATH LATHES

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(1) Parameter setting screen (For details, see Part V, APPENDIX.)


General data relating to the conversational automatic programming
function is set and displayed on this screen.
ACTUAL POSITION

O0001 P0000

(ABSOLUTE)

X
Z
C
Y
G00
G97
G69
G99
G21
G40

<

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
(MODAL)
G25 G13.1
G22
G80
G67
G54
G18

ABB

REL

MM/M

PARAMETER(CAP BIT PARAM)


9770 NM7
NM3 NM2 NM1 NM0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9771 1SP 2SP 96S 96M CS2 CLD DM2 T99
1 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
9772 INO DIO RFN YMD RLF EDM MSO CM5
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
9773
MDL GTL TCD RPT OPO GRO SG3
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
9774 AUT GPW T00 M10 280 MLT MLS TLC
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1

S
SRPM
0
SSPM
0
SMAX 32767
SACT
0

>_
MDI **** *** ***

14:04:09

NO.SRH ON:1 OFF:0 +INPUT INPUT

ALL

(2) Main menu (For details, see II.6.)


All operations start from this menu.

[CAP.]

FANUC Super CAP T Ver. Z3.0


PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM
PROCESSING SIMULATION
DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PROGRAM
CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM

TOOL,CUTTING CONDITION DATA


TOOL OFFSET DATA
EDIT NC PROGRAM
POSIION
EKIT
MODE
END

MEM
MODE

1 2

29

MEM
MODE

3 4

MEM
MODE

14:04:48

5 6 7

MEM

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(3) Machining condition screen (For details, see II.13.)


Cutting condition data for the conversational automatic
programming function is set and displayed on this screen. The
cutting condition data for all possible combinations of tools and
materials to be machined in conversational automatic programming
can be set and displayed.
[CAP.]

101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)

T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD

0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500

50 TL
TL
TL

20.000
150.000
60.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (GENERAL) ***


ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID BITE
CARBID BITE
MATERIALFEED/REV. CUT SPD. CUT DPTH MATERIALFEED/REV. CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.)
(MM)
(MM.REV.) (M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000
80.0
4.000 FC25
0.4000
110.0
FCD45
0.6000
60.0
3.500 FCD45
0.5000
100.0
SS41
0.6000
55.0
5.000 SS41
0.5000
120.0
S45C
0.3000
80.0
8.000 S45C
0.4000
110.0
SKD11
0.5000
80.0
2.000 SKD11
0.2200
150.0
SUS304
0.5000
60.0
2.000 SUS304
0.3000
200.0
AL
0.3000
50.0
3.000 AL
0.3000
120.0
0.0000
0.0
0.000
0.0000
0.0
SET FEEDRATE AMOUNT BY MAX. VALUE

< WORK
MATERL

MENU
RETURN

(4) Pretool list screen (For details, see II.13.)


Final tool and pretool data required by the conversational
automatic programming function to automatically determine a
pretool for final drilling are set and displayed on this screen.
[CAP.]

101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)

T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD

0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500

*** PRETOOL LIST ***

50 TL
TL
TL

NO.01

TOOL NO.
TL NAME NOMINLD
S51
TAP
(F)
18.000

LAST TL
PRETOOL 1
2
3
4
5

701
601

<

CENTER (F)
DRIL
(F)

2.000
20.000

SEARCH

30

MENU
TOOL
RETURN LIST

20.000
150.000
60.000

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(5) Chuck and tail stock figure data screen (For details, see II.13.)
Data on the chuck and tail stock figures displayed together with the
material figure on the check drawing screen is set and displayed.
[CAP.]

101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)

T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD

0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500

*** CHUCK FIGURE ***


NO.TYPE
L
W
L1
W1
1 EXT 60.0 60.0 30.0 30.0
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

50 TL
TL
TL

20.000
150.000
60.000

L1
W
W1

<

EXT.

INT.

CHUCK TAIL
STOCK

MENU
RETURN

(6) Screen for setting and displaying tool data (For details, see II.13.)
Up to 99 tooldata items can be set and displayed for all tools
provided (including tools that are not mounted on the turret).
[CAP.]

101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAO
(F)

T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD

*** TOOL DATA(1) ***


TOOLID NO CN0.101
TOOL TYPE OUTER
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN OOMMON
OUTPUT T
0101
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOSERADIS RN=
0.400
CUTIMG EDG AC=
110
NOSE ANGLE AN=
50
NOSE WIDTH TW=
20.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
TL MATRIAL TM=
CARBID

<

0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500

50 TL
TL
TL

20.000
150.000
60.000

TW

AC

AN

MENU TOOL TOOL


RETURN LIST FIGURE

31

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(7) Program menu screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see
II.6.)
This screen appears first when a machining program is created or
edited using the conversational automatic programming function.
The program numbers and names of all machining programs
registered are displayed on this screen.
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM*** PROGRAM MENU ***
(REST NO. OF PROGRAM 24 PCS.)
(REST NO. OF PROCES 261 PCS.)
PRG.NO.
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
0001:(EXEC)PRG11
1M27S
1994/03/24 11:19

PROGRAM NO

PUNCH

MODIFIED
1994/03/27 14:02

SFTKY

INITAL SET
FC25
PROC(01)
BAR
PROC(01)
BAR
PROC(03) DRILLING
PROC(02)
END

<

[CAP.]

BAR
OUTER END
OUTER END

ROUGH
FIN
(DRILLNG)

READ DELETE COPY

T0101
T0101
T0303

SCHED- EDIT PROCES PLOT GUIDE


ULING
EDIT

(8) Program screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see II.6.)
A machining program consists of a set of machining program units,
called processes. Data necessary for these processes is set and
displayed.
The menu and description of the data item which the cursor points
out are shown on the window in the screen.
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM
[CAP.]
NO. =0001
NAME=PRG11
INITAL SETMATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
100.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL
0.100
0.200
2.000
PROC(01)
AREA
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END
101
120
PROC(01)
AREA
ROUGHNES TOOLNO
BAR (F) OUTER END
5
101
1=OUTER END
START X=
0.000
Z= 0.000
2=OUTER MID
X= 34.000
Z= 0.000
CHAMFR X= 40.000
Z= 3.000
3=INNER
END
X= 40.000
Z= 15.000
ROUND X= 50.000
Z= 20.000
4=INNER MID
X= 56.000
Z= 20.000
CHAMFR X= 60.971
Z= 21.941
 X= 69.402
Z= 38.806
5=FACE END
ROUND X= 70.000
Z= 41.232
X= 70.000
Z= 48.000
4=FACE MID
SOFTKE
AREA

<

2
3
4
5
1
OUTER OMID INNER IMID FACING

32

6
FMID

TOOL DETAIL PLOT


DATA DATA

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

(9) Figure data programming screen (Edit the processing program) (For
details, see II.6.)
Dimension data required for machining is entered and displayed on this
screen. All processes except for the end facing processes consist of the
process data explained previously and the figure data.
The maximum number of figure data items that can be included in each
machining process is given below:
(a) Bar machining: 30
(b) Pattern repeating: 30
(c) Residual machining: 5
(d) End facing: No figure data is needed.
(e) Threading: 5 (for generalpurpose threads and metric threads)
(f) Grooving: 5
(g) Necking: 5
(h) Center drilling: 1
(i) Drilling: 1
(j) Tapping: 1
(k) Single action: 30 (Single action II: 104)
(l) M code: 5
(m) Caxis center drilling/drilling/reaming/tapping:
6 (for uneven intervals), even intervals can be specified.
(n) Caxis grooving: 6 (for uneven intervals), even intervals can be
specified.
(o) Caxis notching: 30
(p) Caxis cylindrical machining: 30
(q) Yaxis center drilling/drilling/reaming/tapping: 6 (for uneven
intervals), A hole pattern can be specified.
(r) Yaxis milling: 30
Arbitrary figures formed by arcs and lines can be specified for bar
machining, pattern repeating, Caxis notching, Caxis cylindrical
machining. and Yaxis milling machining. These arbitrary figures are
called contour figures.
By entering dimensional data specified on a drawing, intersections at the
corners of the contour figure can be automatically calculated and the
results are displayed.
Entered data for a contour figure is displayed on the window and the
calculated results are displayed outside the window on the program
screen.

33

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM


[CAP.]
NO. =0001
NAME=PRG11
INITAL SETMATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
100.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL
0.100
0.200
2.000
PROC(01)
AREA
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTEP END
101
120
0.50
5.000
101
PROC(01)
AREA
ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
BAR (F) OUTER END
5
101
150
0.50
101
START X=
0.000
Z= 0.000
X= 34.000
Z= 0.000
COUNT FORM(TAPER LINE)
CHAMFR X= 40.000
Z= 3.000
DIRECTION
B=

X= 40.000
Z= 15.000
TAPER END X CORD. X= 70.000
ROUND X= 50.000
Z= 20.000
TAPER
END
Z
CORD.
Z=
40.000
X= 56.000
Z= 20.000
COMPONENT X
I=
CHAMFR X= 60.971
Z= 21.941
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J=
X= 69.402
Z= 38.806
LENGTH
Q=
ROUND X= 70.000
Z= 41.232
ROUGHNESS(1 10 ) SR=
5
X= 70.000
Z= 48.000
SOFTKE

AREA

< WINDOW INSERT ALTER ALTER DELETE


FIGURE
OFF

MACHIN TOOL DETAIL PLOT


COND. DATA DATA

(10) Setting of premachining (Processing simulation) (For details, see


II.12.)
Prior to executing the selected machining program, data required for
machining by the program is set on this screen.
PROCESEING SIMULATION
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=

*** SETTING OF PREMACHING ***

[CAP.]

2.000
1

TO MOVE WORK ORIGIN, PLACE TOOL ON SIDE


BORDER AND PRESS (SET) SOFT KEY
CURRENT WSHIFT(Z) =
0.000

WSHIFT
<

SET RETURN

34

TOOLNG

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(11) Tooling data screen (For details, see II.12.)


A list of tool data for the tools used in the currently selected
machining program is displayed on this screen.
*** TOOLING DATA ***
[CAP.]
PAGE 01/01
PROCPROCNAMEUSINGTOOLGEOMETRY OFS XGEOMETRY OFS Z RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
01
BAR (R)
200.000 100.000
RN
0.400
0101
01
BAR (F)
200.000 100.000
RN
0.400
0101
03 DRILLING DRILL
200.000 100.000
DD
20.000
0303

GEOMETE DFS X
<

YAXIS WEAR
OFFSETOFFSET

PREPAR

TOOL RETURN
DISPLY

(12) Tool offset measurement screen (Tool preparation) (For details, see
II.12.)
Operation guidance for measuring a tool offset is shown on this
screen. Follow the instructions on the screen to automatically
measure a tool offset.
[CAP.]

101 OUTER
601 DRILL (F)
651 TAP
(F)

T0101 RN
T0303 DD
T0606 DD

0.400 AC
110 AN
20.000 AC
150
18.000 PT 1.500

50 TL
TL
TL

20.000
150.000
60.000

*** TOOL PREPARATION *** NO. 101


3.BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN CONTACT WITH
THE SENSOR FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION

X=
Z=

200.000
100.000

4
2
3

<

PREPG NXTPG

35

RETURN

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(13) Setting of premachining (Processing simulation) (For details, see


II.12.)
Operation guidance for specifying the optimal position at which to
change tools is indicated on this screen. Follow the instructions on
the screen to automatically determine the tool changing position.
PROCESEING SIMULATION
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=

[CAP.]

*** SETTING OF PREMACHING ***

2.000
1

AFTER CHECKING THAT THERE IS NO


INTERFERENCE,PUSH SOFTKEY [ SET ].

TOOLCHB
X
<

SET RETURN

TOOLNG

(14) Machining simulation screen (For details, see II.7.)


Before the created machining program is executed, it can be checked
with the check drawing screen where the machining operation is
simulated.

00001 P0001
X
X
Z
C

69.448
38.850
0.000

ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.160Z
Z
16.939
C
0.000

1M025
500%

STOP *** ***

< SPEED SPEED PLOT


DOWN
UP

36

AD
ON/OFF

14:13:15

STOP

WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +


PIECE
STEP

4.2
TWOPATH LATHES

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

In Super CAP T for twopath lathes used with the Series 16TB, a screen
for tool post 2 is added to each screen explained in Super CAP T for
onepath lathes used with the Series 16TB.
A screen for tool post 1 is the same as the corresponding screen explained
in Super CAP T for onepath lathes.
(1) Parameter setting screen (For details, see Part V, Appendix.)
Parameters related to the conversational automatic programming
function are common to tool posts 1 and 2 except for parameter No.
9770 specifying allocation of the NCformat program area and
conversational format program area.
ACTUAL POSITION

O0001 P0000

(ABSOLUTE)

X1
Z1
C1
Y1
G00
G97
G69
G99
G21
G40

<

0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
(MODAL)
G25 G13.1
G22
G80
G67
G54
G18

ABB

REL

F
S
SRPM
0
SSPM
0
SMAX 32767
SACT
0

ALL

MM/M

PARAMETER(CAP BIT PARAM)

M
T

9770 NM7
NM3 NM2 NM1 NM0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
9771 1SP 2SP 96S 96M CS2 CLD DM2 T99
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1
9772 INO DIO RFN YMD RLF EDM MSO CM5
1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0
9773
MDL GTL TCD RPT OPO GRO SG3
0 1 1 0 1 0 1 0
9774 AUT GPW T00 M10 280 MLT MLS TLC
1 1 0 1 1 0 0 1
>_
MDI **** *** ***

13:06:58

HEAD1

NO.SRH ON:1 OFF:0 +INPUT INPUT

(2) Main menu (For details, see II.6.)


This menu is common to tool posts 1 and 2.
(3) Machining condition data screen (For details, see II.13.)
This screen is common to tool posts 1 and 2.

37

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(4) Pretool list screen (For details, see II.13.)


Pretool list data is specified separately for tool posts 1 and 2. Two
tool posts are displayed on the screen.
[CAP.:HEADL]

101#L OUTER
102#R OUTEP
601#L DRILL

(F)

T0101 RN
T0101 PN
T0303 DD

*** PRETOOL LIST ***

0.400 AC
0.500 AC
20.000 AC

110 AN
90 AN
150

50 TW
60 TW
TL

20.000
30.000
150.000

NO.01

TOOL NO.
TL NAME NOMINLD
651#L TAP
(F)
18.000

LAST TL
PRETOOL 1
2
3
4
5

701#L CENTER (F)


601#L DRIL
(F)

2.000
20.000

<

SEARCH

MENU TOOL
RETURN LIST

(5) Chuck and tail stock figure data screen (For details, see II.13.)
The data is common to tool posts 1 and 2.
(6) Screen for setting and displaying tool data (For details, see II.13.)
Tool data is specified separately for tool posts 1 and 2. The item
which specifies a tool post is added on the screen.
[CAP.:HEADL]

101#L OUTER
102#R OUTER
601#L DRILL
*** TOOL
TOOLID NO
TOOL TYPE
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSERADIS
CUTIMG EDG
NOSE ANGLE
NOSE WIDTH
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL

(F)

T0101 RN
T0101 PN
T0303 DD

0.400 AC
0.500 AC
20.000 AC

110 AN
90 AN
150

50 TW
60 TW
TL

20.000
30.000
150.000

DATA(1) ***
CN0.101
OUTER (HEADL)
COMMON
0101
NORMAL
RN=
0.400
AC=
110
AN=
50
TW=
20.000
TD=
3
TM=
CARBID

TW

AN

AC

RN
< HEADLHEADF

38

MENU TOOL TOOL


RETURN LIST FIGURE

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(7) Program menu screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see
II.6.)
A machining program is used in common by both tool posts 1 and
2. This screen is also common for the two tool posts.
(8) Program screen (Edit the processing program) (For details, see II.6.)
One machining program is used in common by both tool posts 1 and
2. The item which specifies whether each process is performed with
tool post 1 or 2 is added on the screen.
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0001
NAME=PRG11
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
100.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZEREMOVLPRODLNG
0.100
0.200
2.000 96.000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV
CUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END
HEADL
101
120
0.50
5.000
0101
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO
CUTSPD
FEED/REV TCODE
BAR (F)
OUTER END EADL
5
101
150
0.50
0101
START X=
0.000 Z= 0.000

X= 34.000 Z= 0.000 SR=


5
CHAMFR X= 40.000 Z= 3.000 SR=
5

X= 40.000 Z= 15.000 SR=


5
ROUND X= 50.000 Z= 20.000
R=
5.000
SR=
5

X= 66.000 Z= 20.000 SR=


5
CHAMFR X= 70.971 Z= 21.941 SR=
5

X= 79.402 Z= 38.806 SR=
5
ROUND X= 80.000 Z= 41.232
R=
1.000
SR=
5

X= 80.000 Z= 48.000 SR=


5
SOFTKE

TURRET_BE_OT

< HEADL HEADR PRGRM WINDOWPROCES


END
OFF
EDIT

MACHIN TOOL DETAIL PLOT


COND. DATA DATA

(9) Setting of premachining (Processing simulation) (For details, see


II.12.)
To specify items concerning setting up tools for each tool post, the
setting menus for both tool posts appear on the screen at the same
time.
*** SETTING OF PREMACHING ** [CAP.:HEADL]
HEADR

PROCESSING SIMULATION
HEADL
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=

BASIS TCODE

T=

2.000
WSHIFT

SZ=

TOOLCHG POS

X=
Z=

TO MOVE WORK ORIGIN, PLACE TOOL ON SIDE


BORDER AND PRESS (SET) SOFT KEY
CURRENT WSHIFT(Z) =
0.000
WSHIFT
<

SET

39

RETURNHEADR

TOOLNG

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(10) Tooling data screen (For details, see II.12.)


Different tools are used for each tool post. The tooling data menus
for both tool posts appear on the screen at the same time.
*** HEADL TOOLING DATA ***
PROCPROCNAMEUSINGTOOLGEMOETRY OFS
01
BAR (R)
0.000
01
BAR (F)
0.000
03 DRILLING DRILL
0.000

[CAP.:HEADL]
PAGE 01/01
XGEOMETRY OFS Z RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
0.000
RN
0.400
0101
0.000
RN
0.400
0101
0.000
DD
20.000
0303

GEOMETE DFS X
< HEADL HEADF

YAXIS WEAR
OFFSETOFFSET

PREPAR

TOOL RETURN
DISPLY

(11) Tool offset measurement screen (Tool preparation) (For details, see
II.12.)
Operation guidance for measuring tool offsets is indicated for each
tool post.
[CAP.:HEADL]

101#L OUTER
102#R OUTER
601#L DRILL

(F)

T0101 RN
T0101 PN
T0303 DD

0.400 AC
0.500 AC
20.000 AC

110 AN
90 AN
150

50 TW
60 TW
TL

20.000
30.000
150.000

*** TOOL PREPARATION *** NO. 101


3.BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN CONTACT WITH
THE SENSOR FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION

X=
Z=

0.000
0.000

4
2
3

<

PREPGNXTPG

40

RETURN

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(12) Setting of premachining screen (Processing simulation) (For


details, see II.12.)
Operation guidance for specifying the optimal position at which to
change tools is indicated for each tool post.
*** SETTING OF PREMACING *** [CAP.:HEADL]
HEADR

PROCESSING SIMULATION
HEADL
BASIS TCODE
T=
FACE POSITION CZ=
WSHIFT
SZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=
TAILSTOCK NO
T=
TOOLCHG POS
X=
Z=

BASIS TCODE

T=

2.000
WSHIFT

SZ=

TOOLCHG POS

X=
Z=

AFTER CHECKING THAT THERE IS NO


INTERFERENCE,PUSH SOFTKEY[SET].
TOOLCHB FOB X
<

SET RETURN HEADR

TOOLNG

(13) Machinig simulation for twotoolpost lathes or twopath lathes


with two opposing spindles (For details, see II.7.)
Two materials are machined separately with tool posts 1 and 2 in the
lathes mentioned above. The states of machining with tool posts are
displayed on the screen at the same time.
HEAD1

HEAD2
X2

X1
X1
Z1
C1

00001 P0001

0.000
0.000
0.000

X2 90.000
Z2 24.000
C2
0.000

ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

0M00S
31.7
500%

NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

Z2

0M28S
31.7
MEM STOP *** ***

< SPEED SPEED PLOT


DOWN
UP

41

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

13:13:52

STOP

WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +


STEP
PIECE

4. TYPES OF SCREENS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(14) Machining simulation for twotoolpost lathes or twopath lathes


with one spindle (For details, see II.7.)
With lathes of these types, a single workpiece is simultaneously
machined with tool posts 1 and 2. The machining status is displayed
on the screen as machining progresses.

HEAD1

HEAD2

00001 P0001
X1

X1 60.000
Z1 21.528
C1
0.000

X2 90.000
Z2149.800
C2
0.000

ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

NXT G01
X
4.43
Z
1.7
C
0.000

NXT G01
X
0.000
Z 69.561
C
0.000

1M07S
24.4
500%

1M17S
MEM STOP *** ***

< SPEED SPEED PLOT


DOWN
UP

42

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

13:25:40

STOP

WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +


STEP
PIECE

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

DESCRIPTION OF COORDINATE SYSTEMS

The following explains the coordinate systems used in the conversational


automatic programming function.

43

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

5.1
ONEPATH LATHES
5.1.1

The machine coordinate system is set as follows:

Machine Coordinate
System

+X

+Z
Machine zero point
Tool post

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck

Spindle

The above figure shows the state in which a tool post has returned to the
reference position. The X and Z machine coordinates of the position of
the tool post are 0. When the tool post is manually returned to a reference
position, the X and Z machine coordinates of the machine reference
position are automatically set to 0.
The directions of the X and Zaxes are specified so that the tool post
moves away from a workpiece or the spindle when the tool post moves
in the positive X and Z directions.
This machine coordinate system is kept unchanged, regardless of whether
the program reference position, explained later, is set on the end face of
a workpiece or the end face of the chuck.
The coordinates in the machine coordinate system are indicated on the
allposition display screen or in the MACHINE column on the
conversational program execution screen. The all position display screen
is displayed by pressing the POS function button, then pressing the [ALL]
soft key.

44

B62444E1/04

5.1.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

OPERATION

The machine coordinate system previously mentioned is peculiar to a


specific machine. It is determined uniquely regardless of the workpieces
and tools used.
Another coordinate system is required for each tool to prevent
programmed positions from changing between tools because of the
difference in tool dimensions. This coordinate system must be set with
respect to the dimensions of a specific tool. Such coordinate systems are
called workpiece coordinate systems.
A workpiece coordinate system is determined using the tool geometry
compensation function. For details of tool geometry compensation, refer
to the Series 16/18TB or Series 16/18TC Operators Manual.
The origin of the workpiece coordinate system may be set on the end face
of either a workpiece or the chuck.
(1) When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is placed on the
end face of a workpiece
+X
Machine zero point

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck

Spindle

+Z
Origin of the workpiece
coordinate system

(2) When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is place on the
end face of the chuck
+X
Machine zero point

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck

Spindle

Origin of the workpiece


coordinate system

45

+Z

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

5.1.3
Program Coordinate
System

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

When a machining program is created by entering data conversationally,


the dimensions are specified with respect to the reference position
peculiar to a workpiece. This reference position is called the program
reference position.
The program reference position may be set on the end face of either the
workpiece or the chuck.
Setting parameter No. 9786 (ZEROPT) to 0 places the program reference
position on the end face of the workpiece. Setting the parameter to 1
places the reference position on the end face of the chuck.
(1) When the program reference position is placed on the end face of the
workpiece

+X
Machine zero point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Spindle

Program reference
position
+Z

Origin of the workpiece


coordinate system

(2) When the program reference position is placed on the end face of the
chuck
+X
Machine zero point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Spindle

Origin of the workpiece


coordinate system, Program reference position

46

+Z

5.2
TWOPATH LATHES
WITH TWO
OPPOSING
SPINDLES
5.2.1
Machine Coordinate
System

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

In twopath lathes with two spindles, coordinate systems used for tool
posts 1 and 2 are the same as those for onepath lathes except that the
direction of the Zaxis is opposite in coordinate systems for tool post 2.

The following figure shows the machine coordinate system for tool post
2.
+X2

+Z2
Machine zero point
Tool post 2

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck

Spindle

The directions of the Xand Zaxes are specified so that the tool post
moves away from a workpiece or the spindle when the tool post moves
in the positive X and Z directions.

47

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

5.2.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

In a workpiece coordinate system used for tool post 2, like in the machine
coordinate system for tool post 2, the direction of the Zaxis is opposite
that used for tool post 1.
(1) When the origin of a workpiece coordinate system is placed on the
edge of a workpiece
+X2
Machine zero point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Spindle

+Z2

(2) When the origin of a workpiece coordinate system is placed on the


edge of the chuck
+X2
Machine zero point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Spindle

+Z2

48

5.2.3
Program Coordinate
System

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

In a program coordinate system used for tool post 2, like in the machine
coordinate system for tool post 2, the direction of the Zaxis is opposite
that used for tool post 1.
(1) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of a
workpiece

Toll
post 2

+X2

Machine zero
point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Program reference position


Origin of the workpiece
coordinate system

Spindle

+Z2

(2) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of the
chuck

+X2
Machine zero
point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""

Chuck

Program reference position


+Z2

Origin of the workpiece


coordinate system

49

Spindle

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

5.3
FOR TWOPATH
LATHES WITH ONE
SPINDLE
5.3.1
Machine Coordinate
System

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

In twopath lathes with one spindle, coordinate systems used for tool
posts 1 and 2 are the same as those for onepath lathes except that the
direction of the Xaxis is opposite in coordinate systems for tool post 2.

The following figure shows the machine coordinate system for tool post
2.

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Spindle

Tool post 2

+Z2
Machine zero point

+X2

50

B62444E1/04

5.3.2
Workpiece Coordinate
System

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

OPERATION

In a workpiece coordinate system used for tool post 2, like in the machine
coordinate system for tool post 2, the direction of the Xaxis is opposite
that used for tool post 1.
(1) When the origin of a workpiece coordinate system is placed on the
edge of a workpiece

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck

Spindle

+Z2
Origin of the workpiece
coordinate system

+X2

Machine zero point

(2) When the origin of a workpiece coordinate system is placed on the


edge of the chuck

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
Chuck

Spindle

Origin of the workpiece


coordinate system

+X2

51

+Z2

Machine zero point

5. DESCRIPTION OF
COORDINATE SYSTEMS

5.3.3
Program Coordinate
System

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

In a twopath lathe with one spindle and two tool posts, a program
coordinate system used for tool post 2 is the same as that for tool post 1.
(1) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of a
workpiece

+X
Machine zero
point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Program reference position

Spindle

+Z

Origin of the workpiece


coordinate system

(2) When the program reference position is placed on the edge of the
chuck
+X

Machine zero point

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
Chuck

Spindle

Origin of the workpiece coordinate


system, program reference position

52

+Z

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

53

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

6.1
FORMAT OF
MACHINING
PROGRAM USED
FOR THE ONEPATH
LATHES

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

The format of machining programs created using the conversational


automatic programming function is different from that of NCformat
machining programs.
An NCformat machining program consists of NC block instructions in
which G codes, axisaddress data, and miscellaneous functions are
combined. An NC block instruction corresponds to an NC operation.
A conversational machining program consists of processes. A process
here refers to a set of machining operations using one tool. The process
contains process data, such as a tool to be used and cutting conditions, and
figure data including the figure of a machined product. NC data necessary
for machining is automatically generated from the process and figure
data.
NCformat machining programs and conversational machining
programs are stored separately as shown below.

Part program
storage
Conversational
machining
programs

A program is stored by each process block


(it corresponds to a tape length of about
0.76 m, 30 inches).

NCformat
machining
programs

A program is stored by each character (it


corresponds to a tape length of about 2.54
mm, 0.1 inches).

The storage capacity assigned to machining programs is determined


according to the length of the optional tape attached. Setting parameter
No. 9770 (NMEM0 to NMEM4) sets the ratio of the storage capacity used
for NCformat and conversational machining programs.

54

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

6.2
FORMAT OF
MACHINING
PROGRAM USED
FOR THE TWOPATH
LATHES

In the Twopath lathes, an NCformat machining program is created


separately for each tool post, tool post 1 or 2, and is stored. Each
NCformat machining program is totally independent.
In a conversational machining program, each machining process is
created separately for tool post 1 or 2. However, processes for both tool
posts are combined and stored as a one machining program. When a
certain conversational machining program is selected, a workpiece is
machined within the processes specified in the program for tool posts 1
and 2. Different machining programs cannot be executed for the two tool
posts.
The following figure shows how a conversational machining program is
executed.

Conversational machining
program

Processes to be executed
with tool post 1
Process 1: Machining the
outer surface of
a bar

Process 1: Machining the


outer surface of
a bar with tool
post 1
Process 2: Grooving on an
outer surface
with tool post 1

Process 2: Grooving on an
outer surface

The processes
are classified
by the tool post
used.

Process 3: Threading on an
outer surface

Process 3: Threading on an
outer surface
with tool post 1

Processes to be executed
with tool post 2

Process 4: Machining the


end face of a
bar with tool
post 2

Process 4: Machining the


end face of a
bar
Process 5: Drilling

Process 5: Drilling with tool


post 2
Process 6: Tapping

Process 6: Tapping with


tool post 2

Process 4 with
an endfacing
tool #2

Process 6
with a tap
#2

""""

""""
""

"""""
"
""""
""
""""""""
"""""
"
""""""""

"""""""

"""""
""
"""""""

""""
"""""
""

""""
""""
Process 2
with a
grooving
tool #1

Process 5
with a drill
#2

Workpiece to be
machined

55

Process 1
with a tool
used for
machining
an outer
surface
#1

Process
3 with a
threading
tool #1

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

6.3
SELECTING THE
CONVERSATIONAL
MODE

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Select the conversational mode before creating a machining program


using the conversational automatic programming function.
To enter the conversational mode, use the Conversation button on the
machine operators panel by referring to the operators manual issued by
the machine tool builder or use the [CAPI] soft key on the program
screen in the NC as follows:
(1) Select the EDIT mode by using the mode switch on the machine
operators panel.
(2) Press the PRGRM function button to display the NCformat
program screen.
(3) Press the [CAPI] soft key to enter the conversational mode. Then
the main menu for the conversational function appears.
[CAP:HEADL]

FANUC Super CAP


PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM
EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM
PROCESSING SIMULATION

DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PROGRAM


CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM
TOOL,CUTTING CONDITION DATA
TOOL OFFSET DATA
EDIT NC PROGRAM
POSIION
EDIT
MODE
END

MEM
MODE

1 2

MEM
MODE

3 4

MEM
MODE

14:04:48

5 6 7

MEM

(4) To return from the conversational input mode to the NCformat


mode in the main menu, change the mode to the EDIT mode and
press the [END] soft key.
NOTE
1 At the top right corner of the screen displayed by the
conversational function, [CAP:HEADL]/[CAP:HEADR]
(twopath lathe) or [CAP] (onepath lathe) is displayed.
2 At the bottom right corner of the screen, the current time and
current mode are displayed.

56

6.4
CREATING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM
6.4.1
Entering the Number
and Name of a
Program
Example)

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Press the [1] soft key to create a new machining program on the main
menu.

A number and name can be specified for a machining program using the
conversational automatic programming function.

When entering the DEMONSTRATION program with number 210


(1) (PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM)
210

INPUT

DEMONSTRAION

INPUT

PREP A NEW PROCESSING PROGRAM


[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0210
NAME = DEMONSTRATION
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZEREMOVLPRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
SOFTKE
TURRET_BE_OT

SOFTKEY

<

FC25

MATERIAL
FCD45

SS41

S45C

SKD11

SUS304

AL

PLOT

NOTE
1 Up to 20 characters can be used for the name of a program.
2 The PRODLNG data item is displayed only when the
conversational function for twoturret lathes with two
opposing spindles or lathes with a subspindle is used.
3 The displayed workpiece materials vary with the machine
tool builder. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.

57

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

6.5
INITIAL SETTINGS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Initial settings are commonly used in a conversational machining


program.
PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZEREMOVLPRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
SOFTKE
TURRET_BE_OT

SOFTKEY

<

FC25

MATERIAL
FCD45

SS41

S45C

SKD11

SUS304

AL

PLOT

The data for the machining program created immediately before the
current program is automatically copied to initial setting items.

6.5.1
Details of Settings

MATERIAL (workpiece material) : Material to be machined.


A
material is chosen from either eight
or 24 types of materials. When it is
chosen from 24 types, press the [+]
rightmost soft key to display the
ninth and subsequent materials.
Set the workpiece material with the
parameter.
SHAPE (shape of a workpiece) : Figure of the workpiece to be
machined. Choose either a blank
rod or a blank plate.

BAR

RGH
SHAPE

BAR:Blank rods or blanks having a rounded portion


RGH SHAPE : Casting or material for casting

NOTE
When the workpiece material is changed on the initial
setting screen for an existing machining program, all cutting
condition data in the machining program is automatically
replaced by newly calculated data corresponding to the new
material.
Similarly, when the workpiece figure is changed,
corresponding data in the machining program, such as the
start point for cutting, is calculated again.

58

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

The selection of the workpiece figure, for either blank rods or blank
plates, determines the subordinate input data items for blank dimensions.
(1) When BAR is selected as the workpiece figure
PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZEREMOVLPRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000

###
###
###
L

OUTSIDE DIA

< DELETE INSERT

P R OWINDOW PROCES
GRAM
ON/OFF EDIT
END

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL


DATA

PLOT

OUTDIA (maximum diameter) : Outer diameter of the blank


INDIA (minimum diameter)
: Inner diameter of the blank
WORKLNG
: Length of the blank

Outer diameter
of the blank (D)
Inner diameter
of the blank (H)

Length of the blank (L)

59

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(2) When RGH SHAPE is selected as the workpiece figure


To specify the figure of a blank plate, enter the coordinates of up to 12
points for each of the outer and inner surfaces of the figure in the program
coordinate system.
PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM
[CAP.:HEADL]
NO. =0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25RGH SHAPE 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZEREMOVLPRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
OUTSIDEPX1
Z1
X2
Z2
X3
Z3

#####
#####
#####
#####
1

3 4
5

9 10

78

OUTSIDE PX1

< DELETE INSERT

FIGURE
WINDOW PROCES
END
ON/OFF EDIT

Points on the outer surface X1 :


Z1 :

X12 :
Z12 :
Points on the inner surface X1 :
Z1 :

X12 :
Z12 :

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL


DATA

PLOT

11

12

X and Z coordinates of points on the outer


surface in the program coordinate system

X and Z coordinates of points on the inner


surface in the program coordinate system

NOTE
Enter the coordinates of necessary positions on both the
outer and inner surfaces. Enter coordinates of three points
in a line. When the cursor moves to the next line, new data
items for three points appear.
After data is entered for the necessary points on the outer
surface, press the [FIGURE END] soft key to display the
data items for points on the inner surface.
After data is entered to points on the inner surface, press the
[FIGURE END] soft key.
Pressing the [DELETE] soft key deletes all the data which
is on the line the cursor points out.
Pressing the [INSERT] soft key creates a new data entry line
for three points immediately after the line the cursor points
out.

60

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Points on the outer surface


Coordinates of point (1) = (X1, Z1)
Coordinates of point (2) = (X2, Z2)
Coordinates of point (3) = (X3, Z3)
Coordinates of point (4) = (X4, Z4)
Example) Crosssection of molding material

Coordinates of point (5) = (X5, Z5)


Coordinates of point (6) = (X6, Z6)

#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
#############
(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(6)
(7)

Points on the inner surface


Coordinates of point (7) = (X1, Z1)
Coordinates of point (8) = (X2, Z2)
Coordinates of point (9) = (X3, Z3)
Coordinates of point (10) = (X4, Z4)
Coordinates of point (11) = (X5, Z5)
Coordinates of point (12) = (X6, Z6)

(8)

(12)

(10)
(11)

(9)

Program reference position


(on the edge of a workpiece)

Figure for checking


the outside claw

Program reference position (on the edge of the chuck)

61

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

MAXS (maximum spindle speed) : Maximum spindle speed under


constant surfacespeed control
COOLANT
: Coolant commonly used in this machining
program. Select the appropriate coolant using the
following soft keys.

ON

OFF

Initial value of coolant data for each processes is automatically determined by this setting.

FINISHING X/Z (finishing allowance X/Z) : Finishing allowance in the


Xaxis (diameter) and Zaxis direction
END REMOVAL (end face of a workpiece) : Machining allowance at end
facing

Degree of cutting at
the end face
(such as mill scale)

Program reference position


(on the edge of a workpiece)

Program reference position (on the edge of the chuck)

PRODLNG (length of a product) :

Length of a finished product

Endfacing allowance for tool post 2 is obtained by subtracting (end face


of a workpiece) and (length of a product) from (length of a workpiece).
Length of a finished product is effective only when twopath lathes with
two opposing spindles and lathe with subspindles are used.

62

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

WARNING
After you enter or copy the initialization data, make sure that all data is correct.
Material
: Select the same material as the actual workpiece from the material
menu. If the desired material is not on the menu, discontinue
machining the workpiece. If an incorrect material is selected, or an
incorrect cutting condition is used, the tool may be damaged, and
even injuries may occur.
Shape, outer blank surface, inner blank surface, blank length,
and molding outside/inside diameter points
: Enter the correct data that matches the actual workpiece. If
incorrect data is entered, the tool may bump against the workpiece,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even
injuries.
Maximum rotation speed : For the machine spindle, workpiece, and workpiece fastening jig, do
not specify data higher than the maximum rotation speed allowed
for them.
Running the machine with incorrect data may allow the workpiece
and/or jig to come off by centrifugal force, possibly causing damage
to the machine, and even injuries.
Coolant
: Set coolant selection to ON as required. If it is set to OFF when a
coolant is necessary, the tool may be damaged, and even injuries
may occur.
Finishing allowance X/Z : Enter the finishing allowance data that assures safe finishing work
for cutting. If incorrect data is entered, finishing may result in
damage to the tool, and even injuries.
Endsurface allowance : Be sure to enter the same endsurface allowance data as that for
the actual workpiece.
If incorrect data is entered, the tool may bump against the
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine,
and even injuries.
Product length
: For a twopath lathe with two facing spindles or a lathe with a
subspindle, enter the same data as the length of the actual product.
If incorrect data is entered, the tool may bump against the
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine,
and even injuries.

63

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

6.5.2
Operation for Initial
Settings

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(1) Entering or changing data


Press the soft key corresponding to the desired menu. For some
menus, the guidance is shown on the window.
Use the numeric keys and the INPUT key to enter data.
(2) Terminating the initial setting entry
After entering all the necessary data for a certain initial setting, press
the INPUT key or cursor key several times to move the cursor to the
next initial setting line.
Then a new process is created. The following soft key menu for
selecting processes and the window for guidance appear on the
screen.
[CAP.:HEADL]

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM

NO. = 0120
NAME = MSTU
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA
INDIA WORKLNG MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000 2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL PRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
PROC (01)
1=BAR
2=PT.RPT
3=RESID.
4=FACING
5=THREAD
6=GROOVE
7=NECK
8=CENTER
9=DRILL
10=TAP
SOFTKEY
<

1
BAR

MACHINING
2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THREAD

64

6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL

10
TAP

B62444E1/04

6.6
PROCESS DATA
SCREEN

OPERATION

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

A machining program consists of several processes, or units of


machining.
Process data, such as the type of machining, tools to be used, and cutting
conditions, is set and displayed on the process data screen.
Data which must be set in this screen depends on the type of machining
in the process. For details, see Part III, Types of machining programs.

NOTE
Process data for a twopath lathe contains the process data
for a onepath lathe and the items (units) for selecting a tool
post.

WARNING
No check is made on whether the machining sequence is
correct. For example, even if you program tapping without
preparing a hole, or finishing without roughing, the machine
runs according to the programmed machining sequence.
For this reason, when creating a machining program using a
conversational function, be sure to confirm that the machine
runs in the correct sequence.
If the machining sequence is incorrect, the tool may bump
against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

WARNING
When process data is entered, tool and cutting condition data
is determined automatically according to the selected
machining type and area. Be sure to check that the
automatically determined data is correct.
If the data is incorrect, correct it.
If the tool and cutting condition data is incorrect, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

65

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

6.6.1
Operation for the
Process Data Screen

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(1) Entering or changing data


Use the soft key to select the menu. Use the numeric keys and
INPUT key to enter data.
(2) Automatic determination of tools to be used and cutting conditions
Tools to be used and cutting conditions are automatically
determined and displayed on the screen by only entering the type of
machining and the area to be machined.
The functions for automatically determining tools and cutting
conditions depend on the type of machining. For details, see Part III,
Types of machining programs.
(3) Terminating data input
After all the necessary data is entered on the process data screen,
follow the step below according to the type of machining.
(a) When the type of machining is set to end facing, turning and
drilling, miscellaneous machining, subcall or M.
After all the necessary data is entered, if data is to be entered for
the next process, move the cursor to the next line with the cursor
key.
This operation creates an empty process. The menu for selecting
a machining type is displayed in the soft key field.
To return to the main menu screen once program creation has been
completed, press the [PROGRAM END] or [ ] soft key.
(b) When the type of machining is set to machining other than that in
(a)
Move the cursor to the next line with the cursor key to specify
figure data. Then the figure data screen described in 6.5 appears.

66

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

(4) Soft keys


The following soft keys are displayed when the cursor is positioned
at the process data items.

<

DELETE INSERT PRGRM WINDOW PROCES


END
OFF
EDIT

[DELETE]

EXEC REALLY?
CANCEL

MCHNC TOOL DETAIL PLOT


D
DATA

: Deletes the current process. Pressing this soft


key displays the following confirmation
message and soft keys.

YES:[EXEC] NO:[CANCEL]

EXEC

Pressing the [EXEC] soft key deletes the process. Pressing the
[CANCEL] key cancels the deletion and returns to the previous state.
[PRGRM END]
[WINDOW OFF]

[PROCES EDIT]
[MCHNC]
[TOOLD]
[DETAIL DATA]
[PLOT]

67

: Terminates the creation of the program and


returns to the main menu.
: Suppresses the window guidance. Pressing
this soft key changes the key to the [WINDOW
ON] soft key. Pressing the [WINDOW ON]
soft key displays the window guidance.
: Displays the process directory screen.
: Displays the cutting condition data screen.
: Displays the registeredtool directory screen.
: Displays all the data used in the process.
: Displays figures of a workpiece in all the
processes of the machining program.

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

6.7
FIGURE DATA
SCREEN

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

All processes, except for end facing, turning and drilling, miscellaneous
machining, and subcall processes consist of process data (explained in
the previous section) and figure data.
The figure data screen is used to enter and display figure data required for
each type of machining.
Data to be entered on the figure data screen differs according to the type
of machining performed in the process. For details, see the explanation
of machining programs in III.

6.7.1
Operation on the
Contour Data Screen

For the figure data used in bar machining, pattern repeating, Caxis
notching, Caxis cylindrical machining, and Yaxis milling machining
specify the final figure.
Enter necessary data, such as intersections and contact points which are
automatically calculated while a contour is displayed on the screen.
(1) Entering coordinates of the start point.
50

INPUT

(START POINT X)

INPUT

(START POINT Z)

[INSERT]
[CAP.:HEADL]

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM

NO. = 1234
NAME =DEMONSTRATION
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA
INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL PRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REVCUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPDFEED/REV TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101
CONTR FORM(START PPOINT)
START POINT X
START POINT Z

X= 50.000
Z= 0.000

START POINT X
CANCEL

68

INSERT TOOL DETAIL PLOT


D
DATA

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(2) Selecting a figure


A menu of figures appears on the lower part of the screen. Select a
figure by pressing the corresponding soft key.

<

CHAMFR

<

TANGNT

PLOT

FIGURE PLOT
END

ROUND

(3) Entering contour data


When a figure has been selected, the window guidance for entering
contour figure data appears as shown below. Enter the data that is
designated on the drawing.
Position the cursor at the item for specifying the angle, then enter the
following:
30

INPUT (angle of the diagonal line)

[INSERT]

CONTR FORM(TAPER LINE)


DIRECTION
B=

TAPER END X CORD. X=


TAPER END Z CORD. Z=
COMPONENT X
I=
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J=30.000
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(1 10 ) SR=4
LENGTH
CANCEL

INSERT TOOL DETAIL PLOT


D
DATA

(4) Displaying the figure data screen


When contour data is entered as mentioned above, the intersections
and other necessary data are calculated automatically and displayed
on the screen.
Repeat the above operation until all the data necessary for the
process is entered. Then press the [FIGURE END] soft key.
69

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

WARNING
When entering contour data, make sure that the specified
shape is the one that can be machined according to the
machining type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against
the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to
the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

CAUTION
After contour data is entered, make sure that the coordinates
and arc radius of each specified shape are correct; the
specified shape can be displayed graphically. It is especially
necessary to make sure that the data automatically calculated
using a conversational function is definitely correct.
If the data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct
product.

6.7.2
Operation for Data
other than Contour
Data on the Figure
Data Screen

For figure data used in machining except for bar machining, pattern
repeating, Caxis notching, Caxis cylindrical machining, and Yaxis
milling machining specify the reference position or start point, and the
end point that are required for machining.
Use the numeric keys and the INPUT key to enter data.
Example) Figure data screen for threading
Move the cursor to the next line in the process data. After displaying the
figure data, enter the following:
100

INPUT

(START POINT X)

INPUT

(START POINT Z)

100

INPUT

(END POINT X)

50

INPUT

(END POINT Z)

[FIGURE END]

70

B62444E1/04

PROC (03)
THREADING

OPERATION

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

AREA
HEAD THRDTYPE THRDANGL CUTMETHD
OUTER
HEADL
GENERL
60 AMNTSNGL
TOOLNO CUTSPD CUTDPTH CHAMFER
251
80
0.200
ON
STATX
STATZ
ENDX
ENDX
100.000
0.000
100.000

LEAD
1.000
TCODE
0101

END POINT Z
<

DELETE INSERT FIGURE WINDOW PROCES


END
OFF
EDIT

MCHNC TOOL DETAIL PLOT


D
DATA

NOTE
When contour data is entered for bar machining, edit keys,
such as the INSERT key, need to be pressed for every
figure. However, for data entry on the above figure data
screen, only the numeric keys and the INPUT key are used.

After all the figure data for the process is entered, press the [FIGURE
END] soft key.
Pressing the [FIGURE END] soft key creates the next process
automatically. Enter the type of machining in the next process. If the next
process is unnecessary, press the [PRGRM END] soft key or the leftmost
soft key to return to the main menu.
Automatically created processes do not need to be deleted.
WARNING
After figure data is entered, make sure that the specified shape
is the one that can be machined according to the machining
type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against
the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to
the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

CAUTION
After figure data is entered, make sure that the coordinates
and arc radius of each specified shape are correct; the
specified shape is displayed graphically by pressing the
[PLOT] soft key.
If the data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct
product.

71

6. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS

6.8
CREATING A NEW
PROGRAM USING
OTHER PROGRAMS
6.8.1
Registeredprogram
Directory Screen for
Editing

6.8.2
Copying a Program

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Based on an existing machining program, a new machining program can


be created with some modifications to the existing program.

Press the [2] soft key on the main menu to display the registeredprogram
directory screen

On the registered program directory screen, used for editing a machining


program, enter the number of the machining program to be copied.
Alternatively, position the cursor to the program number and press the
[COPY] key.
Before copying the program, be sure to check that the memory protect
switch on the the machine operators panel is set to the release position.

Example)

Copying the machining program with program number 210


210

[COPY]

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM

*** PROGRAM MENU ***

(REST NO.OF PROGRAM 16 PCS.)


(REST NO.OF PROCES 128 PCS.)
PRG.NO
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
0025 DEMONSTRATION
5M51S
1993/11/24 09:24

PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC(01)
PROC(01)
PROC(02)

[CAP.:HEADL]

MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32

SFTKEY
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER END
BAR
OUTER END
DRILLING

HEADL
HEADL
HEADL

CANCEL

ROUGH
FIN

T0505
T0505
T0202

EXEC

Enter a program number for a program to be created. Press the [EXEC]


soft key. The new machining program is then created.
To stop copying, press the [CANCEL] key.
The initial setting screen for the new machining program appears. Modify
the machining program in the same way as editing machining programs
explained in Section 6.8.
72

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

73

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

7.1
CHECKING INPUT
FIGURES
7.1.1
Registeredprogram
Directory Screen for
Editing

7.1.2
Specifying the
Program to be Edited

On the main menu screen, press the [2] soft key to call the
registeredprogram directory screen for editing.

On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, enter the number


of the desired machining program using numeric keys. Alternatively,
move the cursor to the program number. Then press the [EDIT] soft key.
However, be sure to check that the memory protect switch on the machine
operators panel has been locked.

7.1.3
Displaying the
Contents of the
Machining Program

(1) Checking the data


By performing the operation described in the section above, the
initial setting screen of the selected machining program appears on
the display.
Press the page key to check the contents of the machining program.
Pressing this key displays the contents one after another.
(2) Checking all product figures
Pressing the [PLOT] key on the program directory screen draws, in
a window, the product figures for all machining processes included
in the machining program, together with the corresponding
workpiece figures. The above figures are drawn on the program
screen in the same way.
When the product figures are drawn, the final figures specified in the
machining program are displayed in the material figures using lines.
Since it is hard to see the figures, they are drawn according to
machining type as listed below.
Machining type

Description of drawing

BAR (bar machining)

The specified final contour is drawn with


straight lines and arcs.

PT.RPT (pattern repeating)

The specified final contour is drawn with


straight lines and arcs.

RESID. (residual machining)

The residual is drawn using straight lines based


on the start and end point data of the residual
specified by the figure data.

FACING (end facing)

The machined end is drawn with straight lines.

THREAD (threading)

The portion to be threaded is drawn with two


lines indicating the top and bottom of the
thread.

GROOVE (grooving)

The cross section of the groove is drawn with


straight lines.

74

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

Machining type

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Description of drawing

NECK (necking)

The corners to be necked are drawn with arcs.

CENTER (center drilling)

The sectional hole figure is drawn with straight


lines based on nominal diameter and cutting
edge angle data registered in the tool file.

DRILL (drilling)

The sectional hole figure is drawn with straight


lines based on nominal diameter and cutting
edge angle data registered in the tool file.

TAP (tapping)

The sectional hole figure is drawn with straight


lines based on nominal diameter and cutting
edge angle data registered in the tool file.

SINGL (single action)

Nothing is displayed on the final figure drawing


screen.

CA.SUB (calling subprograms)


CCENT (Caxis center
drilling)
CDRIL (Caxis drilling)

In the front view of the material, a hole on the


end face is drawn with a nominal diameter
circle and a hole on the side face is drawn with
circle,
a rectangle.

CTAP (Caxis tapping)


CGROV (Caxis grooving) The groove figure is drawn in the front view of
the material.
The figure of a fixedform groove on the end
face is drawn as it is machined while a straight
line is drawn between the grooving start and
end positions for an unfixedform groove.
CNOTC (Caxis
notching)

The specified final contour is drawn with


straight lines and arcs in the front view of the
material.

CCYL. (Caxis
cylindrical machining)

The specified final contour is drawn with


straight lines and arcs in the development drawing of the cylindrical section of the material.

YMIL. (Yaxis milling)

The specified final contour is drawn with lines


and arcs.

AUX (auxiliary process)

Noting is displayed on the final figure drawing


screen
screen.

TRANS process (only for


twopath lathes)

75

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM


NO. = 0194
NAME =
PROC (02)
TRANS.
PROC(03)
AREA
BAR (R) OUTER END
PROC (01)
AREA
BAR (R) OUTER END
START

CHAMFR

PRG11

*** PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE ***


X

SOFTKEY

CUTDPTH TCODE
8.000
0202
FEED/REV TCODE
0.20
0202
B=

X= 95.000
Z= 14.000
I=
K/J= 75.000
Q=
) SR=
5

FIG.TYPE
RETURN

7.1.4
Enlarging the Part of
the Contour

The contour entered on the figure data screen for bar machining or
suchlike is displayed and can be enlarged partially.
(1) Move the cursor to the desired figure.
(2) Press the rightmost [+] soft key until the following soft keys are
displayed. When these soft keys are displayed, the scale
magnification is displayed at the upper right of the screen.

< SCALE SCALE ENLARG

7.1.5
End of Checking
Machining Programs

NORM PROCES
EDIT

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

[SCALE ]

: Increases the contour display magnification.

[SCALE ]

: Decreases the contour display magnification.

[ENLARG]

: Draws the contour at the specified scale


magnification.

[NORM]

: Restores the scale magnification to that applied


before the enlargement (= 1.0).

After the contents of the machining program are checked, press the
leftmost [
] soft key.
The system returns to the main menu screen.
76

B62444E1/04

7.2
CHECKING
MACHINING
PROGRAMS USING
THE SIMULATION

OPERATION

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Even if the machine is not actually operated, the machining tool path can
be displayed.
When this function is used, it is not necessary to operate the machine.
However, the requirements for starting the actual NC operation of the
machine must be met by the following: selecting the MEM mode with
the mode switch on the machine operators panel and releasing the start
lock and interlock.

WARNING
Even after machining simulation has made sure that the programmed tool path and machining
operation are correct, if actually used data such as the tool offset and work shift amount is
incorrect, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine (including the chuck and
tailstock), possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.
For this reason, before starting actual machining, make sure that the tool will not bump against
the workpiece or machine, for example, by starting the machining program with sufficiently low
feedrate without attaching a workpiece to the machine.

WARNING
Machining simulation may cause data such as a work shift amount, tool tip radius/wear
compensation value, virtual tool tip direction data, tool exchange position (second reference
position data), chuck barrier data (second storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock barrier
data (only when the relevant option is available) to be changed according to the machining
program subjected to machining simulation.
If another program (conversational machining program or a machining program in the form of NC
statements) runs under this condition, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

WARNING
In some cases, machining simulation may not cause data such as a work shift amount, tool tip
radius/wear compensation value, virtual tool tip direction data, tool exchange position (second
reference position data), chuck barrier data (second storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock
barrier data (only when the relevant option is available) to be changed according to parameter
settings. For details, refer to the applicable manual supplied by respective the machine tool
builders.
Even in such cases, before running another program (conversational machining program or a
machining program in the form of NC statements), make sure that the data described above is
correct.
If the data is incorrect, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

77

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

7.2.1
Selecting a Machining
Program

(1) Display the main menu screen, then change the system to the MEM
mode.
(2) Press the [3] and [PROCESSING SIMULATION] soft keys. The
following registeredprogram directory screen for machining
simulation is displayed.
*** PROGRAM LIST ***

CAP.:HEADL

NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
DEMONSTRATION
5M51S 1993/11/24 09:24
PRG11
1M58S 1993/11/20 14:30
NECKING
3M22A 1993/10/30 10:15

PROGRAM NO.=
INITAL SET
PROC(01)
PROC(02)
PROC(03)
PROC(04)
PROC(05)

< TOOL
ING

B62444E1/04

Before checking a drawing, select a machining program created by


conversational programming by following the procedure described
below:

PROCESSING SIMULATION
PRG.NO
0025
0194
1212

OPERATION

MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23

SOFTKEY
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

ANIMA. ANIMA. RT.CH


+RT.CH

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH
FIN

T0505
T0505

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH
FIN

T0202
T0202

PREEX PROCES PLOT


EDIT

GUIDE +

(3) Enter the number of the program to be simulated. Alternatively,


move the cursor to the number of the program. Then press the
[ANIMA.], [ANIMA. + RT.CH], or [RT.CH] soft key.
[ANIMA.]
[ANIMA. + RT.CH]
[RT.CH]

: Displays the animated simulation of the


machining.
: Displays the animated simulation of the
machining and tool path.
: Displays only the tool path.

NOTE
The tool path of the Caxis and Yaxis machining cannot
be drawn if RT.CH is specified.

78

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

(4) To display the simulated drawing of a chuck or tail stock, press the
[PREEX] soft key. The setting screen before execution is
displayed. On the setting screen, enter the following data:
OUTPUT (Specified T code)
WSHIFT (INC) (Workpiece shift)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO.

T:
SZ :
CZ :
C:

Need not be set


Need not be set
Automatically set.
Number on the chuck
figure screen
X, Z : Need not be set
TN : Number on the tail stock
figure screen

After entering these necessary data, press the [RETURN] soft key. The
system returns to the registeredprogram directory screen. Then follow
the procedure described in (3) above.

79

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

7.2.2

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

When the [ANIMA.], [ANIMA + RT.CH], or [RT.CH] key is pressed, the


following simulation screen is displayed:

Simulating Machining

O1209 P0001
X1 20.000
Z1 10.000
C1
0.000

X1

X2

ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G01

Z2
0.000
0.000
0.000

0M00S
20.0
500%
<

SPEED SPEED
UP
DOWN

ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G01
X
Z
C

X
Z
C

0M00S
20.0
MEM ****
PLOT

X2 30.000
Z2 20.000
C2 90.000

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

[SINGLE STEP]

***

***

0.000
0.000
0.000

15: 26: 21

WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE


PIECE
STEP

: Causes a singleblock stop while continuous


simulation is being executed.
Or, starts
singleblock simulation.
[EXEC]
: Starts the ordinary simulation drawing.
[PROCES]
: Starts simulating the machining in units of
processes.
The output of M01 causes a
singleblock stop. (To output M01 at the end of
each process, set bit 4 (M01OUT) of parameter
9774 to 1.)
[WORKPIECE] : Clears the current simulation drawing and
redisplays the initial workpiece figure.
[HEAD]
: Searches for the beginning of a machining
program and initializes the graphic drawing.
[PROG ON/OFF] : Displays or deletes a converted NC program
during NC program conversion.
[PLOT]
: Draws the final product figure over the workpiece
figure.
[SPEED DOWN] : Reduces the drawing speed.
[SPEED UP]
: Increases the drawing speed.
80

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

The above soft keys are valid only during machining simulation.
Animated drawings showing the actual machining status can also be
displayed during machining (drawing during machining). To do this,
press the GRAPH key to display the screen illustrated above, then start
the machining.
When display of this machining simulation screen was selected from the
main menu screen of the conversational function, press the [ ] key to
return to the main menu screen.
NOTE
1 If the [RT.CH] key is pressed, the [PROG ON/OFF]/[PLOT]
[SPEED DOWN]/[SPEED UP] soft keys are not displayed.
2 The drawing speed can be increased only during machining
simulation. In drawing during machining, the conventional
method is applied.
If the actual tool travels at high speed while drawing during
machining is being executed, the drawing may not be
performed at the same speed, resulting in the drawing being
incorrect.
3 The screen cannot be switched during machining
simulation. If an attempt is made to switch the screen,
machining simulation is stopped and cannot be resumed.
4 To use the soft keys described above, set both bit 4 (CSF)
and bit 6 (NZM) of parameter 6500 to 1.
Set bit 3 (DPA) of parameter 6500 to 0.
To use the machining simulation drawing function, set bit 0
(HSA) of parameter 6502 to 1.

While an NC program is being converted, the NC program is displayed


as shown below.

81

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Sample of screen displayed during NC program conversion)


NXT G00
X 0.000
Z
Z 55. 900
C 0. 000

O0002
G01Z49. 9F0.5;
X159.5Z 49.9;
X160.;
G00Z6.;
0M23S
500%
SPEED
UP

MEM
SPEED
DOWN

PLOT

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

STRT

***

***

WORK
PROCES
PIECE

11:31:35
EXEC

EDIT

SINGLE
STEP

NOTE
1 When the NC program is displayed as shown above, it may
not be possible to display part of a long block in the frame.
2 For Super CAP II T, [SPEED UP] and [SPEED DOWN] are
not displayed.
3 Do not press [HEAD] during conversion to an NC format
program. Otherwise, ordinary simulation is performed
instead of machining simulation even if [EXEC] is pressed.

82

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

7.2.3
Enlarging a Figure and
Displaying Other
Screens

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

(1) Enlarging a figure


While the soft keys, described in the previous section, are displayed,
press the [+] key. The [ENLARG] key is displayed.
Press the [ENLARG] soft key. The following soft keys are
displayed. The coordinates of the screen center and scale
magnification are also displayed on the lefthand side of the screen.

Coordinates of the
screen center

Scale magnification

X=
0.000
Z= 125.523
S=
0.60
<

NORMAL SCAL

SCAL

CURSOR KEYS

CAN

EXEC

[EXEC]

: Draws the figure with the new scale magnification


and the new coordinates of the screen center.
[CAN]
: Cancels the scale magnification and the
coordinates of the screen center, modified on this
screen.
[SCAL]
: Reduces the scale magnification.
[SCAL]
: Increases the scale magnification.
[NORMAL]
: Sets the scale magnification and coordinates of the
screen center to the standard values and draws the
figure by applying these standard values.
Cursor keys : Move the screen center.
On the figure enlargement screen, specify a new scale magnification and
new coordinates for the screen center. Press the [+] key, then press the
[OPRT] key. The original simulation soft keys are displayed. Then, start
the new machining simulation.

83

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

NOTE
1 If increasing the scale magnification or modifying the
coordinates of the screen center causes the workpiece to
exceed the range of the screen, the machining simulation
may not be executed normally.
2 If increasing the scale magnification causes the
corresponding tool to be enlarged, the tool may not be
displayed normally or cutting simulation may not be
performed normally.
(2) Displaying other screens
Press the [+] key several times. The following soft keys are
displayed.
<

G.PRM A.PRM GRAPH

[OPRT]

OPRT

: Redisplays the machining simulation soft keys,


described in Section 7.2.2.
: Displays the graphic parameter screen.
: Displays the animation parameter screen.

[GPRM]
[A.PRM]

NOTE
When the conversational function is used, no operations
need be performed using the graphic parameter screen or
the animation parameter screen. For details, see the
operators manual of the NC function.

[GRAPH]

: Displays the following soft keys. Once the


simulation drawing has been completed, press the
soft key corresponding to the desired screen. The
selected screen is displayed.

<

SIDE

FRONT

OPEN

OPRT

SIDE
: Displays the simulated turning.
FRONT : Displays the simulated Caxis machining or Yaxis end
facing (drilling, milling), except Caxis cylindricalsurface
machining.
OPEN : Displays the simulated Caxis cylindricalsurface
machining.

84

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

7.3
SIMULATION OF
YAXIS MACHINING
7.3.1
Simulation of Yaxis
Machining by a
Onepath Lathe

If the Yaxis machining function is supported, the following machining


simulation screen is displayed:
01209 P0005

X
30.000
Z 20.000
C
90.000
Y 10.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000

20.0
500%

MEM **** *** ***

< SPEED SPEED PLOT


DOWN
UP

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

15:26:21

WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +


STEP
PIECE

(FS16/18TB)

Simulated turning is displayed on the left half of the screen. Simulated


Yaxis side facing is displayed on the right half of the screen.
If Yaxis side facing is executed, the machining statuses on the four faces
determined by the orientation of the Caxis can be displayed
simultaneously.
Example)
Y

Drawing coordinate system for


Yaxis side facing
X

Z
C

85

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

If movement about the Caxis is specified for Yaxis side facing, the
machining face is switched. The machining faces need not meet at right
angles as shown above. Five or more faces can be machined. The
machining statuses for the fifth and subsequent faces, however, cannot be
displayed together with the statuses of the first four faces. For example,
the machining status for the fifth face is drawn after the status displayed
for  above has been erased.
When Yaxis end facing is simulated, the end face of the workpiece is
drawn in the same way as when Caxis end facing is simulated.

7.3.2
Simulation of Yaxis
Machining by a
Twopath Lathe

When the Yaxis machining function is added to a twopath lathe, the


following machining simulation screen is displayed:
01209 P0005

X1

X1 20.000
Z1 10.000
C1
0.000
Y1
5.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
Z10.000
C
Y
0.000

X2

Z2

0M55S
20.0
MEM **** *** ***

1M25S
20.0
500%
< SPEED SPEED PLOT
DOWN
UP

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

X2 30.000
Z2 20.000
C2 90.000
Y2 10.000
ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000
NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
Y
0.000

15:26:21

WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +


STEP
PIECE

(FS16/18TB)

Simulated Yaxis side facing is displayed at the top of the screen. If a


twopath lathe is used, the status of the latest Yaxis side facing is
displayed for each tool post.
NOTE
1 The field of the simulated Yaxis side facing is limited to an
area around the center of the workpiece. If the tool is moved
toward the upper or lower end of the workpiece, the tool will
not be displayed.
2 If machining is continued with an identical angular
displacement about the Caxis, but with different tools, the
tools are drawn using different colors.
3 To simulate Yaxis machining, set bit 0 (HSA) and bit 1
(GRY) of parameter 6502 to 1.

86

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

7.4
OFFSET DATA SAVE
AND RESTORE
FUNCTION
7.4.1

On Super CAP T, the under mentiond data are memorized at each CAP
programs. And these NC data are automatically rewritten when Direct
operation of CAP program or Convert to NC program or Processing
simulation are execution selected.
(1) Work shift amount
(2) Geometry and wear offset of nose R and direction of imaginary nose.
(3) Tool change position (the second reference position data)
(4) Chuck barrier data (the second stored stroke limit data)
(5) Chuck and tail stock barrier data (only this option is added)

Generals

Therefore, when the drive of NC program is interrupted and Processing


simulation or Direct operation of CAP program or Convert to NC
program is done, the above mentiond data will be rewr itten. In this case,
there is possibility interfere the tool because refer to rewritten offset data.
By setting of parameter, the offset data is prevented from changing before
and after the only machining simulation.

7.4.2
Parameter
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

9766

OSV

LGC

#1

#0

0 : It is overwritten the offset data when CAP program is execution


selected.
1 : It is saved and restored of the offset data when CAP program is
exection selected in Processing simulation mode.
#7

5002

#2
OSV

#6

#5
LGC

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

0 : Tool geometry compensation is not canceled by offset number 0.


1 : Tool geometry compensation is canceled by offset number 0.
*Always set this bit to 1.

87

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

7.4.3
Details

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

When the parameter described in 7.4.2 is set to 1, the following processing


will be done.
(1) Following data are saved, rewritten, restored when Processing
simulation is executed.
Save/ restore Nose R offset (geometry, wear) imaginary nose
direction, tool geometry offset, tool wear offset.
Nose R offset (geometry, wear) imaginary nose
direction tool offset (geometry, wear)
(temporary value) .

Rewrite

(2) The data are saved and restored only when Processing simulation is
executed. And the data are not saved and restored when Direct
operation of CAP program, Convert to NC program are executed.
(3) The data are saved at biginning of each process, and restored at
ending of each process.
(4) During offset data save, and RESET is occured, the data are restored
immedeitely. And power off is occured, the data will be restored at
next power on. If P/ S alarm is occuerrd, the data are not restored.
(because, RESET signal is not turn on)
(5) For distinguish Processing simulation from the others, the condition
that is able to start is limited. The executing program is selected in
Processing simulation mode, it becomes P/ S alarm 3014 when the
program starts in Direct operation of CAP program mode. And also
when the executing program is selected in Direct operation of CAP
program mode, it becomes P/ S alarm 3014 when the program start
in Processing simulation mode.
Information of selecting condition is displayed on the right of the
screen.
(6) When offset data save restore function is effecive, the geometry and
wear offset data are written in to the temporary value 0. Therfore, it
dose not display the tool wear/ geometry offset data in tooling data
screen of Processing simulation mode.

88

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

7.4.4
Execution Selection
State Display

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

When offset data save restore function is effecive, the condition that is
able to start is limited. For understand easily, information of selecting
condition is displayed on the right of the screen.

*** PROGRAM MENU ***

SIMU [CAP. HEAD L]

Execution selection state

(1) Selection mode displaying.


It depends on the program selection screen whether offset data are
saved and restored or not. The state being selected now (selection
mode) is displayed by the character.
SIMU Processing simulation mode
(The offset data are saved and restored)
DRCT Direct operation of CAP program mode
(The offset data are not saved and restored)
CONV Convert into NC program
(The offset data are not saved and restored)
These selection mode are changed by pressing soft key in the main
menu 3 [Processing simulation] , 4 [Direct operation of CAP
program] 5 [Convert into CAP program] .
(2) Program selection state displaying
When offset data save and restore function is effective, it is
neccessary select the execute program. Whether the program is
selected in current is displaying by the reverse color.
Red
It isnt selected the executing program in current selection mode.
Under this condition, it is impossible to start both Processing
simulation and machine drive. (it will be became P/S 3014
program is not selected) Please select the executing program in
current selection mode.
Green
Already selected the executing program in current selection mode.
It is possible to start program execution. However, under this
condition, only be able to start animation in Processing
simulation, and able to machine start in Dirrect operation CAP
program. If the executing program is selected in Processing
simulation mode, and start the direct drive, it will be became P/S
3014. Same way, if the executing program is selected in Direct
drive mode and start the animation, it will be became P/S 3014.
In Convert into NC program mode, it is possible to start both
animation and direct driving.

89

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

7.4.5
Tool Changing Position
Temporary Setting

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Tool changing position is fixed to the following temporary position which


is not related to the NC parameter No. 1241 (the second reference
position) .
In case of program zero point is workpiece end
X material length +100
Z 150

(when unit is inch, +10)


(when unit is inch, 15)

In case of program zero point is chuck end


X material length +100
Z material diameter +150

7.4.6
Alternation of G30
Command in Macro
Program

Example)

(when unit is inch, +10)


(when unit is inch, +15)

In the machining macro program, when Offset data save restore function
is effective and only execute Processing simulation, the program
commands G00 instead of G30 to display the tool at fixed position
however absolute and machine coordinates are any value. Therefore, if
Offset data save restore function is used, the machine tool builders
original macro program will be changed in case of G30 is in the macro
program.
G30 U0 V0 G00 X (material outer diameter +100) Z150
If the change is necessary, please replace the part of calling G30 command
with the subroutine which shows in the follows. Command order of axis,
simultaneous axis number etc. follows G30 command which is replaced
G00 command ( see machining macro program O0450 O0455, O0460)
Command value of each axis in G00 is in order to inputting unit and
program zero point.
In case of program zero point is workpiece end
X material length +100
Z 150

(when unit is inch, +10)


(when unit is inch, 15)

In case of program zero point is chuck end


X material length +100
Z material diameter +150

90

(when unit is inch, +10)


(when unit is inch, +15)

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

7.5
MACHINING
SIMULATION BASED
ON A SOLID MODEL
(SUPER CAP II T)

7.5.1

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

With the Super CAP II T, it is possible to perform cutting simulation for


turning, using a solid model. After simulation, the display of the
simulated cut product can be rotated.
It is also possible to make a line drawing of a tool trajectory on the
C/Yaxis simulation screen, using an isometric projection method.

Cutting simulation for turning uses a solid model. To display how the
inner surface is machined, a quarter of the periphery of the display is cut
out.

Simulating a Cutting
Operation Based on a
Solid Model

The chuck and tailstock are displayed in a similar manner. The chuck is
displayed as a cylinder on the assumption that it is rotating.
(1) On the machining simulation registration program screen, press
[ANIMA.] to select animated drawing where no tool trajectory is
drawn.

TOOLING

ANIMA.

ANIMA.
+RT.CH

RT.CH

PREEX PROCES
LIST

PLOT

GUIDE

(2) When the following soft keys appear on the machining simulation
screen, press [PROCES], [EXEC], or [SINGLE STEP], similarly to
conventional machining simulation. The machining simulation
type selected by the pressed key begins.
SPEED
UP

SPEED
DOWN

PLOT

ROTATE

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

PROCES

EXEC

SINGLE
STEP

(3) After machining simulation is finished, pressing [ROTATE] causes


the display of the simulated machined product to be rotated.
Moreover, pressing [

] can switch the display from


threequarter shape format to full shape format. To reselect the
threequarter format, press [

].
NOTE
It is impossible to carry out machining simulation with the
display of the simulated machined product kept rotated.

7.5.2
Simulation of
C/Yaxis Machining

In addition to the conventional animated endsurface (C/Yaxis),


development (Caxis), and side elevation (Yaxis) drawings, C/Yaxis
machining simulation can display a line drawing of a tool trajectory based
on isometric projection.
91

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

flow chart
Offset data save and restore
function is effective?
yes

no

no

Execute processing simulation?


yes

#1=material length
#2=material diameter

Program zero point is workpiece end?


yes

no

#1=0 (material length clear)

Input unit is mm?


yes

no

inch unit
#1=15+#1
#2=10+#2

mm unit
#1=150+#1
#2=100+#2

G30command

G00command
G00X#2Z#1

RET

92

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

7. CHECKING MACHINING PROGRAMS

example)

/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
/*
O0000

N100

Offset data save and restore function G30 G00 replace operation
INPUT
P9766#3(OSV)
Input Macro parameter #20666 material length
#20667 material outer diamiter
#20737 input unit
#20794 program zero point
#9127 state of execution
OUTPUT
none
IF[[P9766AND4]EQ0]GOTO500;No.9766#2(OSV) 0:non effective 1:effective
IF[#9127NE1]GOTO500
;#9127 1:Processing simulation
;
2:Convert in to NC program
#1=#20666
;material length
#2=#20667
;material outer diamiter
IF[#20794EQ1]GOTO100
#1=0

;program zero point 0:workpiece and 1:chuck end


;matelial length data clear

IF[#20737EQ1]GOTO120

;#20737 0:input unit mm 1:input unit inch


;***mm unit
;#1=150+ material length (z coordenate)
;#2=100+ material diamiter (x coordenate)

#1=150+#1
#2=100+#2
GOTO200

;**inch unit
;#1=150+ material length (z coordenate)
;#2=100+ material diamiter (x coordenate)

N120

#1=15+#1
#2=10+#2

N200

G00X#2Z#1
GOTO900

;*** G00 command

N500
N900

G30U0W0V0
M99

;*** G30 command


;return

93

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

WARNING
When editing a machining program, be sure to confirm that the
changes are correct. If you have made a mistake in changing,
be sure to correct it, because the previous state of the program
has not be saved.
If the machining program is incorrect, the tool may bump
against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

WARNING
When a machining program is edited, the tool and cutting
condition data may be changed automatically and become
different from manually entered data, depending on the
changes made. In such a case, make sure that the
automatically made changes are correct. If there is incorrect
data, be sure to correct it.
If the tool and cutting condition data is incorrect, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

94

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

8.1
SELECTING THE
MACHINING
PROGRAM TO BE
EDITED
8.1.1

To display the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, press the


[2] and [EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM] soft keys on the main
menu screen.

Registeredprogram
Directory Screen for
Editing

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM

*** PROGRAM MENU ***

CAP.:HEADL

(REST NO. OF PROGRAM 15 PCS.)


(REST NO. OF PROGRAM 122 PCS.)
PRG.NO
0025
0194
1212

NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
DEMONSTRATION
3M32S 1993/11/24 09:24
PRG11
1M58S 1993/11/20 14:30
NECKING
0M30S 1993/10/30 10:15
SFTKY

PROGRAM NO.=
INITAL SET
PROC(01)
PROC(02)
PROC(03)
PROC(04)
PROC(05)
<

MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23

FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

PUNCH

READ

DELETE COPY

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH
FIN

T0505
T0505

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH
FIN

T0202
T0202

SCHEDULEING

EDIT PROCES PLOT


EDIT

GUIDE

The registeredprogram directory screen displays the program numbers,


names, cycle times, creation dates and times, and the latest update dates
and times of all registered conversational machining programs.
Part of the outline of the program to which the cursor is positioned is
displayed in the lower part of the screen.
By pressing [PLOT], the product figure of the program to which the
cursor is positioned can be displayed in the window. The screen display
returns to its original status when [RETURN] is pressed.

95

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

NOTE
1 As the cycle time data, a calculated machining time is
displayed when machining simulation is performed.
Depending on the conditions, the actual machining time
may differ from a calculated machining time. When a
machining program is actually executed, the time required
for actual machining is displayed.
2 Another registeredprogram directory screen, such as that
for machining simulation, displays similar information for
each machining program.

8.1.2
Selecting a Machining
Program

On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, enter the number


of the machining program to be edited using numeric keys. Alternatively,
move the cursor to the number of the program. Then press the [EDIT] soft
key.
However, be sure to check that the memory protect switch on the machine
operators panel has been released.
By performing the operation above, the initial setting screen of the
selected machining program is displayed.
Press a cursor key or page key to find the part to be changed.

96

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

8.2
EDITING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM IN UNITS
OF PROCESSES
(PROGRAM SCREEN)

A process can be deleted or added by pressing the [DELETE] or


[INSERT] soft key shown below.

< DELETE INSERT PRGRM WINDOW PROCES


END
OFF
EDIT

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

If the soft keys shown above are not displayed, press the rightmost [+] soft
key for several times.
NOTE
A process can be deleted or inserted only when the cursor
is positioned to a process data item. When the cursor is
positioned to figure data, figure data can be deleted or
inserted. None of the initial setting data can be deleted.

8.2.1

The processes contained in a machining program can be deleted in units


of processes.

Deleting a Process

Move the cursor to the process to be deleted, then press the [DELETE]
soft key. The message for confirming the operation and soft keys are
displayed as shown below.

EXEC REALLY?
CANCEL

YES:[EXEC]

NO:[CANCEL]

EXEC

8.2.2
Adding a New Process

[CANCEL]

: Cancels the deletion and returns to the original state.

[EXEC]

: Deletes the process.

To add a new process to a machining program, move the cursor to the


process which is to be followed by the new process and press the
[INSERT] soft key.
By performing this operation, the new process is created. Select a
machining type as when a program is created.
97

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

8.3
CHANGING THE
PROCESS DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

To change the process data, move the cursor to the part to be changed
using a cursor key. Enter new numeric data using numeric keys, then
press the INPUT key.
To delete the entered data, press the CAN key, then the INPUT key.
To change the machining type of a process, position the cursor to the
machining type, then press the soft key corresponding to the desired
machining type. This displays the operation confirmation message and
soft keys shown below. Press a soft key as required.

EXEC REALLY?
CANCEL

YES:[EXEC]

NO:[CANCEL]

EXEC

[CANCEL] :
[EXEC]

Cancels the operation for changing the machining type,


and returns to the previous state.
Changes the machining type.

NOTE
When a machining type is changed to a new machining
type, the process data and figure data existing before the
change may be entirely rewritten, depending on the new
machining type.

98

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

8.4
CHANGING PART OF
THE CONTOUR DATA

8.4.1
Changing Entered
Figure Data

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

The contour data of bar machining can be changed by the data entered for
automatic figure computing.
By performing this operation, cross and contact points of the changed
contour block and the preceding and subsequent figure blocks are
recomputed to create new contour data.

(1) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the figure block to be
changed. The entered data is displayed in the window guidance as
shown below.

[CAP.:HEADL]

EDITING THE PROCESSING PROGRAM

NO. = 1234
NAME =DEMONSTRATION
INITAL SET MATERIAL
SHAPE OUTDIA
INDIA WORKLNG
MAXS COOLANT
FC25
BAR 100.000
145.000
2000
ON
FINISHX FINISHZ EREMOVL PRODLNG
0.200
0.100
2.000 150.000
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPDFEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
BAR (R) OUTER END HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101
START X= 20.000 Z= 0.000
CONTR FORM(HOPIZLINE)
J
X= 20.000 Z= 30.000

X= 20.000 Z= 40.000
DERECTION
B=

END POINT Z
Z=30.000
HORIZONTAL X CORD. X=
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR=

< WINDOW INSERT ALTER ALTER DELETE


OFF
FIGURE

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

(2) Press the [ALTER] soft key shown above. If the soft keys are not
displayed, press the rightmost [+] soft key for several times.
(3) The color of the frame of the window guidance changes to yellow
and the following soft keys are displayed.

<

DELETE

ALTER TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

If a cursor key is pressed in this state, a yellow inverted cursor moves in the
window guidance.

99

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(4) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the part of the contour data
to be changed.
(5) Using numeric keys, enter new numeric data, then press the INPUT
key.
(6) Press the [ALTER] soft key.
(7) The contour is recomputed and the results are displayed. The color
of the frame of the window guidance returns to sky blue.

Example
PROC (01) AREA
BAR (R)
OUTER
START

Changing the angle of a taper line from 45 to 60


HEAD ROUGHNES
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
END HEADL 5
102
80
0.25
0101
X= 20.000
Z= 0.000
SR=5
X= 20.000
Z= 30.000
X= 80.000
Z= 60.000
CONTR FORM(TAPER LINE)
X= 10.000
Z= 60.000
DIRECTION
B=
TAPER END X CORD. X=
TAPER END Z CORD. Z=
COMPONENT X
1=
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J=45.000
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR= 5

< WINDOW INSERT ALTER ALTER DELETE


OFF
FIGURE

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

Move the cursor (J) to the figure to be changed, then


[ALTER]
Move the cursor in the window guidance (yellow frame) to the angle, then
60 INPUT
[ALTER]
By performing the operation above, the contour is recomputed and the
new figure data is displayed. The new figure is displayed on the same
screen.

100

8.4.2

(1) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the figure block to be
changed. The entered data is displayed in the window guidance.
(2) Press the [ALTER FIGURE] soft key. If soft keys are not displayed,
press the rightmost [+] soft key for several times.
(3) The graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft keys, as shown
below. Press the soft key of the desired new figure.

Changing the Figure

<

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

CHAMFR

TANGNT

ROUND

PLOT

FIGURE PLOT
END

[ + ]

<

(4) The input data items for the new contour are displayed in the window
guidance. The color of the frame of the window guidance changes
to yellow. The following soft keys are displayed.

CANCEL

ALTER TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


FIGURE
DATA

If a cursor key is pressed in this state, the yellow inverted cursor moves
in the window guidance.
(5) Using numeric keys, enter the numeric data of the new figure. Then
press the INPUT key.
(6) After entering all necessary data, press the [ALTER FIGURE] soft
key.
(7) Based on the new figure, the contour is recomputed and the results
are displayed. The color of the frame of the window guidance
changes to sky blue.

101

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Example

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Changing chamfering (C2) to rounding (R3)

PROC (01) AREA


HEAD ROUGHNES
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
BAR (R)
OUTER END HEADL 5
102
80
0.25
0101
START X= 20.000 Z= 0.000
SR=5

X= 20.000 Z= 30.000

X= 77.172 Z= 58.58
CONTR FORM(CHAMFER)
JCHAMFR X= 84.000 Z= 60.000
BEVEL AMOUNT
I= 2.000

X= 10.000 Z= 60.000
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR= 5

< WINDOW INSERT ALTER ALTER DELETE


OFF
FIGURE

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

Move the cursor (J) to the chamfering data to be changed, then


[ALTER FIGURE]
Check that the graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft key field, then
[ROUND]
Check that the input data items for rounding are displayed in the window
guidance, move the cursor to the radius of rounding, then
3 INPUT
[ALTER FIGURE]
By performing the operation above, the contour is recomputed and the
changed figure data is displayed on the screen. The new figure is
displayed on the same screen.

102

8.4.3

(1) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the figure block to be
followed by a new figure.
(2) Press the [INSERT] soft key.
(3) The graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft keys. Press the soft
key of the figure to be added.

Adding a Figure

<

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

CHAMFR

TANGNT

ROUND

PLOT

FIGURE PLOT
END

[ + ]

<

(4) The input data items for the new contour are displayed in the window
guidance. The color of the frame of the window guidance changes
to yellow. The following soft keys are displayed.

CANCEL

INSERT TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

If a cursor key is pressed in this state, the yellow inverted cursor moves
in the window guidance.
(5) Using numeric keys, enter the numeric data for the new figure and
press the INPUT key.
(6) After entering all necessary data, press the [INSERT] soft key.
(7) Based on the added figure, the contour is recomputed and the results
are displayed. The color of the frame of the window guidance
returns to sky blue.

103

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

Example
PROC (01) AREA
BAR (F)
OUTER
START

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Adding rounding (R3)


HEAD ROUGHNES
ENDHEADL
5
X= 20.000 Z=
X= 20.000 Z=
X= 77.172 Z=
X= 10.000 Z=

TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE


102
80
0.25
0101
0.000
30.000
58.58
60.000

SR=5
CONTR FORM(TAPER LINE)
DIRECTION
B=
TAPER END X CORD. X=
TAPER END Z CORD. Z=
COMPONENTX
I=
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J=45.000
LENGTH
Q=
ROUGHNESS(110)
SR= 5

< WINDOW INSERT ALTER ALTER DELETE


OFF
FIGURE

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

Move the cursor (J) to the figure which is to be followed by a new figure,
then
[INSERT]
Check that the graphic pattern menu is displayed on the soft key field, then
[ROUND]
Check that the input data items for rounding are displayed in the window
guidance, move the cursor to the radius of rounding, then
3 INPUT
[INSERT]
By performing the operation above, the contour after the new figure is
added is recomputed and the changed figure data is displayed on the
screen. The new figure is displayed on the same screen.

104

B62444E1/04

8.4.4
Deleting a Figure

EXEC REALLY?

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

(1) Using a cursor key, move the cursor to the figure block preceding the
part to be deleted.
(2) Press the [DELETE] soft key.
(3) The message for confirming the operation and the soft keys are
displayed as shown below. To cancel the operation, press the
[CANCEL] soft key. To delete the figure, press the [EXEC] soft key.
YES:[EXEC] NO:[CANCEL]
CANCEL

EXEC

(4) The contour after the figure is deleted is recomputed and the results
are displayed.
NOTE
Deletion of a figure may cause a conflict in relationship
between the deleted figure and the figures before and after
the deleted figure. In this case, the system warns the
operator that the entered data are invalid and the system
cancels the delete operation. The warning message is
erased by the next key operation.

8.5
CHANGING FIGURE
DATA OTHER THAN
CONTOUR DATA

To change figure data other than contour data, move the cursor to the data
to be changed using a cursor key. Using numeric keys, enter numeric data
and press the INPUT key.
To delete the entered data, press the CAN key, then the INPUT key.

105

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

8.6

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Machining programs created by conversational programming can be


moved, deleted, copied, and searched for in units of processes on the
process editing screen.

EDITING MACHINING
PROGRAMS IN
UNITS OF
PROCESSES
(PROCESS EDITING
SCREEN)
8.6.1

Two methods are available to display the process directory screen.


(1) Displaying the process directory screen from the
registeredprogram directory screen

Displaying the Process


Directory Screen

On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, enter the desired


program number using numeric keys. Alternatively, move the cursor to
the program number. Then press the [PROCES EDIT] soft key.
(2) Displaying the process directory screen from the screen of the
machining program
When the contents of the machining program are displayed, press the
[PROCES EDIT] soft key. The process editing screen of the machining
program is displayed.

Example

Process editing screen of a twopath lathe

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM

*** PROCESS EDIT ***

HEADL
INITAL SET

FC25

HEADR
INITAL SET

BAR

PROC (04)

PROC (01)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
3M 0S
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
PROC (02)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
1M37S
JJJJJJJ
PROC (03)
GRV OUTER END (STNDRD)
T1212
0M 4S
J
PROC (04)
TRANS.
0M20S

JJJ

HEADL
HEADR

5M01S 01
2M02S 04

[CAP.: HEAD:L]

FC25

BAR

TRANS.

0M20S
JJJ
PROC (05)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
1M 3S
JJJJJJ
PROC (06)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
0M39S
JJJJ

JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 02 JJJJJJJJJ
JJJJ 05 JJJJJJJ 06 JJJJJ

< RENUM TRANS DELETE COPY

EDIT

0304

JJJJ

RETURN PLOT

GUIDE

On the process editing screen, the machining time of each process is


indicated in minutes and seconds and also in a bar chart. The bar charts
of the rough machining, finish machining, and chamfering are displayed
in green, purple, and blue respectively.
106

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

The ratio of the machining time of each process to that of the entire
machining program is indicated in a bar chart at the bottom of the screen.

NOTE
The machining time described above is displayed after
simulation or actual machining is completed. If the
simulation or actual machining is stopped in the middle by
a reset, the machining time may not be displayed.
Machining times longer than 99 minutes are not displayed.
During simulation, machining time data is summed by
calculating the execution times for individual move
commands. However, such a machining time can differ from
the actual machining time, depending on the prevailing
conditions, including the feedrate override and
miscellaneous function operation times. During actual
machining, the actual machining time data is displayed.

8.6.2
Moving a Process for a
Tool Post

The sequence of processes registered in a machining program can be


changed in units of processes.
On the process editing screen, move the cursor to the process to be moved,
then press the [TRANS.] soft key. The following operation guidance is
displayed.

SPECIFY DESTINATION SOFT KEY [EXEC]


CANCEL EXEC

Move the cursor to the process which is to be followed by the moved


process and press the [EXEC] soft key. The selected process is inserted
immediately after the process specified by the cursor.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance shown
above, the move operation is canceled and the system returns to the
original state.
NOTE
The initial setting process cannot be moved. An attempt to
move it will be ignored.

107

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

8.6.3

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

If a twopath lathe with the Series 16TB is used, a process can be moved
between the two tool posts.

Moving a Process
between the Two Tool
Posts

When the process is moved to the other tool post, the tools used in the
destination tool post is automatically selected. The tools required for the
process to be moved must be registered in advance.
Moving the process to the other tool post is the same as moving the
process for a tool post, except that the former requires the move
destination to be specified to the other tool post.

Example

Moving the grooving process (process 03) of the HEADL to HEADR


on the process editing screen shown in Section 8.6.1
Move the cursor to process 03, then
[TRANS.]
Move the cursor to process 06, then
[EXEC]
After the operation above, the following process editing screen is
displayed.

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM

*** PROCESS EDIT ***

HEADL
INITAL SET

FC25

INITAL SET

BAR

PROC (04)

PROC (01)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
3M 0S
JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ
PROC (02)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
1M37S
JJJJJJJ
PROC (04)
TRANS.
0M20S

JJJ

HEADL
HEADR

5M01S 01
2M02S 04

[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR
FC25

BAR

TRANS.

0M20S
JJJ
PROC (05)
BAR OUTER END
ROUGH
T0505
1M 3S
JJJJJJ
PROC (06)
BAR OUTER END
FIN
T0505
0M39S
JJJJ
PROC (03)
GRV OUTER END (STNDRD)
T0909
0M 4S
J

JJJJJJJJJJJJJJJJ 02 JJJJJJJJJ
JJJJ 05 JJJJJJJ 06 JJJJJ 03

< RENUM TRANS DELETE COPY


.

EDIT

108

04

JJJJ

RETURN PLOT

GUIDE

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

NOTE
1 A process can be moved to the other tool post only in an
automatically scheduled program.
For automatic
scheduling, see Section 8.7, Automatic Scheduling.
2 The following processes cannot be moved to the other tool
post:
D Drilling processes such as center drilling and tapping
D All Caxis/Yaxis machining processes
D Special processes such as single action, calling of
subprograms, auxiliary processes, and TRANS
processes
3 If a process of bar machining or pattern repeating is moved
to the other tool post, the contour of the process is
automatically adjusted to the coordinate system used for
the destination tool post.
If the contour data has been entered with automatic
calculation of intersections, the figure data entered for the
automatic calculation is all deleted and the end point data
of each figure is automatically entered instead.
Chamfering and rounding are replaced with a slanted line
and arc respectively.
Even if the moved process is returned to the original tool
post, the replaced figure data will not return to the original
data.

8.6.4

The contents of a machining program can be copied in units of processes.

Copying a Process

On the process editing screen, move the cursor to the process to be copied
and press the [COPY] soft key. The following operation guidance is
displayed.

SPECIFY DESTINATION SOFT KEY [EXEC]


CANCEL

EXEC

Move the cursor to the process to be followed by the copied process and
press the [COPY] soft key. The specified process is copied.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance shown
above, the copy operation is canceled and the system returns to the
original state.
NOTE
The initial setting process cannot be copied. An attempt to
copy it will be ignored.

109

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

8.6.5

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

The contents of a machining program can be deleted in units of processes.

Deleting a Process

EXEC REALLY?

On the process directory screen, move the cursor to the process to be


deleted and press the [DELETE] soft key. The following operation
guidance is displayed.

YES:[EXEC] NO:[CANCEL]
CANCEL

EXEC

If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance, the specified
process is deleted. If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed on the operation
guidance, the delete operation is canceled and the system returns to the
original state.
NOTE
The initial setting process cannot be deleted. An attempt to
delete it will be ignored.

8.6.6
Searching for a
Process (Editing)

On the process editing screen, the part of a machining program to be


displayed or edited can be specified.
Move the cursor to the process of which contents are to be displayed and
press the [EDIT] soft key. The data of the selected process is displayed.
Edit the contents in the same way as for usual editing of a machining
program.

110

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

8.7

In a machining program which has just been created in conversational


programming, a process contains both rough machining and finish
machining. When the machining program is executed, the processes are
executed in order in which they were entered.

AUTOMATIC
SCHEDULING

The automatic scheduling function divides each process of the machining


program into three groups: rough machining, finish machining, and
chamfering (chamfering is performed only in the Caxis machining). It
automatically arranges the processes so that all rough machining is
executed first and the finish machining is executed next.
WARNING
When a machining program is created by automatic
scheduling, make sure that the generated machining
sequence is correct.
If the machining sequence is incorrect, the tool may bump
against the workpiece, or the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

8.7.1
Operation of Automatic
Scheduling

When the automatic scheduling function is executed, the original


machining program is kept as it is and a new scheduled program is created.
On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, enter the number
of the machining program for which the automatic scheduling function
is executed. Alternatively, move the cursor to the program using a cursor
key. Then press the [SCHEDULING] soft key.
However, be sure to check that the memory protect switch on the machine
operators panel has been released.
The following operation guidance and soft keys are displayed.

PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)

SFTKY

=
FC25 BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202

CANCEL

EXEC

On the operation guidance, enter the number of the program to be created


by automatic scheduling using numeric keys and press the [EXEC] soft
key.
111

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

By performing the operation above, an automatically scheduled program


is created.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, the automatic scheduling is
canceled.
On the registeredprogram directory screen, the new machining program
created by automatic scheduling is indicated with an asterisk (*) on the
left of the program number, as shown below. With the asterisk, the
program can be distinguished from other programs.

Display
Example

Machining program 0025 has been arranged so that all rough machining
is executed first.

EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM *** PROGRAM LIST ***


(REST NO.OF PROGRAM 12 PCS.)
(REST NO.OF PROCES 128 PCS.)
PRG.NO
NAME
CYCLE TIME
CREATED
*0025
DEMONSTRATION
3M32S 1993/11/24 09:24
0194
PRG11
1M58S 1993/11/20 14:30
1212
NECKING
0M30S 1993/10/30 10:15

112

[CAP.:HEADL]

MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

8.7.2
Details of Automatic
Scheduling

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

In automatic scheduling, processes are divided and arranged so that all


rough machining is executed first.
(1) Dividing processes
Each of the processes of i to iv listed below contains rough machining and
finish machining. The process is divided into independent subprocesses
such as rough machining process, finish machining process and
chamfering process (chamfering is performed only in Caxis machining
process).
i.

Process including rough machining and finish machining: Bar


machining, pattern repeating, residual machining, end facing, and
trapezoidal grooving
ii. Process executed as rough machining: Ordinary grooving, slanted
grooving, center drilling, drilling, reaming, boring, tapping, single
action, measurement, and calling of subprograms
iii. Process executed as finish machining: Threading and necking
iv. Others: Caxis machining processes (including drilling, rough
machining, finish machining, and chamfering)
Yaxis machining processes (including drilling, rough
machining, and finish machining)
M process

Example

Bar machining

Entered process

Divided processes

Bar machining (rough and finish)

Bar machining (rough)

Contour (common)

Contour (rough)
Bar machining (finish)
Contour (finish)

NOTE
1 The program for which the automatic scheduling function is
not executed has a single contour (or figure) shared by the
rough machining, finish machining, and chamfering (in
Caxis machining).
If the common contour data (or figure data) is changed in
that program, the machining contours for rough machining,
finish machining, and chamfering (in Caxis machining) are
changed at the same time.
The program for which the automatic scheduling function
has been executed has a contour (or figure) for each
process. The contour can be changed in units of processes.
2 An end process is always placed at the end, even in a
program subject to automatic scheduling.

113

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

When automatic scheduling is executed, the processes are divided as


described above and automatically arranged in the following order.
Group of rough machining processes

Group of finish machining processes

Group of threading and Caxis machining processes


NOTE
3 If bit 0 (TRD) of parameter 9776 is set to 1, the group of
threading and Caxis machining processes is included in
the group of finish machining processes.

i.

Group of rough machining processes

Rough machining for bar machining, pattern repeating, residual


machining, and end facing processes

Ordinary grooving and slanted grooving processes

Rough machining for trapezoidal grooving

Turning and drilling processes such as center drilling, drilling, and


tapping

Single action and calling of subprograms

NOTE
4 Ordinary grooving and slanted grooving processes can be
included in the finish machining process group by specifying
finish machining as the execution cycle data displayed on
the detail data screen.

ii.

Group of finish machining processes

Finish machining for bar machining, pattern repeating, residual


machining, and end facing processes

Finish machining for trapezoidal grooving

Necking processes

iii. Group of threading and Caxis machining processes

iv.

Threading processes

Caxis drilling processes such as Caxis center drilling and Caxis


tapping

Caxis milling processes such as Caxis grooving, Caxis


notching, and Caxis cylindrical machining

M process
Auxiliary processes
The group to which the auxiliary processes belong depends on the
machine. Refer to the operators manual written by the machine tool
builder.
114

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

v.

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

TRANS processes
A TRANS process (available only with twopath lathes with the
Series 16/18TTA) divides the programs for tool posts 1 and 2.
In automatic scheduling, the TRANS process is set at the end of the
program of tool post 1 and at the beginning of the program of tool
post 2.

Example

Program in which the processes are arranged so


that all rough machining is executed first

Original program
Process 1

Process 1

End facing (rough/finish)

End facing (rough)

Process 2

Process 2

Bar machining (rough/finish)

Bar machining (rough)

Contour (common)

Contour (rough)

Process 3

Process 5

Threading

Ordinary grooving (rough)

Process 4

Process 6

Caxis notching
(rough/finish/chamfer)

Calling of subprograms
(rough)

Contour (common)

Process 1
End facing (finish)

Process 5
Ordinary grooving (rough)
Process 6

Process 2

Calling of subprograms
(rough)

Bar machining (finish)


Contour (finish)
Process 3
Threading
Process 4
Caxis notching (rough)
Bar machining (rough)
Process 4
Caxis notching (finish)
Contour (finish)
Process 4
Caxis notching (chamfer)
Contour (chamfer)

115

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

8.8

EXEC REALLY?

INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)

B62444E1/04

On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, enter the number


of the machining program to be deleted. Alternatively, move the cursor
to the program number. Then press the [DELETE] soft key. The message
for verifying the operation and the soft keys are displayed as shown below.

DELETING
MACHINING
PROGRAMS

PROGRAM NO.

OPERATION

YES:[EXEC]
=

1258

NO:[CANCEL]
SFTKY

FC25 BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202

CANCEL EXEC

If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed on the operation guidance, the specified
machining program is deleted.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, the delete operation is canceled and
the system returns to the original state.
NOTE
To delete all machining programs, enter 9999 as the
program number.

116

B62444E1/04

8.9
EDITING NC
PROGRAMS (CROSS
EDITING)

OPERATION

8. EDITING MACHINING PROGRAMS

By pressing [8] (EDIT NC PROGRAM) on the main menu screen, an NC


program can be edited without changing the conversational mode. This
type of editing is automatically performed in the background, eliminating
the need to change the mode to EDIT mode.
Example of operation
: Editing NC program O1001
(Main menu screen of the conversational function)
[8] (EDIT NC PROGRAM) : Displays the NC program background
editing screen.
[LIB]
: Displays the NC program directory
screen.
: Selects NC program O1001.
O1001 [O SERCH]
[PRGRM]
: Displays the above program on the
entire screen.
: Perform the necessary editing.
[OPRT]
: Displays the soft keys used for edit
operations.
[BGEND]
: Returns the display to the main menu
screen of the conversational function.
NOTE
1 Before this cross edit function can be used, bit 4 (CRS) of
parameter No. 9775 must be set to 1.
2 NC programs, selected on the NC side, cannot be edited in
the background.

117

9. OUTPUTTING MACHINING PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

OUTPUTTING MACHINING PROGRAMS

A conversational machining program can be output and saved in an


external memory unit via the reader/punch interface.
On the registered-program directory screen for editing, enter the number
of the machining program to be output. Alternatively, move the cursor
to the program number. Then press the [PUNCH] soft key. The soft keys
for verifying the operation are displayed as shown below.

PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)

<

1234

SFTKY

FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

HEAD-L
HEAD-L

ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505

HEAD-R
HEAD-R

ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202

CANCEL EXEC

If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed, the output of the specified program is
started.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, the output operation is canceled and
the system returns to the original state.
To output all machining programs, enter 9999 as the program number.
If the output equipment is the FANUC Cassette, a new file is created
immediately after the registered file.
When the output of the machining program starts, the OUTPUT
message blinks at the bottom of the screen. It continues to flash until the
operation ends.
NOTE
Only the machining program created with the
conversational programming function described in this
manual can be output by performing the operation
described above.
The machining program created on the NC program screen
cannot be output by the operation described above. For the
output of the program, refer to the operators manual of the
NC machine.

118

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

10

10. READING MACHINING PROGRAMS

READING MACHINING PROGRAMS

The machining program output by the operation described in Chapter 9


can be read by the NC machine via the reader/punch interface.
Before starting reading, be sure to release the memory protect switch on
the machine operators panel.
On the registeredprogram directory screen for editing, press the [READ]
soft key. The message for entering a file number and the soft keys for
verifying the operation are displayed as shown below.

PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)

<

SFTKY

=
FC25
BAR
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202

CANCEL EXEC

Using numeric keys, enter the number of the file containing the machining
program to be read and press the [EXEC] soft key. Reading of the
machining program is started.
If the input equipment is the FANUC PPR, only press the [EXEC] soft
key. The file number need not be entered.
If the [CANCEL] soft key is pressed, reading is canceled and the system
returns to the original state.
When reading of the machining program is started, the INPUT message
blinks at the bottom of the screen. It continues to flash until the operation
ends.
NOTE
Only the machining program created with the
conversational programming function described in this
manual can be read by performing the operation described
above.
The machining program created on the NC program screen
cannot be read by the operation described above. For
reading of the program, refer to the operators manual of the
NC machine.

119

11. CONVERTING MACHINING


PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

11

CONVERTING MACHINING PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS

A machining program created by conversational programming can be


executed. The program can also be converted into an NC program and the
NC program can be executed and changed.
The converted NC program can be stored in the NC tape memory area or
output to the external memory unit via the reader/punch interface.
NOTE
When a twopath lathe is used, the program cannot be
output via the reader/punch interface.

This function is available as an option.


NOTE
While the program is being converted as described above,
no other operation such as background editing, manual
movement, or data setting with MDI can be performed.

WARNING
Conversion of a machining program to an NC program may
cause data such as a work shift amount, tool tip radius/wear
compensation value, virtual tool tip direction, tool exchange
position (second reference position data), chuck barrier data
(second storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock barrier
data (only when the relevant option is available) to be changed
according to the machining program subjected to conversion.
It is impossible to run another machining program after
conversion.
If you try to run another program (conversational machining
program or a machining program in the form of NC statements)
under this condition, the tool may bump against the workpiece
and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or
machine, and even injuries.

120

11. CONVERTING MACHINING


PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

11.1
CONVERTING A
MACHINING
PROGRAM TO AN NC
PROGRAM
11.1.1

On the main menu, press the [5] and [CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM]


soft keys. The registeredprogram directory screen for conversion to NC
program is displayed.

Registeredprogram
Directory Screen for
Conversion to NC
Program

CONVERT TO NC PROGRAM
PRG.NO.
0025
0194
1212

*** PROGRAM MEMU ***

NAME
CYCLE TIME
DEMONSTRATION 3M32S
PRG11
1M58S
NECKING
0M30S

PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)

[CAP.: HEADL]

CREATED
1993/11/24 09:24
1993/11/20 14:30
1993/10/30 10:15

MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23

SFTKY

=
FC25
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

BAR
END
END

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505

END
END

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202

< NCMEM

PREEX

PLOT

GUIDE

NOTE
If a onepath lathe with the Series 16TB is used, the
[NCPCH] soft key is displayed to the right of the [NCMEM]
soft key.

121

11. CONVERTING MACHINING


PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS

11.1.2

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

When converting a machining program to an NC program, select the


MEM mode.

Converting a
Machining Program to
an NC Program

On the registeredprogram directory screen, enter the number of the


machining program to be converted to an NC program using numeric
keys. Alternatively, move the cursor to the program number. Then press
the [NCMEM] or [NCPCH] soft key.
(1) [NCMEM]: Stores the converted program in the NC tape memory
area. Before pressing this key, memory protection must be released.
(2) [NCPCH]: Outputs the converted program to an external memory
unit via the reader/punch interface. The soft key is valid only when
a onepath lathe with the Series 16/18TA is used.
After the operation described above, the message for entering the number
of the converted program and the soft keys for verifying the operation are
displayed as shown below.

NEW PROGRAM NO.


INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)

1234

FC25
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

SFTKY

BAR
END
END

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH T0505
FIN
T0505

END
END

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH T0202
FIN
T0202

< CANCEL EXEC

Enter the number of the converted program with numeric keys and press
the [EXEC] soft key. The following animated simulation is displayed on
the screen.
If the [EXEC] soft key is pressed on the simulation screen, conversion to
the NC program is started and the simulation is executed.
During the conversion to the NC program, the EDITING message
blinks at the bottom right of the screen. The message disappears when the
operation ends.
During the conversion, avoid changing the screen to another screen or
performing other operation.

122

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

11. CONVERTING MACHINING


PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS

NOTE
1 During conversion to the NC program, the drawing speed on
the simulation screen is lower than usual. An arc may be
displayed as a polygon.
2 If the leftmost [<] soft key (super return) is pressed when the
conversion to the NC program terminates, the system
returns to the registeredprogram directory screen for
conversion to NC program.
3 The simulation is executed for the converted NC program in
the same way as described above. The data of the material
figure and tool figure is output in the NC command block of
G10 at the beginning of the program. The command for
changing the tool is also output.

The output of the NC command block can be suppressed by setting


parameters. The optional block skip (/) can be output at the beginning of
the block.
For details, see Section 12.2, Executing Machining Programs.

11.1.3
Entering Setting Data
Before Execution

To enter setting data before execution such as a chuck barrier, press the
[PREEX] soft key.
On the setting screen before execution, enter necessary data following the
description of the setting screen before execution in Chapter 12,
Executing Machining Programs. Then press the [SET] soft key. The
selected machining program is displayed in the conversational format.
NOTE
1 If the chuck barrier is not specified on the setting screen
before execution, the chuck barrier command is not output
in the NC program.
2 If the same program number as that of the NC program
specified during program conversion is already registered
in the NC program memory area, P/S alarm 73 occurs
irrespective of the parameter setting. In this case, change
the program number. Alternatively, delete the registered
program having the same program number. Then restart
the program conversion.

123

11. CONVERTING MACHINING


PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS

11.2
ALARMS DURING
CONVERSION OF
THE MACHINING
PROGRAM INTO THE
NC PROGRAM

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

While the machining program is being converted into the NC program,


the machining program is running for machining operation or check
drawing. A P/S alarm may occur because of the contents of the machining
program or the operation to start the machining program.
For the P/S alarms, see Appendix V. which describes the alarms that may
occur when the machining program is running. Then correct the
machining program.
If the P/S alarm occurs during the conversion, the converted part of the
machining program has already been stored in the tape memory area. To
restart the conversion of the machining program, correct the erroneous
part, delete the converted part, and perform conversion from the
beginning.
The following alarms may occur while the machining program is being
converted.
Alarm No.
070

Description
Cause

Insufficient tape memory area

Action

Take the following action depending on the condition:


(1)If another NC program is already registered and
the remaining memory is insufficient for the program being currently converted,
Save the registered NC program in the external
memory unit via the reader/punch interface, delete
the program, and resume conversion.
(2)If the entire reserved area is insufficient for the program being currently converted,
Output the converted program to the external
memory unit via the reader/punch interface as described in Section 11.3.
To execute the converted NC program, perform
DNC execution via the reader/punch interface.
The NC program area can be increased by setting
parameters. However, this causes the conversational program area to be reduced and the all data
items to be cleared temporarily. This method must
not be used in usual operation.

072

073

Cause

The number of registered programs exceeded 63 or


125 (optional setting).

Action

Save some of the registered NC programs in the external memory unit via the reader/punch interface,
delete the programs, and resume conversion from the
beginning.
Alternatively, output the converted program to the external memory unit via the reader/punch interface as
described in Section 11.3.

Cause

An attempt was made to specify the same program


number as that of a registered program.

Action

Delete the registered NC program having the same


number and resume conversion from the beginning.
Alternatively, change the number of the machining
program specified in the conversion procedure and
resume conversion from the beginning.

124

B62444E1/04

11.3
SETTING THE
READER/PUNCH
INTERFACE

OPERATION

11. CONVERTING MACHINING


PROGRAMS INTO NC PROGRAMS

Before the machining program converted into the NC program is output


to an external memory unit via the reader/punch interface, the following
must be set in the same way as for outputting of an ordinary program.
(1) Selecting the input/output equipment
Select the channel to which the converted machining program is
output in the item setting No. 0020:I/O CHANNEL.
(2) Setting the baud rate of the selected channel and other data items
D Channel 1: Setting Nos. 0101, 0102, and 0103, or setting Nos. 0111,
0112, and 0113
D Channel 2: Setting Nos. 0121, 0122, and 0123
For details of the data items to be set and the operation, refer to the
description of specification of the setting data items in the operators
manual of the NC machine.

125

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

12

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

DIRECT OPERATION FOR MACHINING PROGRAMS


CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

WARNING
Direct operation of a machining program created using a
conversational function may cause data such as a work shift
amount, tool tip radius/wear compensation value, virtual tool
tip direction, tool exchange position (second reference
position data), chuck barrier data (second storedstroke limit
data), and chuck/tailstock barrier data (only when the relevant
option is available) to be changed according to that machining
program. It is impossible to run a machining program in the
form of NC statements after conversion.
If you try to run a machining program in the form of NC
statements under this condition, the tool may bump against the
workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

126

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

12.1
OPERATION BEFORE
EXECUTION (SUCH
AS SELECTING A
PROGRAM,
MOUNTING A TOOL,
ETC.)
12.1.1
Displaying the
Registeredprogram
Directory Screen for
Direct Operation

Select the MEM mode on the main menu. Then, press the [4] soft key
(DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PROGRAM) to display the
registeredprogram directory screen for direct operation.

DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG


PRG.NO. NAME
0025 DEMONSTRATION
0194 PRG11
1212 NECKING

PROGRAM NO.
INITAL SET
PROC (01)
PROC (02)
PROC (03)
PROC (04)
PROC (05)

*** PROGRAM MENU ***

CYCLE TIME
3M32S
1M58S
0M30S

=
FC25
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER
TRANS.
BAR
OUTER
BAR
OUTER

CREATED
1993/11/24 09:24
1993/11/20 14:30
1993/10/30 10:15

[CAP.: HEADL]
MODIFIED
1993/11/25 10:32
1993/11/24 08:32
1993/11/01 11:23

SFTKY
BAR
END
END

HEADL
HEADL

ROUGH
FIN

T0505
T0505

END
END

HEADR
HEADR

ROUGH
FIN

T0202
T0202

< TOOLING

EXEC

127

PREEX PROCES PLOT


LIST

GUIDE

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

12.1.2
Specifying a Machining
Program

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

On the registeredprogram directory screen for direct operation, position


the cursor at the machining program to be executed. Alternatively, enter
the number of the program to be executed with the numeric keys, then
press the [EXEC], [PREEX], or [PROCES LIST] soft key.
(1) [EXEC]:Specifies the machining program to be executed.
(2) [PROCES LIST]:Displays the process directory screen. Move the
cursor to the process to be executed and press the [EXEC] soft key.
The program can be started in the middle.
(3) [PREEX]:Displays the setting screen before execution. On this
screen, use this key to specify the chuck barrier and workpiece shift
or to enter the numbers of a chuck and tail stock.
When a new machining program is executed using these functions
for the first time, call the setting screen and enter data items as
required before execution.
Pressing the [EXEC] soft key displays the program execution screen.
Pressing the [PREEX] soft key displays the setting screen before
execution.

128

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

12.1.3
Setting Data on the
Setting Screen Before
Execution

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

Example of a setting screen before execution in the Series 16TB for a


twopath lathe
WARNING
If data such as a work shift amount, turret rotation position
(second reference position data), chuck barrier data (second
storedstroke limit data), and chuck/tailstock barrier data (only
when the relevant option is available) is changed on the
preexecution setting screen, it is always rewritten. It is
impossible to run another machining program after
conversion.
If you try to run another machining program (such as a
conversational machining program or a machining program in
the form of NC statements) under this condition, the tool may
bump against the workpiece and/or machine, possibly causing
damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG

*** PREMACHINING ***

HEADL
BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS

T=
SZ=
CZ=
C=
X=
Z=
T=
X=
Z=

[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR

BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)

T=
SZ=

TOOLCHG POS

X=
Z=

2.000

<

RETURN HEADR

129

TOOL
NG

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

BASIS T

T : T code of a tool for which a chuck barrier is


specified
WSHIFT(INC)
SZ : Increment or decrement of the workpiece
shift along the Z axis.
The current workpiece shift is displayed at
the bottom of the screen. When the end face
of a workpiece needs to be shifted, enter the
required value.
When parameter PREDSP (bit 1 of
parameter 9775) is 0, enter a value in the
incremental mode, then press the [SET] soft
key.
When parameter PREDSP (bit 1 of
parameter 9775) is 1, bring the tool
specified by the T code into contact with the
end face of a workpiece, then press the
[SET] soft key.
END REMOVAL
CZ : Cut amount in end facing (set automatically)
CHUCK ID NO.
C : The number of the chuck to be used, which
is displayed on the chuck figure data screen
CHUCK BARRIER X, Z : The machine coordinates of the chuck
reference position
The machine coordinates are read by
pressing the [SET] soft key. See 12.1.6
for details of the chuck barrier.
TAILSTOCK NO.
T : The number of the tail stock to be used,
which is displayed on the tail stock figure
data screen
TOOLCHG POS
X, Z : The machine coordinates of the tool
change position
Move the turret to the tool change
position, then press the [SET] soft key.
The machine coordinates of the position
are written into parameter 1241 (second
reference position).
NOTE
For tool post 2, END REMOVAL, CHUCK ID NO., CHUCK
BARRIER, and tail stock data, cannot be specified.

When all necessary data items have been input, press the [RETURN] soft
key to return to the registeredprogram directory screen for direct
operation.

130

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(1) Setting screen prior to execution when bit 1 (PRD) of parameter No.
9775 is set to 1
DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG

*** PREMACHINING ***

HEADL
BASIS TCODE
FACE POSITION
WSHIFT
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS

[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR

T=
CZ=
SZ=
C=
X=
Z=
T=
X=
Z=

FACE POSITION

WSHIFT

OUTPUT T
WSHIFT (INC)

T=
SZ=

TOOLCHG POS

X=
Z=

CZ :

Zaxis coordinate of a workpiece end face


when the workpiece shift amount is
measured by butting a tool against the end
face
SZ : A workpiece shift amount difference can be
automatically entered by butting the tool
specified by a T code against a workpiece
end face and pressing [SET].

NOTE
1 Press [HEADR] to set the data for tool post 2.
2 End removal, chuck number, chuck barrier, and tailstock
data for tool post 2 cannot be set.
(2) Chuck barrier data when the optional chuck/tailstock barrier
function is selected
When the cursor is positioned to CHUCK ID NO. or CHUCK
BARRIER on the setting screen, before execution, the following
soft keys are displayed:

<

RETURN HEADR BARRI TOOLCHUCK


ING

By pressing [BARRI CHUCK], chuck barrier data is displayed in the


window. This chuck barrier data is identical to that for the same option
on the NC side.
By entering a chuck number on the setting screen before execution, chuck
barrier data is automatically determined and displayed in the window.

131

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

NOTE
1 For details of the chuck/tailstock barrier function, see the
relevant operators manual for the NC.
2 When the optional chuck/tailstock barrier function,
supported by the NC side, is selected, the chuck barrier
function based on the conventional conversational function
cannot be used.

WARNING
Before using a chuck/tailstock barrier supported by the
conversational function, make sure that the barrier area data
is set correctly, that the barrier function works at the correct
position, and that the tool will not bump against the chuck or
tailstock, using a manual operation (such as jog feed or
manual pulse generator feed).
If the tool bumps against the chuck and/or tailstock, the tool
and/or machine may be damaged, and even injuries may
occur.

Example of chuck barrier data window for a onepath lathe:


DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG *** PREMACHINING ***
BASIS TCODE
T=
WSHIFT (INC) SZ=
END REMOVAL
CZ=
CHUCK ID NO.
C=
CHUCK BARRIER X=
Z=1
TAILSTOCK NO. T=
TAILSTOCK BAR Z=
TOLLCHG POS
X=2
Z=2

BARRIER
L

[CAP.]

(CHUCK)
*

L1
CX

TY
L
W
L1
W1

=
=
=
=
=

OUT
30.000
40.000
20.000
20.000

W1
CX =
CZ =

140.000
129.000

CZ
PRES.POS (ABSOLUTE)
X 80.000

<

Z 120.000

RETURN

132

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(3) Tailstock barrier data when the optional chuck/tailstock barrier


function is selected
In the same way as for chuck barrier data, the following soft keys are
displayed when the cursor is positioned to TAILSTOCK NO. or
TAILSTOCK BAR on the setting screen, before execution:

<

RETURN

BARRI. TOOL(TAIL ING


S)

By pressing [BARRI. TAILSTOCK], tailstock barrier data is displayed


in the window.
The tailstock barrier data is identical to that for the same option on the NC
side.
Example of tailstock barrier data window for a onepath lathe:
DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG *** PREMACHINING ***

BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO.
TAILSTOCK BAR
TOOLCHG POS

T=
SZ=
CZ=
C=
X=
Z=1
T=
Z=
X=2
Z=2

BARRIER

(TAILSTOCK)
L
L1

L2
TZ
*

[CAP.]

D2 D1

L
D
L1
D1
L2
D2
D3

=
=
=
=
=
=
=

30.000
60.000
20.000
40.000
0.000
20.000
16.000

TZ =

0.500

D3
Z
PRES.POS (ABSOLUTE)
X 80.000

<

Z 120.000

RETURN

By entering a tailstock number on the setting screen before execution,


tailstock barrier data is automatically determined and displayed in the
window.

133

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(4) Notes on the setting screen, displayed before execution


For each conversational machining program, the data items listed
below are memorized.
(a) Workpiece shift amount (SZ)
(b) Chuck barrier data (X/Z)
(c) Chuck number, chuck barrie reference point (CX/CZ)
(d) Tailstock number, tailstock reference point (TZ)
(e) Turret turning position (X/Z)
When a machining program is converted to an NC program, NC
commands are output at the beginning of the program, created by the
conversion, to rewrite the data items below.
(a) Workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis
(b) Chuck barrier data (parameter Nos. 1322 and 1323: Second stored
stroke limit coordinates)
(c) Chuck barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(d) Tailstock barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(e) Turret turning position (parameter No. 1241: Second reference
position coordinates)
When a program is selected on a registeredprogram directory screen by
pressing [EXEC], [PREEX], [TOOLING], [ANIMA], [ANIMA. +
RT.CH], [NCMEM], or [NCPCH], to perform operations such as
conversational machining program simulation, direct run, and conversion
to an NC program, the following data items, memorized for each program,
are written to the NC.
This means that NC data is rewritten even if actual machining is not
performed. So, be careful when operating an NC program after
performing these operations.
(a) Workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis
(b) Chuck barrier data (parameter Nos. 1322 and 1323: Second stored
stroke limit coordinates)
(c) Chuck barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(d) Tailstock barrier data for the chuck/tailstock barrier option
(e) Turret turning position (parameter No. 1241: Second reference
position coordinates)
(f) Tooltip radius compensation values (geometry/wear) and virtual
tool) tip positions for the tools being used
NOTE
Item (b) above is applicable only when the chuck/tailstock
barrier option is not selected. On the other hand, items (c)
and (d) are applicable only when the chuck/tailstock barrier
option is selected.

134

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

12.1.4

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

By pressing [TOOLING] on the registeredprogram directory screen,


setting screen before execution, or process directory screen, the tooling
data screen is displayed.

Mounting Tools

Processes and data for the tools being used are displayed in the order in
which they were registered in the machining program. With [HEADL]
or [HEADR], a tool post can be selected for display.
Example of tooling data screen: For a twopath lathe
*** HEADL TOOLING DATA ***
PROC

PROC NAME

USING TOOL

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

END FACNG (R)


BAR
(R)
BAR
(F)
GROOVING
CGROOVE (R)
CGROOVE (C)
CENTERDRL
DRILLING
BORE
THREADING
CNOTCHING(R)
CNOTCHING(F)

GEOMETRY
OFS X
200.000
300.000
0.000
0.000
ENDMILL
0.000
CHAMFER
0.000
CENTER
0.000
DRILL
0.000
BORE
0.000
OUTR TH
0.000
END MILL
0.000
END MILL
0.000

[CAP : HEAD L]
01/01
GEOMETRY RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
OFS Z
10.000 RN
0.400
0202
20.000 RN
0.600
0303
0.000 RN
0.600
0404
0.000 WN
2.000
0505
0.000 TR
5.000
0606
0.000 TR
10.000
0707
0.000 DD
2.000
0808
0.000 DD
5.000
0909
0.000 TW
10.000
1010
0.000 RN
0.000
1111
0.000 TR
5.000
1212
0.000 TR
5.000
1313

GEOMETRY OFS X
< HEAD
L

HEAD
R

YAXIS WEAR
OFFSET OFFSET

PREPARE

TOOL TOOL RETURN


LIFE DISPLY

PROC
: Process number
PROC NAME
: Name of each process
USING TOOL
: Symbol or name of a tool used for each process
GEOMETRU OFS X,Z :
Tool geometry compensation values (same as
compensation values for the NC side)
This data item can be entered directly by using the
numeric keys, or can be entered by using the setup
guidance screen for compensation value
measurement, displayed by pressing [PREPARE].
RN/WN/DD/TR/TW: Data specific to each tool
RN= Tool tip radius (same as the compensation
value for the NC)
WN= Width of a grooving tool
DD= Nominal diameter of a drilling tool
TR= Radius of a milling cutter (same as the
compensation value for the NC)
TW= Width of a boring tool
135

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

When any of the above data items is rewritten, the


same data, held in the tool file, is modified at the
same time.
TCODE:
T code for cach tool
When the T code value of a tool is rewritten, the T
code value of the same tool in the current
machining
program
is
also
modified
automatically. Furthermore, the T code in the tool
file is also modified at the same time.
When [YAXIS OFFSET] is pressed, Yaxis
geometry/wear compensation values are
displayed. These values are the same as for the
NC. When the Yaxis conversational function is
not supported, this soft key is not displayed.
When [WEAR OFFSET] is pressed, Xaxis/Zaxis wear compensation
values are displayed. These values are the same as for the NC. Enter these
values manually in the same way as for the tool offset screen.
Before attempting to execute a machining program, attach the tools to be
used to the turret of the machine by checking the tooling data screen.
Usually, attach the tools according to the displayed Tcode tool numbers.
Even if a tool is attached to a different turret, the corresponding T code
in the program can be automatically rewritten simply by rewriting the
specified T code on the tooling data screen.
By pressing [RETURN], the user can display the original screen.
When [TOOL DISPLAY] is pressed, a tool data screen like that shown
below appears in the window. At the same time, the tool figure is also
drawn in the same window.
*** HEAD L

TOOLING DATA ***

PROC

PROC NAME

USING TOOL

01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12

END FACNG (R)


BAR
(R)
BAR
(F)
GROOVING
CGROOVE (R)
CGROOVE (C)
CENTERDRL
DRILLING
BORE
THREADING
CNOTCHING(R)
CNOTCHING(F)

GEOMETRY
OFS X
200.000
300.000
0.000
0.000
ENDMILL
0.000
CHAMFER
0.000
CENTER
0.000
DRILL
0.000
BORE
0.000
OUTR TH
0.000
END MILL
0.000
END MILL
0.000

[CAP : HEAD L]
1/1
GEOMETRY RN/WN/DD/TR/TW TCODE
OFS Z
10.000 RN
0.400
0202
20.000 RN
0.600
0303
0.000 RN
0.600
0404
TOOL DATA
0.000 WN
2.000
0505
0.000 TR
TOOLID5.000
NO No.0606
101
0.000 TR
10.000 OUTER(HEADL)
0707
TOOLTYPE
0.000 DD
2.000
0808
TOOLDIREC
0.000 DD
5.000 COMMON
0909
ROUGH/FIN
0.000 TW
1010
OUTPUT10.000
T
0202
0.000 RN
0.000 NOMAL
1111
REVOLUTD
0.000 TR
5.000 RN=1212
NOSERADIUS
0.400
0.000 TR
CUTTING5.000
EDG AC=1313 90
NOSE ANGEL AN=
60
NOSE WIDTH TW= 20.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
TL MATRIAL TM= CARBID

GEOMETRY OFS X
RETURN

<

136

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

NOTE
1 The window displays the tool data for the tool to which the
cursor is positioned. The displayed data cannot, however,
be modified.
2 When [PREPARE] is pressed, the tool offset measurement
guidance screen appears. The information displayed on
the screen may vary, depending on the machine. For
details, refer to the manual supplied by the machine tool
builder.
3 When [TOOL LIFE] is pressed, the screen may display no
information, depending on the specifications of the
machine. Information, if displayed, may vary from one
machine to another. For details, refer to the manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.

12.1.5
Measuring Tool
Geometry
Compensation when
no Tool Setter is Used

On the tooling data screen, move the cursor to the geometry compensation
field and press the [PREPAR] soft key. The setup guidance screen for
measuring compensation values appears.
WARNING
When measuring tool geometry compensation on the
X/Zaxis using this method, keep the spindle rotating, and
push the tool against the end surface or periphery of the
workpiece and cut it with a feedrate as low as possible, using
manual pulse generator feed. Also, be sure to keep the safety
door of the machining station closed.
Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the respective
machine tool builders for detailed operations. If you do not
know how to use this measurement function, do not use it.
Use of this measurement method without a working
knowledge of the operating procedure may bring about the
death of, or a serious injury to, the user.

137

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(1) Manual reference position return operation


First, manually return to the reference position. When reference
position return has been performed previously, this screen is not
displayed.
Operation)
After manually returning to the reference position along the X and Z axes,
press the [NXTPG] soft key.
[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

*** TOOL PREPARATION ***

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
120

AN
AN
AN

60
60
30

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

NO. 101

1. RETURN X, Z AXIS TO REFERENCE POINT

<

NXTPG

RETURN

To return to the tooling data screen, press the [RETURN] soft key.
NOTE
On the setup screen, data of the tool for which the geometry
compensation is measured is displayed at the top of the
screen with the data of tools registered before and after the
tool.

138

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(2) Tool indexing


The tool index request screen appears after the reference position
return request screen described in the previous section. The tool to
be measured is indexed from the machine operators panel.
Operation)
After indexing a tool from the machine operators panel, press the [END]
soft key.

[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

*** TOOL PREPARATION ***


2.

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
120

AN
AN
AN

60
60
30

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

NO. 101

CHANGE TO ACTUAL TOOL


AFTER CHANGING TO ACTUAL TOOL,
PUSH SOFTKEY [END]

<

PREPG NXTPG END

RETURN

The [PREPG] soft key displays the previous page, the [NXTPG] soft
key displays the next page, and the [RETURN] soft key displays the
previous screen.

139

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(3) Measuring compensation along the Zaxis


The screen for measuring compensation along the Zaxis appears
after the tool index request screen described in the previous section.
The compensation is measured by manually bringing the tool into
contact with the end face of the workpiece.
Operation)
After manually moving the tool so that it touches the end face of the
workpiece, press the [END] soft key.

[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

*** TOOL PREPARATION ***

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
120

AN
AN
AN

60
60
30

PREPG NXTPG

END

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

NO. 101

3. CUT A WORK AT END SURFACE AND BRING


THE TOOL EDGE THERE IN MANUAL MODE
(BUT CUTTING IS AT ONLY FIRST TIME)
AFTER THIS OPERATION,
PUSH SOFTKEY [END]

<

RETURN

As displayed on the above screen, the end face of the workpiece is cut off
only when the compensation is measured for the first time.

140

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(4) Measuring the compensation along the Xaxis


The screen for measuring the compensation along the Xaxis
appears after the screen for measuring compensation along the
Zaxis described in the previous section. The compensation value
is measured by manually bringing the tool into contact with the outer
surface of the workpiece.
Operation)
After manually moving the tool to touch the outer surface of the
workpiece, press the [END] soft key.

[CAP.; HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

*** TOOL PREPARATION ***

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
120

AN
AN
AN

60
60
30

PREPG NXTPG

END

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

NO. 101

4. CUT A WORK AT OUTSURFACE AND BRING


THE TOOL EDGE THERE IN MANUAL MODE
(BUT CUTTING IS AT ONLY FIRST TIME)
AFTER THIS OPERATION,
PUSH SOFTKEY [END]

<

RETURN

As displayed on the above screen, the end face of the workpiece is cut off
only when the compensation value is measured for the first time.

141

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(5) Measuring the outside diameter of a workpiece


The screen for measuring the diameter of a workpiece appears after
the screen for measuring the compensation along the Xaxis.
Measure the diameter of the workpiece using a tool such as vernier
calipers, then enter the reading into the MX field (workpiece
diameter) on the screen.
Operation)
When the diameter of a workpiece is 100 mm
100 INPUT
[END]

[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

*** TOOL PREPARATION ***

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
120

AN
AN
AN

60
60
30

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

MX=
MZ=

100.000
0.000

NO. 101

5. FING OF SHIFT (MZ) OF WORK PATH (MX)


AND DIRECTLY INPUT THE FIGURE
THEN, PUSH SOFTKEY [END]

MX
MZ

<

PREPG

END

RETURN

If necessary, enter the following data in the MZ field (shift along the
Zaxis) before pressing the [END] soft key.
D When the program reference position is on the end face of a workpiece
To shift the end face of the workpiece, enter the desired shift.
D When the program reference position is on the end face of a chuck
Enter the length of the workpiece.
When [END] is pressed, a tool geometry compensation value calculation
is performed, the result of the calculation being written into the tool
geometry compensation field. This tool geometry compensation value is
the same as that for the NC.
At the same time, 0 is written into the wear compensation field for the
compensation number.
The original tooling data screen is redisplayed.
142

B62444E1/04

12.1.6
Measuring Tool
Geometry
Compensation when a
Tool Setter is Used

OPERATION

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

When a tool setter is provided, tool geometry compensation is measured


in the same manner as for when no tool setter is used. The compensation
is measured by calling the setup guidance screen on the tooling data
directory screen.
WARNING
When measuring tool geometry compensation on the
X/Zaxis using this method, keep the spindle at a stop, and
push the tool against the sensor with a feedrate as low as
possible, using manual pulse generator feed. Also, be sure to
keep the safety door of the machining station closed.
Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the respective
machine tool builders for detailed operations. If you do not
know how to use this measurement function, do not use it.
Use of this measurement method without a working
knowledge of the operating procedure may cause the tool to
bump against the workpiece, machine, and/or sensor, possibly
resulting in damage to the tool, machine, and/or sensor, and
even injuries.
(1) Manual reference position return operation and tool indexing
The screen for requesting the manual reference position return and
the screen for requesting tool index are displayed in the same way
as for when no tool setter is used.

143

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(2) Measurement using a sensor


The above operations display the screen for measuring
compensation using a sensor. Measure the compensation by
manually bringing the tool into contact with the sensor.
In this case, the sensor to which the tool is brought into contact with
is displayed on the screen using the icon. Bring the tool into contact
with that sensor.
Operation)
Manually bring the tool into contact with the specified senor.
The number is displayed in reverse video.

[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

*** TOOL PREPARATION ***

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
120

AN
AN
AN

60
60
30

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

MX=
MZ=

120.000
20.000

NO. 101

3. BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN


CONTACT WITH THE SENSOR
FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION
1

4
2
3

<

PREPG

144

END

RETURN

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

When the tool touches the sensor, the sensor to be touched next is
automatically displayed.
Operation)
Manually bring the tool into contact with the specified sensor.

[CAP.: HEADL]
101#01
103#02
104#01

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T1111 RN
T0909 RN

*** TOOL PREPARATION ***

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
120

AN
AN
AN

60
60
30

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

MX=
MZ=

120.000
20.000

NO. 101

3. BRING THE TOOL EDGE IN


CONTACT WITH THE SENSOR
FROM ZAXIS DIRECTION
1

4
2
3

<

PREPG

RETURN

Once an Xaxis measurement has been completed, a tool geometry


compensation value calculation is performed, the result of the calculation
being written into the tool geometry compensation field. This tool
geometry compensation value is the same as that for the NC.
At the same time, 0 is written into the wear compensation field for the
compensation number.
The original tooling data screen is redisplayed, and the result of the
measurement is displayed in the tool geometry compensation field.

145

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

12.1.7
Chuck Barrier
WARNING
Before using a chuck barrier supported by the conversational
function, make sure that the barrier area data is set correctly,
that the barrier function works at the correct position, and that
the tool will not bump against the chuck or tailstock, using a
manual operation (such as jog feed or manual pulse generator
feed).
If the tool bumps against the chuck or tailstock, the tool and/or
machine may be damaged, and even injuries may occur.

(1) Specifying a chuck barrier


On the setting screen before execution
0101 INPUT (Tcode of the tool currently indexed)
Position the cursor at the chuck number field (C=).
1 INPUT (Chuck No.)
Position the cursor at the chuck barrier field, and manually move the tool
to the upper right corner of the chuck.
[SET] (Chuck barrier specification)

DIRECT OPERATION OF CAP PRG *** SETTING OF PREMACHINING ***

HEADL
BASIS TCODE
WSHIFT (INC)
END REMOVAL
CHUCK ID NO.
CHUCK BARRIER
TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS

T=
SZ=
CZ=
C=
X=
Z=
X=
Z=

[CAP.: HEADL]

HEADR
0101

OUTPUT T
WSHIFT (INC)

T=
SZ=

TAILSTOCK NO
TOOLCHG POS

X=
Z=

2.000
1

0.000
0.000

146

0.000
0.000

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

(a) For external claw chucks

Tool

Chuck

Move the tool to the upper right corner of the chuck with a
clearance of about 2 mm along the X and Zaxes.

Workpiece

(b) For internal claw chuck

Tool

Chuck

Move the tool to the upper right corner of the chuck with a
clearance of about 2 mm along the X and Zaxes.

Workpiece

NOTE
A tool needs a distance of 2 mm from the tip of the tool to
the end of the chuck when the tool stops after hitting the
stroke limit while it moves in rapid traverse. For safety,
however, a larger distance may be required.

147

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(2) Details of the chuck barrier


The Chuck barrier uses the second limit of the extended stored stroke
check function. When this function is used for other purposes, the
chuck barrier is not available.
The chuck barrier checks only the tip of a tool (or the center of a
rotating tool). It does check the entire tool.
When the second limit is used, set bit 0 (INOUT) of parameter No.
1300 to 0 to suppress machining in the area inside the second limit.
The chuck barrier function uses a program command (G22 X _Z _I
_K _) for the second limit to move an inhibited area by the distance
equalivalent to the difference between the offset of the reference tool
and that of each tool.
This function also modifies the figure of an inhibited area according
to the figure of the chuck used and the area to be machined in each
process.
(a) For external claw chucks (turning tool)
f

L
L1

g
W

c
W1

b
L

(1)

Calculation for each point

: Chuck reference position specified on the


setting screen before execution
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1
Z = Z coordinate of point a
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: X = X coordinate of point a
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: Tool geometry compensation (X)

b
c
d
e

GOX
148

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

WOX
WSX

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

: Tool wear compensation (X)


: Shift of the X coordinate in the workpiece
coordinate system (X)
: Outside diameter of the workpiece
: Workpiece length
: Tool geometry compensation (Z)
: Tool wear compensation (Z)
: Shift of the Z coordinate in the workpiece
coordinate system (Z)
: Amount of clearance (100 mm or 10 inches)
: Dimensions of the chuck

D
L
GOZ
WOZ
WSZ
CL
L, W, L1, W1

(2) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b, e,


and f
Bar machining
: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface
away from the edges, end faces near the
edges, end faces away from the edges
Pattern repetition
: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface
away from the edges, end faces near the
edges, end faces away from the edges
Residual machining
: Outer surface and end faces
Threading
: Outer surface
Grooving
: Outer surface and end faces
Necking
: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface
away from the edges, end faces near the
edges, end faces away from the edges
End facing, independent operation, and subprogram calling
(3) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points c, d, e,
and g
Bar machining

: Inner surface near the edges, inner surface away


from the edges

Pattern repetition

: Inner surface near the edges, inner surface


away from the edges
Residual machining
: Inner surface and inner bottom surface
Threading
: Inner surface
Grooving
: Inner surface
Necking
: Inner surface near the edges, inner surface
away from the edges
Center drilling, drilling, and tapping
NOTE
When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is on
the end face of the chuck, the length of the workpiece (L)
is ignored. The machining allowance for the end face is not
included in workpiece length L.
When a blank plate is machined, point X1 on the outer
surface of a workpiece is used.

149

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(b) For internal claw chucks (turning tool)

W1
b

c
L1

L
e

(1) Calculation of each point


a

: Chuck reference position specified on the


setting screen before execution

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)


Z = Zcoordinate of point a

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H


Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L + L1

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)


Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L + L1

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)


Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL

: X = Xcoordinate of point a
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H


Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL

GOX

: Tool geometry compensation (X)

WOX

: Tool wear compensation (X)

WSX

: Shift of the Xcoordinate in the workpiece


coordinate system (X)

: Inside diameter of the workpiece

: Workpiece length

GOZ

: Tool geometry compensation (Z)

WOZ

: Tool wear compensation (Z)

WSZ

: Shift of the Z coordinate in the workpiece


coordinate system (Z)

CL

: Amount of clearance (100 mm or 10 inches)

L, W, L1, W1

: Dimensions of the chuck

150

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

(2) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b, e,


and f
Bar machining: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface away from the
edges, end faces near the edges, end faces away from the edges
Pattern repetition

Residual machining
Threading

: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface


away from the edges, end faces near the
edges, end faces away from the edges
: Outer surface and end faces
: Outer surface

Grooving

: Outer surface and end faces

Necking

: Outer surface near the edges, outer surface


away from the edges, end faces near the
edges, end faces away from the edges

End facing, single action, and subprogram calling


(3)

When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points c, d, e, and g

Bar machining

Residual machining
Threading

: Inner surface near the edges and inner


surface away from the edges
: Inner surface near the edges and inner
surface away from the edges
: Inner surface and inner bottom surface
: Inner surface

Grooving

: Inner surface

Necking

: Inner surface near the edges, inner surface


away from the edge

Pattern repetition

Center drilling, drilling, and tapping


NOTE
When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is on
the end face of the chuck, the length of the workpiece (L)
is ignored. The machining allowance of the end face is not
included in workpiece length L.
When a blank plate is machined, the point closest to the
chuck on the inner surface is used.

151

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(c) External claw chucks (rotating tool)

a
a

f
L1
c
W
e

W1
d

b
e

(1) Calculation of each point


a

: X = Xcoordinate of the chuck reference


position specified on the setting screen
before execution
Z = Zcoordinate of the chuck reference
position specified on the setting screen
before execution + CR
: X = Xcoordinate of the chuck reference
position specified on the setting screen
before execution + CR
Z = Zcoordinate of the chuck reference
position specified on the setting screen
before execution
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1
Z = Zcoordinate of point a
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1 CR
Z = Zcoordinate of point a
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: X = GOX + WOX WSX + D W1 CR
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: X = Xcoordinate of point a
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: X = Xcoordinate of point a
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL
: Tool geometry compensation (X)
: Tool wear compensation (X)
: Shift of the X coordinate in the workpiece
coordinate system (X)
: Radius of the tool

b
b
e

GOX
WOX
WSX
CR
152

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

D
L
GOZ
WOZ
WSZ

:
:
:
:
:

Outside diameter of a workpiece


Workpiece length
Tool geometry compensation (Z)
Tool wear compensation (Z)
Shift of the Z coordinate in the workpiece
coordinate system (Z)
: Amount of clearance (100 mm or 10 inches)
: Dimensions of the chuck

CL
L, W, L1, W1

(2) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b,


e, and f
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving

:
:
:
:

Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face

Cylindrical machining

: Side face

(3) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b,


e, and f
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Caxis notching

:
:
:
:
:

Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face
End and side faces

NOTE
When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is on
the end face of the chuck, the length of the workpiece (L)
is ignored. The machining allowance for the end face is not
included in workpiece length L.
When a blank plate is machined, point X1 on the outer
surface is used.
(d) Internal claw chucks (rotating tool)
a

a
f

f
W

W1
c

b
L1
e
e

153

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(1) Calculation of each point


a

: X = Xcoordinate of the chuck reference


position specified on the setting screen
before execution
Z = Zcoordinate of the chuck reference
position specified on the setting screen
before execution + CR

: X = Xcoordinate of the chuck reference


position specified on the setting screen before
execution + CR
Z = Zcoordinate of the chuck reference
position specified on the setting screen before
execution

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)


Z = Zcoordinate of point a

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)


CR
Z = Zcoordinate of point a

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)


Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL

: X = GOX + WOX WSX + H (W W1)


CR
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL

: X = Xcoordinate of point a
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL

: X = Xcoordinate of point a
Z = GOZ + WOZ WSZ L (L L1)
CL

GOX

: Tool geometry compensation (X)

WOX

: Tool wear compensation (X)

WSX

: Shift of the Xcoordinate in the workpiece


coordinate system (X)

CR

: Radius of the tool

: Inside diameter of a workpiece

: Workpiece length

GOZ

: Tool geometry compensation (Z)

WOZ

: Tool wear compensation (Z)

WSZ

: Shift of the Zcoordinate in the workpiece


coordinate system (Z)

CL

: Amount of clearance (100 mm or 10 inches)

L, W, L1, W1

: Dimensions of the chuck

154

B62444E1/04

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

(2) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b,


e, and f
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Cylindrical machining

:
:
:
:
:

Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face
Side face

(3) When machining is suppressed in the area formed by points a, b,


e, and f
Caxis center drilling
Caxis drilling
Caxis tapping
Caxis grooving
Notching

:
:
:
:
:

End face
End face
End face
End face
End and side faces

NOTE
When the origin of the workpiece coordinate system is on
the end face of a chuck, the length of the workpiece (L) is
ignored. The machining allowance for the end face is not
included in workpiece length L.
When a blank plate is machined, point X1 on the outer
surface is used.

12.1.8
Chuck/Tailstock Barrier

When the chuck/tailstock barrier function, an optional NC function, is selected,


it replaces the chuck barrier function described in the previous section. For
details of this optional function, refer to the operators manual supplied with the
NC.

Chuck/tailstock barrier data can be displayed and entered by using the


conversational setting screen before execution. For details, see Section
12.1.3.

155

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

12.2

12.2.1

(1) Execution in the conversational mode


After operating as instructed in Section 12.1, Operation before
Execution, start execution of a machining program on the machine
operators panel.
When the program screen is called, the following screen is displayed
during execution of the machining program.
Example of a screen for current positions for a twopath lathe

Starting Execution of
Machining Programs

POSITION
[ABSOLUTE]

[CAP.: HEADL]
HEADR

HEADL

X1
Z1
C1

0.000
0.000
0.000
[CURRENT]
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000

X2
Z2
C2

[NEXT]
G00
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000

(ACTUAL SPEED)
F: 2000 MIM/MIN
S: 800 RPM
OVR_PLAY BACK
PRC OVRD 80%
ABS

MACIN

LOAD METER
X jjjjjjJJJ
Z jjjjjjJ
C jjj
S jjjj

REL

G00

CPROC (01) BAR


OUTTER
NPROC (02) GR OUTTER (NORMAL)

<

B62444E1/04

Machining programs created conversationally can be executed in the


conversational mode. It can be also executed after being converted to the
NCformat program.

EXECUTING
MACHINING
PROGRAMS

G00

OPERATION

PROC
ES
LIST

0.000
0.000
0.000
[CURRENT]
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000
S

[NEXT]
G00
X 0.000
Z 0.000
C 0.000
T

CPROC (01) BAR


OUTTER
NPROC (02) GR OUTTER (NORMAL)
(ACTUAL SPEED)
F: 2000 MIM/MIN
S: 800 RPM
OVR_PLAY BACK
PRC OVRD 80%

LOAD METER
X jjjjjjJJJ
Z jjjjjjJ
C jjj
S jjjj

HEAD HEAD
OVR
L
R
TEACH
(FS16/18TB)

By starting the program while the graphic screen is displayed by pressing


the GRAPH function button, an animated simulation can be displayed
when a workpiece is being machined.
NOTE
1 If another screen is called while an animated simulation is
displayed, the animated simulation may be suspended
depending on the type of screen called.
2 The sample execution inprogress screen shown above
assumes that the override playback function is enabled.

156

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

12.2.2
Override Playback
Function

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

When a conversational machining program is executed directly, a feedrate


override value can be memorized for each process.
This function can be enabled by setting bit 7 (OPB) of parameter No. 9765
to 1.
(1) Override teaching
When a conversational machining program is executed, a feedrate
override value, set on the operators panel, can be memorized by
each process (override teaching) by using the execution inprogress
screen (Section 12.2.1).
(a) The execution inprogress screen is displayed during the direct
execution of a conversational machining program.
(b) When a twopath lathe is used, the tool post for which override
teaching is used can be specified using [HEAD L]/[HEAD R].
Override teaching can be specified for use with both tool posts at
the same time. The soft key corresponding to a specified tool post
is displayed in reverse video.
(c) When [OVR TEACH] is pressed, the following message and soft
keys are displayed:

(ACTUAL SPEED)
F: 2000 MM/MIN
S: 800 RPM
OVRPLAY BACK
PRC OVRD 80%
EXEC REALLY?
YES [EXEC]

NO: [CANCEL]
EXEC

CAN

(d) By pressing [EXEC], the feedrate override value currently set on


the operators panel is memorized. When [CAN] is pressed, the
previous screen is redisplayed.
NOTE
1 Override teaching is performed only for the process being
executed when [OVR TEACH] is pressed. Even if the next
process is started before the teaching operation has been
completed, a feedrate override value is memorized in the
process being executed when [OVR TEACH] is pressed.
2 When bit 6 (OPR) of parameter No. 9765 is set to 0:
Override teaching cannot be performed when the memory
protect switch is set.
When bit 6 (OPR) of parameter No. 9765 is set to 1:
Override teaching can be performed even when the
memory protect switch is set.

157

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(2) Override playback


When a conversational machining program, for which override
teaching is performed, is executed, its memorized override values
are automatically applied (override playback).
In this case, however, note that an override value of 100% must be
set. Otherwise, the feedrate will be overridden twice.
When a conversational machining program is executed using the
override playback function, OVR.PLAY BACK blinks on the
execution inprogress screen.
When conversion to an NC program is performed while the override
playback function is being used, overridden feedrate data is output.
NOTE
1 If override teaching is performed with a machining program
being executed using the override playback function,
override values, produced by multiplying one override value
by another, are memorized.
2 The override teaching and override playback functions can
be used with the following processes:
Bar machining (excluding finish machining)
Pattern repeating (excluding finish machining)
Residual machining
End facing
Grooving (excluding finish machining of trapezoidal
grooves)
Necking
Center drilling/drilling
Caxis center drilling/drilling
Caxis grooving/notching/cylindrical machining
Yaxis center drilling/drilling
Yaxis milling

WARNING
When using the override playback function, especially when
increasing an override value, make sure that the override
value is sufficient for successful machining.
If the override value is too high, the machine may be forced to
perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the
tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

158

B62444E1/04

12.2.3
Execution of a
Conversational
Machining Program
After Conversion to an
NC Program

OPERATION

12. DIRECT OPERATION FOR


MACHINING PROGRAMS
CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

A machining program that was created conversationally, and which has


been converted to an NC program, can be executed in exactly the same
way as an ordinary NC program.
The parameters listed below allow a user to determine whether to perform
animated simulation with an NC program created by conversion.
D Bit 1 (GRO) of parameter No. 9773
0 : Outputs an NC command (G10) for animated simulation upon
conversion to an NC program.
1 : Does not output an NC command (G10) for animated simulation
upon conversion to an NC program.
D Bit 2 (OPO) of parameter No. 9773
0 : Outputs an NC command (G10) for animated simulation without
modification when the GRFOUT bit is set to 0.
1 : Outputs an NC command (G10) for animated simulation with /
(optional block skip) specified at the beginning of the block
containing the NC command when the GRFOUT bit is set to 0.
In addition, the following parameters are also related to conversion to NC
programs.
D Bit 6 (MDL) of parameter No. 9773
0 : Outputs the G and F codes of group 01 upon conversion to an NC
program, even if the codes are the same as those in the previous
block.
1 : Does not output the G and F codes of group 01 upon conversion to an
NC program if the codes are the same as those in the previous block.

159

13. SETTING DATA

13

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

SETTING DATA

Before creating a program in the conversational mode, data items such as


TOOL DATA and MACHINING CONDITION must be set.
These data items are used for the automatic selection of a tool and the
automatic determination of machining conditions.
Pressing the soft key [6](TOOL, CUTTING CONDITION DATA) on the
basic menu screen displays the following tool data menu:

""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""

""""
""""
"""""""""
""""
""""
"

[CAP.:HEADL]

MACHINING DATA MENU


1

<

TOOL FILE LIST

DISPLAY
/EDIT

TOOL
ENTRY

TOOL DATA

TRANS.

COPY

DELETE

MACHINING CONDITION (GENERAL)

MACHINING CONDITION (THREADING)

MACHINING CONDITION (GROOVING)

MACHINING CONDITION (DRILL)

MACHINING CONDITION (TAP)

MACHINING CONDITION (MILLING)

MACHINING CONDITION (COEFFICIENT)

MACHINING CONDITION (ROUGHNESS)

""
"" """"
"" """""
"""""
"

10

PRETOOL LIST

11

CHUCK, TAILSTOCK DATA

CHUCK

CHUCK
FIGURE

TAIL
STOCK

TAIL
FIGURE

Pressing the rightmost soft key [+] on the above screen displays the soft
keys on the second page:
<

10

11

READ

PUNCH

CLEAR +

The relevant screen is displayed by pressing the soft key corresponding


to an item number for each screen.
NOTE
When the leftmost soft key [ ] is pressed on the screen
displayed on the basic menu, the screen can be returned to
the main menu.

160

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

13. SETTING DATA

WARNING
When creating a machining program using a conversational
function, make sure that all necessary data among the tool
data, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
list, and chuck/tailstock data is set correctly.
If this data is not set correctly, the cutting conditions necessary
for machining will not be set correctly, possibly causing
damage to the tool, and even injuries.

161

13. SETTING DATA

13.1
TOOL DATA FILE

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

As shown below, tools to be registered are assigned to tool management


numbers according to the type of machining.
101 to 149:
201 to 249:
301 to 349:
401 to 449:
501 to 549:
601 to 649:
701 to 749:
801 to 849:
901 to 949:
151 to 199:
251 to 299:
451 to 499:
551 to 599:
651 to 699:
751 to 799:
851 to 899:
951 to 999:

Outer surface machining


End facing
Threading on the inner surface
End facing on the inner bottom
Grooving on the inner surface
Drilling
Center drilling
Side cutting
Reaming
Inner surface machining
Threading on the outer surface
Grooving on the outer surface
Grooving on the end surface
Tapping
End milling
Chamfering
Boring

Up to 40 or 99 tools can be registered in the tool data file.


The tool specified in the machining program coded in the conversational
mode is called a prepared tool. Mark @ is given to the left of the
management number of the prepared tool on the tool data screen. The
management number is displayed in reverse.
The selected tool post and tool direction for the prepared tool cannot be
changed.

162

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.1
Displaying the Tool
Data Directory Screen
*** TOOL FILE LIST
101#01 OUTTER
102#02 OUTTER
103#02 OUTTER
251#01 OUTR TH
451#01 OUTR GR
452#02 OUTR GR
601#01 DRILL

Selecting the tool data screen on the tool data menu screen calls the tool
data directory screen.

***
T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T1212
T1212
T0808

No.=
< TRANS. COPY DELETE

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

REST No. OF
0.400 AC
90
0.400 AC
90
0.400 AC
90
0.000 AN
60
0.000 WN 3.000
0.200 WN 3.000
20.000 AC
118

TOOL=92 [CAP. :HEADL]


AN
60 TW
20.000
AN
60 TW
20.000
AN
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
AA
90 TL
15.000
AA
90 TL
5.000
TL
170.000

SFTKY
TOOL
ENTRY

DISPLY
/EDIT

MENU
RETURN

NOTE
The above example shows the tool data directory screen for
the 2path lathe. In the 1path lathe, the tool post number
(#L or #R) is not displayed on the right of the tool
management number.

163

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

13.1.2
Operations on the Tool
Data Directory Screen

B62444E1/04

(1) Registering a new tool


Press the soft key [TOOL ENTRY], then press the soft key
corresponding to the desired tool.

[CAP. :HEADL]
101#01
102#02
103#02

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505
T0101
T0202

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 000
TOOL TYPE
GENERAL
OUTTER
INNER
END FACE
THREAD
OUTTER
INNER
INNER BOTTOM FACE CHAMFER
GROOVE
OUTER
INNER
END FACE
TOOL TYPE SOFTKEY
<

RN 0.400
RN 0.400
RN 0.400

DRILL
TAP
CNT.DR
END MIL
SIDCUT

AC 90
AC 90
AC 90

AN 60
AN 60
AN 60

TW 20.000
TW 20.000
TW 20.000

GENERAL

THREAD

BOTTOM

GROOVE

REAMA
BORE

GENERL GENERL GENERL THREAD THREAD


OUTTER INNER FACING OUTTER INNER

BOTTOM GROOVE GROOVE GROOVE TOOL +


OUTTER INNER FACE
LIST

Pressing the rightmost soft key [+] displays the following soft keys:
<

DRILL

TAP

CNT.DR THROW
AWAY

TOOL
LIST

NOTE
The [THROWAWAY] soft key is displayed by setting bit 0
of parameter No. 9765 to 1.

<

END
MIL

< REAMA

SIDCUT CHAMFR

BORE

164

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
LIST

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(2) Deleting a tool data item


Move the cursor to the tool data item to be deleted and press the soft
key [DELETE]. The following prompt and soft keys are then
displayed:

NO. =
<

SFTKY

DELETE REALLY? YES: [DELETE]

CANCEL DELETE

NO: [CANCEL]
TOOL +
LIST

Pressing the soft key [DELETE] can delete the tool data item. Pressing
the soft key [CANCEL] can cancel the deletion.
(3) Copying a tool data item
Move the cursor to the tool data item to be copied and press the soft
key [COPY]. The following message is then displayed. Enter a new
tool management number with numeric keys, then press the soft key
[COPY] again.

NO. =
< TRANS. COPY

SFTKY

PRESS SOFT KEY [COPY] AFTER TOOL # INPUT


TOOL
TOOL
ENTRY
ENTRY

DELETE

DISPLY
/EDIT

MENU

RETURN

(4) Changing the priority of tools to be selected


To change the order of registered tools by changing a tool
management number, move the cursor to the tool data item to be
changed and press the soft key [TRANS.]. The following message
is then displayed. Enter a new tool management number with
numeric keys and press the soft key [TRANS.].

NO. =
< TRANS. COPY

SFTKY
DELETE

PRESS SOFT KEY [TRANS.] AFTER TOOL # INPUT


TOOL
ENTRY

DISPLY
/EDIT

MENU

RETURN

NOTE
By setting bit 7 (AUT) of parameter 9774 to 1, the tool having
the smallest tool management number can automatically be
selected from among the tools satisfying the specified
conditions.
When bit 7 (AUT) is set to 0, the tool that requires the
minimum cutting time is selected.

165

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.3
Tool Data for
Machining Outer
Surfaces, Inner
Surfaces, End Faces,
and Inner Bottom
Faces
[CAP. :HEADL]
101#01
102#02
103#02

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T0101 RN
T0202 RN

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 101
TOOL TYPE OUTTER (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN
COMMON
OUTPUT T
0505
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOSERADIS RN=0.400
CUTTING EDG AC=
90
NOSE ANGLE AN=
60
AC
NOSE WIDTH TW=20.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID

90
90
90

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

TW

AN

RN

<

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.


Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

TOOL DIREC

166

Specify by pressing one of the following soft


keys.

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

(1) Outer surface (

(2) Outer surface (

(3) Inner surface (

(5) End face (

(4) Inner surface (

(6) End face (

(7) Inner bottom face (

(8) Outer surface, inner surface, and


end face (
)

Used for residual machining of drilled hole bottoms

NOTE
A tool shown on the screen by pressing the tool direction
soft key with a filledin tip indicates that the cutter is
equipped with a tip at this side. A tool shown with an
unfilledin tip indicates that shown the cutter is equipped
with a tip at the opposite side.

167

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

ROUGH/FIN

Specify by pressing one of the [ROUGH], [FIN],


and [COMMON] soft keys.

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (Four digits/six digits)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a spindle rotates during


cutting Specify by pressing the [NORMAL]
(= M03) or [REVERS] (= M04) soft key.

NOSERADIS (RN):

Radius of a tool tip


When bit 0 (TLC) of parameter 9774 is set to 1,
the tool tip radius in a conversationally coded
program isspecified separately from that in an
NCformat program, and the former valueis
copied to the NC offset data when the program
is executed.
When the bit is set to 0, the same tool tip radius
is used in both a conversationally coded program
and an NCformat program.

CUTTING EDG (AC) :

See the following figures.

NOSEANGLE (AN) :

See the following figures.

(1) Outer surface (right hand)

(2) Outer surface (left hand)

AN
AN

AC

(3) Inner surface (right hand)

AC

AC

(4) Inner surface (left hand)

AC

AN
AN

(5) End face (negative direction)

AN

(6) End face and inner bottom face (positive direction)


AC

AN

AC

NOTE
When a round nose tool is used, the cutting edge angle and
tool angle are not displayed.

168

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

NOSE WIDTH (TW) :

TW

Need to be set only when the figure of a tool to


be drawn is determined.
TW

IMGNRY NOS (TD) :

Position of a virtual tool tip when compensating


the tool tip radius
Example of setting)
(1) Outer surface (right hand/round nose tool) =3
(2) Outer surface (left hand) = 4
(3) Inner surface (right hand/round nose tool) =2
(4) Inner surface (left hand) = 1
(5) End face (negative direction/round nose tool)
=3
(6) End face and inner bottom face (positive
direction) = 2
(7) Roundnose tool=

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys. The tool
material [SPCIAL] can be altered by parameters.

169

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.4
Tool Data for External
Threads and Internal
Threads
103#02
251#01
451#01
452#02
601#01

OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR GR
OUTR GR
DRILL

T0202
T0404
T1212
T1212
T0808

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.000
0.000
0.200
20.000

AC
90
AN
60
WN 3.000
WN 3.000
AC
118

AN
AA
AA

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
90 TL
15.000
90 TL
5.000
TL
170.000
60

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 251
TOOL TYPE OUTR TH (HEADL)
TW
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSERADIS
NOSE ANGLE
NOSE WIDTH
TL MATRIAL
<

0404
NORMAL
RN= 0.000
AN=
60
TW=40.000
TM=CARBID

AN

RN

MENU

HEADL HEADR

RETURN

TOOL TYPE

(1) External thread

Tool post selection :

TOOL
FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.

(2) Internal thread

Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or


[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

170

TOOL
LIST

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (Four digits/six digits)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a spindle rotates during


cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] (= M03) or
[REVERS] (= M04) soft key.

NOSERADI (RN) :

Need not be set.

NOSEANGLE (AN) :

See the following figures.

AN

NOSE WIDTH (TW) :

Need to be set only when the figure of a tool


to be drawn is determined.

(1) External thread

(2) Internal thread

TW

TW

TL MATRIAL(TM)

171

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.5
Tool Data for Grooving
on Outer Surfaces,
Inner Surfaces, and
End Faces
103#02
251#01
451#01
452#02
601#01

OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR GR
OUTR GR
DRILL

T0202
T0404
T1212
T1212
T0808

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.000
0.000
0.200
20.000

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 251
TOOL TYPE OUTR GR (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC
ROUGH/FIN COMMON
OUTPUT T
1212
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
TL
NOSERADIS RN= 0.000
NOSE WIDTH WN= 3.000
SLANT ANGL AA=
90
CUTTR LNGT TL=15.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
3
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID

AC
90
AN
60
WN 3.000
WN 3.000
AC
118

AN
AA
AA

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
90 TL
15.000
90 TL
5.000
TL
170.000
60

AA

RN

WIN

< HEADL HEADR

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.


Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

TOOL DIREC

Specify by pressing one of the following soft


keys.

(1) Grooving on outer surfaces (

172

) (2) Grooving on outer surfaces (

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

(3) Grooving on inner surfaces (

(5) Grooving on end faces (

(6) Grooving on end faces (

: Programming point

ROUGH/FIN

Specify by pressing one of the [ROUGH], [FIN],


and [COMMON] soft keys.

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (Four digits only)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a spindle rotates during


cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] (= M03) or
[REVERS] (= M04) soft key.

NOSERADIS (RN):

Radius of a tool tip

RN

173

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

NOSE WIDTH (WN) :

B62444E1/04

Width of the cutting edge of a grooving tool

WN

SLANT ANGLE (AA) :


(1) Grooving on outer surfaces

(2) Grooving on inner surfaces

AA

AA

(3) Grooving on end faces

AA

CUTTR LNGT (TL) : Effective length of a grooving tool tip

TL

174

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

13. SETTING DATA

IMGNRY NOS (TD) :

Position of a virtual tool tip when


compensating the tool tip radius
Example of setting)
(1) Grooving on outer surfaces (left reference
position) = 3
(2) Grooving on outer surfaces (right
reference position) = 4
(3) Grooving on inner surfaces (left reference
position) = 2
(4) Grooving on inner surfaces (right
reference position) = 1
(5) Grooving on end faces (upper reference
position) = 2
(6) Grooving on end faces (lower reference
position) = 3

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

175

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.6
Tool Data for Drilling

451#01
452#02
601#01
602#01
603#01

OUTR GR
T1212 RN
OUTR GR
T1515 RN
DRILL
(F) T0303 DD
DRILL
(F) T0808 DD
DRILL
(S) T0909 DD

0.000
0.200
20.000
25.000
12.000

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 601
TOOL TYPE
DRILL(HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
AC
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD=20.000
NOSE ANGLE AC= 118
CUTTER LNGT TL=60.000
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID
<

FACE

WN 3.000
WN 3.000
AC
118
AC
180
AC
150

AA
AA

[CAP. :HEADL]
90 TL
15.000
90 TL
5.000
TL
60.000
TL
90.000
TL
40.000

DD

TL

SIDE
CUT

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.


Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

TOOL DIREC

Specify by pressing the [FACE] or [CROSS]


soft key.

(1) Drilling an end face


(turning or Caxis machining, Yaxis
machining)

176

(2) Drilling an side face (Caxis machin


ing, Yaxis machining)
[CROSS]

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

MILLNG/TRN

Specify by pressing one of the [TURN],


[MILLNG], and [COMMON] soft keys.
[MILLNG] : Milling tools for Caxis/Yaxis
machining
[TURN]
: Tools for turning
[COMMON] : Tools that are used for both
milling and turning

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a spindle or rotating tool


rotates during cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] (= M03) or
[REVERS] (= M04) soft key.

NOTE
The M code for normal rotation (parameter 9877) or reverse
rotation (parameter 9878) can be set in the respective
parameter for Caxis/Yaxis machining.

NOMINAL DIA (DD) :

Nominal diameter of a drill

NOSE ANGLE (AC) :

Point angle of a drill

CUTTR LNGTH (TL) :

Effective length of a drill

DD

AC

TL

TL MATRIAL (TM)

177

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.7
Tool Data for Tapping
[CAP. :HEADL]
602#01
603#01
651#01
701#01
751#02

DRILL
DRILL
TAP
CENTER
ENDMILL

(F)
(S)
(F)
(F)
(S)

T0808
T0909
T0303
T0808
T0909

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 651
TOOL TYPE TAP (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD=20.00
PITCH
PT= 1.500
CUTTER LNGT TL=60.000
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID

DD
DD
DD
DD
TR

25.000
12.000
20.000
2.000
12.000

AC
180
AC
150
PT 1.500
AC
90
EN
3

TL
TL
TL
CD
TL

90.000
40.000
60.000
2.000
40.000

PT

DD

TL
<

FACE

SIDE
CUT

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.


Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

TOOL DIREC

Specify by pressing the [FACE] or [CROSS]


soft key.

(1) Tapping on end faces


(turning or Caxis machining, Yaxis
machining)

MILLNG/TRN

178

(2) Tapping on side faces


(Caxis machining, Yaxis
machining)

[CROSS]

Specify by pressing one of the [TURN],


[MILLNG], and [COMMON] soft keys.

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a spindle or rotating tool


rotates during cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] (= M03) or
[REVERS] (= M04) soft key.

NOMINAL DIA (DD) :

Nominal diameter of a tap

PITCH (PT)

Pitch of a tap

CUTTR LNGTH (TL) :

Effective length of a tap

PT

DD

TL

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

179

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.8
Tool Data for Center
Drills
[CAP. :HEADL]
603#01
651#01
701#01
751#02
752#02

DRILL
TAP
CENTER
ENDMILL
ENDMILL

(S)
(F)
(F)
(F)
(S)

T0909
T0303
T0808
T0909
T1111

DD
DD
DD
TR
TR

12.000
20.000
2.000
12.000
2.500

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 701
TOOL TYPE
DRILL (HEADR)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD= 2.000
MAX DIA
DT=10.000
DD
NOSE ANGLE AC=
90
CUT DPTH
CD= 2.000
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID
<

FACE

AC

AC
150
PT 1.500
AC
90
EN
3
EN
3

TL
TL
CD
TL
TL

40.000
60.000
2.000
40.000
30.000

DT

CD

SIDE
CUT

MENU
RETURN

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
FIGURE

TOOL TYPE

Specify when a tool is registered.

TOOL POST
SELECTION

Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or


[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

TOOL DIREC

Specify by pressing the [FACE] or [CROSS]


soft key.

(1) Drilling an end face


(turning or Caxis machining,
Yaxis maching)

(2) Drilling an side face


(Caxis machining,
Yaxis machining)
[CROSS]

180

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

MILLNG/TRN

Specify by pressing one of the [TURN],


[MILLNG], and [COMMON] soft keys.

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a spindle or rotating tool


rotates during cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] or
[REVERS] soft key.

NOMINAL DIA (DD)

Nominal diameter of a center drill

MAX DIA (DT)

Diameter of the base of a center drill.

NOSE ANGLE (AC) :

Point angle of a center drill

CUTTR LNGTH (CD) :

Effective length of a center drill

DD
AC

DT

CD

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

181

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.9
Tool Data for
Throwaway Drills
451#01
452#02
631#03

OUTER GR
OUTER GR
TRWAWY

T1212 RN 0.000WN 3.00


T1515 RN 0.200WN 3.00
T0303 DD 20.000AC 180

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 631
TOOL TYPE
TRWAWY (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
MILLING/TRN COMMON
OUTPUT T
0303
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOMINLD
DD=20.000
NOSE ANGLE AC=180.000
CUTR LNGT
TL=60.000
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID

AA
AA

90
90

[CAP. :HEADL]
TL 15.000
TL 5.000
TL 60.000

DD

TL

<

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

TOOL POST SELECTION :

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
FIGURE

To be selected when the tool is registered


To be selected using [HEADL]/
[HEAD]R]

NOTE
Tool post selection is possible only when a twopath lathe
is used.

OUTPUT T

T code (T followed by four digits/T followed by


six digits) output when a machining program is
executed

REVOLUTD

Direction of spindle or milling cutter rotation for


cutting.
Specified using [NORMAL
] (= M03) or
].
[REVERSE

NOTE
In Caxis/Yaxis machining, the M code for normal rotation
can be specified using parameter No. 9877, and the M code
for reverse rotation can be specified using parameter No.
9878.

182

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

NOMINLD

DD: Nominal diameter of a throwaway drill

NOSE ANGLE

AC: Point angle of a drill for throwaway drill


(Normally 180)

CUTR LNGT

TL: Effective drill length

183

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.10
Tool Data for End Mills
[CAP. :HEADL]
651#01
701#01
751#02
752#02
753#01

TAP
CENTER
ENDMILL
ENDMILL
ENDMILL

(F)
(F)
(F)
(F)
(S)

T0303
T0090
T1414
T1212
T1111

DD 20.000
DD 2.000
TR 5.000
TR 2.500
TR 5.000

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 751
TOOL TYPE
ENDMILL(HEADR)
TOOL DIREC FACE
ROUGH/FIN
COMMON
OUTPUT T
1414
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
TOOL RADIS TR= 5.000
NUM OF BLA EN=
3
CUTTER LNGT TL=10.000
IMGNRY NOS TD=
0
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID
<

FACE

PT 1.500
AC
90
EN
3
EN
3
EN
3

TL
CD
TL
TL
TL

60.000
2.000
20.000
30.000
20.000

TL
TR

SIDE
CUT

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL
LIST

TOOL
FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.


Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

TOOL DIREC

(1) End mill for end faces

184

Specify by pressing the [FACE] or [CROSS]


soft key.

(2) End mill for side faces

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

ROUGH/FIN

Specify by pressing one of the [ROUGH], [FIN],


and [COMMON] soft keys.

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a rotating tool rotates during


cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] or
[REVERS] soft key.

NOTE
The M code for normal rotation (parameter 9877) or reverse
rotation (parameter 9878) can be set in the respective
parameter for Caxis machining and Yaxis machining
TOOL RADIS (TR)

NUM OF BLAD (EN) :

Radius of an end mill


When bit 0 (TLCOPY) of parameter 9774 is
set to 1, the cutter compensation value in a
conversationally coded program is specified
separately from that in an NCformat
program, and the former value is copied to
the NC offset data when a program is
executed.
When the bit is set to 0, the same cutter
compensation value is used in both a
conversationally coded program and an
NCformat program.
Number of cutting edges on an end mill

NOTE
When cutting conditions are determined automatically, the
feed amount per cutting edge is specified. An actual feed
amount is calculated by multiplying the feed amount in the
determined condition data by the number of cutting edges.
CUTTR LNGT (TL) :

Effective length of an end mill

TR

TL

IMGNRY NOS (TD) :

Must be set to 0.

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

185

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.11
Tool Data for Side
Cutters
752#02
753#01
801#01
851#01
852#01

ENDMILL
ENDMILL
SIDE CU
CHAMFER
CHAMFER

(F) T1212 TR
(S) T1111 TR
T0707 TR
(F) T1313 TR
(F) T1414 TR

2.500
5.000
30.000
15.000
15.000

EN
3
EN
3
EN
12
MD 2.000
MD 2.000

[CAP. :HEADL]
TL
30.000
TL
20.000
TW 5.000 TL
25.000
AN
90 CL
0.500
AN
90 CL
0.500

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 751
TOOL TYPE
SIDE CU(HEADL)
ROUGH/FIN
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSE WIDTH
TOOL RADIS
NUM OF BLA
CUTTR LNGT
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL
< ROUGH

FIN

COMMON
0707
NORMAL
TW= 5.000
TR=30.000
EN=
12
TL=25.000
TD=
0
TM=CARBID

TW

TR
TL

COMMON

MENU TOOL
RETURN LIST

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL
FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.

Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or


[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.
ROUGH/FIN

Specify by pressing one of the [ROUGH], [FIN],


and [COMMON] soft keys.

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)

186

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a rotating tool rotates during


cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] or
[REVERS] soft key.

NOSE WIDTH (TW) :

Width of a side cutter

TOOL RADIUS (TR) :

Radius of a side cutter


When bit 0 (TL) of parameter 9774 is set to
1, the cutter compensation value in a
conversationally coded program is specified
separately from that in an NCformat
program, and the former value is copied to
the NC offset data when execution is
selected.
When the bit is set to 0, the same cutter
compensation value is used in both a
conversationally coded program and an
NCformat program.

TR

TW

NUM OF BLADS (EN) :

Number of cutting edges on a side cutter

NOTE
When cutting conditions are determined automatically, the
feed amount per cutting edge is specified. An actual feed
amount is calculated by multiplying the feed amount in the
determined condition data by the number of cutting edges.
CUTTR LNGTH (TL) :

Effective length of a side cutter

TL

IMGNRY NOS (TD) :

Must be set to 0.

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

187

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.12
Tool Data for
Chamfering
[CAP. :HEADL]
753#01
801#01
851#01
852#01
901#01

ENDMILL
SIDE CU
CHAMFER
CHAMFER
REAMA

(S) T1111
T0707
(F) T1313
(S) T1414
(F) T1818

TR
TR
TR
TR
DD

5.000
30.000
15.000
15.000
22.000

EN
3
EN
12 TW 5.000
MD 5.000 AN
90
MD 2.000 AN
90
TL 70.000

TL
TL
CL
CL

20.000
25.000
2.000
0.500

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 851
TOOL TYPE CHAMFER (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
TOOL RADIS
SMALL DIAM
NOSE ANGLE
NOS CLRLNC
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL
<

FACE

1313
NORMAL
TR=15.000
MD= 5.000
AN=
90
CL= 2.000
TD=
0
TM=CARBID

CL
AN

TR
MD

SIDE
CUT

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL
TOOL
LIST FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.


Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.
TOOL DIREC

(1) End face chamfering

OUTPUT T

188

Specify by pressing the [FACE] or [CROSS]


soft key.
(2) Side face chamfering

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (Four digits/six digits)

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a rotating tool rotates during


cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] or
[REVERS] soft key.

TOOL RADIUS (TR) :

Radius of a chamfering tool

NOTE
To execute chamfering, calculate the required cutter
compensation value, then overwrite the wear compensation
value corresponding to a specific offset number by the G10
command.

SMALL DIAM (MD) :

Smaller diameter of a chamfering tool

NOSE ANGLE (AN) :

Angle of a chamfering tool tip

NOS CLRLNC (CL)

Length of the part which cannot be used for


chamfering at the tip of a chamfering tool

TR
AN

TR
CL

IMGNRY NOS (TD) :

Must be set to 0.

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

189

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.13
Tool Data for Reamers
[CAP. :HEADL]
851#01
852#01
901#01
951#01

CHAMFER (F) T1313 TR


CHAMFER (S) T1414 TR
REAMA
T1818 DD
BORE
T0707 TW

15.000
15.000
22.000
20.000

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 901
TOOL TYPE REAMA (HEADL)
TOOL DIREC FACE
ROUGH/FIN COMMON
OUTPUT T
1818
REVOLUT.D NORMAL
NOM.D/WID DD= 22.000
CUTTR LNGT TL= 70.000
TL MATRIAL TM=CARBID

MD 5.000 AN
MD 2.000 AN
TL 70.000
TL 60.000

90
90

CL
CL

2.000
0.500

DD

TL
<

FACE

SIDE
CUT

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL TOOL
LIST FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.


Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or
[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

TOOL DIREC

(1) Reamer for end faces

190

Specify by pressing the [FACE] or [CROSS]


soft key.

(2) Reamer for side faces

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

MILLNG/TRN

Specify by pressing one of the [TURN],


[MILLNG], and [COMMON] soft keys.
[MILLNG] : Milling tools for Caxis/Yaxis
machining
[TURN]
: Tools for turning
[COMMON] : Tools that are used for both
milling and turning

OUTPUT T

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a rotating tool rotates during


cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] or
[REVERS] soft key.

NOM.D/WID

(DD) :

Nominal diameter of a reamer

CUTTR LNG

(TL) :

Effective length of a reamer

DD
TL

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

191

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.1.14
Tool Data for Boring

852#01
901#01
951#01

CHAMFER (S) T1414 TR


REAMA
T1818 DD
BORE
T0707 TW

15.000 MD 2.000
22.000 TL70.000
20.000 TL60.000

AN

[CAP. :HEADL]
90 CL
0.500

*** TOOL DATA (1) ***


TOOLID NO. 951
TOOL TYPE BORE
(HEADL)

OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSE WIDTH
CUTTR LNGT
TL MATRIAL

0707
NORMAL
TW= 20.000
TL= 60.000
TM=CARBID

TW

TL
< HEADL HEADR

MENU
RETURN

TOOL TYPE

Tool post selection :

TOOL TOOL
LIST FIGURE

Specify when a tool is registered.

Specify by pressing the [HEADL] or


[HEADR] soft key.

NOTE
This is effective only for the 2path lathe.

OUTPUT T

192

Tcode to be output when a machining program


is executed (T4 digits/T6 digits)

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

REVOLUT.D

Direction in which a spindle rotates during


cutting
Specify by pressing the [NORMAL] (= M03) or
[REVERS] (= M04) soft key.

NOSE WIDTH (TW) :

Need to be set only when the figure of a tool


to be drawn is determined.

CUTTR LNGT (TL) :

Effective length of a boring tool

TW

TL

TL MATRIAL (TM) :

193

Specify by pressing one of the [CARBID],


[HISPD], and [SPCIAL] soft keys.

13. SETTING DATA

13.1.15
Automatic Tool
Specification Function

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

The following table lists tools that are automatically specified according to the
type of the machining and the area to be machined.

Type of machining
Bar machining and
pattern repeating

Residual machining

Area to be machined

Tool

Outer surlaco edge

Outersurface machining

Outer nonedge surface

Outersurface machining

Inner surface edge

Innersurface machining

Inner nonedge surface

Innersurface machining

End face edge

Endface machining

End face nonedge machining

Endface machining

Outer surface

Outersurface machining

Inner surface

Innersurface machining

End face

Endface machining

Inner bottom face

Inner bottom face machining

End facing

Endface machining

Threading

Grooving

Necking

Outer surface

Outersurface threading

Inner surface

Innersurface threading

Outer surface

Outersurface grooving

Inner surface

Innersurface grooving

End face

Endface grooving

Right side of an outer sur- Outersurface machining


face
Left side of an outer surface

Outersurface machining

Right side of an inner sur- Innersurface machining


face
Left side of an inner surface

Innersurface machining

Upper side of an end face Endface machining


Lower side of an end face Endface machining
Center drilling

Center drill
(end face turning)

Drilling

Drill
(end face turning)

194

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Type of machining

Area to be machined

Tool

Reamer

Reamer
(end face turning)

Boring

Boring
(end face turning)

Tapping

Tap
(end face turning)

Caxis center drilling

End face

Center drill
(end face milling)

Side face

Center drill
(side face milling)

End face

Drill
(end face milling)

Side face

Drill
(side face milling)

End face

Reamer
(end face milling)

Side face

Reamer
(side face milling)

End face

Tap
(end face turning)

Side face

Tap
(side face milling)

End face

End mill
(end face)

Side face

End mill
(side face)

End face

End mill
(end face)

Side face

Side cutter

Caxis cylindrical
machining

Side face

End mill
(side face)

Yaxis Center dril

End face

Center dril
(end face turning)

Side face

Center dril
(Side face turning)

End face

Dril
(end face turning)

Side face

Dril
(Side face turning)

Caxis drilling

Caxis Reamer

Caxis tapping

Caxis grooving

Caxis notching

Yaxis Drilling

195

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

Type of machining
Yaxis Reamer

Yaxis Tapping

Yaxis Milling

13.1.16
Tool Geometry Data for
Drawing

B62444E1/04

Area to be machined

Tool

End face

Reamer
(end face turning)

Side face

Reamer
(Side face turning)

End face

Tap
(end face turning)

Side face

Tap
(Side face turning)

End face

End mill
(end face)

Side face

End mill
(side face)

Tool geometry data for drawing is automatically determined. To display


data for drawing, press the [TOOL FIGURE] soft key on the tool data
screen.
[CAP. :HEADL]

101#01
102#02
103#02

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER

T0505 RN
T0101 RN
T0202 RN

0.400 AC
0.400 AC
0.400 AC

90
90
90

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000

*** TOOL DATA(2) *** NO. 101


TOOTH FORM
PT1 X= 0.000
X= 0.000
*** TOOL DATA (1) ***
2 X= 10.000
X= 0.524
TOOLID NO. 000
3
X=
10.000
X= 6.666
TOOL TYPE
OUTTER(HEADL)
4 X= 3.849
X= 6.666
TOOL DIREC

ROUGH/FIN
OUTPUT T
REVOLUT.D
NOSERADIS
CUTTING EDG
NOSE ANGLE
NOSE WIDTH
IMGNRY NOS
TL MATRIAL

COMMON
0505
NORMAL
RN= 0.400
AC=
90
AN=
60
TW=20.000
TD=
3
TM=CARBID

PT1
2
3
4
5
6

SHANK FORM
X= 30.000
X= 18.750
X= 15.000
X= 0.000
X= 11.547
X= 30.000

<

X= 2.500
X= 2.500
X= 0.000
X= 0.000
X= 20.000
X= 20.000

TOOL
PLOT

RETURN

Pressing the [RETURN] soft key returns to the tool data screen.

196

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

13. SETTING DATA

(1) Turning tools


Up to four points can be specified for a tip figure. Specify each point
clockwise from the origin (0, 0), plotting by a single stroke. The area
formed by these four points is filled.
Up to six points can be specified for a shank figure. By plotting each point
using the singlestroke drawing method, lines can be created.
Make sure that the line formed for the shank figure does not pass through
the area specified for the tip. Otherwise, the area may not be filled
normally.
(2) Round nose tools
For round nose tools, the tip figure need not be specified.
Two lines can be specified for the shank figure. Points 1 to 3 and points
4 to 6 each create one line.
(3) Milling tools
Neither a tip figure nor a shank figure needs to be specified for milling
tools. Tool geometry data for drawing is not displayed.
NOTE
The automatically determined tool geometry data for
drawing can be changed by pressing numeric keys and
INPUT key. Pressing the [TOOL PLOT] soft key draws a
new tool figure.

197

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

13.1.17
Details of the
Automatic Setting of
Tool Geometry Data for
Drawing

B62444E1/04

When all data items required for the type of a tool have been entered, tool
geometry data for drawing is automatically specified as follows.
(1) Generalpurpose cutting tools

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, NOSEANGLE, CUTTING EDG, and NOSE
WIDTH

[Right side of an outer surface]


SW (shank width) = Tool width
SL (shank length) = SW*1.5

SW

TT (tip thickness) = SW/3


SW/8

TW (tip length) = SL/3

SL/8

SL

SL/2

Based on the cutting edge angle, tool angle, and above dimensions,
values of points s1 to s6 for a shank and points t2 to t4 for a tip are
calculated. Note that the point of the tip (t1) must always be at the
origin (0, 0).
A tool for machining the left side of an outer surface is symmetrical
with the above tool about its axis.

TW
TT

[Left side of an inner surface]

[Right side of an inner surface]

TT

TT

SL/2
TW

TW
SW

SW

SL/8
SL

SL
SW/8
TT (tip thickness) = SW/4
TW (tip length) = SL/2

[Lower side of an end face]

SL

SL/8

SW
SW/8

TT

TT (tip thickness) = SW/4


TW (tip length) = SL/2

TW

A tool for machining the left side of an outer surface


is symmetrical with the above tool about its axis.

SL/2

198

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

(2) Threading tools

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, CUTTING EDG, and NOSE WIDTH

[Outer surface]
SW (shank width) = Tool width
SL (shank length) = SW*1.5

SW

TT (tip thickness) = SL/8


Based on the cutting edge angle and above dimensions,
values of points s1 to s6 for a shank and points t2 to t4 for a
tip are calculated. Note that the point of the tip (t1) must
always be at the origin (0, 0).

SL

TW
TT

[Inner surface]
SL

SW (shank width) = Tool width

TW

SL (shank length) = SW*1.5


TW (tip height) = SW/8

SW

TT

199

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(3) Grooving tools

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, NOSEANGLE, SLANT ANGLE, and
effective length

[Outer surface]
Left reference point
SW
S5

S1

S4

SL

SW/2

SW (shank width) = Cutting edge width*8

SL/2
S2

t2

SL (shank length) = SW*1.5


TT (tip length) = Effective length

S3

TT
t1

t3

TW (tip width) = Cutting edge width

t4

The figure of a tool for which the right reference position is specified
is symmetrical with the above tool about its axis.

TW

[Inner surface]
Left reference point
TW
t2

t1

SW (shank width) = Effective length*8

TT
S1

t
SW 4

S2

SL (shank length) = SW*1.5

t3

TT (tip length) = Effective length


TW (tip width) = Cutting edge width
For grooving inner surfaces, the right reference position is not specified normally. Should it be specified, however, shift the entire figure
for the left reference position to the left by width of the cutting edge.
The position of the tip is also shifted accordingly.

S3
S5

S4

SL

[End face]
Lower reference position

S2

S1

SW

S3

t4

S5

S4

t1

t2

TT (tip length) = Effective length


TW (tip width) = Cutting edge width

t3

TW

SW (shank width) = Cutting edge width*8


SL (shank length) = SW*1.5

The figure of a tool for which the upper reference position is specified
is symmetrical with the above tool about its axis.

SL

TT

200

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13. SETTING DATA

(4) Center drills

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, NOSE ANGLE, and
CUTTR LNGTH

S1

S3

S2

t3
t4

t2
DD

t1

SW

S5

DD (nominal diameter) = Nominal diameter of a center drill

S6

CD

SW (shank width) = DD*3


SL (shank length) = SW

S4

CD (depth of cut) = Depth of cut by a center drill


SL

(5) Drills

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, NOSE ANGLE, and
effective length

S1

S2

t2
t1

DD

t3

S3

S4

DD (shank width) = Nominal diameter

S5

SL (shank width) = Effective length


SL

(6) Taps

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, and effective length

S2

t2

t1

S1

t3

t4
SW
S4

S3

DD (shank width) = Nominal diameter


SL (shank length) = Effective length

SL

201

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(7) Round nose cutting tools

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, tool tip radius, and NOSE WIDTH

SW (shank width) = NOSE WIDTH

SW

SL (shank length) = SW
S1

Two lines are drawn upward from the center of the circle, both of
which form 45 degrees with the Xaxis. The two lines intersect the
arc at points s3 and s6 as shown in the figure. Then, the two lines
are extended until they intersect the lines indicating the tool width at
points s2 and s5.

S4

S5

S2

SL

S6

S3

(8) Reamers

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, NOMINAL DIA, and effective length

S2

S1

t2

t3

t1

t4

SW

S4

DD (shank width) = Nominal diameter

S3

SL (shank length) = Effective length


SL

(9) Boring tools

Tool data used


TOOL DIREC, NOSE WIDTH, and effective length
TT
S2

t1

Note)

S1

t2

Boring is performed only when turning is specified.

TW
t4

SW

t3

SW (shank width) = NOSE WIDTH


SL (shank length) = SW*1.5
TT (tip length) = SL/4

S3
S5

S4

TW (tip width) = SW/2

SL

202

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.2
MACHINING
CONDITION DATA
AND SURFACE
ROUGHNESS DATA
13.2.1
Machining Condition
Data for
Generalpurpose Tools

Pressing the [2] soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for generalpurpose tools.
(1) Cutting condition data for rough machining
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for rough machining)
. 5 INPUT (FEED/REV.)
80 INPUT (CUT SPD.)
2
INPUT (CUT DPTH)
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for finish machining)
. 3 INPUT
120 INPUT

(FEED/REV.)
(CUT SPD.)
[CAP. :HEADL]

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (GENERAL) ***


ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID BITE
CARBID BITE
MATERIAL FEED/REV. CUT SPD. CUT DPTH MATERIAL FEED/REV. CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.) (MM)
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000
80.0
2.000
FC25
0.3000
120.0
FCD45
0.0000
0.0
0.000
FCD45
0.0000
0.0
SS41
0.0000
0.0
0.000
SS41
0.0000
0.0
S45C
0.0000
0.0
0.000
S45C
0.0000
0.0
SKD11
0.0000
0.0
0.000
SKD11
0.0000
0.0
SUS304
0.0000
0.0
0.000
SUS304
0.0000
0.0
AL1
0.0000
0.0
0.000
AL1
0.0000
0.0
AL2
0.0000
0.0
0.000
AL2
0.0000
0.0
SET FEEDRATE AMOUNT BY MAX. VALUE
<

WORK

MENU

MATERL

RETURN

203

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

NOTE
1 The cutting conditions for generalpurpose tools need to be
specified when cutting conditions for bar machining or
pattern repeating are automatically determined.
Enter the following three items in the cutting condition data
for generalpurpose tools:
One of the three tool material types
Either rough machining or finish machining
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types
When a workpiece material can be selected from 24 types,
pressing the [WORK MATERL] soft key displays data on
subsequent 16 types of workpiece materials.
(2) Cutting condition data for finish machining
The feed amount for finish machining with a generalpurpose tool
is calculated based on the surface roughness using the following
formula:

F=

8R
1000

: Feed amount

: Radius of a tool tip

: Surface roughness

That is, the larger the radius of the tool, the larger the feed amount. For
a tool with a large radius, such as round nose tools, therefore, a clamp
value for the feed amount needs to be set in the cutting condition data for
finish machining with a generalpurpose tool.

204

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.2.2
Cutting Condition Data
for Threading Tools

Pressing the [3] soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for threading tools.
To display the cutting condition data screen for each tool material, press
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for threading)
80
1

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

INPUT
INPUT

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

(CUT SPD.)
(CUT DPTH)
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (THREAD) ***


CARBID BITE
MATERIAL CUT SPD.
(M/MIN.)
FC25
80.0
FCD45
0.0
SS41
0.0
S45C
0.0
SKD11
0.0
SUS304
0.0
AL1
0.0
AL2
0.0
<

CUT DPTH
(MM)
1.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000
0.000

WORK
MATERL

MENU
RETURN

NOTE
Enter the following two items in the cutting condition data for
threading tools:
One of the three tool material types
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types

205

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

13.2.3
Cutting Condition Data
for Grooving Tools

B62444E1/04

Pressing the [4] soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for grooving tools.
To display the cutting condition data screen for each tool material, press
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for rough machining)
.5

INPUT

80 INPUT
2 INPUT

(FEED/REV.)

(CUT SPD.)
(CUT DPTH)

Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for finish machining)


.3

INPUT

120 INPUT
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

(FEED/REV.)

(CUT SPD.)
0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (GROOVING) ***


ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID BITE
(SWDTH MM
MM)
CARBID
BITE
MATERIAL FEED/REV.
CUT SPD. CUT DPTH MATERIAL FEED/REV.
CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.)
(M/MIN.) (MM)
(MM/REV.)
(M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000 80.0 2.000 FC25
0.3000
120.0
FCD45 0.0000 0.0
0.000 FCD45
0.0000
0.0
SS41
0.0000 0.0
0.000 SS41
0.0000
0.0
S45C
0.0000 0.0
0.000 S45C
0.0000
0.0
SKD11 0.0000 0.0
0.000 SKD11
0.0000
0.0
SUS304 0.0000 0.0
0.000 SUS304 0.0000
0.0
AL1
0.0000 0.0
0.000 AL1
0.0000
0.0
AL2
0.0000 0.0
0.000 AL2
0.0000
0.0
SET FEEDRATE AMOUNT BY MAX. VALUE
<

WORK

MENU

MATERL

RETURN

Because the feed amount required for finish machining for trapezoidal
grooves is calculated based on the surface roughness and radius of the tool
tip, a clamp value for the feed amount needs to be set, as in the cutting
conditions for generalpurpose tools.
NOTE
Enter the following three items in the cutting condition data
for grooving tools:
One of the three tool material types
Either rough machining or finish machining
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types
Cutting condition data for rough machining is only used for ordinary and
slanted grooves. Cutting condition data for finish machining is used for
trapezoidal grooves.
206

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.2.4
Cutting Condition Data
for Drilling Tools

Pressing the [5] soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for drilling tools.
To display the cutting condition data screen for each tool material, press
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for drilling)

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

.5

INPUT

(FEED/REV.)

60

INPUT

(CUT SPD.)

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (DRILL) ***


CARBID DRIL
(SDIA.
MM
MATERIAL FEED/REV. CUT SPD.
(MM/REV.) (M/MIN.)
FC25
0.5000
60.0
FCD45
0.0000
0.0
SS41
0.0000
0.0
S45C
0.0000
0.0
SKD11
0.0000
0.0
SUS304
0.0000
0.0
AL1
0.0000
0.0
AL2
0.0000
0.0
<

WORK

DRILL

CNT.DR REAMA

MM)

BORE

MATERL

MENU
RETURN

To select the cutting condition data screen for the desired drilling tool,
press one of the [DRILL], [CNT.DR], [REAMA], and [BORE] soft keys.
When the desired cutting condition data screen is selected, the name of
the relevant soft key is displayed in reverse.
NOTE
1 Enter the following three items in the cutting condition data
for drilling tools:
One of the three tool material types
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types
2 Cutting condition data for a throwaway drill can be
calculated by multiplying the cutting condition data (feed
amount and cutting speed) by coefficients.
Set the coefficient for the cutting speed in parameter No.
9055 and the coefficient for the feed amount in parameter
No. 9057.

207

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

13.2.5
Cutting Condition Data
for Tapping Tools

B62444E1/04

Pressing the [6] soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for tapping tools.
To display the cutting condition data screen for each tool material, press
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for tapping)
80

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

INPUT

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

(CUT SPD.)

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (TAP) ***


CARBID TAP
(SDIA.
MATERIAL CUT SPD.
((M/MIN.)
FC25
80.0
FCD45
0.0
SS41
0.0
S45C
0.0
SKD11
0.0
SUS304
0.0
AL1
0.0
AL2
0.0
<

MM

MM)

WORK
MATERL

MENU
RETURN

NOTE
Enter the following three items in the cutting condition data
for tapping tools:
One of the three tool material types
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types

208

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.2.6

Pressing the [7] soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for Caxis machining tools such as ENDMIL,
SIDCUT, and CHAMFR.

Cutting Condition Data


for Caxis/Yaxis
Machining Tools

To display the cutting condition data screen for each tool material, press
the page key.
Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for rough machining
with end mills)
.5
.3
80

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(FEED QNTH)
(FEED QNTA)
(CUT SPD.)

Example of operation to specify cutting conditions for finish machining


with end mills)
. 2 INPUT
. 3 INPUT
120 INPUT

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

(FEED QNTH)
(FEED QNTA)
(CUT SPD.)

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (ENDMILL) ***


ROUGHING
FINISHING
CARBID ENDMIL (SDIA MM MM)
CARBID ENDMIL (SDIA MM MM)
MATERIAL FEED QNTH FEED QNTA CUTSPD MATERIAL FEEDQNTH FEEDQNTA CUT SPD.

(MM/EDG.)
FC25
0.5000
FCD45 0.0000
SS41
0.0000
S45C
0.0000
SKD11 0.0000
SUS304 0.0000
AL1
0.0000
AL2
0.0000
<

WORK

(MM/EDG.) (M/MIN.)
0.3000
80.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0

FC25
FCD45
SS41
S45C
SKD11
SUS304
AL1
AL2

(MM/EDG.) (MM/EDG.) (M/MIN.)


0.2000
0.3000
120.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
0.0000
0.0000
0.0
MENU

ENDMILSIDECUT CHAMFR

MATERL

RETURN

NOTE
For end mills, two values must be specified for the feed
amount. One is for radial cutting and the other is for axial
cutting.

209

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

(1) Radial cutting

B62444E1/04

(2) Axial cutting

To display one of other cutting condition data screens for Caxis/Yaxis


machining tools, press the desired soft key.
NOTE
For end mills and side cutters, enter the following three
items in the cutting condition data:
One of the three tool material types
Either rough machining or finish machining
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types
For end mills and side cutters, specify the feed amount per
cutting edge.
For chamfering tools, enter the following two items in the
cutting condition data:
One of the three tool material types
One of the eight (or 24) workpiece material types

210

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.2.7

Detailed cutting conditions can be specified by setting coefficients.


Pressing the [8] ([7] soft key if the Caxis graphic conversation function
is not provided) soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for specifying coefficients.
To display the screen for specifying coefficients for each tool material,
press the page key.

Coefficients

(1) Coefficients for generalpurpose tools


The cutting speed can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the feed amount required for finish machining for each workpiece
material.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for generalpurpose tools)
0.2 INPUT
0.4 INPUT
0.6 INPUT
0.8 INPUT
1.667 INPUT
1.500 INPUT
1.333 INPUT
1.200 INPUT
1.000 INPUT
1.667 INPUT


101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

(FEED/REV. 1)
(FEED/REV. 2)
(FEED/REV. 3)
(FEED/REV. 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)


RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


FINISHING
GENERAL
FEED/REV.
(MM/REV.)
0.20 0.40 0.60 0.80
MATERIAL
FC25
1.667 1.500 1.333 1.200 1.000
FCD45
1.667 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SS41
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
S45C
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SKD11
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SUS304
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL1
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL2
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(CUT SPD.)
<

WORK

MENU

MATERL

RETURN

211

GUIDE

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

NOTE
The coefficients for the reference feed amount must always
be 1.000. Not all boundary values and coefficients need to
be specified.
(2) Coefficients for threading tools
The depth of the first cutting can be increased or decreased according to
the range of the thread lead for each workpiece material.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for threading tools)
1
2
3
4
0.3
0.6
0.9
1.0
1.2
0.4

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER TH
OUTTER TH

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(LEAD 1)
(LEAD 2)
(LEAD 3)
(LEAD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

[CAP. :HEADL]
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


THREAD
LEAD
(MM/REV.)
1.00 2.00 3.00 4.00
MATERIAL
FC25
0.300 0.600 0.900 1.000 1.200
FCD45
0.400 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SS41
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
S45C
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SKD11
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SUS304
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL1
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
AL2
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(CUT DPTH)
<

WORK

MENU

MATERL

RETURN

212

GUIDE

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(3) Coefficients for grooving tools


The feed amount can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the width of a grooving tool for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for grooving tools)
2
4
6
8
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(GRV WIDTH 1)
(GRV WIDTH 2)
(GRV WIDTH 3)
(GRV WIDTH 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


GROOVE
GRV WIDTH
2
4
6
8
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(FEED/REV)
<

MENU
RETURN

GUIDE

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (4
mm to 6 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SWDTH field of the cutting condition data screen for
grooving tools.

213

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(4) Coefficients for drills


The feed amount can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the nominal diameter of a drill for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for drills)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


DRIL
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(FEED/REV)
<

MENU
RETURN

GUIDE

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (20
mm to 30 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for drills.

214

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(5) Coefficients for center drills


The feed amount can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the nominal diameter of a center drill for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for center drills
1
2
3
4
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)


[CAP. :HEADL]

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


CNT.DR
NOMINLD
1
2
3
4
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(FEED/REV)
<

MENU

GUIDE

RETURN

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (2
mm to 3 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for Center
drills.

215

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(6) Coefficients for reamers


The feed amount can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the nominal diameter of a reamer for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for reamers)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


REAMER
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(FEED/REV)
<

MENU

GUIDE

RETURN

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (20
mm to 30 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for
reamers.

216

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(7) Coefficients for boring tools


The feed amount can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the nominal diameter of a boring tool for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for boring tools)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)


[CAP. :HEADL]

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


BORE
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(FEED/REV)
<

MENU
RETURN

GUIDE

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (20
mm to 30 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for boring
tools.

217

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(8) Coefficients for tapping tools


The feed amount can be increased or decreased according to the range of
the nominal diameter of a tapping tool for each material of the tool.
Example of operation to specify coefficients for tapping tools)
10
20
30
40
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)


[CAP. :HEADL]

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


TAP
NOMINLD
10
20
30
40
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000

(CUT SPD.)
<

MENU
RETURN

GUIDE

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (20
mm to 30 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for tapping
tools.

218

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(9) Coefficients for end mills (Caxis/Yaxis graphic conversation


function)
The feed rate can be increased or decreased according to the range of the
nominal diameter of an end mill for each material of the tool.
In this case, coefficients for rough machining and finish machining can
be specified separately.
Example of operation to specify coefficient for end mills)
3
6
9
12
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(NOMINLD 1)
(NOMINLD 2)
(NOMINLD 3)
(NOMINLD 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)


[CAP. :HEADL]

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


ROUGHING
ENDMIL
NOMINLD
3
6
9
12
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
FINISHING
NOMINLD
0
0
0
0
(MM)
CARBID
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
HISPD
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<

MENU
RETURN

GUIDE

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (6
mm to 9 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SDIA. field of the cutting condition data screen for end
mills.

219

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(10) Coefficients for side cutters (Caxis graphic conversation function)


The feed rate can be increased or decreased according to the range of the
nominal diameter of a side cutter for each material of the tool.
In this case, coefficients for rough machining and finish machining can
be specified separately.
Example of operation to specify coefficient for side cutters)
20
40
60
80
1.2
1.1
1.0
0.9
0.8
0.6

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(NOSE WIDTH 1)
(NOSE WIDTH 2)
(NOSE WIDTH 3)
(NOSE WIDTH 4)
(Coefficient 11)
(Coefficient 12)
(Coefficient 13)
(Coefficient 14)
(Coefficient 15)
(Coefficient 21)


[CAP. :HEADL]

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (COEFIC) ***


ROUGHING
SIDECUT
NOSE WIDTH
3
6
9
12
(MM)
CARBID
1.200 1.100 1.000 0.900 0.800
HISPD
0.600 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
FINISHING
NOSE WIDTH
0
0
0
0
(MM)
CARBID
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
HISPD
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
SPCIAL
0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000 0.000
(FEED/REV)
<

MENU

GUIDE

RETURN

NOTE
The groove width for which coefficient data 1.000 is set (10
mm to 5 mm in the above example) is displayed in the
SWDTH field of the cutting condition data screen for side
cutters.

220

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.2.8
Surface Roughness
Data

For each finishing after bar machining, pattern repeating, and machining
of trapezoidal grooves, the surface roughness can be selected from ten
levels.
Pressing the [9] ([8] soft key it the Caxis graphic conversation function
is not provided) soft key on the tool data menu screen displays the cutting
condition data screen for the surface roughness.
Example of operation to specify the surface roughness)
60
40
30
25
20
15
10
7
4
3

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

OUTTER
T0505
OUTTER
T0101
OUTTER
T0202
OUTR TH T0404
OUTR TH T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 1)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 2)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 3)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 4)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 5)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 6)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 7)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 8)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 9)
(SURFACE ROUGHNESS 10)

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

*** MACHINING CONDITION (ROUGH) ***


RGH CODE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

SURFACE ROUGHNESS
(MM/1000)
60.0
40.0
30.0
25.0
20.0
15.0
10.0
7.0
4.0
3.0

<

MENU
RETURN

221

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

13.3

B62444E1/04

In drilling, entering one of the final processes automatically determines


the required preprocesses.
Pressing the [10] soft key ([9] soft key if the Caxis graphic conversation
function is not provided) on the tool data menu screen displays the
pretool list screen. Up to five pretools can be registered for each final
tool.

PRETOOL LIST

Example of operation to specify pretools)


651 INPUT
701 INPUT
601 INPUT

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

(LAST TL)
(PRETOOL 1)
(PRETOOL 2)

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

*** PRETOOL LIST ***

LAST TL
PRETOOL

TOOL NO.
651#01
1 701#01
2 601#01
3
4
5

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

[CAP. :HEADL]
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
60 TW
20.000
TW
40.000
TW
40.000

NO. 01

TL NAME
TAP(F)

NOMILD
20.000

CNT.DR(F)
DRIL (F)

2.000
20.000

SEARCH

<

MENU TOOL
RETURN LIST

To display the registeredtool directory screen, pressing the [TOOL


LIST] soft key.
To search the list of pretools for a pretool for which a tool management
number has been registered at the final tool column, enter the tool
management number with numeric keys and press the [SEARCH] soft
key.

222

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.4

Pressing the [11] soft key ([10] soft key if the Caxis graphic conversation
function is not provided) on the tool data menu screen displays the
chuck/tail stock figure setting screen.

CHUCK/TAIL STOCK
FIGURE DATA
13.4.1

Example of operation to specify a chuck figure)

Chuck Figure Data

[EXT.]

(Chuck type)

20
20
10
15

(Dimension L)
(Dimension W)
(Dimension L1)
(Dimension W1)

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

[CAP. :HEADL]
101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** CHUCK FIGURE ***


NO. TYPE
1 EXT
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
<

EXT.

L
20.0

W
20.0

INT. CHUCK

L1
10.0

W1
15.0

L1
W
W1

TAIL
STOCK

MENU
RETURN

(1) External claw chuck

(2) Internal claw chuck


L

L1

W1

223

W1

L1

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

NOTE
Up to 10 types or up to 60 types (Option) of figures can be
registered for the chuck figure data. These figures are used
for animated simulation and the specification of chuck
barriers.

13.4.2
Chuck Data Extension
Function (Optional)

<

EXT.

INT.

OUTS

(1) Outline
This function increases the number of chuck figure data items that
can be registered in FANUC Super CAP T/II T, from 10 (standard)
to 60.
(2) Detailed specifications
(a) Registering chuck figure data
Up to 60 items of chuck data can be registered, using the chuck
figure data screen.
(b) Adding the Outer Special chuck type
In the conventional specification, two types of chucks, Inner
and Outer, can be registered. By enabling the chuck data
extension function, three types of chucks including these types
and an additional Outer Special chuck type can be registered.
The Outer Special chuck type is supported for the user to ease
management, while the dimensions set for that type are the same
as those set for the external claw type.

CHUCK

TOOL
TAIL
ENTRY
STOCK

MENU
RETURN

The [OUTS] soft key is displayed on the chuck figure


data screen.

NOTE
When the FS16/18TA or FS16/18TTA is used, enabling
this function reduces the number of processes that can be
used in the conversational program by 10 to 15.

224

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

13.4.3
Tail Stock Figure Data

Pressing the [TAIL STOCK] soft key displays the tail stock figure data
screen.
Example of operation to specify a tail stock figure)
30
20
20
15
10
20

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(Dimension D0)
(Dimension L0)
(Dimension D1)
(Dimension L1)
(Dimension D2)
(Dimension L2)
[CAP. :HEADL]

101#L
102#R
103#R
251#L
252#R

OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTTER
OUTR TH
OUTR TH

T0505
T0101
T0202
T0404
T0606

RN
RN
RN
RN
RN

0.400
0.400
0.400
0.000
0.000

AC
AC
AC
AN
AN

90
90
90
60
60

AN
AN
AN

60
60
60

TW
TW
TW
TW
TW

20.000
20.000
20.000
40.000
40.000

*** TAIL STOCK FIGURE ***


NO.
D0
L0
D1
L1
D2
L2

1
30.000
20.000
20.000
15.000
10.000
20.000

D2

D1

L2
<

CHUCK

D0

L1

L0

MENU

TAIL
STOCK

RETURN

D Dimensions of a tail stock figure

D2

L2

D1

L1

D0

L0

NOTE
Four types of figures can be registered for the tail stock
figure data. The figures are used for animated simulation
of tail stocks.

225

13. SETTING DATA

OPERATION

13.5

The tool data file, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool
list, and chuck/tail stock figure data can be punched out on external I/O
devices.
(1) Connect an external I/O device to the system and specify the
required parameters such as a device selection.
(2) Change the mode to the EDIT mode.
(3) Call the tool data menu screen and press the [+] rightmost soft key
to display the following soft keys. Then, press the [PUNCH] soft
key.

PUNCHING OUT
SETTING DATA

<

10

B62444E1/04

11

READ

PUNCH

CLEAR

13.6

Setting data that is punched out in the above procedure can be read again.

READING SETTING
DATA

(1) Connect the external I/O device to the system and specify the
required parameters such as a device selection.
(2) Set setting data for parameter writing to 1.
(3) When the FANUC CASSETTE is used, specify a file number in
parameter 9877 (TLFLNO).
(4) Call the tool data menu screen and bring the system to an emergency
stop.
(5) Press the [READ] soft key.

13.7

Tool data file, cutting condition data, surface roughness data, pretool list, and
chuck/tail stock figure data can be cleared.

CLEARING SETTING
DATA

(1) Set setting data for parameter writing to 1.


(2) Call the tool data menu screen, change the mode to the EDIT mode,
then bring the system to an emergency stop.
(3) Press the [CLEAR] soft key.

226

B62444E1/04

14

OPERATION

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

Using the batch data input/output function, multiple types of data such as
NC parameters, NC offset values, NC programs, and PMC parameters,
can be entered or output as a batch by using a generalpurpose external
input/output unit such as the FANUC Cassette Adaptor.
NOTE
Before the batch data input/output function can be used, bit
6 (DIO) of parameter No. 9772 must be set to 1.

227

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

14.1
DATA THAT CAN BE
ENTERED AND
OUTPUT

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(a) NC parameter: All parameters, except the option parameters and


the parameter (No. 1010) used to specify the number of axes
(b) Offset value: All wear/geometry compensation value data
(c) NC program: All NC programs (Part of the NC programs can also
be entered and output.)
(d) PMC parameter: All counter values, keep relay data, timer data,
and data (Part of the data can also be entered and output.)
(e) Tool file: All tool data files, cutting condition data, surface
roughness data, pretool lists, and chuck/tailstock geometry data
(f) Conversational program: All conversational programs (Conversational programs cannot be entered and output on aprogram
byprogram basis.)
NOTE
NC parameters cannot be entered and output together with
other types of data. All other types of data can be entered
and output as a batch.

228

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

14.2

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

(1) Connect an external input/output unit, then set the necessary


parameters, including the unit selection parameter:
Channel used on the NC = 0
Stop bit = 2
Parity = None
Character length = 8
Baud rate = Corresponds to NC parameter No. 0103.
XON/OFF control = Used
(2) Select the EDIT mode. When a twopath lathe is used, select the
screen for tool post 1.

DATA OUTPUT

(3) Display the main menu screen, then press [+] to display the soft keys
on page 2.
(4) Press [17] to display the data input/output menu screen.
Sample data input/output menu screen (for a twopath lathe)
[CAP.:HEADL]

DATA I/O SCREEN


PUNCH
SINGLE

SINGLE

1.NC PARAMETER (HD1)

7.NC PARAMETER (HD2)

2.NC OFFSET
(HD1)
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1)
4.PMC PARAMETER

5.NC OFFSET (HD2)


6.NC PROGRAM (HD2)

8.CAP TOOL FILE


9.CAP PROGRAM

<

READ

PUNCH

I/O
SET UP

NOTE
When a onepath lathe is used, the data selection menu for
tool post 2 is not displayed.
(5) Press [PUNCH]. The screen below appears.

229

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

[CAP.:HEADL]

DATA I/O SCREEN


PUNCH
SINGLE

SINGLE

1.NC PARAMETER (HD1)

2.NC OFFSET
(HD1)
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1)
4.PMC PARAMETER

7.NC PARAMETER (HD2)

5.NC OFFSET (HD2)


6.NC PROGRAM (HD2)

8.CAP TOOL FILE


9.CAP PROGRAM

SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT

<

NC
PARAM

NC
NC
OFFSET PROG

PMC
PARAM

CAP
TOOL

CAP
PROG

NC HD2 NC HD2 NC HD2 SELECT 


PARAM OFFSET PROG
END

NOTE
When a onepath lathe is used, the soft keys below are
displayed.

<

NC
NC
PARAM OFFSET

NC
PMC
PROG PARAM

CAP
TOOL

CAP
PROG

I/O
PRE SELECT 
SET UP
PG
END

(6) Press the soft keys corresponding to the types of data to be output.
The selected types of data are displayed in reverse video (in green).
After selecting the desired types of data, press [EXEC].
NOTE
1 To cancel data type selection, press [PREPG]. The
original screen is displayed.
2 NC parameters cannot be output together with other types
of data. If several types of data as well as NC parameters
are selected for output, the selection of all types of data,
except the NC parameters, is cancelled.
(7) When [NC PROG] or [NC HD2 PROG] ([NC PROG] for a onepath
lathe) is pressed, a registered NC program directory is displayed as
shown below.

230

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

[CAP.:HEADL]

DATA I/O SCREEN


PUNCH
SINGLE
1.NC PARAMETER

SINGLE
(HD1)

REGISTERO PROGRAM

7.NC PARAMETER (HD2)

2.NC OFFSET (HD1) 5.NC OFFSET (HD2) 8.CAP TOOL FILE


3.NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6.NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9.CAP PROGRAM
4.PMC PARAMETER

*** HEAD 1 ***


00012
00110
00120
00150
00160

SELECT THE DATA WHICH YOU WANT TO PUNCH OUT

<

ALL
ALL SELECT CANCEL SELECT
SELECT CANCEL
END

[ALL SELECT]: Press this soft key to punch all programs. When this
soft key is pressed, the following soft keys are displayed:

EXEC REALLY? YES[EXEC] NO[CANCEL]


<

EXEC

CANCEL

Press [EXEC] to specify punch for all programs. Press [CANCEL] to


cancel punch for all programs.
ALL SELECT

Press this soft key to cancel punch for all


programs. When this soft key is pressed, the soft
keys displayed when [ALL SELECT] is pressed
are displayed.
Press [EXEC] to cancel punch for all programs.
Press [CANCEL] to abandon cancelation of
punch for all programs.

SELECT

When specifying an NC program to be punched,


position the cursor to the program number, then
press this soft key.

CANCEL

Press this soft key to cancel punch for an NC


program.

SELECT END

Press this soft key once punch for NC programs


has been completed.

(8) When [EXEC] is pressed, the following screen appears. Press


[EXEC] to start data output. Press [CANCEL] to cancel data output.
231

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

[CAP.:HEADL]

DATA I/O SCREEN


PUNCH
SINGLE

SINGLE

1.NC PARAMETER (HD1)

2.NC OFFSET
(HD1)
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1)
4.PMC PARAMETER

7.NC PARAMETER (HD2)

5.NC OFFSET
6.NC PROGRAM

(HD2)
(HD2)

8.CAP TOOL FILE


9.CAP PROGRAM

EXEC REALLY? YES[EXEC] NO[CANCEL]


<

I/O
SET UP

EXEC CANCEL

When data output is started, OUTPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of


the screen. The type of data being output is indicated by the data type
name blinking in reverse video (in yellow). Data that has already been
output is indicated by displaying the corresponding data type name in
light blue.
When the data output terminates with an error, the data type name is
displayed in red.
(9) Upon the completion of data output, press [
menu screen.

] to display the main

NOTE
1 The format of the data output with the batch data
input/output function differs from that used when outputting
data conventionally, on a typebytype basis.
2 The format of the data output for a onepath lathe differs
from that of the data output for a twopath lathe.
3 Only the data output with the batch data input/output
function can be entered by using the same function.
4 A range of PMC parameters to be output can be specified
by using the NC parameters, as shown below.

NC PARAMETER
PMCIOS

9090

PMCIOS

232

Start address of the PMC parameter D area data


to be output

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

NC PARAMETER
PMCIOE

9091

PMCIOE

End address of the PMC parameter D area data


to be output

When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) = 0 and No. 9091 (PMCIOE) = 0:


All PMC parameters, including counter values, keep relay data, timer
data, and data are output.
When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) = No. 9091 (PMCIOE) 0 0:
The PMC parameter D area data (one data item only) at a specified address
is output.
When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) < No. 9091 (PMCIOE):
The PMC parameter D area data between a specified start address and end
address is output.
When No. 9090 (PMCIOS) > No. 9091 (PMCIOE):
All PMC parameter D area data is output.

233

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

14.3
DATA INPUT

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Data output, performed as described in Section 14.2, can be entered as a


batch in a similar way.
(1) Before reading NC parameters, manually set any option parameters
and parameter (No. 1010), used to specify the number of axes.
(2) Connect an external input/output unit, then set the necessary
parameters, including the unit selection parameter, in the same way
as for input.
(3) Select EDIT mode. When a twopath lathe is used, select the screen
for tool post 1.
(4) Release the protection for each type of input data.
(a) NC parameter
: Set PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
to 1.
(b) Offset value
: Set offset data protection to off (KEY1
= 1).
(c) NC program
: Set program protection to off (KEY3
= 1).
(d) PMC parameter
: Set PARAMETER WRITE ENABLE
to 1.
(e) Tool file
: Set offset data protection to off
(KEY1 = 1).
(f) Conversational program : Set program protection to off (KEY3
= 1).
(5) Display the data input/output menu screen.
(6) Press [READ]. The screen below appears.

[CAP.:HEADL]

DATA I/O SCREEN


READ
SINGLE

SINGLE

1.NC PARAMETER (HD1)

7.NC PARAMETER (HD2)

2.NC OFFSET
(HD1) 5.NC OFFSET
3.NC PROGRAM
(HD1) 6.NC PROGRAM
4.PMC PARAMETER

(HD2) 8.CAP TOOL FILE


(HD2) 9.CAP PROGRAM

SELECT THE FILE WHICH YOU WANT TO READ

<

NC
OTHERS NC HD2
PARAM
PARAM

I/O
SET UP

234

C PRE SELECT
PG
END

B62444E1/04

OPERATION

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

NOTE
1 When a onepath lathe is used, the data selection menu for
tool post 2 is not displayed.
2 When an input/output unit other than the FANUC Cassette
Adaptor is used, [NC PARAM], [OTHERS], and [NC HD2
PARAM] are not displayed.
(7) When an external input/output unit other than the FANUC Cassette
Adaptor is used, perform read data preparation (such as that done
when searching for the start of data).
When the FANUC Cassette Adaptor is used, the user need not
perform this preparation: the data is called automatically.
(8) Press [NC PARAM] to read the NC parameters for tool post 1. Press
[NC HD2 PARAM] to read the NC parameters for tool post 2.
Press [OTHERS] to read data other than the NC parameters.
Each selected type of data is indicated by displaying the data type
name in reverse characters (in green). When the input of data other
than the NC parameters is specified, the data types actually read
cannot be identified beforehand; all data type names are displayed
in reverse characters (in green).
NOTE
To cancel data read, press [PREPG]. The original screen
is displayed.
(9) When [EXEC] is pressed, the following screen appears.
EXEC REALLY? YES[EXEC] NO[CANCEL]
<

I/O
EXEC
SET UP

CANCEL

(10) Press [EXEC] to start data input. Press [CANCEL] tocancel data
input.
If several types of data, other than the NC parameters, are output as a batch
beforehand, those types of data can also be read as a batch.
During data input, INPUT blinks in the lowerright corner of the screen.
Data being read is indicated by its data type name, blinking in reverse
video (in yellow). Data that has been read normally is indicated by
displaying the data type name in light blue. When the input of data
terminates with an error, the data type name is displayed in red.
(11) Upon the completion of data input, press [ ] to display the main
menu screen.

235

14. BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT


FUNCTION

14.4
I/O PARAMETER
DISPLAY

OPERATION

When [I/O SET UP] is pressed, the parameters set for the reader/punch
interface are displayed as shown below.

[CAP.:HEADL]

DATA I/O SCREEN


SINGLE
1.NC PARAMETER (HD1)

B62444E1/04

SINGLE
7.NC PARAMETER (HD2)

2.NC OFFSET (HD1) 5.NC OFFSET (HD2) 8.CAP TOOL FILE


3.NC PROGRAM (HD1) 6.NC PROGRAM (HD2) 9.CAP PROGRAM
4.PMC PARAMETER

I/O PARAMETER
SEL CHANNEL
BAUD RATE
STOP BIT
SEL DEVICE

0
4800
2
2

<

RETURN

The user can display the original screen by pressing [RETURN].


NOTE
The Super CAP II T constantly displays the I/O parameters.
So, [I/O PARAMETER] or [RETURN] shown above is not
displayed.

236

B62444E1/04

15

OPERATION

15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY


COLORS (Super CAP II T)

CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY COLORS (Super CAP II T)

With the Super CAP II T, it is possible to change the colors of displays


on the screen.

237

15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY


COLORS (Super CAP II T)

15.1
HOW TO CHANGE
DISPLAY COLORS

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(1) Press [16] on the basic menu to cause the color scheme setting screen
to appear. (Pressing [+] causes [16] to appear.)
(2) Place the cursor on a number from 1 to 14 or Background color.
Each number corresponds to each part color, as listed below.
Number

Corresponding part color

Standard set color

1 Alarm display in the upper right section of the conversational screen, tool
in animated drawing mode, inoperable display of the status (drawing,
execution, and conversion) at the top
of the conversational screen

Red

2 Warning message display, soft key


characters, bar graph representing
machining time on the process edit
screen, operable display (drawing,
execution, and conversion) at the top
of the conversational screen, and tool
interference section in animated drawing mode

Green

3 Title bar at the top of the conversational screen

Yellow

4 Soft key characters, and characters in


expansions of drawings on the detail
data screen

Blue

5 Soft key characters, and bar graph


representing machining time on the
process edit screen

Pink

6 Not used

Light blue

7 Window title characters, highlighted


soft keys, cursor, and input keys at the
bottom of the conversational screen

White

8 Title bar of the contour data input window

Yellow

9 Title bars of windows other than item


8.

Blue

10 Cross section of the blank

Dark green

11 Window background, product shape


in animated drawing mode

Light gray

12 Cross section of chuck and tailstock

Blue

13 Background of data display on the


conversational screen

Light gray

14 Soft key shade, and window shade

Dark gray

Background Background of the conversational


screen

238

Gray

15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY


COLORS (Super CAP II T)

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

(3) Press the soft key that corresponds to the color element (red, green,
or blue) to be changed.

<

RED
15

GREEN
0

BRIGHT

BLUE
0

DARK

RETURN +

(4) Pressing [BRIGHT] makes brighter the color element at 3. Pressing


[DARK] makes it darker. Use of these soft keys can change the
number displayed on each color element key between 0 (dark) and
15 (light). The color displayed is determined by mixing the color
elements in proportion as indicated by the numbers. For example,
if the number indicated at each color element is 0, the synthesized
color is black. If the number is 15, it is white.
(5) Pressing [RETURN] brings you back to the basic menu screen.

239

15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY


COLORS (Super CAP II T)

15.2
STORING AND
CALLING DISPLAY
COLOR DATA

15.2.1
Storing Display Color
Data

< MEMORY

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

Changes to the display color made in Section 15.1 can be stored. Once
a changed display color is stored, any subsequent changes can be nullified
by calling the stored display color.
All display color numbers 1 to 14 and background color are stored in
groups. Up to four groups of display colors can be stored. One of the
groups can be stored as parameter data. This parameter data can be output
and input, similarly to other parameters.

(1) After you specify a display color, press [+] to cause soft key page 2
to appear.

CALL

COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 COLOR4 RETURN


PARAM

(2) Press [COLOR1 PARAM], [COLOR2], [COLOR3], or [COLOR4]


to select a group to be stored. If [COLOR1 PARAM] is pressed, the
display color data is stored in parameters No. 9061 to 9075. If any
other key is pressed, it is impossible to output the color display data.
So, clearing the NC memory results in the display color data being
deleted.
(3) Pressing [MEMORY] causes the following soft keys to appear.

< CANCEL

EXEC

(4) Pressing [EXEC] causes all color displays to be stored in the display
color data group selected at 2.
Pressing [CANCEL] stops storing the display color data.

240

OPERATION

B62444E1/04

15.2.2

15. CHANGING SCREEN DISPLAY


COLORS (Super CAP II T)

(1) Pressing [+] causes soft key page 2 to appear.

Calling Display Color


Data

< MEMORY

CALL

COLOR1 COLOR2 COLOR3 COLOR4 RETURN


PARAM

(2) Press [COLOR1 PARAM], [COLOR2], [COLOR3], or [COLOR4]


to select a group to be called. If [COLOR1 PARAM] is pressed, the
display color data stored in parameters No. 9061 to 9075 is restored
(3) Pressing [CALL] causes the following soft keys to appear.

<

CANCEL

EXEC

(4) Pressing [EXEC] changes the display color of the screen to the color
in a display color data group selected at 2.
Pressing [CANCEL] stops calling the stored display color data.

241

III. TYPES OF MACHINING


PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

WARNING
Before going to the next step of handling or operation, check the display on the screen carefully
to assure that the intended data has been entered correctly.
If the machine is used with incorrect data, the tool may bump against the machine and/or
workpiece, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

WARNING
When process data is entered, tool and cutting condition data is determined automatically
according to the selected machining type and area. Be sure to check that the automatically
determined data is correct.
If the data is incorrect, correct it.
If the tool and cutting condition data is incorrect, the tool may bump against the workpiece, or the
machine may be forced to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the tool
and/or machine, and even injuries.

WARNING
When entering contour data, make sure that the specified shape is the one that can be machined
by the machining type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

CAUTION
After figure data is entered, make sure that the specified shape is the one that can be machined
by the machining type and area selected as the process data.
If an incorrect shape is specified, the tool may bump against the workpiece and/or machine,
possibly causing damage to the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

WARNING
After figure data is entered, make sure that the coordinates and arc radius of each specified shape
are correct; the specified shape is displayed graphically by pressing the soft key [PLOT].
If the entered shape data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct product.

WARNING
After contour data is entered, make sure that the coordinates and arc radius of each specified shape
are correct; the specified shape can be displayed graphically. It is especially necessary to make sure
that any data automatically calculated using a conversational function is definitely correct.
If the data is incorrect, it is impossible to create a correct product.

245

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR 2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

NOTE
In some machining programs created in the conversational mode, the offset data for specific
offset numbers may have been rewritten. (16: The number of offset groups is 16. 32: The
number of offset groups is 32.) 64:The number of offset groups is 64. 97:The number of offset
groups is 97.) Those offset numbers should not be used.
Refer to the appropriate manual, issued by the machine tool builder, for details of these offset
numbers (16, 32, 64, and 97, according to the number of offset groups).

246

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.1

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

Roundbar materials are machined by bar machining.

BAR MACHINING
+X

Material figure

+Z
Product figure

1.1.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
automatically created, and the machining type menu is displayed on the
soft key field.
Pressing the [BAR] soft key selects bar machining.
The process data varies according to the machining area (See the
following items.)
(1) For the outer surface, inner surface, and end face

PROC
BAR
PROC
BAR

(01)
AREA
(R) OUTER END
(01)
AREA
(F) OUTER END

HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE


HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101

NOTE
One of outer surface, inner surface, and end face is
displayed as area data according to the specified machining
area.

247

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) For the outer surface, inner surface, and end face plus automatic
residual machining
PROC (01)
AREA
BAR (R) OUTER MID
AREA
RESIDUAL
PROC (01)
AREA
BAR (F) OUTER MID
AREA
RESIDUAL

HEAD
HEADL

TOOLNO
102
TOOLNO
105
HEAD ROUGHNES
HEADL
5
ROUGHNES
5

CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE


80
0.25
2.000
0101
CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE
80
0.25
2.000
0101
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
102
80
0.25
0101
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
105
80
0.25
0101

NOTE
1 One of OUTER MID, INTER MID, and FACE MID is
displayed as area data according to the specified machining
area.
2 The above process data is for 2path lathes. For 1path
lathes, there is no HEAD data item.
3 Some process data is not displayed on the program screen
but displayed only on the detail data screen.

The detail data screen is displayed by pressing [DETAIL DATA]. The


figure displayed on the detail data screen may vary depending on the
machine being used. For details, refer to the manual supplied by the
machine tool builder.

248

B62444E1/04

1.1.2
Details of Setting Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

Among the following data items, those preceded by a J mark are


displayed on the detail data screen. A separate detail data screen is
displayed for roughing processes and finishing processes.
The data marked with J at its left is displayed on both the program screen
and detail data screen.
Machining area
Select the desired type of machining area from the following menu items.
Those are displayed on the window
1 = Outer surface
2 = Outer surface + automatic residual machining
3 = Inner surface
4 = Inner surface + automatic residual machining
5 = End face
6 = End face + automatic residual machining
(1) Outer surface
Outer surface portion which does not require automatic residual
machining. Monotonous change along the Zaxis.

(2) Outer surface + automatic residual machining


Outer surface portion which requires automatic residual machining.
Monotonous change along the Zaxis.

(3) Inner surface


Inner surface portion which does not require automatic residual
machining

249

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(4) Inner surface + automatic residual machining


Inner surface portion which requires automatic residual machining.
Monotonous change along in the Zaxis.

(5) End face


End face portion which does not require automatic residual
machining

(6) End face + automatic residual machining


End face portion which requires automatic residual machining.
Monotonous change along the Xaxis.

NOTE
1 When a machining area is specified, the tools for rough
machining and cutting conditions are determined
automatically.

250

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(1) Roughing process


TOOLNO.

: Management number of a rough machining


tool

CUTSPD

: Cutting speed in rough machining

FEED/REV

: Feed amount in rough machining

CUTDPTH

: Depth of cut in rough machining

TCODE

: T code of a rough machining tool

JRotation direction

: Spindle rotation direction in rough machining

JPASS POINT 1 X1: X coordinate of pass point 1, traversed by the


tool as it moves from the tool exchange
position to a cutting start point
Z1: Z coordinate of pass point 1, traversed by the
tool as it moves from the tool exchange
position to a cutting start point
JPASS POINT 2 X2: X coordinate of pass point 2, traversed by the
tool as it moves from the tool exchange
position to a cutting start point
Z2: Z coordinate of pass point 2, traversed by the
tool as it moves from the tool exchange
position to a cutting start point
NOTE
2 The position of pass point 2 is automatically determined
from parameter Nos. 9780 and 9781.

JSTART PNT

CX: X coordinate of a cutting start point


CZ: Z coordinate of a cutting start point

NOTE
3 When a machining area is specified, a cutting start point is
automatically calculated from blank profile data entered
initially.

JESCAPE AMNT EA: Travel along the Xaxis (in outer/inner surface
machining: diameter) or along the Zaxis (in
end facing: radius) for retraction after cutting
(1) Standard roughing

(2) High speed roughing

Clearance

251

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
4 When a bar machining process is newly created, the
clearance specified in parameter No. 9797 (along the
Xaxis) or parameter No. 9798 (along the Zaxis) is set
automatically.
JSDRCT.

RS: Direction of spindle rotation for rough machining.


Choose from [NORMAL] and [REVERSE].
JFINISHINGFX: Finishing allowance along the Xaxis (diameter)
FZ: Finishing allowance along the Zaxis
NOTE
5 The finishing allowance is set automatically to the value
specified on the initial setting screen. A different value,
however, can be specified for each process.
JPROC MOVE. MP: Speed of tool positioning after cutting in a
roughing process.
Choose from [STANDARD] and [HIGH
SPEED].
[STANDARD]

[HIGH SPEED]

The tool is retracted after cutting along


the final figure outline.

JSPINDL GEAL.

The tool is retracted immediately after


cutting.

P: Spindle gear
Select the desired type of SPINDLE GEAR
from the follwing menu items.
1 = Automatic
2 = Low speed
3 = Medium speed 1
4 = Medium speed 2
5 = High speed

NOTE
6 When automatic mode is selected, a spindle gear is
automatically selected according to the range of travel for
the tool. The spindle gears for low speed, medium speed
1, medium speed 2, and high speed correspond to the
spindle speeds determined by parameters No. 3741
(maximum speed for spindle gear 1), 3742 (maximum
speed for spindle gear 2), 3743 (maximum speed for spindle
gear 3), and 3744 (maximum speed for spindle gear 4),
respativety.

252

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

COOLANT

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

CM: Coolant specificatin


Select either [ON] or [OFF].
When ON is selected, M8 is output. When
OFF is selected, M9 is output.
1 = ON (M8)
2 = OFF (M9)

NOTE
7 Whether to set the coolant to on or off is determined
automatically according to the specification on the initial
setting screen. A different value, however, can be specified
for each process.

RESIDUAL CUT

AU: Automatic residual machining


specification

Residual after cutting


If there is a residual as shown above, it can be cut automatically with a lefthand
tool as shown below.

Select either [EXEC.] or [NO EXEC.].


NOTE
8 When automatic residual machining is valid, the tools for
residual machining and cutting conditions are automatically
determined.
This data item is not displayed when an OUTER, INNER, or
FACING is specified as a machining area.
(2) FINISHING process
ROUGHESS:

253

Surface roughness of a finished surface.


Choose from [1], [2], [3 ], [4 ], [5 ],
[6 ], [7 ], [8
], [9 ], and [10
]. Set
each surface roughness value from Item 9.
Cutting Conditions (Surface Roughness
Setting) of the tool data menu beforehand.
Surface roughness data is also displayed in the
window.

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
9 In finish machining, a cutting feed amount is calculated for
each contour from the surface roughness and the tooltip
radius of the tool being used. For details, see Section
13.2.1.
The surface roughness of each contour is automatically set
to the process data of the surface roughness specified
above. However, the surface roughness of each contour
can also be modified manually.

NOTE
10 When a surface roughness value is specified, the tool
and cutting conditions for finish machining are
determined automatically.
TOOLNO.

: Management number of a finish machining tool

CUTSPD

: Cutting speed for finish machining

FEED/REV

: Feed amount for finish machining

NOTE
11 For FEED/REV, the result of calculation based on the
process data of surface roughness and the tooltip
radius of the tool being used is displayed. However, the
displayed value is not applied to actual machining. To
modify the actual cutting feed amount for finish
machining, the surface roughness specified for each
contour must be modified.
TCODE

: T code of a finish machining tool

JPASS POINT1

X1: X coordinate of pass point 1 for finish


machining
Z1: Z coordinate of pass point 1 for finish
machining

JPASS POINT2

X2: X coordinate of pass point 2 for finish


machining
Z2: Z coordinate of pass point 2 for finish
machining

JSTART PNT

CX: X coordinate of a cutting start point for finish


machining
CZ: Z coordinate of a cutting start point for finish
machining

NOTE
12 Pass point 2 and the cutting start point are automatically
determined in the same way as for rough machining.

254

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

JESCAPE AMNT EA: Travel along the Xaxis (in outer/inner surface
machining: diameter) or along the Zaxis (in
end facing: radius) for retraction after finish
machining
NOTE
13 For finish bar machining, the finishing tool is moved along
the specified workpiece outline. At the end of machining,
the tool is retracted, cancelling tooltip radius
compensation.
For this clearance, the value obtained by multiplying the tooltip radius
of the tool being used by 2 (or 4 when using a diameter value) is set when
a bar machining process is newly created.
Example of retraction in finish machining:

ESCAPE AMNT

JSDRCT

RS: Direction of spindle rotation for finish


machining. Choose from [NORMAL] and
[REVERSE]
JSPINDL GEAR GM: Spindle gear. Choose from [AUTO], [LOW
GEAR], [MID GEAR 1], [MID GEAR 2], and
[HIGH GEAR].
JCOOLANT
CM: Specifies whether to use coolant. Choose [ON]
or [OFF]. M8 (ON) or M9 (OFF) is output.
JRESIDUAL CUT AU: Specifies automatic residual machining.
Specify whether to perform automatic residual
machining, in the same way as for rough
machining.

255

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.1.3

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

In bar machining, the contour calculation function can be used to specify


the final figure.

Details of Figure Data

NOTE
1 Up to 30 contours can be specified for one process.
(1) Specifying the figure start point
After all process data is entered and checked, move the cursor to the
line next to the process data. The contour start point coordinate input
screen will then be displayed.
START POINT X
START POINT Z

X: Xaxis coordinate (diameter value) of the


contour starting point
Z: Zaxis coordinate value of the contour
start point

(2) Selecting a contour


After input of the above start point coordinate, pressing the
[INSERT] soft key displays the figure selection menu on the soft key
field.

<

CHAM
FER

TANGNT

ROUND

PLOT

[+]

<

FIGURE
PLOT
END

(3) HORIZONTAL LINE


Pressing the [] or [] soft key selects a horizontal line, that is, a
straight line parallel to the Z axis.
DIRECTION

END POINT Z
END POINT X
LENGTH
ROUGHNESS

256

B: Direction of the horizontal line


Select the direction with the [] or
[] soft key.
Z: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the
end point
X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the
horizontal line
Q: Length of the horizontal line
SR: The roughness of the finished face
is selected by the soft key. The
roughness specified by the process
data is set automatically.

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(4) VERTICAL LINE


Pressing the [] or [] soft key selects a vertical line, that is, a
straight line parallel to the X axis.
DIRECTION
B: Direction of the vertical line
END POINT X
X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the end
point
END POINT
Z: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the vertical
line
LENGTH
U: Length of the vertical line
ROUGHNESS
SR: The roughness of the finished face is
selected by the soft key. The roughness
specified by the process data is set
automatically.
(5) TAPER LINE
Pressing the [], [], [], or [] soft key selects a taper line.
DIRECTION
B: Direction of the taper line
TAPER END X CORD X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the
taper line end point
TAPER END Z CORD Z: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the
taper line end point
COMPONENT X
I: Xaxis component of an angle
COMPONENT Z/ANGLE K/J: Angle, or Zaxis component of
an angle
NOTE
2 Specify an angle, together with move direction data, as
shown below.

X
B=

When angle data


of 30 is entered

B=
30

30

30

30

Z
B=

LENGTH
ROUGHNESS

(6) ARC
Pressing the [
DIRECTION
RADIUS

257

B=

Q: Length of the taper line (Radius)


SR: The roughness of the finished face is selected
by the soft key. The roughness specified by the
process data is set automatically.
]or [

] soft key selects an arc.


B: Direction of the are rotation
R: Specify the radius of an arc. A positive
number with a decimal point is to be
specified.

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

ARC END X

X: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the end


point
END Z/ANGLE
Z/J: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the end
point, or the center angle of an arc
CENTER X COORD
I: Absolute Xaxis coordinate of the arc
center
CENTER Z COORD K: Absolute Zaxis coordinate of the arc
center
ROUGHNESS
SR: The roughness of the finished face is
selected by the soft key.
The
roughness specified by the process
data is set automatically.
NOTE
3 No major arc can be entered. For bar machining and pattern
repeating, even a semicircle or minor arc cannot be entered
if that semicircle or minor arc extends over three or more
quadrants.
(7) CHAMFER
Pressing the [CHAMFR] soft key selects chamfering.
BEVEL AMOUNT

I:
I

I: Chamfer amount

ROUGHNESS

SR: The roughness of the finished face is


selected by the soft key.
The
roughness specified by the process
data is set automatically.

NOTE
4 When chamfering is specified, CHAMFER is displayed on
the screen until the next contour is entered.

258

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(8) ROUND
Pressing the [ROUND] soft key selects a corner radius.
ROUND RADIUS R:

Corner radius

NOTE
5 When a round corner is specified, ROUND is displayed on
the screen until the next contour is entered.

ROUGHNESS SR: The roughness of the finished face is selected


by the soft key. The roughness specified by
the process data is set automatically.
(9) TANGNT
Pressing the [TANGNT] soft key specifies that the next contour form
a tangent to the previous contour (either contour must be an arc).
NOTE
6 Be sure to specify a straight line or arc for the next contour.
When a contact point is specified, TANGNT is displayed
on the screen.
(10) End of contour input
Upon completion of the necessary contour input, press [FIGURE
END]. Then, the cursor moves to the next process.

259

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.1.4

A part of a contour is referred to as a figure block.

Details of Contour
Calculation

A figure block with its end point not determined is said to be in the
pending state. A pending figure block is drawn by dashed lines.
On the screen for figure data input (contour data input screen), more data
input items than required are provided. These data items are used to
calculate the cross point with the immediately preceding pending figure
block, and also calculate the end point. The pending state is then released.
NOTE
1 Ten successive figure blocks can be specified as pending
blocks.
(1) Chamfering immediately after a start point
Immediately after a start point, chamfering or can be specified. In this
case, the coordinates of a calculated start point are displayed.

Entered start point

Chamfering
Calculated start point

Immediately after chamfering or corner R, only a horizontal line,


vertical line, slanted line, or arc can be specified.
(2) Chamfering/corner R at the end of a contour
At the end of a contour, chamfering or corner R can be specified. In
this case, enter a temporary figure block as a pending block. In a
temporary figure block, specify only a horizontal line, vertical line,
or slanted line, with its end point pending.
Chamfering

Temporary figure block

Specify the end point of the figure block immediately before the
final figure block, allowing the end point of chamfering or corner R
in the final block to be calculated.

260

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(3) Horizontal line


(a) When the immediately preceding block is pending, and contact
point determination is not specified
i) When the X coordinate of a horizontal line is entered
 The intersection with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. However, this figure is pending.


Intersection

When the immediately preceding block specifies an arc,


the intersection selection request screen appears. Press
[CROSS 1] or [CROSS 2], then press [INSERT] (or
[ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure).
ii) When the X coordinate (X) of a horizontal line is entered,
together with the Z coordinate (Z) of an end point, or a line
length (W)
 The intersection with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated, and the end point is determined.

(X, Z)


Intersection

(End point of )

(End point of )

Intersection

(b) When the immediately preceding figure block specifies a pending


arc, and contact point determination is specified
i) When no data is entered (with the direction of a horizontal line
specified at figure selection)
 Usually, a contact point is automatically calculated from
the rotation direction of the arc and the direction of the
horizontal line. The horizontal line is pending.
If any of the specified directions is invalid, however, a
warning message is displayed to indicate that invalid data
has been entered.
ii) When the Z coordinate (Z) of an end point, or a line length (W)
is entered
 In the same way as in i) above, a contact point is
automatically calculated, and the end point of the
horizontal line is determined.

261

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Z
Contact point

Contact point

(4) Vertical line


(a) When the immediately preceding block is pending, and contact
point determination is not specified
i) When the Z coordinate of a vertical line is entered
 The intersection with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. However, this figure is pending.

Z


Intersection

When the immediately preceding block specifies an arc, the


intersection selection request screen appears. Press [CROSS 1] or
[CROSS 2], then press [INSERT] (or [ALTER] or [ALTER
FIGURE] to change the figure).
ii) When the Z coordinate (Z) of a vertical line is entered,
together with the X coordinate (X) of an end point, or a line
length (W)
 The intersection with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated, and the end point is determined.

(X. Z)


U

Intersection

Intersection

262

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(b) When the immediately preceding figure block specifies a pending


arc, and contact point determination is specified
i) When no data is entered (with the direction of a vertical line
specified at figure selection)
 Usually, a contact point is automatically calculated from
the rotation direction of the arc and the direction of the
vertical line. The vertical line is pending.
If any of the specified directions is invalid, however, a warning
message is displayed to indicate that invalid data has been entered.
ii) When the X coordinate (X) of an end point, or a line length
(W) is entered.
X
U

Contact point

Contact point

(5) Slanted line


NOTE
2 When an angle of 90 or greater is entered, a warning
message is displayed to indicate that invalid data has been
entered.
(a) When the immediately preceding figure block is not pending
i) When a line length (Q) and angle (J) are entered, or
ii) When a line length (Q), and the X component (I) and the Z
component (K) of an angle are entered
 The end point of a slanted line is determined.

End point

End point

J
Start point

Start point
K

iii) When an angle (J), and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate


(Z) of an end point are entered, or
iv) When the X component (I) and Z component (K) of an angle,
and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate (Z) of an end point
are entered
 The end point of a slanted line is determined
263

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

X or Z
End point

J
Start point

(b) When the immediately preceding figure block specifying an arc


is not pending
i) When the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate (Z) of an end point
is entered
 The angle of a slanted line is calculated automatically,
and an end point is determined. If neither the X
coordinate nor Z coordinate of the end point of a slanted
line is entered, the slanted line will be pending.

X or Z

This angle is calculated


automatically.

Arc center

Arc end point

(c) When the immediately preceding block is pending, and contact


point determination is not specified
i) When the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of the end
point of a slanted line, and an angle (J) are entered, or
ii) When the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of the end
point of a slanted line, and the X component (I) and Z
component (K) of an angle are entered
 The intersection with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated.

End point
(X, Z)


Intersection


When the immediately preceding block specifies an arc, the intersection


selection request screen appears. Press [CROSS 1] or [CROSS 2], then
press [INSERT] (or [ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure).
It is assumed that the radius of the arc and the coordinates (X,Z) of the arc
center have already been entered.
264

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(d) When the immediately preceding figure block specifies a pending


arc, and contact point determination is specified
It is assumed that the radius of the arc and the coordinates (X,Z)
of the arc center have already been entered.
i) When an angle (J) is entered, or
ii) When the X component (I) and Z component (K) of an angle
are entered
 The contact point selection request screen appears. Press
[TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2], then press [INSERT] (or
[ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure).
The slanted line is pending.

Contact point

Contact point

iii) When the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of the end
point of a slanted line are entered
 The contact point selection request screen appears. Press
[TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2], then press [INSERT] (or
[ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure).
The end point of the slanted line is determined.
Contact point

Contact point

iv) When an angle (J) and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate


(Z) of an end point are entered, or
v) When the X component (I) and Z component (K) of an angle,
and the X coordinate (X) or Z coordinate (Z) of an end point
are entered

265

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

 The contact point selection request screen appears. Press


[TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2], then press [INSERT] (or
[ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure).
The end point of the slanted line is determined.
If the positional relationship between the coordinates of
the contact point and the slanted line is such that an
entered angle conflicts with the entered X coordinate or
Z coordinate of an end point, a warning message is
displayed to indicate that invalid data has been entered.

J
Contact point
X or Z
J
Contact point

vi) When an angle (J), and the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate
(Z) of the end point of a slanted line are entered
 The end points of the arc and slanted line are determined.
The contact point selection request screen does not
appear.

(X, Z)

J
Start point of 

Contact point

(6) AC
(a) When the immediately preceding block is not pending, and
contact point determination is specified
i) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
center are entered
 The arc is pending.
ii) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (X) and Z
coordinate (Z) of an arc end point are entered, or
iii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
center, and the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of an arc
end point are entered
 A minor arc is determined.
266

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(End point)
(X, Z)

R
(I, K)

(Start point)

iv) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc


center, and the central angle (J) are entered
 An arc having the specified central angle is determined.

(End point)

J
(Start point)

(I, K)

NOTE
3 If the distance (radius) between the start point and arc
center differs from the distance (radius) between the end
point and arc center, the figure displayed on the program
screen will differ from the workpiece outline, and machining
will not be performed correctly.
v) When an arc radius (R) is entered
 When contact point determination and a horizontal line
with an X coordinate entered are specified immediately
after, an arc can be uniquely determined.
However, there are two possible contact points, such that
one contact point must be selected by pressing
[TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2].

(X, Z)

R



Contact point

(b) When the immediately preceding block is not pending, and


contact point determination is specified
267

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

End point of 



Start point of 

Contact point

 Horizontal line, vertical line, or slanted line (for which its end
point has been determined);
or
Arc (for which the radius and end point have been determined)
 Arc for which the X coordinate and Z coordinate of its end point have
been entered
 The radius of the arc of  is calculated automatically.

(c) Data input when the immediately preceding figure block is


pending (for which the start point has been determined), and
contact point determination is not specified
i) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of an arc center are entered, or
ii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
center, and the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of an arc
end point are entered
 The intersection selection request screen appears. Press
[CROSS 1] or [CROSS 2], then press [INSERT] (or
[ALTER] or [ALTER FIGURE] to change the figure)
(d) Data input when the immediately preceding line is pending (for
which the start point has been determined), and contact point
determination is specified
i) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of an arc center are entered
 A contact point with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. The arc is pending

(I, K)

R


(Start point of )

Contact point

ii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc


center, and the central angle (J) are entered, or
iii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc
center, and the X coordinate (X) and Z coordinate (Z) of an arc
end point are entered
 A contact point with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. The end point of the arc is
determined
268

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

End point of 


End point of 

(X, Z)

(I, K)
J

Contact point


Contact point

(I, K)

Start point of 

Start point of (1)

iv) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate (X) and Z
coordinate (Z) of an arc end point are entered
 A contact point with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. The contact point selection request
screen appears. Press [TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2]. In
this case, select a contact point to define a minor arc.

(X, Z)
End point of 
R

R
Contact point

Contact point

(e) When the immediately preceding arc is pending (for which the
start point has been determined and only the radius is to be
entered), and contact point determination is specified
In this case, the directions of rotation of the two arcs must be the
same.
i) When an arc radius (R), and the X coordinate and Z coordinate
of an end point are entered
 A contact point with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. The contact point selection request
screen appears. Press [TANGNT 1] or [TANGNT 2]. In
this case, select a contact point to define a minor arc.

Contact point

End point
Contact point

R


Start point of 

ii) When the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of an arc


center, and an arc radius (R) are entered
 A contact point with the immediately preceding figure
block is calculated. The arc is pending.
269

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04


R

(I, K)

Start point of 

(7) Lines forming tangents to two arcs




Start point of 
(I3, K3)

(I1, K1)




 Arc for which the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of its
center have been entered (A start point is determined. This arc
is pending.)
 Slanted line (pending)
Data other than direction data cannot be entered.
 Arc for which its radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of its center have been entered
 The end points of figures  and  are determined, and the
arc of  is pending. Four slanted lines form tangents to the
two arcs as shown above. Depending on the directions of
rotation of the two arcs, the slanted line that makes a smooth
connection to the arcs is automatically selected.

270

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(8) Arc that contact intersecting lines and arcs

(X, Z)

Contact point


Contact point




Start point

Start point

Contact point

Contact point


Contact point

Start point
Contact point

 Horizontal line, vertical line, or slanted line that is pending (for


which the start point has been determined);
or
Arc that is pending (for which the start point has been determined)
 Arc (pending)
Data other than arc radius data (R) cannot be entered.
 Horizontal line for which the X coordinate of its end point has
been entered, a vertical line for which the Z coordinate of its end
point has been entered, or a slanted line for which the X coordinate
or Z coordinate of its end point and its angle have been entered;
or
Arc for which its radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of its center have been entered
 The end points of figures  and  are determined, and the
figure of  is pending.
(9) Arc contacting a line and arc that do not intersect with each other

Start point




Contact point


R
Contact point

 Horizontal line, vertical line, or slanted line that is pending (for


which the start point has been determined)
271

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

 Arc (pending)
Data other than arc radius data (R) cannot be entered.
 Arc for which its radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of its center have been entered
 The end points of figures  and  are determined, and the
arc o is pending. Depending on the direction of the line and
the rotation direction of the arc of , the arc that makes a
smooth connection is automatically selected.
(10) Arc contacting two arcs that do not intersect with each other




Start point of 
(I3, K3)

(I1, K1)

 Arc for which the X coordinate (I) and Z coordinate (K) of its
center have been entered (pending)
 Arc (pending)
Data other than the rotation direction data cannot be entered.
 Arc for which its radius (R), and the X coordinate (I) and Z
coordinate (K) of its center have been entered
 The end points of figures  and  are determined, and the
arc of  is pending. Eight arcs can contact the two arcs
according to the combinations of the rotation directions of the
three contacting arcs. Depending on the direction of rotation
of the arc, the arc that makes a smooth connection is
automatically selected.

272

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.1.5

A part of an entered contour can be enlarged when it is drawn.

Partially Enlarged
Drawing of a Contour

Operation)

<

(1) Move the cursor to the contour to be partially enlarged.


(2) Press the right end [+] soft key several times until the following soft
keys are displayed.

SCALE SCALE ENLARG

NORM PROCES
EDIT

MCHNC TOOLD DETAIL PLOT


DATA

(3) When the above soft keys are displayed, the scale ratio is displayed
at the top right of the screen. Press the [SCALE ] or [SCALE ]
soft key to change the scale ratio.
In this case, the drawing scale is changed to 1.0.
(4) Pressing the [ENLARG] soft key enlarges the figure up to the
specified ratio. The contour indicated by the cursor then comes to
the center of the screen.
(5) To display the figures before or after the contour portion indicated
by the cursor, just move the cursor accordingly.
(6) To draw a figure with the original ratio, press the [NORM] soft key.

273

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.1.6

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Automatic Residual
Machining Function

(1) Compensation by the tool figure


In bar residual machining for which automatic residual machining
is specified, the residual portion automatically remains because of
the tool figure as shown in the examples below.

Example 1)

When the contour is a straight line

Tool
Clearance angle
(Set in Parameter No. 9801)

Example 2)

When the contour is an arc

Tool

Several residual portions can be left unremoved.

Residual portions

274

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(2) Executing automatic residual machining


Residual portions can be cut off automatically.

Tool

Residual portion

NOTE
Automatic residual machining is not performed if NOT
EXEC is specified in the data item which specifies whether
to perform automatic residual machining.

When automatic residual machining is performed, cutting trace


compensation based on the tool angle is not performed. Therefore, the
tool tip may interfere with the workpiece.
In automatic residual machining, the back of a tool can foul the opposite
side of the workpiece. Before actual machining is started, a careful check
must be made using machining simulation.

275

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.1.7

(1) Machining the outer surface, inner surface, and end face of a bar

Details of Bar
Machining

Machining example) Machining the bar outer surface

Cutting start point

Ez

Ex /2

MD

Ez

MD
MD

Ex /2

MD: Depth of cut (Radius) entered on the process data screen


U: Finishing allowance (Delail data screen : diameter) in the Xaxis
direction entered on the initial setting screen (Detail data screen)
W: Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the initial setting
screen (Detail data screen)
Ex: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Xaxis at rough bar
machining
Ez: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Zaxis at rough bar
machining
NOTE
1 In rough machining, cutting is performed to produce a figure
which has a clearance of the finishing allowance (along the
Xaxis and Zaxis) plus the tool tip R radius from the
specified contour.
2 When cutting for all the specified figures is completed
semifinish machining is performed. The tools and cutting
conditions used for semifinish machining are the same as
those for rough machining.
Semifinish machining, however, can be canceled by
setting bit 5 of Parameter No. 9772 to 1.
3 In the following cases, semifinish machining is always
performed:
Outer surface machining: X coordinate of a cutting start
point < Maximum X coordinate of a contour
Inner surface machining: X coordinate of a cutting start
point > Minimum X coordinate of a contour
End facing: Z coordinate of a cutting start point < Maximum
Z coordinate of a contour

276

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(2) Bar machining for which automatic residual machining is specified


Machining example) Outer surface + automatic residual machining 1

Ez
Ex /2
Ez

MD

Ex /2
Ez

MD

Ex /2

Cutting start
point
Finish figure
start point

MD: Depth of cut (Radius) entered on the process data screen


U: Finishing allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) in the Xaxis
direction entered on the initial setting screen (Detail data screen)
W: Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the initial setting
screen (Detail data screen)
Ex: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Xaxis at rough bar
machining
Ez: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Zaxis at rough bar
machining
Machining example) Outer surface + automatic residual machining (2)
In the bar machining for which automatic residual machining is specified,
the bar can be cut with the cutting path compensated by the tool figure as
shown below.

Program
zero
point

277

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(3) Automatic residual machining of a bar


Machining example) Automatic residual machining of a bar

Lefthand
tool
Ez Ex /2

MD
Cutting start point
Rz

Rz

MD

Rz

Rz: Clearance (Parameter No. 9800) for residual machining


MD: Depth of cut (Radius) entered on the process data screen
U: Finishing allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) in the Xaxis
direction entered on the initial setting screen (Detail data screen)
W: Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the initial setting
screen (Detail data screen)
Ex: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Xaxis at rough bar
machining
Ez: Clearance (Detail data screen) along the Zaxis at rough bar
machining

278

B62444E1/04

1.1.8
Entering Contour Data
for Machining on the
2Path Lathe with Two
Spindles Facing Each
Other

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

The contour of the tool post 2 (rightside spindle) on the lathe that has two
facing spindles is entered as follows.
(1) When the program zero point is at the workpiece end
When the coordinate of the zero point of the workpiece end face is
(0, 0), enter  then  so that the Zaxis runs in the opposite
direction for tool post 1.
The bar machining contours of outer and inner surfaces are entered
from left to right on the screen. The contour for endface bar
machining is entered from outer surface to inner surface and to the
left.
- Contour of the outer surface bar

+X2

Workpiece


+Z2
[frame_small]

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""

Spindle

Contour of the inner surface bar

+X2


+Z2

279

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""

Workpiece

Spindle

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Contour of the end face bar


+X2

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""

Workpiece


+Z2

Spindle

(2) When the program zero point is on the chuck end face
When the coordinate of the zero point of the chuck end face is (0, 0),
enter  then  so that the Zaxis runs in the opposite direction for
tool post 1.
- Contour of the outer surface bar
+X2

+X2

Workpiece

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""

Spindle

+Z2

Contour of the inner surface bar


+X2


+Z2

280

""""
""""
""""
""""
""""
""""

Workpiece

Spindle

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

Contour of the end face bar

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""

+X2

Workpiece


+Z2

1.1.9
Entering Contour Data
for Machining on the
Singlespindle 2path
Lathe (16TB)

Spindle

On the singlespindle 2path lathe, the program coordinates of tool post


2 are the same as those of tool post 1. The contour can be specified in
exactly in the same was as for that on tool post 1.
See 5 Description of Coordinate Systems in Chapter II for details.

281

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.1.10

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

In bar machining (outer surface, inner surface, or end face), useless


machining can be canceled automatically according to the specified
material figure to optimize machining.

Null Cutting Cancel


Function
Example)

Outer surface bar machining

Cutting path
Rapid traverse path
Product figure
Material figure

NOTE
1 This function cannot be applied to automatic residual
machining.
(1) Parameter setting
- Setting to validate the null cutting cancel function
Bit No.
9777

#7
ACC

#6

ACC 1
0
-

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

: Null cutting is canceled automatically.


: Ordinary bar machining is performed including null
cutting.
Cutting portion clearance amount

9784

SFCLRX

SFCLRX: Clearance amount at cutting start in end face bar machining

SFCLRZ

282

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

9785

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

SFCLRZ

SFCLRZ

: Clearance amount at cutting start in outersurface


bar/Innersurface bar machining.

Outersurface bar machining


SFCLRZ

Innersurface bar machining


SFCLRZ

NOTE
2 The parameter for the clearance amount of the above
cutting portion is used also when cutting start point or
machining start point is automatically determined.
(2) Specifying of the material figure
To specify the material figure, specify formed material as the
initial setting data for the machining program, and enter the X and
Z coordinates of the corner.
The material figure consists only of vertical and horizontal lines. It
increases (outer surface) or decreases (inner surface) monotonously
from the material end toward the chuck in steps as shown in the
following example.
The coordinates of up to 12 corner points can be specified for the
outer surface or inner surface.
Example of specifiable material figure)
(X1, Z1)

(X2, Z2)
(X3, Z3)

Coordinates of outer surface point 1 = (X1, Z1)

(X4, Z4)

(X5, Z5)

Coordinates of outer surface point 2 = (X2, Z2)


Coordinates of outer surface point 3 = (X3, Z3)

(X6, Z6)

Coordinates of outer surface point 4 = (X4, Z4)


(X8, Z8)

(X7, Z7)

Coordinates of outer surface point 5 = (X5, Z5)


Coordinates of outer surface point 6 = (X6, Z6)
Coordinates of outer surface point 7 = (X7, Z7)
Coordinates of outer surface point 8 = (X8, Z8)

283

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example a material figure that can be specified)

Coordinates of inner surface point 1 = (X1, Z1)


Coordinates of inner surface point 2 = (X2, Z2)

(X2, Z2)
(X1, Z1)
(X4, Z4)

Coordinates of inner surface point 3 = (X3, Z3)


Coordinates of inner surface point 4 = (X4, Z4)

(X3, Z3)

Coordinates of inner surface point 5 = (X5, Z5)


Coordinates of inner surface point 6 = (X6, Z6)

(X5, Z5)
(X6, Z6)

Example of a material figure that cannot be specified 1)


A taper line cannot be specified.

Example of a material figure that cannot be specified 2)


Nonmonotonous increase

284

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(3) Specifying of bar machining process data


The process data and contour of bar machining can be entered in the
same way as ordinary input.
The contour, however, must be inside the material figure entered at
initial setting.
Example of a contour for bar machining (outer surface + automatic
residual machining)

Material figure

Contour

Example of a contour that cannot be entered)

The contour goes out of the material figure


Material figure

Contour

NOTE
3 To reduce input errors, enter the material figure and bar
machining contour in the following sequence instead of
entering first the material figure, then the contour.
1. To create a machining program, enter a rough figure
such as a rectangle as a formed material.
2. Enter the bar machining contour like ordinary operation.
3. Redisplay the material figure data screen for initial
setting.
4. Pressing the [PLOT] soft key draws the material figure
and bar machining contour which are overlapped on
each other. This display is called product figure drawing
screen.
Enter the material figure data while checking both the
material figure and contour.

285

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(4) Details of machining


If the parameter for null cutting cancel is set, and the formed material
is specified as the material figure, the bar machining process is
executed, thereby automatically canceling cutting where there is no
material.
(a) Machining the outer surface of a bar

Cutting path
Rapid traverse path
Product figure
Material figure

(b) Machining a recessed outer surface of a bar


When outer surface, inner surface, or end face + automatic
residual machining is specified, the middle portion is cut with the
tooltip geometry compensation as shown below. For other
portions, null cutting is canceled as with ordinary outer surface,
inner surface, or end face machining.
The portion which was left uncut in the middle portion is
automatically cut by the lefthand tool during automatic residual
machining.
Example of machining a recessed outer surface of a bar)

Middle portion

Innersurface bar machining and endface bar machining are executed in


the same way as outersurface bar machining.

286

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.1.11

(1) Generals
When tool whose cutting edge angle is acute is used in bar and
pattern repeating processing , it is possible machining that tool and
material dont interfere.

Compensation by Tool
Cutting Edge

Parameter nonsetting

Bit No.
9767

SGT

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

Parameter setting

#2

#1
SGT

#0

0 : Usual machining
1 : It is possible machining which give consideration to cutting edge
angle. And it is possible to input the tool cutting edge data with
decimal value in tool data screen.
Compensation of conditions are following. (And abovementioned
parameter set to 1. )
(a) Interference
The tool and material interfere in
usual machining.
(b) Cutting edge angle
The cutting angle of the tool is less than
90 degrees. (When round nose tool is
used, this compensation
becomes ineffective.)
(c) Figure
The product figure will be limited to
mototonous increase in the
direction of the X axis and Z axis.

Start point
ineffective

End point

ineffective

Start point

287

End point

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Details
Figure is compensated according to the following.
(a) The straight line is drawn from the end point of figure that
interference gets up. The inclination of the line is calculated from
a value of cutting edge angle of tool and parameter No. 9801
(TLBACK) . Afterhere, this straight line is called Auxiliary line.
The left part of Auxiliary line in not cut down.
(b) The point that Auxiliary line and figure intersect, is an end point
of new figure.
(c) Auxiliary line becomes figure (taper line). The feed amount is
calculated from the value of the surface roughness of the process
data. And it is used for the finishing machining of Auxiliary line.
(d) All figure that placed between Auxilialy line is ignored.

*Note :

Auxillary line is drawn from


contact line in case of arc.

Parameter value
Auxiliary line
contact
point

Parameter value
Auxiliary line

example)

a
Auxiliary line
d

before
e

*
*
*

End point of the horizonal line which start point is b changes in


to c of the end point of Auxiliary line.
The figure which end point is f changes from the vertical line into
the taper line.
All figure that placed between Auxilialy line is ignored. (c f)
f

after

288

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(e) When end point of Auxiliary line is outside of begining point


(Auxiliary line dosent intersect with figure), the cross point of
Auxiliary line and the vertical line which passes the beginning
point becomes the new beginning point of figure.

Auxiliary line
before
end point

before
end point
beginning
point

new begnning
point

vertical line which passes


the beginning point

(f) This compensation is also effective in the backward cutting in bar


machining.

before
beginning point
Auxiliary line

after
beginning point
end point

end point

(g) When the distance between end point of Auxiliary line and start
point of figure is smaller than diameter of tool nose, the end point
of Auxiliary line becomes new start point of figure.

before

after

smaller than 2R.

289

move the end point of Auxiliary line.

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.1.12

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) Parameter

Bar and Pattern


Repeating Finishing
Processing without
Using G41/G42
Command
Bit No.
9767

NCR

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3
NCR

#2

#1

#0

1 : G41/G42 command is not used in bar and pattern repeating finishing


processing.
0 : G41/G42 command is used in bar and pattern repeating finishing
processing.
(2) Details
when parameter No.9767 bit 3 is set to 1, G41/G42 command of
offsetC is not used in finishing of the bar and pattern repeating
processing. Therefore, G40 of offsetC canceling is not
commanded. However G40 is commanded in the top of each
processing to correspond the midway drive of the program.

290

B62444E1/04

1.1.13
Improving the
Machining of Figures
that Differ Slightly in
Level

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

In rough machining of the outer surface, inner surface, and end faces of
a bar, when the machining profile has a slight difference in level as shown
below, set bit 5 (SFG) of parameter 9767 to 1 to perform normal
machining operation.

Must be less than the


tool nose radius

Chamfering
Corner R

This improvement is valid only for the rough machining of a bar.


Finish machining will result in, too much cutting in tool nose radius
compensation, causing P/S alarm 41. When bit 3 (NCR) of parameter
9767 is set to 1 to disable the use of G41/G42, however, the alarm will
not be issued.
In this case, because G41/G42 is not used for finish machining, the
finished figure may be slightly inaccurate. To resolve this problem,
set bit 3 (NCR) of parameter 9767 to 0 and use a tool having smaller
tool nose radius.
Remark)
Machining is not always performed normally, however, for a figure
which is slightly different in level, as in the following example.
For such a figure, machining can be performed normally by adding the
procedure used to machine corner R for a part having an acute angle.

corner R for a part having an acute angle


Horizontal line
Arc

Horizontal line

291

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.2
PATTERN
REPEATING

1.2.1
Machining Type
Selection

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Formed materials such as castings and forgings are machined in pattern


repeating.

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
automatically created, and the process type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing the [RPT] soft key selects pattern repeating.

PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD REMOVAL X REMOVAL Z TOOLNO CUTSPD TCODE
RPT (R) OUTER END
HEADL
6.000
3.000
102
80
0101
FEED/REV CUTDPTH
0.25
2.000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
RPT (F) OUTER END
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101

292

B62444E1/04

1.2.2
Details of Setting Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

JAREAA: Select the desired type of the AREA from the following
items.
Those are displayed on the window.
1 = OUTER END
2 = OUTER MID
3 = INNER END
4 = INNER MID
5 = FACE END
6 = FACE MID
See Section 1.1 Bar Machining for details about machining areas.
However, automatic residual machining cannot be performed with pattern
repeating.
NOTE
When a machining area is specified, the tools for rough
machining and cutting conditions are determined
automatically.
(1) Roughing process
REMOVAL

X: Cutting allowance (diameter) along the Xaxis


Z: Cutting allowance along the Zaxis
All data items displayed on the program screen and detail data
screen, with the exception of the item above, are the same as those
displayed for bar machining.
(2) Finishing process
All data items displayed on the program screen and detail data screen
are the same as those displayed for bar machining.

1.2.3
Figure Data Input

For pattern repeating, specify a final contour as figure data by performing


a contour calculation in the same way as for bar machining.
When specifying figure data for pattern repeating, a cutting direction can
be entered for each contour block. For details of the direction of cutting,
see Section 1.2.5.
CUTDIRECTION: Cutting direction. Choose from [NORMAL] and
[REVERS].
See Section 1.1 for additional information about contour specification.
NOTE
Unlike bar machining, pattern repeating performs neither
automatic cutting path compensation, based on the tool
angle, nor automatic residual machining. This means that
only figure data that does not result in the tool fouling the
workpiece outline can be entered for pattern repeating.

293

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.2.4
Details of Pattern
Repeating

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

In pattern repeating, cutting is repeated while the cutting pattern is shifted


step by step to cut the specified final figure.
Machining example) Pattern repeating for an outersurface edge
A0
An

Al

Af

MD
First trace of rough machining
Last trace of rough machining
Product figure

RX/2
U/2
RZ

MD : Depth of cut (Radius) entered on the process data screen


U : Finishing allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) along the
Xaxis entered on the process data screen
W : Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the process
data screen (Detail data screen)
RX : Cutting allowance (Detail data screen : diameter) along the
Xaxis entered on the process data screen
RZ : Cutting allowance along the Zaxis entered on the process
data screen
(1) Determining the machining start point (outersurface machining)
A0 : Virtual machining start point
This start point, indicating the 0th machining start point, is
used only for machining start point calculation.
A0x = Sx + RX + (TRx or 0)
Sx = Cutting start point:
X coordinate.
A0z = Sz + RZ + (TRz or 0)
Sz = Cutting start point:
Z coordinate.
TRx = Tool tip : Diameter
of R radius.
TRz = Tool tip : R radius.
Sx and Sz indicate the coordinates of the cutting start point.
NOTE
1 The values in parentheses vary according to the virtual tool
tip position of the tool being used.
A1 : First machining start point
A1x = A0x d0 (d0: Maximum depth of cut MD)
A1z = A0z d0z (d0z = d0 *RZ/RX)

An : nth machining start point


Anx = An1x d0
Anz = An1z d0z
294

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

Af : Finishing start point


Afx = Sx
Afz = Sz
(2) Determining the machining start point (for a recessed outer surface)

A0
MD
Al

RX

An
U
Af

A0 : Virtual machining start point


This start point, indicating the 0th machining start point, is
used only for machining start point calculation.
A0x = Sx + RX + (TRx or 0)
Sx = Cutting start point:
X coordinate.
A0z = Sz
Sz = Cutting start point:
Z coordinate.
TRx = Tool tip : Diameter
of R radius.
Sx indicates the coordinates of the cutting start point.
NOTE
2 The values in parentheses vary according to the virtual tool
tip position of the tool being used.

A1 : First machining start point


A1x = A0x d0 (d0: Maximum depth of cut MD)
A1z = Sz

An : nth machining start point
Anx = An 1x d0
Anz = Sz
Af : Finishing start point
Afx = Sx
Afz = Sz
Also for machining the end surface, recessed end face, inner surface, and
recessed inner surface, the machining start points are determined
according to the machining areas.
295

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(3) The rough machining and finishing are executed as shown in the
following example.

Machining
start point
Auxiliary figure
end point

Next
machining
start point

Figure
end point

Figure
start point

1.2.5

Auxiliary
figure
start point

A cutting direction can be specified for each figure block.

Automatic Reverse
Machining



The cutting direction can be specified for each contour with the
[NORMAL] or [REVERS] soft key.
When a figure block specifying reverse machining is displayed, it is
marked with an asterisk (*).

1.2.6

See 1.1.11 Compensation by Toll Cutting Edge in Part III for details.

Compensation by Tool
Cutting Edge

296

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.2.7
Improvement of
Pattern Repeating
Cutting Retract
Movement
Generals

In pattern repeating, when each X coordinates of rough machining


terminal point (XE) are lower than next machining start point (X2) , the
retract position of X axis direction is higher one of cutting start point or
first machining start point.
The tool always moves to a constant point and it becomes the following
cycles.
Z3 Z2 Z1
S S S

S Cutting start point

S Cutting start point

S Machining start point X1


S Machining start point X2
S Machining start point X3
For outer surface and inner surface

For and facing

Motions
D Outer surface, Inner
surface

i)

When X coordinate of in terminal of rough machining (XE)


is lower than next machining start point (X2) .
XEX axis direction (Higher one of cutting start point or first
machining start point) Z axis directionX axis direction
(Next machining start point X2) .

Cutting start point or first machining


start point.
X2
XE

297

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

ii) When X coordinate in terminal of rough machining (XE) and


next machining start point (X2) is same or X coordinate in
terminal of rough machining (XE) is higher (In case of inner
diameter is lower ) than next machining start point (X2) .
XE Z axis direction (next machining start point Z2) X
axis direction (next machining start point X2) .

Z2
XE
X2

D Facing

i)

When Z coordinate in terminal point of rough machining (ZE)


is lower than next machining start point (Z2) .
ZEZ axis direction (higher one of cutting start point Z1 or
machining start point Z1) X axis direction Z axis
direction (next machining start point Z2)

Z2

X
Z

ZE

298

higher one of cutting start point


Z1 or machining start point Z1.

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

ii) When Z coordinate in terminal point of rough machining (ZE)


and next machining start point (Z2) are same or Z coordinate
in terminal point of rough machining (ZE) is higher than next
machining start point (Z2).
ZEX axis (next machining start point X2) Z axis
direction (next machining point Z2)

Z2
X2

X
Z
ZE

299

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.2.8
Pattern Repeating
Approach to Shape
Start Point
Generals

In pattern repeating, the method of the movement from machining start


point to the beginning point of shape is as follows.

machining
start point
PAP=1
standard

cutting start
point


shape


 to  rapid traverse all

start point of shape

In above mentioned method, when start point of shape is in material, the


material is cut in rapid traverse. To evade this trouble, the approach that
from the machining start point to the shape start point , is changed only
when parameter effective.

machining
start point
PAP
effective

cutting start
point


shape


start point of shape

 to  rapid traverse all


 cutting feed

The tool moves from the machining start point to the shape start point
each one axis. The last block, which moves to the shape start point is
cutting feeding.

300

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Parameter
Bit No.
9767

PAP

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2
PAP

#1

#0

1 : It moves to shape start point every one axis in pattern repeating.


0 : It moves to shape start point by rapid travers simultaneous 2axes.

Approach
movement of
each machining
<Forward>

Outer surface, Inner surface


machining
start point

cutting start
point


shape


 to

start point of shape

Outer surface+residual machining


Inner surface+residual machining

 rapid traverse.
 cutting feed.





cutting start point


machining start point
 to  rapid traverse.
 cutting feed.

shape

301

shape
start
point

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

End face
cutting start point
machining start
point



shape

 to  rapid traverse.
 cutting feed.

End face+residual machining

cutting start point


machining start point

shape start
point

shape

 to  rapid traverse.
 cutting feed.

302

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

<Backward>

Outer surface, Inner surface


cutting start point

machining start
point

shape

Outer surface, Inner surface


(Backward specified each shape)

backward
shape

303

cutting start point

back
ward

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

End face

shape

machining start point


cutting start point

End face (Backward specified each shape)


back

shape
back
machining start point 2
machining start point
cutting start point

1.2.9
Bar and Pattern
Repeating Finishing
Processing without
Using G41/G42
Command

See 1.1.12 Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without


Using G41/G42 Command in Part III for details.

304

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.3

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

The residual portion at a right angle is machined in residual machining.


If, however, machining a recessed surface of a bar is specified, residual
machining does not need to be specified, because it is usually performed
automatically.

RESIDUAL
MACHINING

1.3.1

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
created automatically, and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.

Machining Type
Selection

Pressing the [RESID] soft key selects residual machining.

PROC(01)
RESI (R)
PROC(01)
RESI (F)

AREA
OUTER
AREA
OUTER

HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE


HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101

305

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.3.2
Details of Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

JAREA (A): Select the desired type of the AREA from the following
menu items.
1. Outer surface

2. Inner surface

3. End face

306

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

4. Inner bottom
Residual machining is performed for the bottom of a drilled hole.

Machining start point CX : X coordinate (diameter value) of a clearance


position between residual portions
CZ : Z coordinate of a clearance position
between residual portions
All data items displayed on the program screen and detail data screen,
with the exception of those described above, are the same as for bar
machining.

307

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.3.3
Details of Figure Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

In one process, up to five residual machining portions can be specified for


one machining area.
(1) Outersurface residual machining
Input data example)
30
80
50
60
3

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(ROUND RADIUS)

End point

Chamfer amount
Start point

End point

Corner R radius
Start point

308

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(2) Innersurface residual machining


Input data example)
50 INPUT
80 INPUT
30 INPUT
60 INPUT
INPUT
2
INPUT

(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(Cursor shift)
(Chamfer amount)

Start point

Chamfer amount

End point

Start point

Corner R radius

End point

309

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(3) Endface residual machining


Input data example)
30
10
50
0
3

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(ROUND RADIUS)

End point
Chamfer amount

Start point

End point
Corner R radius

Start point

310

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(4) Endbottom residual machining


Input data example)
10 INPUT
80 INPUT
40 INPUT
75 INPUT
INPUT
2
INPUT

(START POINT X)
(START POINT Z)
(END POINT X)
(END POINT Z)
(Cursor shift)
(Chamfer amount)

End point
Chamfer amount

Start point

End point
Corner R radius

Start point

311

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.3.4

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) When the machining area is an outer surface

Details of Residual
Machining

End point
Ez
MD

Ex

Start point

Ez

MD : Depth of cut (radius value) entered on the process data screen


U : Finishing allowance (diameter value) along the Xaxis
entered on the process data screen
W : Finishing allowance along the Zaxis entered on the process
data screen
Rz : Clearance (parameter No. 9800) for residual machining
Ex : Clearance (Parameter No. 9797: diameter) along the Xaxis
at rough bar machining
Ez : Clearance (Parameter No. 9798) along the Zaxis at rough
bar machining
NOTE
1 In rough machining, cutting is performed to produce a figure
which has a clearance of the finishing allowance (along the
Xaxis or Zaxis) plus the tool tip radius from the specified
residual machining figure.
2 Use parameter No. 9799 to specify a clearance for
endface residual machining and innerbottom residual
machining.

312

B62444E1/04

1.4

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

End facing cuts mill scales from an end face of a material.

END FACING

1.4.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
created automatically, and a machining type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing the [FACING] soft key selects end facing.

PROC(01)
FACING (R)
PROC(01)
FACING (F)

1.4.2
Details of Process Data

HEAD TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH TCODE


HEADL
102
80
0.25
2.000
0101
HEAD ROUGHNES TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV TCODE
HEADL
5
102
80
0.25
0101

(1) Roughing process/Finishing Process


END PT

EX : X coordinate of a cutting end point for rough


machining/finish machining.
The position
where a workpiece is cut from the workpiece
center by (tool tip radius of the tool used),
multiplied by 2, is determined automatically.

NOTE
1 In end facing, a cutting start point and end point are
automatically determined. However, when an area requires
no machining as in the case of a material that has holes,
unnecessary machining operation can be eliminated by
manual setting.
2 All data items displayed on the program screen and detail
data screen, with the exception of the item above, are the
same as for bar machining.
3 Figure data is not used for end facing.

313

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.4.3
Details of End Facing
W
MD
(Cutting start point)

Ex
(Cutting end point)
Ez

MD : Depth of cut per pass in rough machining. The formulas


below are used to determine the average depth of cut per
pass.
N (CUT COUNT) = ((END REMOVAL) (FINISHING
AMNT))/(CUTTING DEPTH):
The fractional part is rounded up to an integer.
MD (CUT DPTH) = ((END REMOVAL) (FINISHING
AMNT))/N
ED : X coordinate (parameter No. 9807: Diameter) where the feed
amount for end facing is reduced. From the cutting start
point (CX) to ED, the workpiece is cut according to the
cutting feed amount specified on the program screen. From
ED to the cutting end point (EX), the workpiece is cut
according to the cutting feed amount with the feed amount
override near the center (parameter No. 9808) applied.
EX : Absolute X coordinate of a cutting end point (detail data
screen)
FZ : Finishing allowance for end facing (detail data screen)
Ex : Clearance (parameter No. 9797: Diameter) along the Xaxis
for end facing
Ez : Clearance (parameter No. 9798: Diameter) along the Zaxis
for end facing
NOTE
In end facing, a generalpurpose end facing tool is
automatically selected. When a generalpurpose outer
surface machining tool is to be used for end facing, the tool
must be registered as a generalpurpose end facing tool in
the tool file. In this case, the same tool can also be
registered as a generalpurpose outer surface machining
tool by using the same T code.

314

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.5
THREADING
Tool

Start point
End point 45
Chamfering is possible only at 45.

1.5.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
created automatically, and a machining type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing the [THREAD] soft key selects threading.

PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD THRDTYPE THRDANGL CUTMETHD
THREAD(01) OUTER HEADL
GENERAL
60 ANMT.SNGL
TOOLNO CUTSPD CUTDPTH
CHAMFER
251
80
0.500
ON

315

LEAD
1.0000
TCODE
0505

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.5.2
Details of Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

JAREA (A): Select the desired type of the AREA from the following
menu items.
1 = OUTER
2 = INNER
1. OUTER

Tool
End
point

Start
point

2. INNER

Start
point

End
point

Tool

THRDTYPE: Choose from [GENERL THREAD], [METRIC


THREAD], [UNIFID THREAD], [PT THREAD], and
[PF THREAD].
1. GENERL THREAD
This type of threading is the same as conventional threading.
Continuous threading is enabled by matching the X coordinate and
Z coordinate of the end point of a thread figure with those of the
start point of the next thread figure.
NOTE
1 For continuous threading, the corresponding optional
function of the NC must be supported. In one threading
process, up to five thread figures (all having the same lead)
can be specified.

316

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

2. METRIC THREAD
This type of threading is performed according to the metric thread
standard. Only straight threads can be cut. Up to five thread figures
(all having the same lead) can be specified.
Example of metric threading process data:

PROC(02)
THREAD

AREA
HEAD
OUTER HEADL
TOOLNO CUTSPD
251
80
THRDDIA STATPZ

THRDTYPE
METRIC
CUTDPTH
0.300
ENDPTZ

CUTMETHD
AMNT.SNGL
CHAMFER
ON

LEAD
1.200
TCODE
0101

NOTE
2 A thread angle of 60 degrees is used for metric threading.
This value cannot be changed.

3. UNIFIED THREAD
This type of threading is performed according to the unified thread
standard. Only straight threads can be cut. In one process, only one
thread figure can be specified.
Example of unified threading process data:

PROC(02)
THREAD

AREA
HEAD
OUTER HEADL
TOOLNO CUTSPD
251
80
THRDDIA STATPZ

THRDTYPE
UNIFIED
CUTDPTH
5
ENDPZ

CUTMETHD
AMNT.SNGL
CHAMFER
ON

THRD CNT
20
TCODE
0101

NOTE
3 For unified threading, the number of threads per inch is
specified instead of the thread lead that is usually specified.
A thread angle of 60 degrees is used. This value cannot be
changed.

4. PT THREAD (Tapered threads for pipes)


This type of threading is performed according to the pipetaper
thread standard. Only tapered threading with a slant angle of
1.7899 degrees can be performed. In one process, only one thread
figure can be specified.
With an external tapered (male) thread figure, the end face of the
workpiece represents the minimum diameter section. With an
internal tapered (female) thread figure, the end face of the
workpiece represents the maximum diameter section.
317

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example of pipetaper threading process data:


PROC(02)
THREAD

AREA
HEAD THROTYPE
OUTER HEADL PIPETAPER
TOOLNO CUTSPD
CUTDPTH
251
80
0.300
START X START Z
END Z

CUTMETHD
AMNTSNGL
CHAMFER
ON

THRD CNT
20
TCODE
0101

NOTE
4 For pipetaper threading, the number of threads per inch is
specified instead of the thread lead that is usually specified.
A thread angle of 55 degrees is used. This value cannot be
changed.
5. PF THREAD (Parallel threads for pipes)
This type of threading is performed according to the PF thread
standard. Only straight threads can be cut. In one process, only one
thread figure can be specified.
Example of PF threading process data:
PROC(02)
THREAD

AREA
HEAD
OUTER HEADL
TOOLNO CUTSPD
251
80
THRDDIA START Z

THRDTYPE CUTMETHD
PIPEFLAT AMNTSNGL
CUTNMBR
CHAMFER
5
ON
END Z

THRD CNT
20
TCODE
0101

NOTE
5 For PF threading, the number of threads per inch is
specified instead of the thread lead that is usually specified.
A thread angle of 55 degrees is used. This value cannot be
changed.
6 The metric thread standard and unified thread standard
specify threads that are shaped differently depending on
whether they are external threads or internal threads. To
simplify the processing, however, the above functions
regard figure data as being identical.

THRDANGL (for generalpurpose threads only) :


Tool tip angle. When parameter No. 9835 is set to
0, this angle is automatically set to 60. When the
parameter is set to a value other than 0, this angle is
automatically set to that value.
CUTMETHD
: Choose from [AMNT SINGLE], [AMNT
BOTH], [AMNT STRGHT], [DEPTH
SINGLE], [DEPTH BOTH], and [DEPTH
STRGHT].
318

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. [AMNT SNGL]: Constant amount of cut, singleedge cutting.

Tool tip
d1
A

d2
d3 d
n
H

D = Depth of cut
d1 = D
d2 = d1 * sqrt (2)
d3 = d1 * sqrt (3)

dn = d1 * sqrt (n)
u = Finishing allowance for threading (parameter 9834)
H = Thread height
H=Pt * LD
Pt: Thread height coefficient (parameter 9832)
LD: Thread lead
A = Threading tool angle
2. [DEPTH BOTH]: Constant amount of cut, zigzag cutting.

Tool tip
A

d1
d2 d
3

d4 d
5

d6
H

D = Depth of cut
d1=(D * sqrt (2) ) / 2
d2 = D * sqrt (2)
d3=(D * (sqrt (2) + sqrt (4) ) ) / 2
d4=D * sqrt (4)
d3=(D * (sqrt (4) + sqrt (6) ) ) / 2
d4=D * sqrt (6)
319

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
7 When the depth of cut per pass becomes less than the
minimum depth of cut (set in parameter No. 9833), the depth
of cut is clamped to the specified minimum value, if a
constant depth of cut has been specified.

3. [AMNT STRGHT]: Constant amount of cut, bothedge cutting


The depth of cut per pass is the same as [AMNT SINGLE], but
straight cutting is performed along the center line of the tool.
4. [DEPTH SINGLE]: Constant amount of cut, singleedge cutting

Tool tip
A

D
H
D

D
u

5. [DEPTH BOTH]: Constant amount of cut, zigzag cutting

Tool tip
A

D
H
D

D
u

6. [DEPTH STRGHT]: Constant amount of cut, bothedge cutting


The depth of cut per pass is the same as [DEPTH SINGLE], but
straight cutting is performed along the center line of the tool.
NOTE
8 When a new threading process is created, [AMNT SINGLE]
is automatically set.

320

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

LEAD (Generalpurpose/
metric thred)

Thread lead
The least input increment is 0.0001 mm
or 0.000001 inch.

THRD CNT/INCH
(UNIFIED/PT/PF THRED)

Number of threads per inch

TOOLNO

Management number of a threading tool

CUTSPD (M/minute)

Cutting feedrate for threading

CUTDPTH
(CUTNMBR)

Depth of cut for the first pass

The least input increment is 1.

By pressing [CUTNMBR], the number


of cuts can be specified, instead of a
depth of cut, for the first pass.
1. When CUTDPTH is selected
Specify a depth of cut for the first
pass.
The number of cuts is
determined from the depth of cut and
the cutting method.
2. When CUTNMBR is selected
The number of cuts is calculated from
the depth of cut determined by the automatic cutting condition determination function when the LEAD data
item is specified.
When the number of cuts is entered,
threading is performed according to
the specified number of cuts. This
number of cuts includes the spark
out operations.

NOTE
9 The maximum number of cuts is 999. If CUTNMBR is
selected for the first time after the creation of a threading
process, the number of cuts is automatically calculated after
data has been entered for the LEAD item.
10 When specifying zigzag cutting as the cutting method,
specify an even number of cuts, excluding the number of
sparkout operations. If an odd number of cuts is
specified, one extra cutting operation is performed.
11 Depending on the minimum depth of cut (set in parameter
No. 9833), the specified number of cuts may be greater
than actually needed. In such a case, the actual number
of cuts is reduced to a value below the specified number.
Furthermore, the specified number of cuts may differ
slightly from the actual number of cuts because of a degree
of error in the calculation.

321

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

CHAMFER:

B62444E1/04

Specifies whether to perform chamfering.


Select [ON] or [OFF].
1. When ON is selected
At a common safety point prior to the
process being executed, the M code for
CHAMFER ON (parameter No. 9836:
CMFONM) is output.
2. When OFF is selected
At a common safety point before the process
is executed, the M code for CHAMFER
OFF (parameter No. 9837: CMFOFM) is
output.

NOTE
12 If neither ON nor OFF is specified, no M code is output. If
no data is set in the parameters described above, no M
code is output.

TCODE

: T code for a threading tool

JSTART PNT.

CX: X coordinate of the retract position used when


the tool moves from one threading area to
another
CZ: Z coordinate of the retract position used when
the tool moves from one threading area to
another

JNO.OF THREAD NT: Number of starts when multistart threads are


cut
JSPARK OUT

SO: Number of finishing operations to be repeated

JTHRD HEIGHT SH: Thread height. A thread height is automatically


determined from the parameters below when
the data for LEAD (THRD CNT) is specified.
1. General threads: Parameter No. 9832
2. Metric threads/unified threads: Parameter
No. 9838
3. PT threads/PF threads: Parameter No. 9839
JSPINDL GEAR

322

: Spindle gear selection. Choose from [AUTO],


[LOW GEAR], [MID GEAR 1], [MID GEAR
2], and [HIGH GEAR].
In one process, up to five threading operations
can be specified. For each threading operation,
a different spindle speed is required to satisfy
the cutting condition data for surface speed
(cutting speed). When [AUTO] is selected, an
M code that matches the optimum spindle gear
(low speed, medium speed or high speed) is
automatically output within the range of
spindle speeds.

B62444E1/04

1.5.3
Details of Figure Data

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

After process data is entered and confirmed, moving the cursor to the next
line of the process data displays the figure data for the threading process.
(1) General threads
STATP

(X, Z):

Coordinates of a threading start point

ENDPT

(X, Z):

Coordinates of a threading end point

NOTE
1 One threading process allows up to five threading areas to
be specified.

Tool
End
point

Start
point

Thread
height

TC

TC: Distance required for the spindle to reach a stable speed (parameter 9831)

NOTE
2 To enter the figure data for the second and subsequent
threading areas, move the cursor to the next line. This
operation displays the figure data for the next threading
area. Then, specify the figure data in the same way as
above.
If the next process has already been entered, an input line for the new
figure data can be opened by pressing [INSERT].
Once the input of all required threading area figure data has been
completed, press [FIGURE END].
(2) Metric thread
THRD DIA
: Thread diameter D
STATPZ
: Z coordinate of the start point of a threading
area ZS
ENDPTZ
: Z coordinate of the end point of a threading area
ZE

ZE

ZS

323

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(3) Unified thread


THRD DIA
STATPZ
ENDPTZ

: Thread diameter D
: Z coordinate of the start point of a threading
area ZS
: Z coordinate of the end point of a threading area
ZE

ZS

ZE

NOTE
3 One threading process allows up to one thraeading area to
be specified.
(4) PT thread
STATPX
STATPZ
ENDPTZ

: X coordinate of the start point of a threading


area XS
: Z coordinate of the start point of a threading
area ZS
: Z coordinate of the end point of a threading area
ZE
ZE
ZS
XZ

1.7899

NOTE
4 One threading process allows up to one thraeading area to
be specified.

324

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(5) PT thread
THRD DIA
STATPZ
ENDPTZ

: Thread diameter D
: Z coordinate of the start point of a threading
area ZS
: Z coordinate of the end point of a threading area
ZE

ZE

ZS
D

NOTE
5 One threading process allows up to five thraeading area to
be specified.

Example of figure data input operation)


30 INPUT (START POINT X)
0. INPUT (START POINT Z)
30 INPUT (END POINT X)
20 INPUT (END POINT Z)
[FIGURE END]

325

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.5.4
Details of Threading

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

The same tool is used for both rough machining and finish machining.
(1) Outersurface threading

Tool

Cutting
start point

TH

Start
point
End point

H
TC

CL
CA

Center of the spindle

TC : Distance required for the spindle to reach a stable speed


(parameter 9831)
TH : Clearance along the Xaxis in threading (parameter 9830)
CL : Threading end area length (parameter 5130)
Let LD be a lead. Then CL is specified using a twodigit
number from 00 to 99 in steps of 0.1*LD; CL must fall in the
range 0*LD to 9.9*LD.
CA : Threading ending angle (45)
H : Thread height
(2) Innersurface threading

CA
CL

TC
H

End point

Start point
Cutting start point

Center of the spindle

326

TH

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(3) Threading for multiple areas

Machining
start point

Threading area 
Threading area 

Type

327

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1.6
GROOVING
(1) Standard groove

(2) Slanted groove

(3) Trapezoidal groove (with corner radius or chamfer)

(4) Treadling groove

328

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.6.1

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
created automatically, and a machining type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.

Machining Type
Selection

Pressing the [GROOVE] soft key selects grooving.


NOTE
Roughing and finishing can be performed in trapezoidal
grooving. In standard grooving, slanted grooving, and
thread grooving, only roughing can be performed. Finishing
cannot be performed.

(1) Process data for standard grooves

PROC(01)
GRV

AREA
HEAD
BASIS PATTERN
OUTER
HEADL
STANDARD
CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH
DWELL
80
0.25
0.700
2.500

WIDTH TOOLNO TCODE


3.000
451
0606

(2) Process data for slanted grooves

PROC(01)
GRV

AREA
HEAD
BASIS PATTERN
OUTER HEADL
SLANTED
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH
451
80
0.25
0.700

WIDTH
3.000
DWELL
2.500

ANGLE
60.000
TCODE
0606

(3) Process data for trapezoidal grooves

PROC(01)
GRV

PROC(01)
GRV

AREA
OUTER
CUTSPD
80
AREA
OUTER
TOONO
451

HEAD
BASIS
HEADL
FEED/REV CUTDPTH
0.25
0.700
HEAD
BASIS
HEADL
CUTSPD FEED/REV
80
0.25

PATTERN
TRAPEZD
DWELL
2.500
PATTERN
TRAPEZD

WIDTH
3.000

TOOLNO TCODE
451
0606

WIDTH ROUGHNES
3.000
5
TCODE
0606

(4) Process data for threading groobes

PROC(01)
GRV

AREA
OUTER
TOOLNO
451

HEAD
BASIS
PATTERN
HEADL
THREDGRV
CUTSPD FEED/REV CUTDPTH
80
0.25
0.700

329

WIDTH
3.000
DWELL
2.500

ANGLE
60.000
TCODE
0606

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.6.2
Details of Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

JAREA (A): Select the desired type of the AREA from the following
menu items.
1 = OUTER
2 = INNER
3 = FACING
1. Outer surface

2. Inner surface

3. End face

330

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

Machining start point

X: Xcoordinate of an approach point before


machining is started
Z: Zcoordinate of an approach point before
machining is started

Machining start point


(outer surface)

Machining start point


(inner surface)

(Outersurface or innersurface machining)


BASIS:

Select the desired type of the BASIS from


the following menu items.
1 = Left reference position [ ]
2 = Right reference position [ ]

1. Grooving tool with the left reference position

Grooving
tool

Program point

Specified grooving point


(Standard groove/Slanted
groove)

331

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. Grooving tool with the right reference position

Grooving
tool

Program point

Specified grooving point


(Standard groove/Slanted
groove)

(End face machining)


BASIS :

Grooving tool program point


Select the desired type of the BASIS from the
following menu items.
1 = Lower reference position [ ]
2 = Upper reference position [ ]

1. Grooving tool with the lower reference position

Grooving
tool

Program point
Specified grooving point
(Standard groove/Slanted
groove)

332

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

2.Grooving tool with the upper reference position

Program point

Grooving
tool

Specified grooving point


(Standard groove/Slanted
groove)

Machining pattern (PP) : Grooving type


Select the desired type of machining pattern
from the following menu items.
1 = STAND
2 = SLANTE
3 =TRAPEZ
4 =THREAD
1. Standard groove (rectangular groove)

333

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. Slanted groove

3. Trapezoidal groove

4. Thread grooving

NOTE
1 Thread grooving can be specified for areas for which
outersurface or innersurface machining has been
selected. In thread grooving, multiple thread grooves,
positioned at constant intervals, cannot be created.

334

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

WIDTH

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

: Minimum width of a groove (minimum groove


width).
In machining grooves other than trapezoidal grooves,
a grooving tool having a width that is less than TOOL
WIDTH is selected automatically.
In machining trapezoidal grooves, a grooving tool
having a width that is less than (TOOL WIDTH
machining allowance Z (for inner or outer surface)) or
(TOOL WIDTH machining allowance X (for end
face)) is selected.

Minimum
groove width

ANGLE

: Slanted groove angle

1. Slanted groove

Groove angle

2. Thread grooving
For thread grooving, a groove angle of 60is selected
automatically.

Groove angle

335

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
2 When AREA, BASIS, WIDTH, and GROOVE ANGLE (for
slanted grooving) have been specified, the tool and cutting
conditions for roughing are determined automatically.

ROUGHNESS : Finished surface roughness (for a trapezoidal groove


only)
NOTE
3 When a surface roughness is specified for a trapezoidal
groove, a tool for finish machining and cutting conditions are
automatically determined.

DWELL

: Dwell at the bottom of a groove in roughing. The


dwell is calculated automatically from parameter No.
9826 once the tool has been determined.

NOTE
4 Data items other than those described above are displayed
on the program and detail data screens in the same way as
those for bar machining.

336

B62444E1/04

1.6.3
Details of Figure Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

After process data is entered and confirmed, moving the cursor to the next
line of the process data displays the figure data for the grooving process.
(1) Ordinary or slanted grooving of an outerinnersurface
STATPX, X: Coordinates of a point where grooving starts
ENDPTX : Xcoordinate of point where grooving ends
NOTE
1 When a tool has a right reference position, the start point is
on the right side of the groove and the end point is on the
left side.

WIDTH
GRVDIV

DEPTH

CHAMFER

Xcoordinate
of the start point

: Width of a groove to be machined


: Absolute X coordinate of the bottom of a
groove. By pressing the [GROOVE
DEPTH] key, the groove depth can be
specified instead of the groove bottom
diameter.
: Depth of a groove to be machined
STATP
ENDPT
CHAMFER
DEPTH

Xcoordinate
of the end point
WIDTH

GRVDIA

CHAMFER

: Chamfer amount

NOTE
2 For slanted grooving, the Xcoordinate of the end point or
chamfer amount cannot be set.

PITCH

: Distance between grooves when grooves


of the same figure are machined at regular
intervals

337

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1. When the program reference position is placed on a workpiece


edge.
(a) When the pitch is positive
PT

PT

Chuck side
Workpiece end face

Reference groove

Program
zeropoint

(b) When the pitch is negative

PT

PT

Chuck side
Workpiece
end face
Reference groove

2. When the program zeropoint is placed on the end face of the chuck
(a) When the pitch is positive
PT

PT

Chuck side
Workpiece
end face
Reference groove

Program zeropoint

(b) When the pitch is negative


PT

PT

Chuck side
Workpiece
end face

Reference groove

NUMBER

: Number of grooves when more than one


groove are to be machined at regular intervals
338

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(2) Standard or slanted grooving of an end face


STATPX, Z
ENDPTZ

(X, Z): Coordinates of a point where grooving starts


: Zcoordinate of a point where grooving ends

NOTE
3 When a tool has an upper reference position, a start point
is on the upper side of the groove and an end point is on the
lower side.

WIDTH
DEPTH

: Width of a groove to be machined


: Depth of a groove to be machined

WIDTH
DEPTH

End point
Start point

CHAMFER

CHAMFER

: Chamfer amount in grooving

NOTE
4 For slanted grooving, the Zcoordinate of an end point or
chamfer amount cannot be set.

PITCH

: Distance between grooves when multiple


grooves of the same figure are machined at
regular intervals
: Number of grooves when more than one
groove are to be machined at regular intervals

NUMBER

339

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(a) When the pitch is positive

PT

PT

Reference groove

Center of the spindle

(b) When the pitch is negative

Reference groove

PT

PT

Center of the spindle

340

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(3) Outersurface trapezoidal grooving


PITCH

: Distance between grooves when multiple


grooves of the same figure are machined at
regular intervals. For detailed information
about intervals, see the description of ordinary
grooves.
: Number of grooves when more than one
groove are to be machined at regular intervals.
For detailed information about the number of
grooves to be machined, see the description of
ordinary grooves.
: Coordinates of a point where grooving starts

NUMBER

STATPX, Z

NOTE
5 Irrespective of tooltip reference data, the start point and
direction in which a figure is specified are fixed.

Points 1 to 4

X, Z: X and Zcoordinates of the corners of a


trapezoidal groove shown below
: Corner radius of each of points 1 to 4
: Chamfer amount for each of points 1 to 4
X, Z: X and Zcoordinates of the end point of a
trapezoidal groove shown below

Corner radius
Chamfer
ENDPTX, Z

Start point

Point 1

Point 4

End point

Reference
point

Point 2

Point 3

NOTE
6 For each point, a corner radius and chamfer amount cannot
be specified at the same time; only one of the two items can
be specified at a time for each point.

341

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(4) Innersurface trapezoidal grooving


Point 2

Point 3

Reference
point
Start point

Point 1

Point 4

End point

(5) End face trapezoidal grooving


End point

Point 4
Point 3

Reference point

Point 2

Point 1

Start point

(6) Thread grooving

Start pint Z

Groove depth

Start pint X

Groove angle

Groove
width

Start pint X

Groove botton die

NOTE
7 Irrespective of tooltip reference data, the start point and
direction in which a figure is specified are fixed.

342

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.6.4

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

(1) Standard grooving and slanted grooving


For an standard groove or slanted groove, only rough machining is
performed.
Example of machining) Outersurface standard grooving using a
grooving tool with the left reference position

Details of Grooving

Reference
point
Cutting
start point

GC
Start
point

GC: Clearance along the Xaxis in grooving (parameter 9820).


Clearance along the Zaxis for endface grooving (parameter
9821).
(2) Trapezoidal grooving
For a trapezoidal groove, both rough machining and finish
machining are performed.
- Rough machining for outersurface trapezoidal grooving using
a tool with the left reference position

OVLGRV* (Tool width)


Reference
point
Cutting
start point

GC

Start point

End
point
GRVBCK
GRVBCK: Parameter 9824
OVLGRV: Parameter 9825

343

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
In rough machining, cutting is performed so that figures can
be produced which have a clearance equivalent to the
amount of finishing allowance (along the X and Zaxes)
plus the tool tip radius with respect to the specified
trapezoidal groove figure.
When rough machining is completed, semifinish
machining is performed. For semifinish machining, the
same tools and cutting conditions as used for rough
machining are used.
However, semifinish machining can be cancelled by
setting bit 5 of parameter 9772 to 1.
-

Finish machining

Grooving
tool

Grooving
tool

Reference
point

Reference
point
Reference
point

344

B62444E1/04

1.7

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

Necking machines a neck portion at a comer for finish grinding.

NECKING
Tool

1.7.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
created automatically, and a machining type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing the [NECK] soft key selects necking.
(1) Process data for generalpurpose necking

PROC(01)
NECKING

HEAD
HEADL
CUTSPD FEED/REV
80
0.25

AREA

SHAPE ROUGHNES
GENERAL
5
AMNT A
B
C
2.000
0.500
0.500

TOOLNO TCODE
102
0101
D
2.000

(2) Process data for necking for grinding 1/grinding 2/threads

PROC(01)
NECKING

HEAD
AREA
SHAPE STNDRDD ROUGHNES
HEADL
GRINDING1
35.000
5
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV
TCODE
102
80
0.25
0101

345

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

JAREA (A): Select the desired type of the AREA from the following
menu items.
1 = Right side of an outer surface [ ]
2 = Left side of an outer surface [ ]
3 = Right side of an inner surface [ ]
4 = Left side of an inner surface [ ]
5 = Upper side of an end face [ ]
6 = Lower side of an end face [ ]

1.7.2
Details of Process Data

1. Rightside outer surface [

2. Leftside outer surface [

3. Rightside inner surface [

4. Leftside inner surface [

5. Upper end face [

6. Lower end face [

346

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

JSTART PNT.

X: Xcoordinate of a relief position between


necking portions
Z: Zcoordinate of a relief position between
necking portions

Machining
start point
Necking portion (2)

Necking portion (1)

JNecking figure (NT): Select the desired type of the Necking figure
from the following menu items.
1 = GENERAL
2 = GRINDING1 (or DIN509E)
3 = GRINDING2 (or DIN509F)
4 = THREADS (or DIN76)
1. Generalpurpose necking

2. Necking 1 for grinding (or DIN509E)

WT

347

15

DT

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3. Necking 2 for grinding (or DIN509F)

W1

WT

8
R

15

DT

4. Necking for threads (or DIN76)

WT

0.6 * DT

JSTNDRDD

30

DT

: Xcoordinate of a necking portion used for the


reference (for a necking figure based on the
DIN standards only)

NOTE
1 For a necking figure based on the DIN standards, each
dimension is determined automatically when a standard
diameter is specified, as shown in the table below.

Diameter
(Xcoordinate)

Depth (DT)
(radius)

Corner
radius (R)

Width (WT)
(radius)

Removing
(W1)

Smaller than 18 mm 0.25 mm


Smaller than 0.7087 0.0098 in.
in.

0.6 mm
0.236 in.

2.0 mm
0.0787 in.

0.1 mm
0.0039 in.

18 mm or larger but
smaller than 80 mm
0.7087 in. or larger
but smaller than
3.15 in.

0.35 mm
0.0138 in.

0.6 mm
0.236 in.

2.5 mm
0.0984 in.

0.2 mm
0.0079 in.

80 mm or larger
3.15 in. or larger

0.45 mm
0.0177 in.

1.0 mm
0.0394 in.

4.0 mm
0.1575 in.

0.3 mm
0.0118 in.

JROUGHNES
348

: Machined surface roughness

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
2 When a necking figure, machining area, and surface
roughness are specified, a tool for necking and cutting
conditions are determined automatically.

TOOLNO.
:
CUTSPD(M/minute) :
FEED/REV
:
TCODE
:
AMNT A, B, C, D :

1. AREA [

Management number for a necking tool


Cutting speed in necking
Feed amount in necking
Tcode for a necking tool
Each dimension of a generalpurpose necking
portion (Generalonly purpose necking)

2. AREA [

B
C
3. AREA [
C

4. AREA [

]
D

5. AREA [

6. AREA [
B
C

D
D

C
B

349

]
A

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

The following data is displayed on the detail data screen.


JSDRCT

: Derection in which the spindle rotates in


necking
JSPINDLE GEAR : Spindle gear selection
JCOOLANT
: Cutting oil specification
- Necking based on the DIN standards (DIN509E, DIN76)
NECKING AMNT
JWIDTH
JDEPTH
JROUND
JAPPROACH ANG
-

WT:
DT:
R:
AA:

See the items of a necking figure


and standard diameter.

Necking based on the DIN standards (DIN509F)


NECKING AMNT

WIDTH
DEPTH
ROUND
APPROACH ANG
RELIEF AMNT
RELIEF ANGLE

350

WT:
DT:
R:
AA:
W1:
WA:

See the items of necking figure


and standard diameter.

B62444E1/04

1.7.3
Automatic Tool
Selection

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

(1) Generalpurpose necking without, necking 1 for grinding


(DIN509E), and necking for threads (DIN76)

TA

TB
TC (= 180TATB)

15
TC  15 +3 : DIN 509E
TC  30 +3 : DIN 76
TA  90

(2) Generalpurpose necking with removing and necking (with


removing) for grinding (DIN509F)

DIN509F
TC  15 +3
TA 90 +8+3
Generalpurpose necking
TC ParameterNo.9815+3
TA  90+ParameterNo.9815+3
TA
TC
Relief

NOTE
Only those tools that satisfy the angle requirement shown
above can be selected.

351

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.7.4
Details of Figure Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

After process data is entered and confirmed, moving the cursor to the next
line of the process data displays the figure data for the necking process.
60
20
70
50

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(Xcoordinate of the first necking portion)


(Zcoordinate of the first necking portion)
(Xcoordinate of the second necking portion)
(Zcoordinate of the second necking portion)

BSC PT

X1: Xcoordinate value of the reference position


for the first necking portion
Z1: Zcoordinate value of the reference position
for the first necking portion

X5: Xcoordinate of the reference point for the fifth


necking portion
Z5: Zcoordinate of the reference point for the fifth
necking portion

Pn (X, Z): Reference point

1.7.5

For necking, only finish machining is performed.

Details of Necking
Cancellation of noseR
compensation

Cutting start point

EA

Start up noseR of
compensation

SA

352

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

A clearance angle of 3 is used for the cutting angle and relief angle for
a necking portion.

Tool tip

TA (cutting
edge angle)
TB (tool angle)

SA (cutting angle) = 180 TA (cutting edge angle) TB (tool angle) 3


EA (relief angle) = TA (cutting edge angle) 90 3
Those tools that can satisfy the cutting angle and relief angle requirements
set in parameter 9815 are selected automatically.
NOTE
In necking based on the DIN standards, a point of
intersection calculation is automatically performed as
described below.

Example) Necking (with removing) for grinding (DIN509F)

Sz

W1

WT
f

8
r Corner R2
e

Corner R1

Sx
15

:Point with known coordinates


: Point with unknown coordinates

353

DT

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.8
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
BORING, AND
TAPPING

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

The following types of turning can be used to make a hole in the center
of a workpiece. It is assumed that the hole will subsequently be threaded
or enlarged.

(1) Center drilling

(2) Drilling

Drill tool
Center drill tool

(4) Reaming

(3) End mill drilling

Reamer tool

End mill tool

(5) Boring

(6) Throw away drill drilling


Boring tool
Throw away drill

(7) Tapping

Tap tool

NOTE
1 To perform reaming or boring, set bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 to 1. For details, see the
parameter descriptions. When the capacity of the part program storage is insufficient, however,
reaming or boring cannot be performed.
2 To perform throwaway drilling, set bit 0 (SLW) of parameter No. 9765 to 1.

354

B62444E1/04

1.8.1
Machining Type
Selection

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

When the cursor is positioned to the end of a program, a new process is


created automatically. The available machining types are displayed as
soft keys.
To perform a given machining type, follow the corresponding procedure
below:
Pressing one of the [CENTER], [DRILL], and [TAP] soft keys selects the
machining.
Center drilling
Drilling
Tapping
Drilling

:
:
:
:

End milling

Reaming

Boring

Throwaway drilling

355

Press the [CENTER] soft key.


Press the [DRILL] soft key.
Press the [TAP] soft key.
Press the [DRILL] soft key, then select
[DRILL] from the type of machining
column.
Press the [DRILL] soft key, then select
[ENDMIL] from the type of machining
column.
Press the [DRILL] soft key, then select
[REAM] from the type of machining
column.
Press the [DRILL] soft key, then select
[BORING] from the type of machining
column.
Press the [DRILL] soft key, then select
[THROWAWAY] from the type of
machining column.

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.8.2

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) Process data for center drilling

Process Data
PROC(01)
CENTERDRL

MACHN2
HEAD HOLEDIA STATPZ
CENTER
HEADL
2.000
0.000
CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL
80
0.25
1.000

ENDPTZ
2.000

TOOLNO TCOOD
702
0808

NOTE
1 For chamfering, CHAMFDIA is displayed instead of
HOLEDIA.

MACHN2

: Select the desired type of machining from


[CENTER],[CENTER+CHAMF],
[STARTING], or [START.+CHAMF].
2. Center drilling + chamfering

1. Center drilling

Center drill
60

Center drill
DD

90

DD
End point Z

3. Starting

4. Starting + chamfering

Drill
90

DD

DD

Drill
90

End point Z
DD: Hole diameter or chamfering diameter

NOTE
2 For center drilling + chamfering, the chamfering is not drawn
on the screen during machining simulation.

HOLEDIA
: Diameter of the hole subject to center drilling
CHAMFDIA : Diameter of the hole subject to chamfering
356

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

STATPZ

ENDPTZ

TOOLNO

TCODE
CUTSPD

FEED/REV
DWELL

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

: Absolute Z coordinate of the start point for center


drilling or chamfering. The position of the start point
on the end face of the workpiece is determined
automatically. It can subsequently be changed
manually, however.
: Absolute Z coordinate of the end point for center
drilling or chamfering. End point Z, used for
chamfering, is determined automatically.
Pressing the [DEPTH] soft key enables the depth of a
hole, relative to the start point, to be input.
: Tool ID number for center drilling or chamfering
For starting, a drill having a tip angle of 90 is
determined automatically.
For center drilling, a center drill having a tip angle of
60 is selected automatically.
In center drilling plus chamfering, a center drill
having a tip angle of 90 is determined automatically.
: T code for the tool described above
: Cutting speed
The actual spindle speed is calculated from the
circumferential speed and nominal diameter of the
tool.
Pressing the [SPINDL SPEED] soft key enables input
of the spindle speed.
: Feedrate
: Dwell at the bottom of a hole

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the detail
data screen in the same way as those for bar machining.
(2) Process data screen for drilling

PROC(01)
DRILLING

MACHN2
HEAD
PATTERN PROCDIA STATPZ ENDPTZ
DRILLING
HEADL HOLEPECK
20.000
0.000
10.000
TOOL NO CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL CUTDPTH
TCODE
601
80
0.25
1.000
2.000
0808

PATTERN

: Select the desired drilling type from [HOLE DRILL],


[HOLE PECK, [HOLE HI.SPD], [PENET DRILL],
[PENET PECK] and [PENET HI.SPD].

357

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. Blindhole drilling

B62444E1/04

2. Blindhole, peck drilling

3. Highspeed, blindhole, peck drilling 4. Throughhole drilling

5. Throughhole, peck drilling

6. Highspeed, throughhole, peck drilling

PROCDIA
STATPZ

: Diameter of a blind hole or through hole


Z: Absolute Z coordinate of the start point of a blind hole
or through hole
ENDPTZ
Z: Absolute Z coordinate of the end point of a blind hole
or through hole
End point Z for a through hole is determined
automatically.
Pressing the [DEPTH] soft key enables input of the
depth of a hole relative to the start point.
CUTDPTH
: Depth of the first cut in peck or highspeed peck
drilling. (Related parameter: No. 9853, DRILCF)
Example)

When parameter No. 9853 is set to 30


and the nominal diameter of the tool is
20 mm, the depth of cut is calculated as
follows:

20 (nominal diameter)

30
100

(coefficient) = 6 mm (depth of cut)

JDEPTH DECRS : Decrement of the depth of cut for peck or


highspeed peck drilling. The depth of cut is
reduced by the specified amount for each cut.
(Related parameter: No. 9850, DRLDEC)
JRETURN AMNT: Amount of retraction for peck or highspeed peck
drilling.
(Related parameter:
NO. 9851,
DRLRET)

358

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. Peck drilling
Cutting start point
Amount of retraction

Amount of each cut

2. Highspeed peck drilling


Cutting start point
Amount of retraction

Amount of each cut

JMIN DEPTH
JSTART FEED

: Minimum depth of cut. (Related parameter: No.


9852, DRLMIN)
: Cutting feed amount at the start of cutting.
(Related parameter: No. 9050, STFECF). The
cutting feed amount at the start of cutting is
calculated as follows. It can be changed manually.
(Usual cutting feed amount)

JSTART CLR

(STFECF)
100

: Clearance (distance between the tool tip and tool


shoulder) at the start of cutting. The tool cuts the
workpiece by the cutting feed amount at the start of
cutting, described above, from a point distanced
from the cutting start point by an amount equal to
this clearance. This clearance is calculated as
follows. It can be changed manually.
SC=

(nominal diameter of the tool)


2 x Tan ( /2)

(=Tool angle between 0< <180)

SC

JEND FEED (only for a through hole):


Cutting feed amount for the last cut. (Related
parameter: No. 9051, ENFECF). The cutting feed
amount for the last cut is calculated as follows. It
can be changed manually.
(Usual cutting feed amount)

359

(ENFECF)
100

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

JENDCLR (only for a through hole):


Clearance (distance the tool protrudes from a hole)
for the last cut. The tool cuts a workpiece by the
cutting feed amount at the last cut, described
above, from a point distanced from the cutting end
point by an amount equal to this clearance. This
clearance is calculated as follows. It can be
changed manually.
SC=

(nominal diameter of the tool)


2 x Tan ( /2)

(nominal diameter of the tool)


10
(=Tool angle between 0< <180)

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the
program and detail data screens in the same way as for center
drilling.
NOTE
3 For drilling, a tool having a tool angle of other than 180 is
selected automatically.

(3) Process data screen for end milling

PROC(01)
DRILLING

MACHN2
HEAD PATTERN PROCDIA STATPZ RESIDPZ
ENDMILL HEADL RESIDPZ
20.000
0.000
1.000
ENDPTZ TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/MIN1
DWELL
TCODE
12.000
751
80
0.25
1.000
0808

PATTERN

: Select
either
of
[SPOTFACING].

1. Residual machining

[RESID.CUTTNG]

2. Spotfacing
SZ

RZ

EZ

and

SZ
D

EZ

: Nominal diameter of an end mill


STATPZ (for residual machining): Z:
Absolute Z coordinate of the start point of the original
hole for which residual machining is performed (SZ,
shown above)
PROCDIA

360

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

STATPZ (for spotfacing): Z:


Absolute Z coordinate of the start point of the original
hole for which spotfacing is to be performed (SZ,
shown above)
RESIDPZ (for residual machining): Z::
Absolute Z coordinate of the start point for residual
machining (RZ, shown above)
ENDPTZ
: Absolute Z coordinate of the end point for residual
machining or spotfacing (D, shown above):
TOOLNO.
: Tool ID number for an end mill
For residual machining, a tool having a nominal
diameter not more than and as close as possible to the
diameter of the drilled hole is determined
automatically.
For spotfacing, a tool having a nominal diameter not
less than and as close as possible to the diameter of the
drilled hole is determined automatically.
FEED/REV 1 (only for residual machining):
Feed amount for residual machining (RZ > EZ). The
feed amount along the axis of the end mill is
determined automatically.
FEED/REV (only for spotfacing):
Feed amount for spotfacing (SZ > EZ). The feed
amount along the axis of the end mill is determined
automatically.
JFEED/REV 2 (only for residual machining).:
Feed amount for movement from the start point (SZ) to the
start point for residual machining. (Related parameter:
No. 9052, EMLFR2)

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as for drilling.
(4) Process data screen for reaming
PROC(01)
DRILLING

MACHN2
REAMING
STATPZ
0.000

HEAD
HEADL
ENDPTZ
12.000

PATTERN.

PATTERN
HOLE
TOOLNO
901

PROCDIA CMAMFLNG
20.000
3.000
CUTSPD FEED/MIN DWELL TCODE
80
0.25 1.000
0808

: Select one of [HOLE] or [PENE TRATE].

1. Blind hole

2. Through hole
Reamer

361

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

CHAMFLNG : Cuttinglip length of a reamer at cutting start or


cutting end (SC, shown below) (related parameter:
No. 9054, RIMKLN)
1. Blind hole/through hole

2. Through hole

SC

SC

TOOLNO.

: Tool ID number for a reamer. A reamer having a


nominal diameter equal to that of the drilled hole is
determined automatically.
JSTART FEED: Cutting feed amount at the start of cutting.
<Related parameter: No. 9050, STFECF>
The cutting feed amount at the start of cutting is
calculated as follows. It can be changed manually.
(Usual cutting feed amount)

(STFECF)
100

JEND FEED (only for a through hole):


Cutting feed amount for the last cut for a through hole.
(Related parameter: No. 9051, ENFECF)
The cutting feed amount for the last cut is calculated
as follows. It can be changed manually.
(Usual cutting feed amount)

(ENFECF)
100

JRETURN SPD: Feedrate for retraction to the cutting start point upon
the completion of reaming.
<Related parameter: No. 9860, RMBROV>
The feedrate for retraction is calculated as follows. It
can be changed manually.
(Usual cutting feed amount)

(RMBROV)
10

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as for drilling.
(5) Process data screen for boring

PROC(01)
DRILLING

MACHN2
HEAD PROCDIA STATPZ
BORING
HEADL
20.000
0.000
CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL
SHIFT
80
0.25
1.000
0.500

SHIFT

ENDPTZ
20.000

TOOLNO TCODE
951
0808

: Shift in retraction for boring (Q, shown below)


<Related parameter: No. 9858, BRSHFT>
362

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

NOTE
4 The tool is usually retracted, at the rapid traverse rate, to the
cutting start point upon the completion of boring. When the
diameter of a hole is small (shift x 2 + tool width hole
diameter), the tool is retracted at the same feedrate as that
for retraction for reaming.
Data items other than those described above are displayed
on the program and detail data screens in the same way as
for drilling.
(6) Process data screen for throwaway drilling

PROC(01)
MACHN2
HEAD PATTERN PROCDIA STATPZ
DRILLING THROWAWAY HEADL PENHI.S
20.000
0.000
TOOLNO CUTSPD FEED/REV
DWELL CUTDPTH
631
80
0.25
1.000
1.500

ENDPTZ
20.000
TCODE
0808

CUTSPD (m/minute) : Cutting speed for throwaway drilling.


<Related parameter: No. 9055, SLCSCF>
The cutting speed for throwaway drilling is
calculated from the drilling cutting conditions,
as follows:
(Cutting speed of drill)

FEED/REV

(SLCSCF)
100

: Feed amount for throwaway drilling.


<Related parameter: NO. 9057, SLFRCF>

The feed amount for throwaway drilling is


calculated from the drilling cutting conditions, as
follows:
(Feed amount of drill)

(SLFRCF)
100

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as for drilling.

363

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(7) Process data screen for tapping

PROC(01)
TAP
TOOLNO
631

HEAD
HEADL
CUTSPD
80

PITCH
TOOLNO.

STATZ ENDPTZ
0.000
20.000
DWELL
1.000

NOMINLD
10.000

PITCH
0.500
TCODE
0808

: Tap pitch
: Tool ID number of a tap. A tap having the same
nominal diameter and the same pitch is determined
automatically.

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as for drilling.

1.8.3
Automatic Pretool
Determination
Function

In drilling, when a final machining process is just created for the drilling,
a necessary preprocess, tools, and cutting conditions are determined
automatically according to the data registered beforehand in the pretool
list.
For information about the pretool list, see Section 13.3.
Example of operation for automatic pretool determination)
(1) Create a new process by pressing the [] or [INSERT] soft key as in
the case of other machining processes.
(2) Tools and cutting conditions are determined automatically by
specifying tapping as the machining type, 50 mm as the hole bottom
point, 20 mm as the nominal diameter, and 1 mm as the pitch.
With the above operation, automatic pretool determination is
performed, and the the pretool process shown below is
automatically created.
(i) Pretool 1 (center drilling)
(ii) Pretool 2 (prepared hole by drilling)

364

B62444E1/04

1.9
SINGLE ACTION
1.9.1
Machining Type
Selection

PROC(01)
SINGL ACT

1.9.2
Details of Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

The single action process executes a simple move command or auxiliary


function block.

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
created automatically, and a machining type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing one of the [SINGL] soft key selects the singleaction process.

HEAD
HEADL

TOOLNO CUTSPD
102
80

FEEDRATE
MM/REV

TCODE
0101

TOOLNO

: Tool management number of a tool to be used


for a single action
TCODE
: Tcode for tool selection
FEED RATE
: Select the desired type of FEEDRATE from the
following menu items.
0 = mm/rotation
1 = mm/minute
CUTSPD (m/minute) : Cutting speed (constant surface speed control
enabled)
Pressing the [SPINDL SPEED] soft key
enables the direct specification of the spindle
speed.
Constant surface speed control,
however, is disabled.
NOTE
Single action is not supported by the detail data screen. The
profile of a workpiece cannot be drawn on this screen.

365

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.9.3

Seven types of single actions can be specified.

Details of Figure Data

One single action process allows up to 30 blocks to be registered.


(1) AUXF

AUXF

M=

S=

M : Mcode
S : SPINDLE SPD.
(2) POSITN (G00)
POSITN

X=

Z=

X : END POS. X
Z : END POS. Z
(3) LINE (G00)
LINE

X=
F=

Z=

X : END POS. X
Z : END POS. Z
F : FEED AMNT (mm/revolution) or
FEED RATE (mm/minute)
(4) ARC
ARC

X=
R=

Z=
F=

X
Z
R
F

:
:
:
:

(5) ARC
ARC

(G02)

END POS. X
END POS. Z
ARC R
FEED AMNT (mm/revolution) or
FEED RATE (mm/minute)
(G03)

X=
R=

Z=
F=

X
Z
R
F

:
:
:
:

END POS. X
END POS. Z
ARC R
FEED AMNT (mm/revolution) or
FEED RATE (mm/minute)
366

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(6) DWELL (G04)


DWELL

P=

P : DWELL TIME
(7) THREAD (G32)
THREAD

X=
F=

Z=

X : END POS. X
Z : END POS. Z
F : Lead of thread

1.9.4
Figure Data Input
Operation

(1) Creating a new block


After entering singleaction process data is completed, moving the
cursor to the next line of the process data displays the following
figure data menu in the soft key field.
ARC

<

ARC

AUXF POSITN LINE

DWELL THREA FIGURE PLOT


D
END

Press the soft key corresponding to a figure to be specified. Move


the cursor to the next line to display the above menu again, then
select the next figure.
After the necessary figure data is entered, press the [FIGURE END]
soft key.
(2) Changing operation data
Place the cursor on an operation data item to be changed. Then, enter
a new numeric value with numeric keys and press the INPUT key.
(3) Changing the operation type
Place the cursor on an operation type item to be changed. Then,
press the [ALTER FIGURE] soft key and select a new operation type
with the desired soft key.
(4) Inserting a block
Move the cursor to the operation type item in the block just after
which a new block is to be added, press the [INSERT] soft key, and
select a new operation type with the desired soft key.
(5) Deleting a block
Move the cursor to a block to be deleted, then press the [DELETE]
soft key. This operation displays the [CANCEL] and [EXEC] soft
keys. To cancel block deletion, press the [CANCEL] soft key.
Or, to execute block deletion, press the [EXEC] soft key.
367

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.9.5
Selecting the Type of
Machining (Single
Action II)

PROC(01)
SINGL ACT

1.9.6
Process Data (For
Single Action II)

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Use single action II to input more general NC program commands.


Addresses other than O or N can be input. Multiple G codes can also be
specified in a single block.
To use single action II, set bit 0 (SC2) of parameter No. 9766 to 1. Then,
press the [SINGL] soft key in the same way as for the conventional single
action.

HEAD
HEADL

TOOL NO
102

TYPE TCODE
SIDE
0101

TOOL NO. : Tool ID number of the tool used for the conventional
single action
TYPE

: Screen on which the machining simulation is drawn


Select one of [SIDE], [CFRONT], [COPEN],
[YFRONT], or [YCROSS].
1. Turning drawing: Turning simulation on the ZX plane is displayed.
2. Caxis endface drawing:
Caxis drilling/grooving/notching
simulation on the XC plane is displayed.
3. Caxis development drawing: Simulation of Caxis cylindrical
machining on the CZ plane is displayed.
4. Yaxis endface drawing:
Yaxis endface drilling/milling
simulation on the XY plane is displayed.
5. Yaxis side drawing: Yaxis sideface drilling/milling simulation on
the YZ plane is displayed.
NOTE
1 To disable the display of TYPE on the screen, set bit 1 (TYP)
of parameter No. 9766 to 1. Then, the turning drawing is
automatically selected and displayed for turning tools
(including drills), while the endface drawing is displayed for
milling tools.

T CODE

: Tool ID number
This item is used only to select the tool to be displayed in
machining simulation.
To actually output a T code, figure data must be specified.

NOTE
2 Single action II is not supported by the detail data screen.
A product profile cannot be displayed.

368

1.9.7
Figure Data (For Single
Action II)
PROC(01)
SINGL ACT

<

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

In single action II, any NC program commands, including G codes, can


be input (excluding O and N commands).
Up to 104 blocks can be input to a singleactionII process.

HEAD
HEADL

TOOL NO CUTSPD
102
80

NSERT DELETE FIGURE WINDOW PROCES


OFF
END
EDIT

1st data

2nd data

FEED/REV
MM/REV

MACHIN TOOL DETAIL


DATA
DATA
C

3rd data

4th data

TCODE
0101

PLOT

5th data

(1) Inputting figure data


To input figure data, enter an address (alphabetic character) key,
enter a value with the numeric keys, then press the INPUT key.
A line of figure data, consisting of up to five data items, corresponds
to one block of a NC program.
Once a data item has been input, the cursor moves to the nextdata
position. Once all five data items have been input, the cursor moves
to the next line. If data items necessary for a block have been entered
in the middle of a line, press the downarrow key to position the
cursor to the next line.
Once all necessary data items have been entered, press the [FIGURE
END] soft key.
(2) Changing figure data
Position the cursor to the data item to be changed, then enter a new
value.
(3) Adding figure data
Position the cursor to the block immediately before the block to be
added, then press the [INSERT] soft key to insert a new block. Enter
new data into that block.
(4) Deleting figure data
Position the cursor to the block to be deleted, then press the
[DELETE] soft key. Then, [CAN]/[EXEC] appears on the screen.
To cancel block delete operation, press the [CAN] soft key. To delete
the block, press the [EXEC] soft key.

369

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.10
CALLING
SUBPROGRAMS

1.10.1
Machining Type
Selection

PROC(01)
CALL SUB

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

This process calls and executes a subprogram registered beforehand in the


program area of the NC.
Up to four subprograms can be registered using subprogram numbers
O9990 to O9993.

When the cursor is moved to the end of the program, a new process is
created automatically, and a machining type menu is displayed in the soft
key field.
Pressing one of the [CA.SUB] soft key selects the subprogram call
process.

HEAD
HEADL

PROGRAM

DATA 1

DATA 2

DATA 3

DATA 4

NOTE
1 The subcall process is not supported by the detail data
screen.
2 When bit 5 (SP6) of parameter 9776 is set to 1, up to six
programs can be registered.

1.10.2

PROGRAM

Details of Process Data


1=
:
2=
:
3=
:
4=
:

: Subprogram specification
Select the desired type of PROGRAM from the
following menu items.
Program 1 (O9990)
AAAAAAAAAAAA
Program 2 (O9991)
BBBBBBBBBBBB
Program 3 (O9992)
CCCCCCCCCCCC
Program 4 (O9993)
DDDDDDDDDDDD

NOTE
Name AAAAAAAAAAAA is set in parameter 9700 to 9715;
name BBBBBBBBBBBB is set in parameter 9716 to 9731;
name CCCCCCCCCCCC is set in parameter 9732 to 9747;
and name DDDDDDDDDDDD is set in parameter 9748 to
9763.

DATA 1
DATA 2
DATA 3
DATA 4

:
:
:
:
370

Variable 1 data (macro variable #20828)


Variable 2 data (macro variable #20829)
Variable 1 data (macro variable #20830)
Variable 2 data (macro variable #20831)

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.10.3
Notes on Subprograms

1.10.4
Selecting the Type of
Machining
(For Subcall II)

(1) A subprogram must be created in the program area of the NC.


(2) No programs can be called from a subprogram.
(3) Gcodes, address specification, NC format programs including
auxiliary functions, and custom macro instructions can be used.
However, subprogram calling (M98 ...) or subprogram calling using
an M, T, or Gcode cannot be performed.
(4) Only when a custom macro function is provided, data 1 to data 4
specified in a process of calling subprograms can be read using
custom macro variables #20206 to #20209.

In subcall process II, any subprograms stored in part program storage can
be called and up to 21 variables can be specified.
A called subprogram can call other subprograms with a nesting level of
up to seven (with a nesting level of four when using custommacro call
G65, or with a nesting level of three when using subprogram call M98).
To use subcall process II instead of the conventional subcall process,
set bit 3 (CS2) of parameter No. 9771 to 1.
NOTE
The conventional subcall process is not compatible with
subcall process II. To use subcall process II from a point
partway through a program, any subcall processes that
have already been created must be deleted.

To enter subcall process II, press the [CA.SUB] soft key in the same way
as for a conventional subcall.
PROC(02)
CALL SUB
DATA J

HEAD
HEADL
DATA K

PROGRAM
5555
DATA D

371

DATA A

DATA B

DATA C DATA I

DATA E

DATA F

DATA H DATA M

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.10.5

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

PROGRAM : Number of the subprogram to be called


The subprogram to be called must reside in part program
storage. A program number must consist of four digits.

Process Data
(For Subcall II)

DATA A
DATA B

: Data for argument A


: Data for argument B

L
DATA M

L
: Data for argument M

NOTE
Up to 21 variables to be passed to a subprogram can be
specified. (Arguments A, B, C, I, J, K, D, E, F, H, M, Q, R,
S, T, U, V, W, X, Y, Z)
Data items other than arguments are displayed on the detail
data screen.

Example of detail data screen for subcall process II


EDIT THE PROCESSING PROGRAM
MACHINING

P=

CALL SUB

HEAD
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA

H=
A=
B=
C=
I=
J=
K=
D=
E=
F=
H=
M=
Q=
R=
S=
T=

HEADL
10.000

A
B
C
I
J
K
D
E
F
H
M
Q
R
S
T

[CAP]

*** PROCESS ***

30.000
1.000
1209.020
22.222
99999.999
90.222
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA
DATA

15.000
0.001
0.050
30.000
20.000
DATA A

372

U
V
W
X
Y
Z

U=
V=
W=
X=
Y=
Z=

1.000
5.000
0.011
0.033
34.230
56.000

B62444E1/04

1.10.6
Subprograms to be
Called (Subcall II)

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

A machining program created by means of conversational programming


is executed either directly or after being converted to an NC program.
To call a subprogram from a machining program to be executed in either
of the above two ways, a subprogram having the following format must
be created.
When a conversational machining program is to be executed directly,
code argument data (P code variables #20807, #20808, ...) input in
subcall process II to arguments (local variables #1, #2, ...).

Example)

09***

(Start of subprogram)

#8570=1 ;

(#8570=0:Offset is read with #1****. #9*** is disabled.)


(#8570=1: P code variable is read with #1****. #9*** is
enabled.)
IF[#9121 EQ 0]GOTO @@@@;
(#9121=0: NC program is being executed. #9121=1:
Conversational program is being executed.)
#1=#20807; (The value of conversational data A is specified in local
argument variable A.)
#2=#20808; (The value of conversational data B is specified in local
argument variable B.)
N@@@@
NOTE
Macro variables correspond to addresses input in
conversational subcall process II, as follows.
Address A=: #20807
Address B=: #20808
Address C=: #20809
Address I=: #20810
Address J=: #20811
Address K=: #20812
Address D: #20813
Address E: #20814
Address F: #20815
Address H: #20816
Address M: #20817
Address Q: #20818
Address R: #20819
Address S: #20820
Address T: #20821
Address U: #20822
Address V: #20823
Address W: #20824
Address X: #20825
Address Y: #20826
Address Z: #20832

373

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

1.10.7

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Subcall II is converted to the following NC program.

NC Program
Conversion For
Subcall II

G65 P5555

Example NC program, converted from subcall process II)

A10.0 C30.0 11.0 J1209.02 K22.222


D99999.999 F90.222 M15.0 Q0.001
R0.05 S30.0 T20.0 U1.0 V5.0 W0.011
X0.033 Y34.23 Z56.0 ;

NOTE
Block variables in subcall II are output in units of the least
input increment, as shown in the above example.
Insignificant 0s, positioned to the left of the decimal point,
are not output. When a variable is null, it is not output.

1.11
AUXILIARY AND
TRANSFER
PROCESSES

The machine tool builders may have created auxiliary and transfer
processes on their own. For details of these processes, refer to the
descriptions issued by the machine tool builders.
The auxiliary process can be used for both the 1path lathe and the 2path
lathe. The transfer process can only be used for the 2path lathe with two
spindles facing each other.

374

B62444E1/04

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

1.12
MCODE AND
PROGRAM END
PROCESSES
1.12.1
Mcode Process

In the Mcode process, only Mcodes are output. Up to five Mcodes can
be output.
When the cursor is at a machining type item after a new process is created,
pressing the [M] soft key selects the Mcode process.

PROC(01)
M

HEAD
HEADL

M
11

M
12

The Mcodes are output to the tool post specified in the head item. No
head item is displayed in the 1path lathe.

375

1. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


2AXES (X AND Z AXIS) LATHES

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.12.2

The operation at the end of a machining program can be specified.

Program End Process

When the cursor is at a machining type item after a new process is created,
pressing the [END] soft key selects the program end process.

PROC(01)
END

RETURN
G00

RETURNX
100.000

RETURNZ
80.000

RETURNC
0.000

ENDM
M02

LOOP
10

RETURN

: Type of a return to be made at the end of


machining program execution
Select the desired code of RETURN from the
[G00], [G28] and [G30] soft key.
G28
: Return to the machine zero point.
G30
: Return to the second zero point (tool change
position).
RETURNX, Z, C, F : Absolute coordinates of individual axis return
positions when G00 is selected on the above
menu.
The machine is moved only along the axis for
which a return position is entered.
ENDM
: M code indicating the end of a machining
program
Select one of [M02], [M30], or [M99].
When M02 is selected, M02 is output and the
program is terminated.
When M30 is selected, M30 is output and the
program is terminated.
When M99 is selected, the program is repeated
until it is forcibly reset by an external reset or
other factor.
LOOP
: A program is repeated the specified number of
times. At the end of repetition, the specified
end M code, M02 or M30, is output. When
M99 is selected as an end M code, M02 is
output.
NOTE
When a program end process is not specified, program
termination can be specified with the following parameters.
(1) Bit 2 (EDM) of parameter No. 9772
0: M02 is output when the program is terminated.
1: M30 is output when the program is terminated.
(2) Bit 3 (280) of parameter No. 9774
0: T0;G28 U0 W0; is executed at the end of the program,
after which the program is terminated.
1: The program is terminated without T0;G28 U0 W0;
being executed at the end of the program.
376

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES WITH CAXIS

377

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2.1
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
AND TAPPING FOR
END FACES

Z
Drill

Caxis

Blank

In the same way as for turning, center drilling, drilling, reaming, boring,
end milling, and tapping can be used for Caxis endface drilling.
Throwaway drilling, however, cannot be specified.
For details, see Section 1.8.
NOTE
To perform Caxis boring, set bit 1 (CBR) of parameter No.
9765 to 1.

2.1.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of program, a new process is


automatically created, and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
To perform a given machining type, follow the corresponding procedure
below:
Caxis center drilling: Press the [CCNTR] soft key, then the [FACING]
key.
Caxis drilling: Press the [CDRIL] soft key, then the [FACING] key.
Caxis tapping: Press the [CTAP] soft key, then the [FACING] key.
Select DRILLING to perform Caxis reaming, boring, or end milling.

378

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2.1.2

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

(1) Process data screen for Caxis center drilling

Details of Process Data


PROC(01)
CCENTER

AREA
FACING
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD MACHN2 HDLEDIA


HEADL
CENTER
2.000
DWELL INTERVAL
1.000
EQUAL

TOOLNO
701

REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

REV/MIN : Speed of the tool for drilling (/min.)


FEED/MIN : Feedrate for drilling (mm/min. or inch/min.)
NOTE
While drilling in turning is performed with feed per rotation,
Caxis drilling is performed with feed per minute.

INTERVAL : [EQ INTRVL] / [UNEQ INTRVL]


Select the desired type of INTERVAL from the following
menu items.
1 = EQ INTRVL
2 =UNEQ INTERVL
1. EQ INTRVL

2. UNEQ INTVL

379

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

JMachining start point X: X coordinate of the position to which the


tool retracts between holes
Z: Z coordinate of the position to which the
tool retracts between holes

Machining start point

JMILLING GEAR

: Milling gear selection (only when required)


Enter an M code directly.

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as those for drilling in turning.
(2) Process data screen for Caxis drilling

PROC(01)
CDRILL

AREA
HEAD MACHN2 PATTERN PROCDIA
FACING
HEADL DRILLING HOLEPECK
20.000
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
DWELL CUTDPTH INTERVAL
800
300
1.000
2.000
EQUAL

TOOLNO TCODE
601
0505

(3) Process data screen for Caxis end milling

PROC(01) AREA
HEAD MACHN2
PATTERN PROCDIA TOOLNO TCODE
CDRILL FACING
HEADL END.MILL RESID.CUT
20.000
751
0505
REV/MIN FEED/MIN1
DWELL INTERVAL
800
300
1.000
EQUAL

(4) Process data screen for Caxis reaming

PROC(01)
CDRILL

AREA
HEAD MACHN2
FACING HEADL REAMING
TOOLNO REV/MIN FEED/MIN
901
800
300

380

PATTERN PROCDIA CHMFLNG


HOLE
20.000
DWELL INTERVAL
TCODE
1.000
EQUAL
0505

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

(5) Process data screen for Caxis boring

PROC(01)
CDRILL

AREA
FACING
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
1.000

MACHN2 PROCDIA
BORING
20.000
SHIFT INTERVAL
0.500
EQUAL

TOOLNO
951

REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

JORIENT M

: M code for spindle orientation (related parameter:


No. 9056, CBRORM)
JSHIFTDRECT.X: Shift direction (related bit: bit 2 (BSH) of
parameter No. 9765)
Use the [PLSWRD] or [MNSWRD] soft key to
select the direction.
When bit 2 of parameter No. 9765 is set to 0, the
positive direction is selected automatically. When
the bit is set to 1, the negative direction is selected
automatically.
(6) Process data screen for Caxis tapping

PROC(01)
CTAP

AREA
FACING
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
1.000

NOMINLD
20.000
INTERVAL
EQUAL

381

PITCH
0.500

TOOLNO
651

REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.1.3

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) Figure data when EQ INTRVL is specified as the hole interval

Details of Figure Data

STATPX
30.000

STATPZ
0.000

STATPX
STATPZ
STATPC

STATPC
20.000

DEPTH
10.000

ANGLE NUMBER LST.ANGL


30.000
6

: Xcoordinate of the hole position (common)


: Zcoordinate of the hole start point (common)
: Ccoordinate of the first hole position

NOTE
1 In drilling, cutting starts at a point which allows for a drilling
clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

Hole depth

Drilling clearance (parameter


9855: GRDCL)

Machining start point

DEPTH
ANGLE

NUMBER
LST.ANGL

Zcoordinate of the hole start point

: Hole depth (common)


: Angle subtended by consecutive holes
Either the positive or negative direction can be
specified.
: Total number of holes
: Ccoordinate of the last hole position

382

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

When neither A (angle), N (number of holes), nor EC (final angle)


is entered

Example) X = r
C = 90.000
r
C=0

When a number greater than or equal to 2 is entered for N (number


of holes) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
entered for A (angle)

Example) X = r
C = 90.000
N=3

EC= 270.000
C=0

When data is entered for A (angle) and a number greater than or


equal to 2 is entered for N (number of holes), with no data entered
for EC (final angle)

Example) X = r
C = 90.000
A = 90.000
N=3

r
C=0

383

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Figure data when UNEQ INTRVL is specified as the hole interval
Up to six end face holes can be specified at arbitrary positions with
arbitrary hole depths.
POINT1X POINT1C
30.000
0.000

POINT
POINT
STATP

STATPZ
DEPTH
20.000 10.0000

nX: Xcoordinate of the nth hole position


nC: Ccoordinate of the nth hole position
Z: Zcoordinate of the nth hole start point

NOTE
2 In drilling, cutting starts at a point which allows for a drilling
clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

Hole depth

Drilling clearance (parameter


9855: GRDCL)

Machining start point

Zcoordinate of the hole start point

DEPTH

(E): Hole depth at the nth point (to be specified for each
hole)

NOTE
3 Machining is not performed for a hole unless all the figure
data above is entered.
4 Moving the cursor to the next line displays the figure data in
sequence. To specify the second and subsequent points,
enter the coordinates for the figure data. When all the hole
positions have been specified, press the [FIGURE END]
soft key.

2.1.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function

As with the drilling operations in turning, an automatic pretool selection


function is available for the Caxis end face drilling operations.

384

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2.2
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
AND TAPPING FOR
SIDE FACES

X
Drill
Z

Caxis
Blank

As with the drilling operations in turning, Caxis drilling for side faces
allows center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping to be specified.
For detailed information about each type of machining, see Section 1.8.

2.2.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of a program, a new process is


automatically created and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
To perform a given machining type, follow the corresponding procedure
below:
Caxis center drilling:
[CROSS] key.

Press the [CCENTER] soft key, then the

Caxis drilling: Press the [CDRILL] soft key, then the [CROSS] key.
Caxis tapping: Press the [CTAP] soft key, then the [CROSS] key.
Select DRILLING to perform Caxis reaming, boring, or end milling.

385

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.2.2

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) Process data screen for Caxis center drilling.

Details of Process Data

PROC(01)
CCENTER

AREA
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD MACHN2
HEADL
DWELL INTREVAL
1.000
EQUAL

START PNT.
.

HOLEDIA
2.000

TOOLNO
701

REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

X: Xcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of


the multiple drilled portions
Z: Zcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of
the drilled portions

Machining
start point

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as those for Caxis endface
drilling.
(2) Process data screen for Caxis drilling

PROC(01)
CDRIL

AREA
CROSS
REV/MIN
800

HEAD MACHN2
PATTERN PROCDIA
HEADL DRILLING HOLEPECK
20.000
FEED/MIN
DWELL CUT/DPTH INTERVAL
300
1.000
2.000
EQUAL

386

TOOLNO TCODE
601
0505

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

(3) Process data screen for Caxis end milling

PROC(01)
CDRILL

AREA
HEAD MACHN2
PATFERN HOLEDIA TOOLNO TCODE
CROSS
HEADL ENDMILL RESID.CUT
2.000
751
0505
REV/MIN FEED/MIN1
DWELL INTERVAL
800
300
1.000
EQUAL

(4) Process data screen for Caxis reaming

PROC(01)
CDRILL

AREA
CROSS
TOOLNO
901

HEAD MACHN2
HEADL REAMING
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
800
500

RATTERN HOLEDIA CHAMFLNG TCODE


HOLE
2.000
5.000
0505
DWELL INTERVAL
1.000
EQUAL

(5) Process data screen for Caxis boring

PROC(01)
CDRILL

AREA
CROSS
FEED/REV
500

HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
1.000

MACHN2
BORING
SHIFT
0.500

PROCDIA
20.000
INTERVAL
EQUAL

TOOLNO
951

REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

JSHIFTDRECT.Z: Shift direction (related bit: bit 2 (BSH) of


parameter No. 9765)
Use the [PLSWRD] or [MNSWRD] soft key to
select the direction.
When bit 2 of parameter No. 9765 is set to 0, the
positive direction is selected automatically. When
the bit is set to 1, the negative direction is selected
automatically.
(6) Process data screen for Caxis tapping

PROC(01)
CTAP

AREA
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD NOMINLD
HEADL
20.000
DWELL INTERVAL
1.000
EQUAL

387

PITCH
0.500

TOOLNO
651

REV/MIN TCODE
800
0505

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.2.3

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) Figure data when EQUAL is specified as the hole interval

Details of Figure Data

STATPX
30.000

STATPZ
0.000

STATPC
20.000

STATPX
STATPZ
STATPC

DEPTH
10.000

ANGLE
30.000

NUMBER LST.ANGL
6

: Xcoordinate of a hole start position (common)


: Zcoordinate of a hole position (common)
: Ccoordinate of the first hole position

NOTE
1 In drilling, cutting starts at a point which allows for a drilling
clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

Machining start point


Drilling clearance (parameter 9855:
GRDCL)
Hole depth
(radius)

DEPTH
ANGLE

NUMBER
LST.ANGL

Xcoordinate of a hole start point

: Hole depth (Radius:Common)


: Angle subtended by consecutive holes
Either the positive or negative direction can be
specified.
: Total number of holes
: Ccoordinate of the last hole position

388

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

When neither A (angle), N (number of holes), nor EC (final angle)


is entered

Example) C = 90.000

C=0

When a number greater than or equal to 2 is entered for N (number


of holes) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
entered for A (angle)

Example) C = 90.000
N = 3
EC = 270.000
C
EC

C=0

When data is entered for A (angle) and a number greater than or


equal to 2 is entered for N (number of holes), with no data entered
for EC (final angle)

Example) C = 90.000
A = 90.000
N = 3
A C
A

389

C=0

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Figure data screen when UNEQ INTRVL is specified as the hole
interval
Up to six sideface holes can be specified at arbitrary positions with
arbitrary hole depths.
POINT 1Z
30.000

POINT IC
0.000

STATPX
20.000

DEPTH
10.000

POINT
POINT
STATP

nZ: Zcoordinate of the nth hole position


nC: Ccoordinate of the nth hole position
X: Xcoordinate of the nth hole start point

NOTE
2 In drilling, cutting starts at a point which allows for a drilling
clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

Machining start point


Drilling clearance (parameter 9855:
GRDCL)
Hole depth
(radius)

DEPTH

Xcoordinate of the hole start point

(E): Hole depth at the nth point (Radius: To be specified


for each hole)

NOTE
3 Up to six endface holes can be specified at arbitrary
positions with arbitrary hole depths.
4 Moving the cursor to the next line displays the figure data in
sequence. To specify the second and subsequent points,
enter the coordinates for the figure data. When all the hole
positions have been specified, press the [FIGURE END]
soft key.

2.2.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function

As with the drilling operations in turning, an automatic pretool selection


function is available for the Caxis sideface drilling operations.

390

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.3
GROOVING FOR END
FACES

X
Z
End mill

Blank

2.3.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of program, a new process is


automatically created and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
Pressing the [CGROV] soft key selects Caxis grooving.

PROC(01)
CGRV(R)

AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO
FACING HEADL
10.000
752
FEED.Z
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR

REV/MIN
2000

FEED.X,C TCODE
1200
0101

NOTE
When data other than 0 is specified for BEVELAM, the
following chamfering process is automatically created.

PROC(01)
CGRV(R)

PROC(01)
CGRV(C)

AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO
FACING
HEADL
10.000
752
FEED.Z
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR
1.000
AREA
HEAD GRVDIA TOOLNO
FACING
HEADL
10.000
752
FEDRATE BEVELAM
REGULAR
1.000

391

REV/MIN
2000

FEED.X,C TCODE
1200
0101

REV/MIN
2000

FEEDRATE TCODE
2200
0101

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.3.2
Details of Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

START PNT X : Xcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of


the grooved portions
Z : Zcoordinate of the relief position, which is one of the
grooved portions

Machining
start point

MIL DIA

: Width of a groove to be machined

NOTE
In automatic tool selection, an end face end mill whose
nominal diameter is not larger than the specified groove
diameter is selected. Caxis grooving for end faces
machines a groove which is exactly as wide as the tool used.
Therefore, the width of a machined groove may be smaller
than the specified groove diameter.

TOOLNO

: Management number of a grooving tool (end


face end mill)
: Tcode for grooving tool or chamfering tool
: Tool speed (rpm) for grooving tool or
chamfering tool
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) used
in a traverse direction of the end face end mill
(along the X or Caxis)
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) used
along the axis of the end face end mill (along
the Zaxis)
: Type of Caxis end face grooving
Select the desired type of SHAPE from the
following menu items.
1 = REGUL.
2 = IRREG.

TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED.X,C

FEED.Z

SHAPE

392

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

1. REGULAR.

2. IRREGULAR.

JBEVEL AM

: Groove chamfer amount

Chamfer
amount

Actual groove
width

FEED/MIN
JMILLNGGEAR
JCOOLANT

393

: Feedrate for chanfering. (mm/min or


inch/min)
: Milling gear selection for chamfering (only
when needed). Enter an Mcode directly.
: Specify cutting oil.

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.3.3

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) Figure data when REGUL. is specified as the groove figure

Details of Figure Data

STATPX STATPZ
30.000
0.000
LST.ANGL

STATPC
45.000

DEPTH
5.000

STATPX
STATPZ

GRVLNG
30.000

ANGLE NUMBER
90.000
4

: Xcoordinate of the groove (common)


: Zcoordinate of the groove start point
(common)
: Ccoordinate of the first groove

STATPC

NOTE
In grooving, cutting starts at a point which allows for a
grooving clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

Groove depth

Grooving clearance
(parameter 9855: GRDCL)

Machining start point

Zcoordinate of the groove start


point

DEPTH
GRVLNG

: Groove depth (common)


: Length of the groove (Center angle:Common)

Groove end
point (X, C)
Groove
length

C=0
Groove start point (X, C)

394

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

ANGLE

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

: Center angle made by the start positions of


consecutive grooves

Groove1
end point
Groove
interval angle
Groove2
start point
C=0
Groove1 start point

Groove2 end point

NUMBER
LST.ANGL

: Total number of grooves


: Ccoordinate of the machining start point of the last
groove

Last groove
start point

Final angle
C=0

Groove1 start point

Front of a workpiece

When neither A (angle), N (number of grooves), nor EC (final


angle) are entered

Example) X = r
C =180.000
LA =90.000
r

C=0

395

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

When a number greater than or equal to 2 is entered for N (number


of grooves) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
entered for A (angle)

Example) X
C
N
EC

=r
= 0.000
=2
= 180.000

C=0

When data is entered for A (angle) and a number greater than or


equal to 2 is entered for N (number of grooves), with no data
entered for EC (final angle)

Example) X
C
A
N

=r
= 0.000
= 180.000
=2

C=0

(2) Figure data when IRREGULAR. is specified as the groove figure


Up to six Caxis end face grooves can be specified at arbitrary
positions with arbitrary groove depths.
GROOVE. n

STATPX: Xcoordinate of the start position of the nth


groove
STATPZ: Zcoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove
STATPC: Ccoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove

NOTE
In grooving along the Zaxis, cutting starts at a point which
allows for a grooving clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

396

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

Groove depth

Grooving clearance
(parameter 9855: GRDCL)

Machining start point

Zcoordinate of the groove start point

ENDPTX
ENDPTC

: Xcoordinate of the end point of the nth groove


: Ccoordinate of the end point of the nth groove

Groove1 end
point (X, C)

Groove2 start
point (X, C)
C=0

Groove1 start point


(X, C)
Groove2 end point
(X, C)
Front of a workpiece

DEPTH

: Groove depth of the nth groove (to be specified for


each groove)

397

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2.4
CAXIS GROOVING
FOR SIDE FACES

End mill
C
Front of a blank

Blank

2.4.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of program, a new process is


automatically created, and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
To select Caxis sideface grooving, press the [CGROV] soft key, then
the [CROSS] soft key.

PROC(01)
CGRV(R)

AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO
CROSS HEADL
10.000
752
FEED.X
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR

REV/MIN
2000

FEED.Z,C TCODE
1200
0101

NOTE
When data other than 0 is specified for BEVELAM, the
following chamfering process is automatically created.

PROC(01)
CGRV(R)

PROC(01)
CGRV(C)

AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN
CROSS
HEADL
10.000
752
2000
FEED.X
SHAPE BEVELAM
1500 REGULAR
1.000
AREA
HEAD MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN
CROSS
HEADL
10.000
851
2000
SHAPE BEVELAM
REGULAR
1.000

398

FEED.Z,C TCODE
1200
0101

FEED/MIN TCODE
1200
0909

B62444E1/04

2.4.2
Details of Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

The same process data as for Caxis grooving for end faces applies to
Caxis grooving for side faces, except a machining start point as
described below.
FEED.Z,C

FEED.X

: Feedrate for cutting in the direction (Zaxis or


Caxis) lateral to the sideface end mill (mm/min. or
inch/min.)
: Feedrate for cutting in the axial direction (Xaxis) of
the sideface end mill (mm/min. or inch/min.)
X coordinate of the retraction position between
sections to be grooved
Z coordinate of the retraction position between
sections to be grooved

Machining
start point

399

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.4.3

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(1) Figure data when REGULAR. is specified as the groove figure

Details of Figure Data

STATPX STATPZ
100.000 20.000
LST.ANGL

STATPC
45.000

DEPTH
5.000

STATPX
STATPZ

GRVLNG
20.000

ANGLE NUMBER
90.000
4

: Xcoordinate of the groove (common)


: Zcoordinate of the groove start point
(common)
: Ccoordinate of the first groove

STATPC

NOTE
1 In grooving, cutting starts at a point which allows for a
grooving clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

Side face end mill


Machining start point
Z

Grooving clearance
(parameter 9855: GRDCL)

Groove depth
(radius)

DEPTH
GRVLNG

Xcoordinate of the
groove start point

: Groove depth (Radius:Common)


: Length of a groove along the Zaxis (common)

400

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

1. Program reference position = workpiece end face, groove length


=+

Side face end mill

Groove length

2. Program reference position = workpiece end face, groove length


=

Side face end mill

Groove length

401

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3. The opposite applies when the program reference position = chuck


end face
ANGLE
: Angle subtended by consecutive grooves

1st groove
Angle
C=0
2nd groove

Front of a workpiece

NUMBER
LST.ANGL

: Total number of grooves


: Ccoordinate of the last groove

1st groove
2nd groove
Final angle
C=0

Last groove

Front of a workpiece

When neither A (angle), N (number of grooves), nor EC (final


angle) are entered

Example) C = 90.000

C=0

402

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

When a number greater than or equal to 2 is entered for N (number


of grooves) and data is entered for EC (final angle), with no data
entered for A (angle)
Example) C = 0.000
N =3
EC =180.000

C=0

When data is entered for A (angle) and a number greater than or


equal to 2 is entered for N (number of grooves), with no data
entered for EC (final angle)
Example) C = 0.000
A =180.000
N =3

C=0

(2) Figure data when IRREGULAR. is specified as the groove figure


Up to six Caxis end face grooves can be specified at arbitrary
positions with arbitrary groove depths.

STATPX STATPZ STATPC ENDPTZ ENDPTC


100.000
20.000
45.000
50.000
60.000
STATPX STATPZ STATPC ENDPTZ ENDPTC
100.000
20.000
90.000
50.000 150.000

GROOV. n

DEPTH
5.000
DEPTH
5.000

STATPX: Xcoordinate of the start position of the nth


groove
STATPZ: Zcoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove
STATPC: Ccoordinate of the start position of the nth
groove
403

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
2 Cutting for grooving along the Xaxis is started at a point
allowing for a grooving clearance (parameter 9855:
GRDCL).

Side face end mill


Machining start point
Grooving clearance
(parameter 9855: GRDCL)
Groove depth
(radius)

ENDPTZ
ENDPTC

Xcoordinate of a
groove start point

: Zcoordinate of the end point of the nth groove


: Ccoordinate of the end point of the nth groove

Example:
Groove1 start point
Groove1 end point
Groove2 start point
Groove2 end point

X=r
X=r
X=r
X=r

Z = Z1s
Z = Z1e
Z = Z2s
Z = Z2s

C = 90.0
C = 180.0
C = 180.
C = 0.

Groove 1
Groove 1

Groove 2

DEPTH

Groove 2

: Depth of the nth groove (Radius: To be specified for


each groove)

404

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2.5
CAXIS NOTCHING
FOR END FACES
X

Endface end mill


End face of
a blank

Caxis
Blank

Notch

NOTE
Notching for end faces may not be possible due to a cutter
compensation C interference alarm, depending on the cut
profile.

Furthermore, one of the tool offset data items (number of offset groups,
offset number 16 in the case of group 16, or number 32 in the case of group
32, or number 64 in the case of group 64, or number 97 in the case of group
97) is exclusively used for the offset data above, so the offset data item
cannot be used for other purposes.

2.5.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of program, a new process is


automatically created and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
Pressing the [CNOTC] soft key selects Caxis notching.

PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(R) FACING
HEADL
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(F) FACING
HEADL
FEED/MIN BEVELAM
4000

STATPZ
0.000
FINISHX
0.500
STATPZ
0.000

ENDPTZ REMOVALX
5.000
10.000
FINISHZ
0.300
ENDPTZ TOOLNO
5.000
752

TOOLNO
752

TCODE
1212

REV/MIN
2667

TCODE
1212

NOTE
When data other than 0 is specified for BEVELAM, the
following chamfering process is automatically created.

405

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(R) FACING
HEADL
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(F) FACING
HEADL
FEED/MIN BEVELAM
4000
0.500
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(C) FACING
HEADL
BEVELAM
0.500

B62444E1/04

STATPZ
0.000
FINISHX
0.500
STATPZ
0.000

ENDPTZ REMOVALX
5.000
10.000
FINISHZ
0.300
ENDPTZ TOOLNO
5.000
752

STAT/PZ
0.000

TOOLNO
851

406

TOOLNO
752

TCODE
1212

REV/MIN
2667

TCODE
1212

REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000

TCODE
1515

B62444E1/04

2.5.2
Details of Process Data

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

(1) Roughing process


STATPZ
: Zcoordinate of the point where cutting is
started
ENDPTZ
: Zcoordinate of the cutting end point
REMOVAL X
: Cutting allowance for rough machining
The maximum residual fillet depends on the
shape of the notch and the diameter of the
blank. Enter a value much larger than the
maximum residual fillet ((a) in the figure).
(a)

TOOLNO

: Management number for a rough machining


tool
TCODE
: Tcode for a rough machining tool
REV/MIN
: Tool speed (rpm) for rough machining
FEED/MIN
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) for
rough machining
FINISHING X
: Finishing allowance for the side face (along the
Xaxis)
FINISHING Z
: Finishing allowance for the bottom (along the
Zaxis)
JMILLNGGEAR
: Milling gear selection for rough machining
(only when needed)
JCUT WID (%)
: Depth of cut per operation in rough machining
(percentage of the tool diameter)
Depth of cut per operation in rough machining
(percentage of the tool diameter) Initially set to
50%, but can be changed manually.
(2) Finishing and chamfering
TOOL NO
: Number of a finish machining tool (used for
tool management)
TCODE
: Tcode for a finish machining tool
REV/MIN
: Tool speed (per minute) for finish machining
FEED/MIN
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) for
finish machining
BEVELAM
: Chamfer amount for the edge of a notch
JMILLNGGEAR
: Milling gear selection for finish machining
(only when needed)
Data items other than those described above are
displayed on the program and detail data
screens in the same way as for other Caxis
machining.
407

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.5.3

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

On the XC plane coordinate system, a figure is specified having an


Xcoordinate which is a diameter and a Ccoordinate which is a radius:

Details of Figure Data

Caxis (hypothetical axis)


(Radius)

Xaxis
(Diameter)
Z
axis

(1) Figure data programming screen for the approach


START PNT X COORD
(X): Xcoordinate of the notch start point
(diameter)
START PNT C COORD
(C): Ccoordinate of the notch start point
(radius)
APPROACH DIRECTION (P): Direction of rotation along the
approach arc
Use the [ ] or [ ] soft key to
select the direction.
APPROACH RADIUS (R): Radius of arc during approach
(2) Contour selection and figure data input
Enter the figure data for approaching and press the [INSERT] soft
key. Then, the following contour menu is displayed in the soft key
field.

<

CHAM
FER

ROUND

PLOT

Press the [+] soft key to display contour menus other than those
described above.

<

TANGNT

ESCAPE START

FIGURE
PLOT
END

For information about contours that can be selected from the menu
][
], [ESCAPE], and start [START], see the
other than arc [
description of contour input in Section 1.1.
408

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

NOTE
1 The specified arc must not extend beyond a semicircle. To
specify a complete circle, for example, specify two
semicircles.
+(3) Figure data programming screen for retracting
ESCAPE RADIUS

(R): Radius of an arc for retracting

(4) Specification of [START] from the figure menu


A final notch is automatically created where the notching start point
matches the notching end point, and the first contour has the same
profile and same direction as the last contour.
Example 1)

Notching start and end point

Example 2)

Notching start and end point

The final figure shown above can be created after specifying the
figure immediately before the last figure by pressing the [ESCAPE]
soft key.
NOTE
2 Up to 30 contour shapes can be specified for a single Caxis
endface notching process. When a multiquadrant arc is
included, the number of shapes which can be specified may
decrease.

409

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(5) Example of notch figure


(a) When a notch is specified using a closed curve
Caxis
Tool

Retracting end point

Machining start and


end point

Xaxis

Approach start point


Notch figure

(b) When a notch which is not a closed curve is specified

Retracting end point

Machining end
point

Caxis
Tool

Xaxis

Notch figure

Machining start point

Approach start point

410

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2.5.4
Details of Caxis
Notching

Caxis

Tool radius
TR

RX
Retracting end point

Machining start and end point


Xaxis

Approach start point


Notch figure

ZS

ZE
TR :
TL :
RX :
RZ :
RQ :
FX :
FZ :
ZS :
ZE :

Tool radius
Effective tool length
Cutting allowance along the Xaxis
Cutting allowance along the Zaxis
Cutting width (%)
Finishing allowance X
Finishing allowance Z
Start point Z
End point Z

ND :
MD :
A :
C :
CZ :
CC :

Nominal diameter of the chamfering tool


Minor diameter of the chamfering tool
Chamfering tool angle
Chamfer amount
Chamfering tool position
Clearance for the chamfering tool tip

TL

TR
RQ

FX

RX

FZ

End mill

RZ

Chamfering tool
C
MD

ND
A

CZ

CC

(1) Machining in bites along the Zaxis is not performed in notching for
end faces.
(2) Cutter compensation C is used for machining in bites along the
Xaxis in notching for end faces.
Number of cutting operations = CN = FUP ( (RX FX) / (2*TR*RQ
/ 100))
Depth of cut = Q = ((RX FX) / 2) / CN
First cutter compensation data
D1 = TR + RX / 2 Q
Second and subsequent cutter compensation data
Dn = Dn 1 Q
411

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
1 The rewriting of the above cutter compensation data is
executed with the G10 instruction for each infeed
machining operation. At that time, cutter compensation C
is made using new cutter compensation data, so a Tcode
is used each time.
This means that consideration is required for the machine
to perform no operation for the same Tcode.
The offset used for the processing described above is 16, 32, 64, or
97, according to the number of offset sets, so as not to destroy the
original offset data.
Therefore, the above offset numbers cannot be used in any processes
including notching.
However, when a cutting allowance of 0 is specified, cutter
compensation data is not rewritten by G10 and Tcode is not output.
(3) Chamfering for notching for end faces is performed as described
below.
The Zcoordinate, CZ, of the chamfering tool tip is calculated
according to the following expression:
CZ = ZS (C/tan(A/2) + CC)
Where CC is the tip clearance of a chamfering tool registered in the
tool file.
As with rough machining, cutter compensation C is used for
chamfering after cutter compensation data is temporarily rewritten.
Cutter compensation data for chamfering is calculated according to
the following expression:
CL = M/2 + CC*tan(A/2)
(4) Polar coordinate interpolation, which is an NC function, is used for
Caxis notching.
NOTE
2 Polar coordinate interpolation, which is an NC function, is
used for Caxis notching for end faces. So the restrictions
that apply to the function also apply.
For detailed information, refer to the description of polar coordinate
interpolation in the operators manual of the NC.

412

B62444E1/04

2.5.5
NC Program
Conversion for Caxis
Notching

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

When a roughing program Caxis notching is converted to an NC


program, an NC block specifying an offset with G10 is output for each cut.
When cutter compensation data has to be changed from that specified
when a roughing program is converted to an NC program, all NC blocks
specifying offsets with G10 must be changed.
Instead, an NC block that calls the subprogram (O9010) to automatically
change cutter compensation data can be output for each cut. Then, the
converted NC program can be used to perform correct machining simply
by changing the cutter compensation data.
To use this function, set bit 7 (MRO) of parameter No. 9779 to 1. This
function can be used for both Caxis endface notching and Caxis
sideface notching.
(1) Output NC program for roughing
G (1)
:
G (1)
:
G (1)
:
G (1)

C (2)

I (3)

R (4)

F (5)

T1 ; . . . Initial offset

T1 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First cut
T2 ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Second cut
Tn ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . nth cut

1= G code for calling subprogram O9010, stored in the standard system


NOTE
1 This G code is specified with compile parameter No. 9013
in the Macro Executor of Super CAP T. The code varies with
the machine tool being used. For details, see the manual
supplied by the machine tool builder.

2= Maximum residual fillet X specified in a Caxis notching process


3= Allowance X specified in a Caxis notching process
4= Cutting width specified in a Caxis notching process
5= Offset to be used for cut (one of 16, 32, 64, or 97. The offset varies
with the option being used.)
n= Number of cuts

413

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Output NC program for chamfering (only for endface notching)


G (1) C (2) I (3) R (4) F (5)
; . . . . . Initial offset
:
G (1) ; . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . First cut

NOTE
2 The following offset number is used for a cut depending on
the offset option being used. The number cannot be used
for ordinary machining.

16 offset pairs: Offset number 16


32 offset pairs: Offset number 32
64 offset pairs: Offset number 64
99 offset pairs: Offset number 97

414

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.6
CAXIS NOTCHING
FOR SIDE FACES

""
""
""
""
""
""
""
""

Side cutter tool

Side cutter tool

Blank

Caxis

Blank

2.6.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of a program, a new process is


automatically created, and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
Pressing the [CNOTC] soft key selects Caxis notching.

PROC(01)
CNOTCH(R)

AREA
HEAD
CROSS
HEADL
REV/MIN FEED/MIN
2667
4000
PROC(01)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(C) CROSS
HEADL
FEED/MIN
4000

STATPZ
60.000
FINISHX
0.500
STATPZ
0.000

ENDPTZ REMOVALX
5.000
20.000
FINISHZ
0.300
ENDPTZ TOOLNO
5.000
752

TOOLN
752

TCODE
1212

REV/MIN
2667

TCODE
1212

NOTE
For Caxis notching for side faces, chamfering cannot be
performed.

415

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.6.2

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

STAT PZ

: Zcoordinate of the point where cutting is


started

ENDPTZ

: Zcoordinate of the point where cutting is


ended

Details of Process Data

Program point

""
""
""
""
""
ZS

Side cutter

ZE

All other process data items for Caxis notching for side faces are the
same as those for Caxis notching for end faces.

2.6.3
Details of Figure Data

The figure data for Caxis notching for side faces is the same as that for
end faces.

416

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2.6.4
Details of Caxis
Notching for Side
Faces

Caxis

Tool radius

TR

RX
Retracting end point

Machining start and end point


Xaxis

Notch figure

Approach start point

TW
TL
TR

Side cutter
ZS

TR:Tool radius
TW:Tool width
TL:Effective tool length
RX:Cutting allowance along the Xaxis
RZ:Cutting allowance along the Zaxis
RQ:Cutting width X (%)
ZQ:Cutting overlap (%)
FX:Finishing allowance X
FZ:Finishing allowance Z
ZS:Start point Z
ZE:End point Z

ZE

FX

RQ

FZ

RX

FZ

RZ

(1) In notching for side faces, machining in bites along the Zaxis is
performed for the cutting allowance along the Zaxis with an
overlap equivalent to the tool width (TW) multiplied by the cutting
overlap value.
Number of cutting operations=CN=FUP ((ZEZS 2*FZ) / (TW*
(100 ZQ) / 100))
Depth of cut = Q = (ZE ZS 2*FZ)/CN
(2) The machining operations of notching for side faces other than the
above are the same as for Caxis notching for end faces.

417

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

2.7
CAXIS
CYLINDRICAL
MACHINING

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

As shown in the figure below, Caxis cylindrical machining machines a


groove as wide as the diameter of the end mill used.

Sideface end mill


Z

(Development drawing)

2.7.1
Machining Type
Selection

When the cursor is moved to the end of program, a new process is


automatically created, and the machining type menu is displayed in the
soft key field.
Pressing the [CCYL.] soft key selects Caxis cylindrical machining.

PROC(01)
CCYL(R)
REV/MIN
300

HEAD
HEADL
FEED.Z,C
4500

STATPX
DEPTH MILDIA
105.000
5.000
10.000
FEED.X BEVELAM
2700

TOOLNO
753

TCODE
1111

NOTE
When data other than 0 is specified for BEVELAM, the
following chamfering process is automatically created.

418

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

PROC(01)
CCYL(R)
REV/MIN
300
PROC(01)
CCYL(F)
REV/MIN
3000

HEAD
HEADL
FEED.Z,C
4500
HEAD
HEADL
FEED/MIN
4500

STATPX
DEPTH MILDIA
105.000
5.000
10.000
FEED.X BEVELAM
2700
1.000
STAPX
DEPTH MILDIA
105.000
5.000
10.000
BEVELAM
1.000

TOOLNO
753

TCODE
1111

TOOLNO
851

TCODE
1313

NOTE
1 A Caxis cylindrical machining process does not support
finishing.
2 In a Caxis cylindrical machining process, a groove having
a width equal to the diameter of the end mill being used is
created.

2.7.2

(1) Roughing process

Details of Set Data

STRTPX:Xcoordinate of the groove start point


NOTE
In grooving, cutting starts at a point which allows for a
grooving clearance (parameter 9855: GRDCL).

Passing point 2
Grooving clearance
(parameter 9855:GRDCL)
Groove depth
(Radius)
Xcoordinate of the groove start point

DEPTH
TOOLNO

: Depth of the groove (radius)


: Number of the side face end mill for grooving
(used for tool management)
: Tcode for the grooving tool
: Tool speed (rpm) for grooving
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) used
in the traverse direction of the side face end mill
(along the Z or Caxis)
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) used
along the axis of the side face end mill (along
the Xaxis)
: Groove chamfer amount

TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED.Z,C

FEED.X

BEVELAM
419

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Chamfer amount

Actual
groove width

JMILLNGGEAR
JCOOLANT

: Milling gear selection for grooving (only when


needed)
: Cutting oil specification

(2) Chamfering process


TOOLNO.
TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED/MIN
JMILLNGGEAR
JCOOLANT

: Number of the chamfering tool (used for tool


management)
: Tcode for a chamfering tool
: Tool speed (rpm) for chamfering
: Feedrate (mm/minute or inches/minute) for
chamfering
: Milling gear selection for chamfering (only
when needed)
: Cutting oil specification

Data items other than those described above are displayed on the program
and detail data screens in the same way as for Caxis machining.

420

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2.7.3
Details of Figure Data

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

To define a contour, specify the center line (dashed line) of the groove as
shown below.

Z
30

60

300

330

360

Side face end mill

30mm

60mm

90mm

Bit 3 (CGRPDR) of parameter 9776 = 0

Bit 3 (CGRPDR) of parameter 9776 = 0

Program reference position = cechuck end face

Program reference position = workpiece end face

+C
Blank surface

Blank surface
+C

+Z

+Z

Bit 3 (CGRPDR) of parameter 9776 = 1

Bit 3 (CGRPDR) of parameter 9776 = 1

Program reference position = cechuck end face

Program reference position = workpiece end face

+Z

+Z

+C
Blank surface

Blank surface
+C

421

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Input of multiple figures

Z
Tool

0
0

360

(3) Moving between multiple figures


To machine multiple figures, use [TRANS].
ESCAPE X COORD.

(R): Xcoordinate of the relief position


NEXT SHAPE C COORD (C): Ccoordinate of the start point of
the next figure
NEXT SHAPE Z COORD. (Z): Zcoordinate of the start point of
the next figure

(C, Z)

For an explanation of contours other than those created by


TRANS, see Section 1.1.
NOTE
1 The specified arc must not extend beyond a semicircle. To
specify a complete circle, for example, specify two
semicircles.
2 One Caxis cylindrical machining process allows up to 30
contours including multiple figures to be specified.
When a quadrant arc is included, the number of contours
which can be used may decrease.

422

B62444E1/04

2.7.4
Details of Cylindrical
Machining

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

2. MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR


LATHES WITH CAXIS

(1) In Caxis cylindrical machining, one cutting operation is performed


with a side face end mill along a contour specified as figure data.
(2) Caxis cylindrical machining uses a cylindrical interpolation
function, which is an NC function.
NOTE
Caxis cylindrical machining is subject to the same
restrictions as imposed on the cylindrical interpolation
function on the NC side. For details, refer to the operators
manual of NC.
(3) To use the cylindrical interpolation function, set the following
parameters:
- Bit 4 (CCR) of parameter 3405 = 1
: Uses I or K for chamfering/corner
radius specification.
- Parameter 1020 = 67 : Defines the program axis name of the
third axis as C.
- Parameter 1022 = 2 : Defines the third axis as the Yaxis of
the reference coordinate system.
- Parameter 5460 = 1 : Defines the straight line axis for polar
coordinate interpolation as the first
axis.
- Parameter 5461 = 3 : Defines the rotation axis for polar
coordinate interpolation as the third
axis.
(4) To specify a cylindrical interpolation mode, the NC commands
described below are used.
(a) G19 H0 W0 ; (CZ plane selection)
(b) G107 C (cylinder radius value) ; (Cylindrical interpolation mode
specification)
(c) Cutting is performed along a contour.
(d) G107 C0 ; (Cylindrical interpolation mode cancellation)
(e) G18 U0 W0 ; (ZX plane selection).

423

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR A LATHE


HAVING THE YAXIS MACHINING FUNCTION

424

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.1
YAXIS CENTER
DRILLING, DRILLING,
AND TAPPING
(ON THE END FACE)

X
Drill

Note)

This figure shows the axes of the


workpiece coordinate system.

Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping can be specified for Yaxis
drilling on the end face in the same way as for drilling for turning.
For details of each machining operation, see Section 1.8, Chapter III.
NOTE
1 To perform reaming, set bit 0 of parameter 9771 (TOOL80)
to 1. In some cases, reaming may be inhibited, depending
on the length of tape used for storage.
2 For Yaxis drilling on the end face, the following cannot be
performed:
Center drilling + chamfering, starting
machining, starting + chamfering, through hole machining,
blind hole machining, boring, throwaway drilling, and end
milling. Turning drilling and Caxis drilling thus cannot be
performed.

425

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.1.1
Selecting a Machining
Type

B62444E1/04

When the cursor is moved to the end of a program, a new process is


automatically created and the machining mode soft keys are displayed.
Press the [YCNTR], [YDRIL], or [YTAP] soft key then press
[FACING] to select Yaxis center drilling, Yaxis drilling, or Yaxis
tapping, respectively. To select reaming, press the [YDRIL] soft key.
To select reaming, press the [YDRIL] soft key.
(1) Sample process data screen for Yaxis center drilling

PROC (01)
YCENTER

AREA
HEAD NOMINLD
FACING
HEADL
2.000
DWELL HOLEPIN
0.500
CIRCLE

TOOLNO
701

REV/MIN FEED/MIN
800
300

TCODE
0505

(2) Sample process data screen for Yaxis drilling

PROC (01)
AREA
YDRILL
FACING
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD MACHN2 PROCDIA TOOLNO


HEADL DRILLING
20.000
601
DWELL PATTERN CUT/DPTH HOLEPTN
0.500 DEEP HOLE
2.000
CIRCLE

REV/MIN
800

TCODE
0505

(3) Sample process data screen for Yaxis reaming

PROC (01)
AREA
YDRILL
FACING
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD MACHN2 PROCDIA


HEADL REAMING
20.000
DWELL HOLEPTN
0.500
CIRCLE

TOOLNO
901

REV/MIN
800

TCODE
0505

(4) Sample process data screen for Yaxis tapping

PROC (01)
AREA
YTAP
FACING
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD NOMINLD
HEADL
20.000
DWELL HOLEPIN
0.500
CIRCLE

426

PITCH
0.500

TOOLNO
651

REV/MIN
800

TCODE
0505

B62444E1/04

3.1.2
Setting

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

J PASS POINT X/Z (1/2) : X and Z coordinates of a point through


which the tool passes to reach the
machining start point (detailed data
screen)
NOTE
1 Only passing point 2 is automatically determined.
J START PNT.

X/Z : X and Z coordinates of the point to which


the tool retracts in machining two or more
holes (detailed data screen)

Machining start point

PROCDIA (NOMINLD)
PITCH (for tapping)

: Nominal diameter of a tool


: Pitch of a tap

NOTE
2 To perform Yaxis drilling, select final machining for drilling
and specify the cutting data described above. By doing this,
the following are automatically determined according to the
data cataloged in the pretool list and registered together
with the final machining: preceding process, tools to be
used, and cutting conditions.

TOOLNO
TCODE
REV/MIN
FEED/MIN

: Tool ID number of a drill


: T code for the drill
: Speed at which the tool revolves in drilling
(revolutions/min)
: Feedrate during drilling (mm/min or inch/min)

NOTE
3 While drilling for turning uses a feed per rotation, Yaxis
drilling uses a feed per minute.

427

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

DWELL
: Dwell time at the bottom of a hole
J MILLING GEAR : Desired milling gear (Detailed data screen:
only when required). Directly enter the
corresponding M code.
J COOLANT
: Desired coolant (detailed data screen)
The following data must be specified only when drilling is selected:
PATTERN (Drilling)

: Select by [DRILLING], [PECKING], [HISPD


PECKING]

CUT DPTH:
(Drilling)
J DEPTH DECRS:
(Drilling)

Same as for the drill to be


used for turning
(described in Section 1.8)

J RETURN AMNT:
(Drilling)
J MIN DEPTH (Drilling)

HOLEPTN : Select the desired type of hole pattern from the following
menu items.
1 = CIRCLE
2 = LATTIC
3 = OPTIONAL
1.

CIRCLE
Y

2.

LATTICE
Y

428

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3.

OPTIONAL
Y

J SKIP POINT 1/2/3 : Number of a hole which is not machined


(detailed data screen).
Assign drilling
sequence numbers to the holes to be drilled
starting from 1. Then, if desired, the drilling of
a hole can be skipped. Up to three holes can be
specified.

429

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.1.3

B62444E1/04

(1) Sample figure data when CIRCLE is selected as the hole pattern

Figure Data
CENTRPX
20.000
RADIUS
30.000

CENTRPY
0.000
ANGLE
60.000

STATPZ
0.000
NUMBER
6

ST.ANGL
10.000
LST.ANGL
10.000

DEPTH
30.000

REV.ANGLE
0.000

CENTRPX/Y: Coordinates of the center of a circle (X, Y)


[HEAD 1]
Y

[HEAD 2]
Y

2
R
R

Center (X, Y)

1
A
X

Positive angular direction

Center (X, Y)
Positive angular direction

STATPZ: Z coordinate of the hole start point


NOTE
1 Drilling starts when the tool reaches the point which is the
specified drilling clearance (GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)
away from the workpiece.

Hole depth

Drilling clearance
(GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)

Machining start point

ST.ANGL

Z coordinate of the hole start point

: Angle between the first hole and the Xaxis (A in the


examples shown above)
DEPTH
: Depth of a hole (radius)
REV.ANGLE : Angular displacement of the workpiece (C coordinate)
RADIUS
: Radius of the circle (R in the examples shown above)
430

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

ANGLE

NUMBER
LST.ANGL

: Angle between two adjacent holes (B in the examples


shown above). A positive or negative value can be
specified.
: Total number of holes
: Angle between the last hole and the Xaxis

NOTE
2 Not all of ANGLE, NUMBER, and LST.ANGL need to be
specified. For example, one of them can be omitted as
shown below:
1

When 2 or more is set for ITEMS and FINANGL is specified, but


ANGLE is not specified

Example)
CENTRP = (X, Y)
RADIUS
=R
STATANGL= 90.000
ITEMS
=3
FINANGL =270.000

R
+(X, Y)
X

When ANGLE is specified and 2 or more is set for ITEMS, but


FINANGL is not specified

Example)
CENTRP
RADIUS
STATANGL
ANGLE
ITEMS

B
(X,Y)

X
B

431

= (X, Y)
=R
= 90.000
= 90.000
=3

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Sample figure data when LATTICE is selected as the hole pattern

STATPX
20.000
NUMBER/LIN
3

STATPY
STATPZ
0.000
0.000
LINE PIT. LINNUMBER
20.000
2

DEPTH
10.000

REV.ANGLE
0.000

HOLE PIT.
20.000

STATPX/Y:Coordinates of the first hole (X, Y)


Y

[HEAD1]

I
X

STATPZ
DEPTH
REV.ANGLE
HOLE PIT.

[HEAD2]

:
:
:
:

Z coordinate of the hole start point


Depth of a hole (radius)
Angular displacement of a workpiece (C coordinate)
Distance between two adjacent holes in the same line
(I in the examples shown above). A positive or
negative value can be specified.
NUMBR/LIN : Number of holes in one line (three in the examples
shown above)
LINE PIT.
: Distance between straight lines (J in the examples
shown above). A positive or negative value can be
specified.
LINNUMBR : Number of straight lines (two in the examples shown
above)
(3) Sample figure data when OPTIONAL is selected as the hole pattern
On one end face, up to six holes of desired depth can be specified at
desired positions.

POINT 1X
30.000

PINT 1Y
0.000

POINT 1C
20.000

POINT n X
POINT n Y
POINT n C
POINT n Z

POINT 1Z
10.000

DEPTH
10.000

: X coordinate of the hole at point n


: Y coordinate of the hole at point n
: Angular displacement of the workpiece when the hole
at point n is machined (C coordinate)
: Z coordinate of the hole start point at point n
432

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

NOTE
3 Drilling starts when the tool reaches the point which is the
specified drilling clearance (GRDCL bit of parameter 9855)
away from the workpiece.

Hole depth

Drilling clearance
(GRDCL bit of parameter 9855)
Machining start point

Z coordinate of the hole start point

DEPTH: Depth of the hole at point n (specified for each hole)


NOTE
4 A hole can be drilled only when all the figure data described
above is specified.
5 To specify the figure data of point 2 and subsequent points,
move the cursor to the next line. After specifying the data
of all the holes, press the [FIGURE END] soft key.

3.1.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function

The automatic pretool selection function can be used for Yaxis drilling
on the end face in the same way as for drilling for turning.

433

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3.2
CENTER DRILLING,
DRILLING, REAMING,
AND TAPPING
(ON THE SIDE FACE)
Y

[HEAD1]

End face of a workpiece

Chuck side

Z
Note)

This figure shows the axes of the


workpiece coordinate system.

The figure above shows a workpiece viewed from the tool side. When a
machining program is created, however, the workpiece is viewed from the
front of the machine; therefore, in the figure above the face to be actually
machined is hidden from view.
To view the side face to be machined, the workpiece must be rotated about
the Caxis by 180 degrees. Consequently, the Yaxis of the actual
workpiece coordinate system is inverted as shown below.
Workpiece coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face

[HEAD1]

[HEAD2]

Since a positive value is always specified as the Z coordinate, the Zaxis


of the program coordinate system is always opposite to that of the
corresponding workpiece coordinate system, as shown below:
Program coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face

434

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

[HEAD1]

[HEAD2]

Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping can be specified for Yaxis
drilling on the side face in the same way as for drilling for turning.

435

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.2.1

B62444E1/04

When the cursor is moved to the end of a program, a new process is


automatically created and the machining mode soft keys are displayed.

Machining Type
Selecting

Press the [YCNTR], [YDRIL], or [YTAP] soft key to select Yaxis


center drilling, Yaxis drilling, or Yaxis tapping, respectively.
To select drilling on the side face of a workpiece, press the [CROSS] soft
key when the cursor is in the AREA field.
To select reaming, press the [YDRIL] soft key.
(1) Sample process data screen for Yaxis center drilling

PROC (01)
YCENTER

AREA
HEAD NOMINLD TOOLNO
CROSS
HEADL
2.000
701
DWELL HOLEPTN
500
CIRCLE

REV/MIN FEED/MIN
800
300

TCODE
0505

(2) Sample process data screen for Yaxis drilling

PROC (01)
AREA
HEAD
YDRILL
CROSS HEADL
FEED/MIN
DWELL
300
500

MACHN2 PROCDIA TOOLNO


DRILLING
20.000
601
PATTERN CUT/DPTH HOLEPTN
DEEP HOLE
2.000
CIRCLE

REV/MIN
800

TCODE
0505

(3) Sample process data screen for Yaxis reaming

PROC (01)
AREA
YREAM
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD MACHN2 PROCDIA


HEADL REAMING
20.000
DWELL HOLEPTN
500
CIRCLE

TOOLNO
901

REV/MIN
800

TCODE
0505

(4) Sample process data screen for Yaxis tapping

PROC (01)
AREA
YTAP
CROSS
FEED/MIN
300

HEAD
HEADL
DWELL
500

NOMINALD
20.000
HOLEPTN
CIRCLE

436

PITCH
0.500

TOOLNO
651

REV/MIN
800

TCODE
0505

B62444E1/04

3.2.2
Process Data

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

The process data for Yaxis drilling on the side face is the same as that
for Yaxis drilling on the end face, except for the machining start point
described below:
JSTART PNT. X/Z

: X and Z coordinates of the point to which the


tool retracts in machining two or more holes
(detailed data screen)

Machining start point

HOLEPTN : Select the desired type of hole pattern from the following
menu items.
1 = CIRCLE
2 = LATTIC
3 = OPTIONAL
1. CIRCLE

2 . LATTICE

437

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3. OPTIONAL

JSKIP POINT 1/2/3 : Number of a hole which is not machined


(detailed data screen).
Assign drilling
sequence numbers to the holes to be drilled
starting from 1. Then, if desired, the drilling of
a hole can be skipped. Up to three holes can be
specified.

438

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3.2.3

(1) Sample figure data when CIRCLE is selected as the hole pattern

Figure Data
CENTRPY
0.000
RADIUS
30.000

CENTRPZ
30.000
ANGLE
60.000

STATPX
80.000
NUMBER
6

ST.ANGL
10.000
LST.ANGL
10.000

DEPTH
30.000

REV.ANGLE
0.000

CENTRY/Z: Coordinates of the center of the circle (Y, Z)

[HEAD1]

[HEAD2]

(X, Z)

R
2

STATPX

A
B

: X coordinate of the hole start point

NOTE
1 Drilling starts when the tool reaches the point which is the
specified drilling clearance (GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)
away from the workpiece.

Machining start point

Drilling cleareance
(GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)
Hole deptph

X coordinate of the hole start point

ST.ANGL
DEPTH
REV.ANGLE
RADIUS

: Angle between the first hole and the Zaxis (A in the


examples shown above)
: Depth of a hole (radius)
: Angular displacement of the workpiece (C
coordinate)
: Radius of the circle (R in the examples shown above)
439

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

ANGLE

NUMBER
LST.ANGL

B62444E1/04

: Angle between two adjacent holes (B in the samples


shown above). A positive or negative value can be
specified.
: Total number of holes
: Angle between the last hole and the Zaxis

Not all of ANGLE, ITEMS, and FINANGL need to be specified. For


example, one of them can be omitted as shown below:
1

When 2 or more is set for ITEMS and FINANGL is specified, but


ANGLE is not specified
R
Example)
CENTRP = (Y, Z)

+(Y, Z)

RADIUS = R

STATANGL = 0.000
ITEMS = 3
FINANGL = 180.000
Y

When ANGLE is specified and 2 or more is set for ITEMS, but


FINANGL is not specified
R
Example)
+(Y, Z)

CENTRP = (Y, Z)
RADIUS = R

STATANGL = 0.000
ANGLE = 90.000
ITEMS = 3
Y

(2) Sample figure data when LATTICE is selected as the hole pattern

STATPY
20.000
NUMBR/LIN
3

STATPZ
STATPX
0.000
0.000
LINE PIT. LINNUMBR
20.000
2

440

DEPTH
10.000

REV.ANGLE
0.000

HOLE PIT.
20.000

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

STAT Y/Z:Coordinates of the first hole (Y, Z)


[HEAD1]

[HEAD2]

Z
3

J
I

STATPX
DEPTH
REV.ANGLE
HOLE PIT.

:
:
:
:

X coordinate of the hole start point


Depth of a hole (radius)
Angular displacement of a workpiece (C coordinate)
Distance between two adjacent holes in the same line
(I in the examples shown above). A positive or
negative value can be specified.
NUMBR/LIN : Number of holes in one line (three in the examples
shown above)
LINE PIT.
: Distance between straight lines (J in the examples
shown above). A positive or negative value can be
specified.
LINNUMBR : Number of straight lines (two in the examples shown
above)
(3) Sample figure data when OPTIONAL is selected as the hole pattern
On one side face, up to six holes of desired depth can be specified
at desired positions.

POINT 1Y
30.000

PINT 1Z
0.000

POINT 1C
20.000

POINT n Y
POINT n Z
POINT n C
POINT n X

POINT 1X
10.000

DEPTH
10.000

: Y coordinate of the hole at point n


: Z coordinate of the hole at point n
: Angular displacement of the workpiece when the hole
at point n is machined (C coordinate)
: X coordinate of the hole start point at point n

NOTE
2 Drilling starts when the tool reaches the point which is the
specified drilling clearance (GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)
away from the workpiece.

441

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Machining start point

Drilling clearance
(GRDLCL bit of parameter 9855)
X coordinate of the
hole start point

Hole depth

DEPTH: Depth of the hole at point n (specified for each hole)


NOTE
3 A hole can be drilled only when all the figure data described
above is specified.
4 To specify the figure data of point 2 and subsequent points,
move the cursor to the next line. After specifying the data
of all the holes, press the [FIGURE END] soft key.

3.2.4
Automatic Pretool
Selection Function

The automatic pretool selection function can be used for Yaxis drilling
on the side face in the same way as for drilling for turning.

442

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.3
YAXIS MILLING
(ON THE END FACE)
Y

End mill
X

Note)

This figure shows the axes of the


workpiece coordinate system.

Workpiece

In Yaxis milling (on the end face), an end mill cuts an end face of a
workpiece by moving only once along the contour determined by the
specified figure data. Specify a desired path along which the cutting tool
is to be moved.
Machining in bites is not performed along the Zaxis.

3.3.1
Machining Type
Selection

PROC (01)
AREA
YMIL
FACING
FEED.X,Y
500

When the cursor is moved to the end of a program, a new process is


automatically created and the machining mode soft keys are displayed.
To select Yaxis endface milling, press the [YMILLING] soft key,
then the [FACE] soft key.

HEAD
DEPTH MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN TCODE
HEADL
5.000
5.000
751
1200
0101
FEED.Z ESCAPESZ SHIFTDR
300
600
CENTER

443

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.3.2

B62444E1/04

JSTART PNT

X: X coordinate of the point to which the tool


retracts in successive milling

JSTART PNT

Z: Z coordinate of the point to which the tool


retracts in successive milling

Process Data

Machining start point

DEPTH

: Depth of a cut in milling. Milling starts when


the end mill reaches the point which is the
depth of cut away from the Z coordinate of the
bottom of the cut, which is specified as the
figure data.
Depth of cut

Z coordinate of the machining start point

End mill

Retraction
(at escape speed Z in the G01
mode)

Z coordinate of the
bottom of the cut
(figure data)

Depth of cut

MILDIA

: Major diameter of the end mill to be used for


endface machining

NOTE
1 The automatic tool selection function selects an end mill for
endface machining whose nominal diameter is smaller
than or equal to the groove diameter. In Yaxis milling, the
machining width is limited to the width of the end mill used.
The machined width may be smaller than the diameter of
the end mill.

444

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

TOOLNO

: Tool ID number of the end mill for endface


machining
REV/MIN
: Speed at which the tool revolves in milling
(revolutions/min)
TCODE
: T code for the end mill
FEED.X,Y
: Feedrate at which the end mill for endface
machining transversely mills the end face of
the workpiece (along the Xaxis and Yaxis)
(mm/min or inch/min)
FEED.Z
: Feedrate at which the end mill for endface
machining longitudinally mills the workpiece
(along the Zaxis) (mm/min or inch/min)
ESCAPESZ
: Feedrate in retraction. After milling is
completed, the end mill is returned to the Z
coordinate of the machining start point at this
speed in the G01 mode. Triple the value set for
FEEDRATE2 is automatically specified.
SHIFTDR
: Desired direction of cutter compensation.
Select the desired type of SHIFTDR from the
following menu items.
1=CENTER : The tool is moved so that its center moves
along the contour determined by the specified
figure data.
2=RIGHT : Cutter compensation to the right is applied to a
specified figure. (tool post 1: G42, tool post 2:
G41)
3=LEFT:
: Cutter compensation to the left is applied to a
specified figure. (tool post 1: G41, tool post 2:
G42)
NOTE
2 If SHIFTDR is set to RIGHT or LEFT, alarm P/S 41 may be
issued while the program is running to indicate interference
in cutter compensation, depending on the specified contour.
JMILLING GEAR
JCOOLANT:

445

: Desired milling gear (only when required).


Directly enter the corresponding M code.
: Desired coolant

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.3.3

B62444E1/04

Specify the figure data on the XY plane shown below: Specify a diameter
along the Xaxis and a radius along the Yaxis.

Figure Data

Yaxis
(radius)

Xaxis
(diameter)
Zaxis

(1) Figure data of the start point


START POINT X
: X coordinate of the start point (diameter)
START POINT Y
: Y coordinate of the start point (radius)
START PNT C COORD
: Angular displacement of the workpiece
(C coordinate)
BOTTOM Z
: Z coordinate of the bottom of the cut
NOTE
1 The cutting start point is determined from the Z coordinate
of the bottom of the cut and the depth of cut. If the depth
of cut is not large enough to enable positioning of the cutting
start point outside the blank, the tool may collide with the
blank during rapid traverse.
(2) Selecting a contour and entering the figure data
After entering the figure data of the start point, press the [INSERT]
soft key. The following soft key menu for selecting a contour is
displayed:

<

CHAM
FER

ROUND

PLOT

To display the second page of the soft key menu, press the [+] soft key.

<

TANGNT

446

TRANS.

FIGURE
PLOT
END

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

For the contours entered by selecting options other than [TRANS.] on the
contour selection menu, see Section 1.1.
(3) Entering two or more figures
By pressing the [TRANS.] soft key on the contour selection menu,
two or more figures can be entered for a single Yaxis milling
process.
Y

Tool

To mill two or more figures, press the [TRANS.] key on the contour
selection menu.
NEXT SHAPE X COORD X
NEXT SHAPE Y COORD Y
NEXT SHAPE C COORD C

BOTTOM Z

: X coordinate of the start point of


the next figure
: Y coordinate of the start point of
the next figure
: Angular displacement of the
workpiece when the next figure is
cut (C coordinate)
: Z coordinate of the bottom of the
cut of the next figure

NOTE
2 An arc exceeding a semicircle cannot be specified. To
specify a whole circle, for example, enter two semicircles.
3 For a single Yaxis milling process, up to 30 contours
(including multiple identical figures) can be specified.

447

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3.4
YAXIS MILLING
(ON THE SIDE FACE)

Y
End lace of a
workpiece

[HEAD1]
Chuck side

Note)

This figure shows the axes of the


workpiece coordinate system.

In Yaxis milling (on the side face), an end mill cuts the side face of a
workpiece by moving only once along the contour determined by the
specified figure data. Specify a desired path along which the cutting tool
is to be moved. Machining in bites is not performed along the Xaxis.
The figure above shows a workpiece viewed from the tool side. When a
machining program is created, however, the workpiece is viewed from the
front of the machine; therefore, in the figure above the face to be actually
machined is hidden from view.
To view the side face to be machined, the workpiece must be rotated about
the Caxis by 180 degrees. Consequently, the Yaxis of the actual
workpiece coordinate system is inverted, as shown below:
Workpiece coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face

[HEAD2]

[HEAD1]

448

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Since a positive value is always entered as the Z coordinate, the Zaxis


of the program coordinate system is always opposite to that of the
corresponding workpiece coordinate system, as shown below:
Program coordinate systems for Yaxis machining on the side face

[HEAD1]

[HEAD2]

3.4.1
Machining Type
Selection

PROC (01)
AREA
YMIL
CROSS
FEED.Y,Z
500

When the cursor is moved to the end of a program, a new process is


automatically created and the machining mode soft keys are displayed.
To select Yaxis milling, press the [YMILLING] soft key, then the
[SIDE CUT] soft key.

HEAD
HEADL
FEED.X
300

DEPTH
5.000
ESCAPESX
600

449

MILDIA TOOLNO REV/MIN TCODE


5.000
751
1200
0101
SHIFTDR
CENTER

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.4.2

J START PNT.

B62444E1/04

X: X coordinate of the point to which the tool


retracts in successive milling

Setting

Z: Z coordinate of the point to which the tool


retracts in successive milling

Machining start point

DEPTH : Depth of a cut in milling (radius). The milling operation


starts when the end mill reaches the point which is the depth
of cut away from the X coordinate of the bottom of the cut,
which is specified as the figure data.
Retraction (at escape speed X in the G01 mode)
X coordinate of the machining
start point

X coordinate of the bottom


of the cut (figure data)

X coordinate of the bottom


of the cut (figure data)

Depth of cut (radius)

MILDIA

: Major diameter of the end mill to be used for


sideface machining

NOTE
1 The automatic tool selection function selects an end mill for
sideface machining whose nominal diameter is smaller
than or equal to the groove diameter. In Yaxis milling, the
machining width is limited to the width of the end mill used.
The machined width may be smaller than the diameter of
the end mill.

450

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

TOOLNO

: Tool ID number of the end mill for sideface


machining
: Speed at which the tool revolves in milling
(revolutions/min)
: T code for the end mill
: Feedrate at which the end mill for sideface
machining transversely cuts the side face of the
workpiece (along the Yaxis and Zaxis)
(mm/min or inch/min)
: Feedrate at which the end mill for sideface
machining longitudinally cuts the workpiece
(along the Xaxis) (mm/min or inch/min)
: Feedrate in retraction. After milling is completed,
the end mill is returned to the X coordinate of the
machining start point at this speed in the G01
mode. Triple the value set for FEEDRATE2 is
automatically specified.
: Desired direction of cutter compensation.
Select the desired type of SHIFTDR from the
follwing menu items
1 = CENTER :
The tool is moved so that its
center moves along the contour determined by the specified figure.
2 = RIGHT :
Cutter compensation to the
right is applied to a specified
figure. (tool post 1: G42, tool
post 2: G41)
3 = LEFT
:
Cutter compensation to the
left is applied to a specified
figure. (tool post 1: G41, tool
post 2: G42)

REV/MIN
TCODE
FEED.Y,Z

FEED.X

ESCAPESX

SHIFTDR

NOTE
2 When SHIFTDR is set to RIGHT or LEFT, alarm P/S 41
may be issued while the program is running to indicate
interference in cutter compensation, depending on the
specified contour.
JMILLING GEAR: Desired milling gear (only when required).
Directly enter the corresponding M code.
JCOOLANT
: Desired coolant

451

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

3.4.3

B62444E1/04

Specify the figure data on the YZ plane shown below: Specify a radius
along the Yaxis and a radius along the Zaxis.

Figure Data

[HEAD1]

[HEAD2]

(1) Figure data of the start point


START POINT Y
: Y coordinate of the start point (radius)
START POINT Z
: Z coordinate of the start point (radius)
START PNT C COORD. C : Angular displacement of the workpiece
(C coordinate)
BOTTOM X
: X coordinate of the bottom of the cut

NOTE
1 The cutting start point is determined from the X coordinate
of the bottom of the cut and the depth of cut. If the depth
of cut is not large enough to enable positioning of the cutting
start point outside the blank, the tool may collide with the
blank during rapid traverse.
(2) Selecting a contour and entering the figure data
After entering the figure data of the start point, press the [INSERT]
soft key. The following soft key menu for selecting a contour is
displayed:

<

CHAM
FER

ROUND

PLOT

To display the second page of the soft key menu, press the [+] soft key.

<

TANGNT

TRANS.

FIGURE
PLOT
END

For the contours entered by selecting options other than [TRANS.] on the
contour selection menu, see Section 1.1.
452

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS


FOR A LATHE HAVING THE YAXIS
TYPES OF MACHINING
MACHINING FUNCTION
PROGRAMS

(3) Entering two or more figures


By pressing the [TRANS.] soft key on the contour selection menu
to rotate the workpiece about the Caxis or to change the depth of
cut, two or more figures can be entered for a single Yaxis milling
process.
End mill

To cut two or more figures, press the [TRANS.] key on the contour
selection menu.
NEXT SHAPE Y COORD Y
NEXT SHAPE Z COORD Z
NEXT SHAPE C COORD C

BOTTOM X

: Y coordinate of the start point of


the next figure
: Z coordinate of the start point of
the next figure
: Angular displacement of the
workpiece when the next figure is
cut (C coordinate)
: X coordinate of the bottom of the
cut of the next figure

NOTE
2 An arc exceeding a semicircle cannot be specified. To
specify a whole circle, for example, enter two semicircles.
3 For a single Yaxis milling process, up to 30 contours
(including multiple identical figures) can be specified.

453

IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE


SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFT
TYPES OF MACHINING
HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

CONVERTING A MACHINE PROGRAM IN THE RIGHTHAND


COORDINATE SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFTHAND
COORDINATE SYSTEM

454

B62444E1/04

4.1
OVERVIEW

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE


SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFT
HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM

When a machining program is created in the conversational mode, it is


assumed that the figures are specified in the righthand coordinate system
(ZX plane) as shown in the example below. It is also assumed that
machining operation with the machining program is performed in the
same coordinate system.

+X

+Z

However, some machines have the lefthand coordinate system, where


the negative Xdirection points upward.

+Z

+X

With the procedure described below, machining programs for such


machines can be created in the conversational mode.
(1) Set bit 6 (RVX) of parameter 9775 to 1.
(2) When creating a machining program in the conversational mode,
enter contour data in the righthand coordinate system as usual, in
the ZX plane where the positive Xdirection points upward.

455

IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE


SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFT
TYPES OF MACHINING
HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(3) A machining program created in the conversational mode is


converted to an NCformat program.
The machining program is automatically converted to a machining
program in the lefthand coordinate system, where the negative
Xdirection points upward.
Therefore, machining on the actual machine is always performed
using an NCformat program.

456

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE


SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFT
HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM

4.2
DETAILS OF
CONVERSION TO
MACHINING
PROGRAM IN THE
LEFTHAND
COORDINATE
SYSTEM
4.2.1
Conversion of
Machining Programs

A machining program created in the conversational mode is converted to


an NCformat program through the conversion operations described
below.
(1) Axis command along the Xaxis
The signs of all axis commands along the Xaxis are reversed.
(2) Gcodes
All Gcodes associated with the coordinate planes in a machining
program are converted as follows:
G02 G03
G03 G02
G41 G42
G42 G41
(3) Gcode commands for animated simulation
Graphic commands starting with G10 P9**** for animated
simulation are always deleted in conversion to an NC format
program.
NOTE
NCformat programs after conversion cannot perform
animated simulation.

457

IN THE RIGHTHAND COORDINATE


SYSTEM TO THAT IN THE LEFT
TYPES OF MACHINING
HAND COORDINATE SYSTEM
PROGRAMS

4.2.2
Restrictions on
Conversion to
Machining Programs in
the Lefthand
Coordinate System

B62444E1/04

(1) Machining programs created in the conversational mode in the


righthand coordinate system cannot be directly executed on a
machine that has the lefthand coordinate system, where the
negative Xdirection points upward.
(2) Animated simulation using a machining program created in the
conversational mode in the righthand coordinate system can be
performed only on the ZX plane where the positive Xdirection
points upward. At this time, set the coordinate system for animated
simulation (Parameter 6510: GRPAX setting value) as described
below.
(a) When the program reference position is on the chuck end face
GRPAX = 1

: Draws only the upper half of a material to be


machined.
GRPAX = 11 : Draws the lower half of a material to be
machined as well.
(b) When the program reference position is on the workpiece end face
GRPAX = 4
GRPAX = 14

: Draws only the upper half of a material to be


machined.
: Draws the lower half of a material to be
machined as well.

After a machining program such as the above is converted to an


NCformat program, animated simulation cannot be performed.
NOTE
If a tool offset is set for a machine based on the lefthand
coordinate system when animated simulation is to be
executed by a machining program created in conversational
mode, movement along the Xaxis associated with the tool
offset may be reversed.
(3) Set the virtual tool tip direction data on the tool data screen of the
conversational function according to the program input coordinate
system, that is, the righthand coordinate system.
Until conversion to an NC format program in the lefthand
coordinate system is completed, set the hypothetical tool tip
direction data of the tool offset data on the NC side as well as the
hypothetical tool tip data on the tool data screen according to the
righthand coordinate system.
Before starting actual machining using a converted NCformat
program, set the hypothetical tool tip direction data of the tool offset
data on the NC side to a normal value in the leftside coordinate
system.
(4) The setup guidance functions of the conversational function such as
tool length compensation value measurement, chuck barrier
specification, and toolchange position specification cannot be
used.
The tooling data directory screen cannot be displayed. In addition,
the tool life management function available with the conversational
function cannot be used.
458

B62444E1/04

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS


FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE

BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS FOR A LATHE WITH A


SUBSPINDLE

459

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS


FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE

5.1
SELECTING THE
SUBSPINDLE

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

In conversational programming, the following functions can be used to


create a program for machining with a subspindle.
These optional functions are valid when bit 6 (2SP) of parameter No. 9771
is set to 1.
(1) The main spindle (main) or subspindle (sub) can be selected for
each machining process.
(2) A program for machining with the main spindle or subspindle can
be selected for each tool.
(3) Some processes can be moved from the main spindle to the
subspindle and vice versa. The processes that can be moved are
limited. They include bar machining and grooving.

460

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

5.2
BACK MACHINING
WITH THE
SUBSPINDLE

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS


FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE

To execute back machining in bar machining with the subspindle,


specify reverse machining as shown below:

- Outer surface

- Inner surface

"""
"""
"""
"""

- End surface

"""
"""

""""
""""
""""

"""
"""
"""

""""
""""
""""

Pressing the [+] soft key on the machiningarea menu for bar machining
displays the following reverse cutting menu.
7: OUTER END (BACKWARD)
8: OUTER MID (BACKWARD)
9: INNER END (BACKWARD)
10: INNER MID (BACKWARD)
11: FACE END (BACKWARD)
12: FACE MID (BACKWARD)
Select the desired machining depending on the shape and area to be
machined.
NOTE
When bar machining or reverse bar machining is specified
for a point, corner rounding/chamfering cannot be specified
immediately after the contour start point. Enter an arc or
diagonal line instead of corner rounding/chamfering.

461

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS


FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE

5.3
COORDINATE
SYSTEM FOR CAXIS
MACHINING WITH
THE SUBSPINDLE

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Viewing the end face of the workpiece from the front, enter coordinates
for Caxis machining with the subspindle, as shown below:
+X
+C

Caxis tool
C=0
End face of
the workpiece

462

B62444E1/04

5.4
ANIMATED
SIMULATION
FUNCTION FOR
MACHINING WITH
THE SUBSPINDLE

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS


FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE

While an animated drawing of a single workpiece is displayed on the


screen as shown below, turning with the main spindle or subspindle is
simulated:

NOTE
When the function for machining with the subspindle is
used, the following animated simulation command for
shifting the graphic coordinate system is executed at the
beginning of each process of a converted NC program. The
command is not output if the suppression of the output in NC
program conversion is specified.
-

5.5
FUNCTION FOR
CONTROLLING THE
CAXIS BRAKE

Process of machining with the main spindle: G10 X0 Z0


P90105;
Process of machining with the subspindle: G10 X0
Z(productlength) P90105;

In Caxis drilling, M codes for activating and deactivating the Caxis


brake are automatically output before and after each drilling action.
The M code for activating the Caxis brake and the M code for
deactivating the Caxis brake (M code for activating the brake plus 1) are
specified in parameter No. 5110. These M codes are automatically output
in the Caxis machining under control of spindle positioning.
463

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS


FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE

5.6

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Even when the machine controls spindle positioning (96 angular


subsections), the following Caxis machining and animated simulation
can be executed:
(1) Caxis drilling on the end face (center drilling, drilling, tapping)
(2) Caxis drilling on the side surface (center drilling, drilling, tapping)
(3) Caxis machining of a predetermined groove on the side surface

CAXIS MACHINING
FUNCTION UNDER
CONTROL OF
SPINDLE
POSITIONING

NOTE
1 For the unit controlling spindle positioning (main
spindle/subspindle), set the parameters for selecting the
Caxis machining menu (Nos. 9791, 9792) to 1.
2 The spindle positioning program is created by the machine
tool builder. For details, refer to the manual written by the
machine tool builder.

When NC program conversion is carried out, the spindle positioning


command is converted to the following block:
M

I1(or 2);

m = M code used to call another M code


c = C coordinate
After a drilling process following the spindle positioning command
terminates, the M code for canceling spindle positioning is automatically
output.
The M code for canceling spindle positioning is specified in parameter
No. 9862 (960FFM).
-

Bit NO.
9771

7
1SP

6
2SP

96M

96S

The following parameters have been added for spindle


positioning:
5
96S

4
96M

1: The spindle positioning control function (96 angular


subsections) is enabled for the main spindle. This is valid
only for the FS16/18T with the subspindle control
functions.
0: The spindle positioning control function (96 angular
subsections) is disabled for the main spindle.
1: The spindle positioning control function (96 angular
subsections) is enabled for the subspindle. This is valid
only for the FS16/18T with the subspindle control
functions.
0: The spindle positioning control function (96 angular
subsections) is disabled for the subspindle.

464

TYPES OF MACHINING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

2SP

1SP

5.7
AUTOMATIC OUTPUT
OF THE M CODE FOR
CONTROLLING THE
SUBSPINDLE
(AND THE M CODES
FOR CALLING
SUBPROGRAMS)

1: The conversational
lathe is enabled.
0: The conversational
lathe is disabled.
1: The conversational
lathe is enabled.
0: The conversational
lathe is disabled.

5. BACK MACHINING FUNCTIONS


FOR A LATHE WITH
A SUBSPINDLE

function for a oneturret twospindle


function for a oneturret twospindle
function for a twoturret onespindle
function for a twoturret onespindle

The M code for changing the subspindle gear and the function to call the
M codes for enabling and disabling the subspindle can be used to control
the subspindle.
(1) M code for changing the subspindle gear
Parameter No. 9893 (GERM1S) : M code for selecting a low gear
Parameter No. 9894 (GERM2S) : M code for selecting medium
gear 1
Parameter No. 9895 (GERM3S) : M code for selecting medium
gear 2
Parameter No. 9896 (GERM4S) : M code for selecting a high gear
The maximum speed of each gear, which determines which gear is
selected, is the same as that specified in the corresponding parameter
for the main spindle.
(2) Calling the M codes for enabling and disabling the subspindle
At the beginning of a process for machining with the subspindle,
a subprogram for enabling the subspindle is automatically called.
At the beginning of a process for machining with the main spindle,
a subprogram for disabling the subspindle is automatically called.
The O9028 subprogram is called to enable the subspindle. The
O9027 subprogram is called to disable the subspindle.
When the program is converted to an NC program, the above block
is converted as a block for calling the M code.
Enabling the subspindle : Mm1; (m1 is the M code for calling
a subprogram.)
Disabling the subspindle : Mm2; (m2 is the M code for calling
a subprogram.)
Machining menu parameters
Machining menus can be displayed separately by specifying
parameter Nos. 9791 (for tool post 1 or the main spindle) and 9792
(for tool post 2 or the sub spindle) accordingly.
For details, see the parameter descriptions.

465

IV. EXAMPLES OF CREATING


PROGRAMS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH


4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

WARNING
The parameters, tool data, cutting condition data, and machining programs in the following
examples differ from those used in actual machining. Actual data varies from one machine model
to another. Refer to the applicable manual supplied by the respective machine tool builders for
details.
If the set data does not match the characteristic of a specific machine, a machining program
created using the conversational function cannot work correctly.
If a machining program fails to work correctly, the tool may bump against the workpiece, and the
machine may be forced to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to the tool
and/or machine, and even injuries.

469

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

1.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS

B62444E1/04

(1) Coordinate system parameters for drawing


Parameter No. 6510 (GRPAX) = 14 (program reference position =
workpiece end face, workpiece upper and lower face drawing)
(2) Workpiece material display

Parameter No.

Setting value

9100
9101
9102
9103
9104
9105
9106
9107

70
67
50
53
0
0
0
0

9108
9109
9110
9111
9112
9113
9114
9115

70
67
68
52
53
0
0
0

9116
9117
9118
9119
9120
9121
9122
9123

83
83
52
49
0
0
0
0

9124
9125
9126
9127
9128
9129
9130
9131

83
52
53
67
0
0
0
0

9132
9133
9134
9135
9136
9137
9138
9139

83
75
68
49
49
0
0
0

9140
9141
9142
9143
9144
9145
9146
9147

83
85
83
51
48
52
0
0

470

Workpiece material 1 (FC25)

Workpiece material 2 (FCD45)

Workpiece material 3 (SS41)

Workpiece material 4 (S45C)

Workpiece material 5 (SKD 11)

Workpiece material 6 (SUS304)

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Parameter No.
9148
9149
9150
9151
9152
9153
9154
9155

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

Setting value
65
76
0
0
0
0
0
0

Workpiece material 7 (AL)

NOTE
1 Specify parameter Nos. 9156 to 9759 according to the
application.

(3) Parameters required to execute a machining program created


conversationally

Parameter No.

Setting value

9050
9051
9052
9053
9054
9055
9056

50
70
2000
500
3000
60
0

9057
9090
9091
9765
9766
9770
9771
9772
9773
9774
9775
9776
9777
9778
9779
9780
9781
9782
9783
9784
9785
9786
9787
9788
9789
9790
9791
9792
9793
9794
9795
9796
9797
9798
9799

80
0
0
11001011
00000001
00000000
00001001
11100000
01101010
11011000
10011001
00000001
11000000
00000100
00000100
30000
10000
3000
1500
3000
3000
0
3000
3000
0
0
5
5
0
0
80
1000
1000
1000
3000

(Cutting feed override at the start of cutting in drilling)


(Cutting feed override at the end of cutting in throughhole drilling)
(Cutting feed amount for retraction in turning residual drilling)
(Cutting feed amount for retraction in Caxis residual drilling)
(Cuttinglip length in reaming)
(Surface speed override in throwaway drilling)
(M code for spindle orientation in Caxis boring; the setting depends on the machine
being used.)
(Cutting feed amount override in throwaway drilling)
(PMC parameter start address in batched data input/output)
(PMC parameter end address in batched data input/output)

(Xcoordinate for outer surface common safety point clearance)


(Zcoordinate for outer surface common safety point clearance)
(Xcoordinate for inner surface common safety point clearance)
(Zcoordinate for inner surface common safety point clearance)
(Cutting start point clearance Xcoordinate)
(Cutting start point clearance Zcoordinate)
(The program reference position is the workpiece end face.)
(Drilling cutting start point clearance Xcoordinate)
(Drilling cutting start point clearance Zcoordinate)
(Override of depth of cut for tool post 1)
(Override of depth of cut for tool post 2)
(Machining menu selection for tool post 1)
(Machining menu selection for tool post 2)
(Automatically set toolchange position X)
(Automatically set toolchange position Z)
(Change ratio of depth of cut)
(Minimum depth of cut)
(Clearance Xcoordinate)
(Clearance Zcoordinate)
(Residual clearance Xcoordinate)

471

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

Parameter No.
9800
9801
9802
9803
9804
9805
9806
9807
9808
9815
9820
9821
9822
9823
9824
9825
9826
9830
9831
9832
9833
9834
9835
9836
9837
9838
9839
9840
9850
9851
9852
9853
9854
9855
9856
9857
9858
9859
9860
9861
9862
9865
9866
9870
9871
9872
9873
9874
9875
9876
9877
9878
9879
9880
9881
9882
9883
9884
9885X9887
9888
9889X9891
9892
9893X9896
9897X9899

B62444E1/04

Setting value
3000
3
0
0
0
0
0
100000
50
30
3000
3000
80
1000
1000
20
5
10000
3000
6495
200
300
60
20
21
6495
6300
0
1000
3000
1000
30
30
1000
1000
50
5000
3000
3
14
0
20
0
0
0
0
0
50
51
0
13
14
3000
46
45
2
10
9
0
2
0
0
0
0

(Residual clearance Zcoordinate)


(Cut angle clearance)
(90 < cutting angle x 135 overridden)
(135 < cutting angle < 180 overridden)
(180 < cutting angle x 225 overridden)
(225 < cutting angle < 270 overridden)
(Overriding at mill scale machining)
(Distance along which end facing speed is reduced)
(Overriding reduction in end facing speed)
(Necking cut angle)
(Groove cut clearance X)
(Groove cut clearance Z)
(Groove cut change ratio)
(Minimum depth of groove cut)
(Amount of groove return)
(Grooving overlap amount)
(Groove bottom dowel time for rotation of the spindle)
(Threading clearance X)
(Threading clearance Z)
(Thread height coefficient)
(Minimum depth of thread cut)
(Thread finishing allowance X)
(Initial thread angle)
(M code for enabling chamfering)
(M code for disabling chamfering)
(Coefficient of thread height for metric and unified threads)
(Coefficient of thread height for PT and PF threads)
(Parameter for canceling Yaxis machining mode)
(Drilling reduced depth)
(Drilling clearance return amount)
(Drilling minimum depth)
(Drilling depth coefficient)
(Drill dowel speed)
(Clearance of drilling or grooving)
(C axis tap clearance)
(Tapped hole bottom clearance)
(Boring shift amount)
(Boring return clearance)
(Boring return speed overridden)
(M code for reversing the direction of tool rotation around the milling axis in Caxis
tapping)
(M code for canceling spindle positioning mode)
(Side face notching overlap amount)
(M code for selecting lowspeed gear)
(M code for selecting middlespeed 1 gear)
(M code for selecting middlespeed 2 gear)
(M code for selecting highspeed gear)
(Tail stock ON M code)
(Tail stock OFF M code)
(Milling axis stop M code)
(Milling axis normal rotation M code)
(Milling axis reverse rotation M code)
(Milling axis maximum speed)
(Spindle Cfaxis switching M code)
(Cfaxis spindle switching M code)
(Number of digits of feed amount)
(Sequence number specification at NC statement conversion)
(Graphic drawing reduction ratio)
(Data for checking the cutting power)
(Cassette number for tool file output)
(Average time required to execute an M, S, or T code)
(Program selected when conversational mode is switched to NC mode)
(M code for selecting subspindle gears)
(Data for the tool/chuck interference check function)

472

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

NOTE
2 The above parameter values are temporary ones. When a
device is connected for actual run, the values appropriate
to the device should be set.
The above example shows the values to be set when such
options as the Caxis conversational automatic
programming function and NC statement output function
are used. If they are not used, each parameter must be set
to 0.

473

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.2
SETTING TOOL DATA
AND CUTTING
CONDITION DATA
1.2.1

(1) Registering a righthand outside surface cutting tool (HEADL)

Setting Tool Data


On the screen with a registeredtool directory displayed, press:
[TOOL ENTRY]
After making sure the tool data is displayed on the screen, specify:
[GENERAL OUTTER]
(Tool type)
[HEADL]
(Tool post)
[
]
(Direction of the tool)
[COMMON]
(Roughing or finising)
0101
INPUT
(Tcode)
[NORMAL]
(Direction of rotation)
0.4
INPUT
(Tool tip radius)
90
INPUT
(Cutting edge angle)
60
INPUT
(Tool angle)
20
INPUT
(Tool width)
3
INPUT
(Virtual tool tip)
[CARBID]
(Tool material)

NOTE
1 Pressing the [TOOL LIST] soft key redisplays the
registeredtool directory.

(2) Registering a lefthand outside surface cutting tool (HEADR)

On the screen with a registeredtool directory displayed, press:


[TOOL ENTRY]
After making sure the tool data is displayed on the screen, specify:
[GENERAL OUTTER]
(Tool type)
[HEADR]
(Tool post)
[
]
(Direction of the tool)
[COMMON]
(Roughing or finising)
1111
INPUT
(Tcode)
[NORMAL]
(Direction of rotation)
0.4
INPUT
(Tool tip radius)
90
INPUT
(Cutting edge angle)
60
INPUT
(Tool angle)
20
INPUT
(Tool width)
3
INPUT
(Virtual tool tip)
[CARBID]
(Tool material)

474

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

NOTE
2 When the registeredtool directory is on the screen,
pressing the [MENU RETURN] soft key redisplays the tool
data menu.

1.2.2
Setting Cutting
Condition Data

Set cutting condition data according to descriptions in 13.2 Machining


Condition Data and Surface Roughness Data in Chapter I.

475

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

1.3
EXAMPLES OF
PROGRAMS FOR
MACHINING THE
CYLINDRICAL
SURFACE OF BARS

B62444E1/04

Program example) Machining cylindrical surfaces


Material code: FC25
Material type: Round bar (100 80, including an
end face cutting allowance of 2 mm on either face)

80

R3
R3

C2

75
30

95

C2

60
60

25

30
50
62
76

1.3.1

(1) Displaying the main menu

Creating a Machining
Program

Press the

PROG

function key to display the main conversational

menu.
NOTE
If the main menu is not displayed, see descriptions in 6.3
Selecting the Conversational Mode in Chapter II.
(2) Operations for program creation
To display a menu for program creation, press the [ 1 ] soft key
(machining program creation).
(3) Entering the program number and name
Enter program number 0194 and name PRG11.

0194
PRG11

INPUT
INPUT

(Program number)
(Program name)

476

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

1.3.2
Entering Initial Data
[FC25]
[BAR]
100
INPUT
80
2000
[ON]
1
.5
2
76

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(Workpiece material)
(Workpiece figure)
(Maximum outside dimension)
(Maximum inside diameter)
(Length)
(Maximum spindle speed)
(Coolant)
(Finishing allowance Xcoordinate)
(Finishing allowance Zcoordinate)
(End surface chamfering allowance)
(Product length)
(Cursor key)

NOTE
Once entered for a program, the above data is preserved
and used for other programs automatically. To use such
data to create another program, just check they are
appropriate for the new program and press the
cursordown key () repeatedly until a new process is
created.

477

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

1.3.3
Specifying the Primary
Machining Process
(For the Leftside Tool
Post)
1
BAR

<

B62444E1/04

(1) Entering the process data


Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of initial data entry
creates a new process and assigns various menus to the soft keys as
shown below:

2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THREAD

6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL

10
TAP

To select bar machining, press the [1 BAR] soft key, and specify the
machining area and tool post. To select a finishing tool, specify the
desired surface roughness. These operations automatically determine the
tool and cutting conditions.
[1 BAR]
[1 OUTER]
[HEADL]

(Workpiece type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)

[5

(Surface roughness)

(Cursor key)

(2) Entering contour data (primary machining)


Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of the operations (1)
displays an entry window for the start point of contour data. Enter
contour data according to the design drawings.

478

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point Xcoordinate)


(Start point Zcoordinate)

[ ]
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)

[CHAMFR]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Amount of chamfer)

[ ]
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Horizontal direction)
(End point Zcoordinate)
(Horizontal line Xcoordinate)

[ROUND]
3
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Radius of a corner)

[ + ]
[
]
60
INPUT
30
INPUT
INPUT
60
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Direction of movement)
(Slanted line end point Xcoordinate)
(Oblique line end point Zcoordinate)
(Xcomponent of an angle)
(Angle)

[ ]
[INSERT]

(Horizontal direction)

[ROUND]
3
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Radius of a corner)

[ + ]
[
]
95
INPUT
50
INPUT
INPUT
80
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Direction of movement)
(Slanted line end point Xcoordinate)
(Oblique line end point Zcoordinate)
(Xcomponent of an angle)
(Angle)

[ ]
62
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(End point Zcoordinate)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

479

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

1.3.4
Specifying a Transfer
Process

<

1
BAR

B62444E1/04

The last key operation [FIGURE END] in 1.3.3 creates a new process,
resulting in the machining type menus being assigned to the soft keys as
shown below:

2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THREAD

6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL

10
TAP

Press the rightmost soft key [ + ] to display the soft keys for page 2 of
machining type menus shown below.

<

11
SINGL

12
AUX

13
14
15
CCENT CDRIL CTAP

16
17
18
19
20

CGROV CNOTC CCYL. TRANS CA.SUB

Press the [19 TRANS] soft key to select a process in which the workpiece
that has undergone the primary machining is transferred from the leftside
tool post to the rightside tool post.

[19 TRANS]

(Machining type)

NOTE
1 The soft key assignment for page 2 of machining type
menus varies depending on whether the Caxis machining
option is available.
2 Refer to the applicable machine tool manual for descriptions
on the transfer process.
3 For the onepath lath, it is impossible to specify the transfer
process and the secondary machining process (for
rightside tool post) described later.

480

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.3.5
Specifying the
Secondary Machining
Process (For the
Rightside Tool Post)

1
BAR

<

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

(1) Entering the process data


The last key operation in the previous section creates a new process
and assigns the machining type menus to the soft keys, as shown
below, for the specification of the secondary process:

2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THREAD

6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL

10
TAP

To machine a bar, press the [1 BAR] soft key, and specify the machining
area and tool post. Also specify the surface roughness to select the desired
finishing tool. These operations determine the tool and cutting conditions
automatically.
[1 BAR]
[1 OUTER]
[HEADL]

(Workpiece type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)

[5

(Surface roughness)

(Cursor key)

481

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Entering contour data (secondary machining)


The last key operation () in item (1) displays an entry window for
the start point data for the contour. Enter the contour data according
to the design drawings.
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point Xcoordinate)


(Start point Zcoordinate)

[ ]
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)

[CHAMFER]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Amount of chamfer)

[ ]
INPUT
30
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(End point Zcoordinate)
(Horizontal line Xcoordinate)

[ + ]
[
]
95
INPUT
7662
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
75
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Slanted line end point Xcoordinate)
(Calculation of end point Zcoordinate)
(Slanted line end point Xcoordinate)
(Xcomponent of an angle)
(Angle)

482

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

1.3.6

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

Pressing the [PLOT] soft key displays the figure of the product in the
multiwindow.

Displaying the Figure


of a Product
[PLOT]
[RETURN]

(Displays the figure of the product.)


(Returns to the original screen.)

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM


NO. = 0194
PROC (02)
TRANS.
PROC(03)
BAR (R)
PROC (01)
BAR (R)

NAME =

AREA
OUTER
AREA
OUTER
START

CHAMFR

[CAP: HEADL]

PRG11

*** PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE ***


X

SOFTKEY selection

CUTDPTH TCODE
8.000
0202
FEED/REV TCODE
0.20
0202
B=

X= 95.000
Z= 14.000
I=
K/J= 75.000
Q=
) SR=
5W

FIG.TYPE
RETURN

(1) Returning to the main menu


After the initial program screen is resumed by pressing the
[RETURN] soft key on the above screen, pressing the leftmost soft
key [ ] redisplays the main menu.

(Super return)

483

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

1.3.7
Animated Simulation

B62444E1/04

A program can be checked by running it for animated simulation using


the procedure shown below:

On the main menu, press:


[3]
(Machining simulation)
A list of machining programs is displayed for simulation purposes.
Place the cursor on the program you want to run for animated
simulation, then specify:
[ANIMA + RT.CH]
(Animated simulation with tool trajectory)
After making sure that the animated simulation appears on the screen,
press:
[EXEC]
(Starts animated simulation.)
To start animated simulation at the very beginning, press:
[HEAD]
[EXEC]

HEAD1

HEAD2

X1

00001
O0001 P0001
P0000
X2

X1
Z1
C1

200.000
100.000
0.000

X2 92.000
Z2 13.057
C2
0.000

ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

ACT G01
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

0M00S
26.0
500%
< SPEED SPEED PLOT
DOWN
UP

NXT G01
X
0.000
Z
1.071
C
0.000

Z2

0M43G
26.0
MEM STOP *** ***
PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

14:22:25

STOP

WORK PROCES EXEC SINGLE +


STEP
PIECE

(FS16/18TB)

1.3.8

Pressing the leftmost soft key [

Returning to the Main


Menu

simulation screen redisplays the main menu.

484

] (super return) on the animated

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
4AXIS (X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES

1.4
SETTING UP
MACHINING
1.4.1
Setting the Workpiece
Shift Amount

When the machine stroke is too large to compensated for by the geometry
compensation amount, the workpiece shift amount is used for
compensation as shown in the following example:
Example) When the tool geometry compensation is insufficient
Tool post
(machine zero
point)
Zgo (Tool geometry compensation along the Zaxis)
Chuck

Xgo

Workpiece
Tail stock
Origin of the workpiece coordinate system
(on the end surface of the chuck)

When the stroke along the Zaxis of the machine exceeds the maximum
value (999.999 mm in metric system) of the tool geometry compensation
amount (Zgo), assign the machining workpiece length value and other
values as the workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis. Then, place the
virtual reference position on the workpiece end face. The Zaxis tool
geometry compensation amount will then be able to be within the
maximum value.
Tool post
(machine zero
point)
Zws (Workpiece shift amount along the Zaxis)

Zgo

Chuck

Xgo

Workpiece
Origin of the workpiece coordinate system
(on the end surface of the chuck)

Tail stock
Virtual zero point

NOTE
Some machine tool builders use the workpiece shift amount
for purposes other than the above. In such a case, the data
setting method differs from this. Refer to the manual
prepared by each machine tool builder.

485

1. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR TWOPATH
EXAMPLES OF CREATING
4AXIS(X1, Z, X2, AND Z2) LATHES
PROGRAMS

1.4.2
Another Setup
Operation for
Machining

B62444E1/04

The following setup must be performed before the conversationally


created machining program can be executed. See Section 12.1 of Chapter
II for details.
(1) Measuring a tool geometry compensation amount
(2) Specifying a tool changing position
(3) Specifying a chuck barrier
NOTE
checking a machining program using drnamic graphic
displays does not require this setup.

486

B62444E1/04

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

EXAMPLE OF INPUTTING CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN REPEATING

WARNING
The following example of entering contour data is intended
only to illustrate what automatic calculation of intersections is
like when contour data is entered. The contour data given in
the example may not be able to be used in actual machining.
If the machine is forced to run according to a program like the
one shown above, the tool may bump against the workpiece,
and the machine may be forced to perform unnatural
machining, possibly causing damage to the tool and/or
machine, and even injuries.

NOTE
The following examples show the input procedure for
contours, assuming that the process data for bar machining
and pattern repeating has already been input.

Example 1
70
29

R5
70

52
R100

487

32

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
32
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)

[
]
100
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(FIG. TYPE)

[
]
5
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
52
INPUT
29
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG.TYPE)

[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)

[
70

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)

]
INPUT

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

(FIG.TYPE)

488

B62444E1/04

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example 2
70

15
R40
R14
100

70

20

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
20
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)

[ ]
15
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)

[
40
INPUT

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)

]
INPUT

INPUT
100
INPUT
15
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
14
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG.TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(FIG.TYPE)

[ ]
70
INPUT
70
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

(FIG.TYPE)

489

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example 3
70
40

R=10

20

70

30

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
30
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)

[ + ]
[
]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(FIG.TYPE)

(Angle)

(FIG.TYPE)

[
]
10
INPUT
70
INPUT
40
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(End point X)
(End point Z)

[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

(FIG.TYPE)

490

B62444E1/04

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

Example 4

70
40
20

70
R=10
30

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
30
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)

[
]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[
]
70
INPUT
40
INPUT
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)

(FIG. TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

(FIG. TYPE)

491

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example 5
70
54

R=10

R=110

70

74

R=7

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[
]
7
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
0
INPUT
7
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
110
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
10
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
74
INPUT
54
INPUT
[INSERT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

492

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
70
INPUT
70
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)

[CROSS1]
[INSERT]

(CROSS PT NUMBER)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

(FIG. TYPE)

Example 6
155
120

R35

150

R35
25

R25

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[
]
25
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
0
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
35
INPUT
[INSERT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

493

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

[ + ]
[TANGNT]

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

(FIG. TYPE)

[
]
35
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
80
INPUT
120
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
155
INPUT
150
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

B62444E1/04

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG.TYPE)

Example 7
33
R80
R2
90
20

R30

R2

20

70

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)

[ROUND]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)

(FIG. TYPE)

494

80

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

30
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
20
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]

(RADIUS)

[CROSS2]
[INSERT]

(CROSS PT NUMBER)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
80
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(FIG.TYPE)

[
]
20
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
90
INPUT
33
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
70
INPUT
80
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)

[CROSS1]
[INSERT]

(CROSS PT NUMBER)

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

495

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example 8
10
R10
70

15

R8
60

100

40

65

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
20
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)

[ + ]
[
]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
15
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]

60

(FIG. TYPE)

(Angle)

(FIG. TYPE)

[
]
10
INPUT
40
INPUT
20
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)
(End point X)
(End point X)

[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
40
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)

[
]
8
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(FIG. TYPE)

496

40

20

20

B62444E1/04

[ + ]
[
]
60
INPUT
60
INPUT
INPUT
10
INPUT
[INSERT]

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

(FIG. TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
65
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)

[ ]
70
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)

[ ]
100
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

497

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example 9

R2
R=20

D=65

D=50

25

D=65

25

D=65

D=50
25

15
25

65
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ROUND]
2
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)

[ ]
25
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)

[ + ]
[  ]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ ]
INPUT
50
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[
]
65
INPUT
75
INPUT
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)

(Angle)

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point X)

(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)

498

220

75

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

[ ]
INPUT
INPUT
15
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)

[  ]
20
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(LENGTH)

(FIG.TYPE)

[ ]
INPUT
50
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(End point X)

(FIG.TYPE)

[
]
20
INPUT
65
INPUT
220
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)
(End point X)
(End point Z)

[TRANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TRANGENITIAL PT NO)

[ ]
INPUT
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)

(LENGHT)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

499

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Example 10
20

R10

R20
R10

R10
10

R8

70

100

145
R10

40
30

45

10

75

60

0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)

[CHAMFR]
1
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(BEVEL AMOUNT)

[ ]
5
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(End point Z)

[
]
10
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
30
INPUT
5
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[  ]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
45
INPUT
[INSERT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG. TYPE)

(FIG. TYPE)

(Angle)

500

50

35 30

B62444E1/04

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
8
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[  ]
30
INPUT
30
INPUT
INPUT
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
[
]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

(FIG.TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)

(FIG.TYPE)

(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)
(TAPER END Z COORD)
(Angle)

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIIUS)

(FIG.TYPE)

[ ]
50
INPUT
40
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ROUND]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)

[ + ]
[  ]
70
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
70
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ ]
60
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END X COORD)

(Angle)

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)

501

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

[
]
20
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
70
INPUT
80
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
10
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG.TYPE)
(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(FIG.TYPE)

[ ]
75
INPUT
100
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)
(End point X)

[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

B62444E1/04

(FIG.TYPE)

Example 11
22
2.4

19.6
6.6

0.99

1.31

5.5
R3
R1.4
R1.5

25 23

R0.5

R1.5
R3
18

502

26.6
24.8

R30

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

24.8
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point X)
(Start point Z)

[ ]
.99
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
INPUT(End point Z)

[ROUND]
.5
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(ROUND RADIUS)

[
]
1.4
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
23.8
INPUT
2.3
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
30
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(FIG. TYPE)

[
]
3
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
29
INPUT
13
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

[TANGNT1]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[
]
1.5
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ ]
INPUT
25
INPUT
[INSERT]

(CENTER X COORD)
(CENTER Z COORD)

(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(FIG. TYPE)
(FIG. TYPE)
(End point X)

503

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

CONTOURS FOR BAR


MACHINING AND PATTERN
REPEATING

[CROSS1]
[INSERT]

(CROSS PT NUMBER)

[ + ]
[TANGNT]

(FIG.TYPE)

[
]
1.5
INPUT
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TANGNT]
[ + ]
[  ]
18
19.6
18
2.4
[INSERT]

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

(FIG.TYPE)
(RADIUS)

(FIG.TYPE)

INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(FIG.TYPE)
(TAPER END
(TAPER END
(COMPONENT
(COMPONENT

X COORD)
Z COORD)
X)
Z)

[TANGNT2]
[INSERT]

(TANGENTIAL PT NO)

[ ]
22
INPUT
[INSERT]

(FIG.TYPE)
(End point Z)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

504

B62444E1/04

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

CREATING MACHINING PROGRAMS FOR LATHES


WITH THE CAXIS

WARNING
The parameters, tool data, cutting condition data, and
machining programs in the following examples differ from
those used in actual machining. Actual data varies from one
machine model to another. Refer to the applicable manual
supplied by the respective machine tool builders for details.
If the set data does not match the characteristic of a specific
machine, a machining program created using the
conversational function cannot work correctly.
If a machining program fails to work correctly, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, and the machine may be forced
to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to
the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

505

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

3.1
SETTING
PARAMETERS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

Set the following parameters in addition to the parameters described in


Section 1.1.
D Bit 4 (CCR) of parameter No. 3405 = 0 : I and K are used for
chamfer/corner radius specification.
D Parameter No. 1020 (third axis) = 67 : The Caxis is programmed as
the third axis.
D Parameter No. 1022 = 6 : The third axis is the Yaxis of the basic
coordinate system.
D Parameter No. 5460 = 1 : The straight line axis for polar coordinate
interpolation is the first axis.
D Parameter No. 5461 = 3 : The rotation axis for polar coordinate
interpolation is the third axis.
Set all other parameters necessary for Caxis control (including polar
coordinate and cylindrical interpolation).

506

B62444E1/04

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

3.2
SETTING TOOL AND
CUTTING CONDITION
DATA
3.2.1

(1) Registering an end mill tool for notching and grooving

Setting Tool Data for


Machining Around the
Caxis
When a registeredtool directory is on the screen,press:
[TOOL ENTRY]
Confirm that the tool data is displayed on the screen,then enter:
[END MIL]
[HEAD_L]
[FACE]
[COMMON]
1010
INPUT
[NORMAL]
5
INPUT
3
INPUT
50
INPUT
0
INPUT
[CARBID]

(Tool type)
(Tool post, for twopath lathes only)
(Tool direction)
(Roughing/finishing)
(T code)
(Direction of rotation)
(Radius of tool)
(Number of edges)
(Tool length)
(Virtual tool tip)
(Tool material)

(2) Registering an end mill tool for cylindrical machining

When a registeredtool directory is on the screen, press:


[TOOL ENTRY]
Confirm that the tool data is displayed on the screen, then enter:
[END MIL]
[HEAD_L]
[CROSS]
[COMMON]
1111
INPUT
[NORMAL]
5
INPUT
3
INPUT
50
INPUT
0
INPUT
[CARBID]

(Tool type)
(Tool post, for twopath lathes only)
(Tool direction)
(Roughing/finishing)
(T code)
(Direction of rotation)
(Radius of tool)
(Number of edges)
(Tool length)
(Virtual tool tip)
(Tool material)

507

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

NOTE
When a registeredtool directory is on the screen, pressing
the [MENU RETURN] soft key redisplays the tool data
menu.

508

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3.3

Program example)

EXAMPLE OF
CREATING A
PROGRAM FOR
NOTCHING AND
CYLINDRICAL
MACHINING
AROUND THE
CAXIS

(1) Material code :

FC25 Material type: Round bar (105 123,


including end face cutting allowance of 3 mm)

(2) Process1

Turning the end face and outside cylindrical


surface of the material

"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
"""
(3)

3 : End face cutting allowance


5 : Cylindrical machining allowance

100

100

Process 2

Notching the material end face around the Caxis


with an end mill tool
(40, 0)

10mm
30
30

(80, 0)

(80, 0)
X

30
30
(40, 0)

509

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

(4)

Cylindrical workpiece

Process 3

B62444E1/04

Machining the cylindrical surface of the material


around the Caxis with an end mill tool

Expanded view of cylindrical portions

Groove on the cylindrical surface

3.3.1
Creating a Machining
Program

(1) Operations for program creation


To display a menu for program creation, press the [ 1 ] soft key
(machining program creation) on the main menu.
(2) Entering the program number and name
Enter program number 20 and name PRGC.

20
PRGC

INPUT

(Program number)
(Program name)

510

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

3.3.2
Entering the Initial Data
[FC25]
[BAR]
105
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
123
2000 INPUT
[ON]
0.5
INPUT
0.2
INPUT
3
INPUT

(Workpiece material)
(Workpiece figure)
(Maximum outside dimension)
(Minimum inside diameter)
(Length)
(Maximum spindle speed)
(Coolant)
(Finishing allowance Xcoordinate)
(Finishing allowance Zcoordinate)
(End surface chamfering allowance)

NOTE
1 It is unnecessary to specify the initial data for product
length for onepath lathes. This hold true for twopath
lathes if no secondary machining (rightsode tool post) is to
be performed.
2 Once the initial data has been specified, it is set
automatically in subsequent programming operations. In
subsequent programming, therefore, check that the
automaticallyset initial data is appropriate, then press the
key several times until a new process is created.

511

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

3.3.3

1
BAR

B62444E1/04

Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of initial data entry creates
a new process and assigns various menus to the soft keys as shown below:

Specifying Process 1
(End Face and
Cylindrical Surface
Machining)

<

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THRED

6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL

10
TAP

To select pattern repeating, press the [2 PT.RPT] soft key, and specify the
machining area and tool post. To select a finishing tool, specify the
desired surface roughness. These operations automatically determine the
tool and cutting conditions. In addition, specify the cutting allowance
necessary for pattern repeating.
[2PT. RPT]
[1 OUTER]
[HEADL]

(Machining type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)

5
3

INPUT
INPUT

(Cutting allowance Xcoorlinate)


(Cutting allowance Zcoordinate)

[5

(Surface roughness)

(Cursor key)

(2) Entering contour data


Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of the operations (1)
displays an entry window for the start point of contour data. Enter
contour data according to the design drawings.
0
INPUT
0
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Start point Xcoordinate)


(Start point Zcoordinate)

[ ]
(Figure pattern)
Position the cursor at Direction Cutting (D=),
[REVERS]
(Direction of cutting)
[INSERT]
[ ]
100 INPUT
100 INPUT
[ INSERT ]

(Figure pattern)
(End point Zcoordinate)
(Horizontal line Xcoordinate)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

512

then

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3.3.4
Specifying Process 2
(Notching the End Face
Around the Caxis)
1
BAR

<

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

The last key operation [FIGURE END] in 2.3.3 creates a new process,
resulting in the machining type menus being assigned to the soft keys as
shown below:

2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THREAD

6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL

10
TAP

Press the rightmost soft key [ + ] to display the soft keys for page 2 of machining
type menus shown below.

<

11
SINGL

12
AUX

13
14
15
CCNTR CDRIL CTAP

16
17
18
19
20

CGROV CNOTC CCYL. TRANS CA.SUB

Press the [17 CNOTC] soft key to select notching around the Caxis,
then specify the machining area, tool post, start point Zcoordinate, and
end point Zcoordinate.
Specifying these values automatically selects an end mill tool whose
length is greater than the machining depth (= end point Zcoordinate
start point Zcoordinate) and determines the cutting conditions.
Also enter data for the cutting allowance Xcoordinate and the finishing
allowance X/Zcoordinate necessary for notching around the Caxis.
NOTE
The finishing allowance X/Zcoordinate for nothing
around the Caxis must bespecified separately from the
finishing allowance entered as the initial cutting data

[17 CNOTC]
[ FACING ]
[ HEADL ]
0
INPUT
INPUT
10
30
INPUT

(Machining type)
(Machining area)
(Tool post)
(Start point Zcoordinate)
(End point Zcoordinate)
(Cutting allowance)

After placing the cursor on the finishing allowance Xcoordinate,specify:


. 2
. 1

INPUT
(Finishing allowance Xcoordinate)
INPUT (Finishing allowance Zcoordinate)
(Cursor key)
(Cursor key)

513

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(2) Entering contour data (notching around the Caxis)


Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of the operations (1)
displays an entry window for contour approach data. Enter the
contour data according to the design drawings.

80 INPUT
INPUT
0
[
]
30 INPUT
[INSERT]

(Machining
(Machining
(Direction
(Radius of

start point Xcoordinate)


start point Ccoordinate)
of approach)
approach)

[ ]
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[ ]
INPUT
0
INPUT
40
INPUT
INPUT
30
[INSERT]

(Direction of movement)
(Slanted line end point Xcoordinate)
(Slanted line end point Ccoordinate)
(Angle)

[ + ]
[ ]
(Figure pattern)
After placing the cursor on the angle (K/J), specify:
INPUT
(Angle)
30
[INSERT]
[
80
[ +
[
0
40
30

]
INPUT
INPUT
]
]
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT

(Figure pattern)
(End point Xcoordinate)
(Figure pattern)
(Slanted line end point Xcoordinate)
(Slanted line end point Ccoordinate)
(Angle)

[ + ]
[
]
(Figure pattern)
placing the cursor on the angle (K/J=), specify:
After
INPUT
(Angle)
30
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[ START ]
[ + ]
[ESCAPE]
INPUT
30
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Figure pattern)
(Clearnce radius)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

514

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

(3) Displaying the figure of a product


Pressing the [PLOT] soft key displays the figure of the product in
the multiwindow.

[PLOT]

(Displays the figure of the product.)

[RETURN]

(Returns to the original screen.)

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM


NO. = 0020 NAME = PRGC
PROC(02)
AREA
HEAD
CNOTCH(F)
FACING HEADL
FEED/MIN
START
APPROACH

STATPZ
0.000

TOOLNO REV/MIN TCODE


752
3000
1010

PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE


***
*** PLOTTING OF PART FIGURE***
X

***

JESCAPE

Softkey selection

ENDPTZ
10.000

R=30.000

Figure pattern
RETURN

<

515

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

3.3.5
Specifying Process 3
(Cylindrical Surface
Machining Around the
Caxis)
1
BAR

<

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

The last key operation [FIGURE END] in 2.3.4 creates a new process,
resulting in the machining type menus being assigned to the soft keys as
shown below:

2
3
4
5
PT.RPT RESID. FACING THREAD

6
7
8
9
GROOVE NECK CENTER DRILL

10
TAP

Press the rightmost soft key [ + ] to display the soft keys for page 2 of
machining type menus shown below.

<

11
SINGL

12
AUX

13
14
15
CCNTR CDRIL CTAP

16
17
18
19
20
CGROV CNOTC CCYL. TRANS CA.SUB 

Press the [18 CCYL.] soft key to select cylindrical surface machining
around the Caxis, then specify the tool post, groove start point
Xcoordinate, groove depth, and groove diameter.
Specifying these values automatically selects an end mill tool whose
length is greater than the groove depth and whose diameter is less than the
groove diameter, and determines the cutting conditions.
[18 CCYL]
[HEADL]
100 INPUT
INPUT
10
INPUT
10

(Machining type)
(Machining area)
(Groove start point Xcoordinate)
(Groove depth)
(Groove diameter)

(Cursor key)
(Cursor key)

(2) Entering contour data (cylindrical surface machining around the


Caxis)
Pressing the cursordown key () at the end of the operations (1)
displays an entry window for the start point of contour data. Enter
the contour data according to the design drawings.
20
INPUT
50
INPUT
[INSERT]

(Machining start point Ccoordinate


(Machining start point Zcoordinate

(Figure pattern)

]
INPUT
INPUT
180 INPUT
60 INPUT
50 INPUT
[INSERT]

(Center angle)
(Ccoordinate for the center of an arc)
(Zcoordinate for the center of an arc)

516

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

NOTE
When entering contour data for notching and cylindrical
machining around the Caxis, it is impossible to specify an
arc with a center angle of 180C or greater (semicircle to
full circle).

]
INPUT
INPUT
180 INPUT
INPUT
60
INPUT
50
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[TRANS]
INPUT
110
INPUT
120
INPUT
50
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(Center angle)
(Ccoordinate of the cented of an arc)
(Zcoordinate of the cented of an arc)

(Figure pattern)
(Clearance Xcoordinate)
(Start point Ccoordinate for another figure)
(Start point Zcoordinate for another figure)

[ + ]
[ ]
(Figure pattern)
After placing the cursor on the angle (K/J=), SPECIFY:
INPUT
(Angle)
30
[INSERT]
[

]
INPUT
INPUT
200
[INSERT]
[ + ]
[
]

INPUT
120
INPUT
50
INPUT
INPUT
30
[INSERT]

(Figure pattern)
(End point Zcoordinate)

(Figure pattern)
(Slanted line end point Ccoordinate)
(Slanted line end point Zcoordinate)
(Angle)

[ + ]
[FIGURE END]

(3) Displaying the figure of a product


Pressing the [PLOT] soft key displays the figure of the product in
the multiwindow.
[PLOT]

(Displays the figure of the product.)

[RETURN]

(Returns to the original screen.)

517

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

PREP A NEW PROCESS PROGRAM


NO.= 0020

NAME =
START

SHIFT

PRGC
C=20.000 Z=50.000
C=99.999 Z=50.000 R=43.906
X

*** PLOTTING
PART FIGURE
***
PLOTTING
OF PART FIGURE
*** OF
*** PLOTTING
OF PART
*** ***
FIGURE

B=
C=
Z=
I=
K/J=

Softkey selection

120.000
50.000
30.000

Figure patterm
RETURN


<

3.3.6
Input for the End
Process

<

21
M

Pressing the [FIGURE END] key as the last step of the previous section
creates a new process, displaying a menu of machining types as soft keys.
Press the [+] soft key several times until the following soft keys appear:

22 PROGRAM WINDOW PROCES


END
END
OFF
EDIT

MCHNC TOOL
DATA

DETAIL PLOT
DATA

To select the end process, press the [22 END] soft key. The G code for
performing a return operation and the M code for termination are set
automatically.
Data including G and M codes can be modified manually to suit the
application.
[22

END]

(Machining type)

To return to the main menu, press the [

518

] soft key.

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

3.3.7

A program can be checked by running it for animated simulation using


the procedure shown below:

Animated Simulation

On the main menu, press:


[ 3 ]
(Machining simulation)
A list of machining programs registered for simulation is displayed.
Place the cursor on the program you want to run for animated simulation, specify:
[ANIMA. + RT. CH] (Animated simulation with tool trajectory)
After making sure that the animated simulation appears on the screen,
press:
[EXEC]

(Starts animated simulation.)

To stsrt animated simulation at the very beginning , press:


[HEAD]
[EXEC]

The screen switches among the SIDE drawing (other than machining
around the Caxis), the FRONT drawing (machining around the Caxis
other than cylindrical surface machining), the OPEN drawing (cylindrical
surface machining around the Caxis) automatically according to the type
of machining during animated simulation.
After animated simulation is completed, any of the drawings can be
selected by soft keys.

SIDE

FRONT

OPEN

<

OPRT

These soft keys can be displayed by pressing the following keys in the
order shown:

<

SPEED SPEED
UP
DOWN

POLT

PROG
ON/OFF

HEAD

ZOOM

EXEC SINGLE

STEP

<

WORK PROCES
PIECE

519

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

B62444E1/04

G.PRM A.PRM GRAPH

OPRT

<

[GRAPH]
NOTE
1 For twopath lathes. these soft key are effective only for
display for the tool post selscted using the tool post
setection switch on the operalors panel of the machine.
2 When redisplaying the original soft keys, press [OPRT].
(1) Soft key [SIDE]
00020 P0000
X
S

0.83
X
Z
C

0.000
0.000
120.000

ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000Z
Z
0.000
C
0.000

19M43S
MEM **** *** ***

500%
<

SIDE

14:39:08
(DPRT) +

FRONT OPEN

(2) Soft key [FRONT]


00020 P0000
S

0.83
X
Z
C

0.000
0.000
120.000

ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

19M43S
500%

MEM **** *** ***

<

SIDE

520

FRONT OPEN

14:39:36
(DPRT) +

B62444E1/04

3. CREATING MACHINING
PROGRAMS FOR LATHES
WITH THE CAXIS

EXAMPLES OF CREATING
PROGRAMS

(3) Soft key [OPEN]


00020 P0000

X
Z
C

0.83

0.000
0.000
120.000

ACT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000
NXT G00
X
0.000
Z
0.000
C
0.000

19M43S
C
500%

MEM **** *** ***

<

3.3.8
Returning to the Main
Menu

SIDE

14:40:05

FRONT OPEN

(DPRT) +

Pressing the leftmost soft key [


] (super return) on the animated
simulation screen redisplays the directory of registered programs.
Pressing the soft key again resumes the main menu.

521

APPENDIX

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A. PARAMETERS

PARAMETERS

WARNING
Be sure to use the parameters set by the machine tool builder.
If you change the setting of a parameter, the machining
program may not work correctly.
If the machining program does not work correctly, the tool may
bump against the workpiece, and the machine may be forced
to perform unnatural machining, possibly causing damage to
the tool and/or machine, and even injuries.

525

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.1
DRILLING
PARAMETERS (1)

NOTE
In addition to the parameters listed below, parameter Nos.
9850 to 9862 are provided for drilling.

9050

STFECF

STFECF Cutting feed override at the start of cutting in turning/Caxis drilling.


Valid data range: 0 to 255
Units:
1%
9051

ENFECF

ENFECF Cutting feed override at the end of cutting in turning/Caxis throughhole


drilling
Valid data range: 0 to 255
Units: 1%
9052

EMLFR2

EMLFR2 Cutting feed amount to be set automatically upon retraction in turning


residual drilling with an end mill (cutting feed 2 on the detail data screen)
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999 Units: 0.0001mm/rev.
0.000001inch/rev.
9053

CEMFR2

CEMFR2 Cutting feed amount to be set automatically upon retraction in Caxis


residual drilling with an end mill (cutting feed 2 on the detail data screen)
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999 Units: 1mm/min.
0.01inch/min.
9054

RIMKLN

RIMKLN Cuttinglip length to be set automatically at the start of cutting in


turning/Caxis reaming (chamfer length on the program screen)
Valid data range: 0 to 99999999 Units: 0.001mm
0.0001inch
9055

SLCSCF

SLCSCF Surface speed override in turning/Caxis throwaway drilling. The


surface speed for drilling is automatically overridden by the value set for
this parameter.
Valid data range: 0 to 255
Units: 1%
9056

CBRORM

CBRORM M code for spindle orientation in Caxis boring


Valid data range: 0 to 999
526

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9057

SLFRCF

SLFRCF Cutting feed override in turning/Caxis throwaway drilling. The cutting


feed amount for drilling is automatically overridden by the value set for
this parameter.
Valid data range: 0 to 255
Units: 1%

A.2
PARAMETERS FOR
CONVERSATIONAL
PERIPHERAL
FUNCTIONS
9061

RGBN01

9075

RGBN15

RGBN01 15 Screen display color code


Storing display colors on the color scheme setting screen causes the
display colors to be automatically set in these parameters. The user,
therefore, need not set these parameters. (This parameter is valid for only
Super CAP II T.)
9090

PMCIOS

PMCIOS PMC parameter output start address in batched data input/output


Valid data range: 0 to 99999999
9091

PMCIOE

PMCIOE PMC parameter output end address in batched data input/output


Valid data range: 0 to 99999999

527

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.3
ENTERING
WORKPIECE
MATERIAL

NOTE
Parameters 9172 and subsequent parameters are used
only when the number of types of workpiece material is
expanded to 24 (when bit 0 (TOOL99) of parameter 9771 is
set to 1).

9100

WKNM11

9107

WKNM18

WKNM11 WKNM18

: Character code of workpiece material 1

9108

WKNM21

9115

WKNM28

WKNM21 WKNM28

: Character code of workpiece material 2

9116

WKNM31

9123

WKNM38

WKNM31 WKNM38

: Character code of workpiece material 3

9124

WKNM41

9131

WKNM48

WKNM41 WKNM48

: Character code of workpiece material 4

9132

WKNM51

9139

WKNM58

WKNM51 WKNM58

: Character code of workpiece material 5

9140

WKNM61

9147

WKNM68

WKNM61 WKNM68

: Character code of workpiece material 6

528

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9148

WKNM71

9155

WKNM78

WKNM71 WKNM78

: Character code of workpiece material 7

9156

WKNM81

9163

WKNM88

WKNM81 WKNM88

: Character code of workpiece material 8

9164

WKNM91

9171

WKNM98

WKNM91 WKNM98

: Character code of workpiece material 9

9172

WKN101

9179

WKN108

WKN101 WKN108

: Character code of workpiece material 10

9180

WKN111

9187

WKN118

WKN111 WKN118

: Character code of workpiece material 11

9188

WKN121

9195

WKN128

WKN121 WKN128

: Character code of workpiece material 12

9196

WKN131

9203

WKN138

WKN131 WKN138

: Character code of workpiece material 13

9204

WKN141

9211

WKN148

WKN141 WKN148

: Character code of workpiece material 14


529

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9212

WKN151

9219

WKN158

WKN151 WKN158

: Character code of workpiece material 15

9220

WKN161

9227

WKN168

WKN161 WKN168

: Character code of workpiece material 16

9228

WKN171

9235

WKN178

WKN171 WKN178

: Character code of workpiece material 17

9236

WKN181

9243

WKN188

WKN181 WKN188

: Character code of workpiece material 18

9244

WKN191

9251

WKN198

WKN191 WKN198

: Character code of workpiece material 19

9252

WKN201

9259

WKN208

WKN201 WKN208

: Character code of workpiece material 20

9260

WKN211

9267

WKN218

WKN211 WKN218

: Character code of workpiece material 21

9268

WKN221

9275

WKN228

WKN221 WKN228

: Character code of workpiece material 22


530

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9276

WKN231

9283

WKN238

WKN231 WKN238

: Character code of workpiece material 23

9284

WKN241

9291

WKN248

WKN241 WKN248

: Character code of workpiece material 24

531

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.4
PARAMETERS FOR
THE
MFUNCTIONLIST
SCREEN
9300

MCNO1

MCNO1

: M code that is displayed at the top left of the screen and


is output to the target device

9301

MCN001

9316

MCN016

MCN001 MCN016

: Character code of the above M code

9317

MCNO2

MCNO2

: M code that is displayed at the left of the second line


and is output to the target device

9318

MCN021

9333

MCN036

MCN021 MCN036

: Character code of the above M code

9334

MCNO3

MCNO3

: M code that is displayed at the left of the third line and


is output to the target device

9335

MCN041

9350

MCN056

MCN041 MCN056

: Character code of the above M code

9351

MCNO4

MCNO4

: M code that is displayed at the left of the fourth line and


is output to the target device

9352

MCN061

9367

MCN076

MCN061 MCN076

: Character code of the above M code


532

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9368

MCNO5

MCNO5

: M code that is displayed at the left of the fifth line is


output to the target device

9369

MCN081

9384

MCN096

MCN081 MCN096

: Character code of the above M code

9385

MCNO6

MCNO6

: M code that is displayed at the left of the sixth line and


is output to the target device

9386

MCN101

9401

MCN116

MCN101 MCN116

: Character code of the above M code

9402

MCNO7

MCNO7

: M code that is displayed at the left of the seventh line


and is output to the target device

9403

MCN121

9418

MCN136

MCN121 MCN136

: Character code of the above M code

9419

MCNO8

MCNO8

: M code that is displayed at the left of the eighth line and


is output to the target device

9420

MCN141

9435

MCN156

MCN141 MCN156

: Character code of the above M code

9436

MCNO9

MCNO9

: M code that is displayed at the left of the ninth line and


is output to the target device
533

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9437

MCN161

9452

MCN176

MCN161 MCN176

: Character code of the above M code

9453

MCNO10

MCNO10

: M code that is displayed at the left of the tenth line and


is output to the target device

9454

MCN181

9469

MCN196

MCN181 MCN196

: Character code of the above M code

9470

MCNO11

MCNO11

: M code that is displayed at the top right of the screen


and is output to the target device

9471

MCN201

9486

MCN216

MCN201 MCN216

: Character code of the above M code

9487

MCNO12

MCNO12

: M code that is displayed at the right of the second line


and is output to the target device

9488

MCN221

9503

MCN236

MCN221 MCN236

: Character code of the above M code

9504

MCNO13

MCNO13

: M code that is displayed at the right of the third line and


is output to the target device

534

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9505

MCN241

9520

MCN256

MCN241 MCN256

: Character code of the above M code

9521

MCNO14

MCNO14

: M code that is displayed at the right of the fourth line


and is output to the target device

9522

MCN261

9537

MCN276

MCN261 MCN276

: Character code of the above M code

9538

MCNO15

MCNO15

: M code that is displayed at the right of the fifth line and


is output to the target device

9539

MCN281

9554

MCN296

MCN281 MCN296

: Character code of the above M code

9555

MCNO16

MCNO16

: M code that is displayed at the right of the sixth line and


is output to the target device

9556

MCN301

9571

MCN316

MCN301 MCN316

: Character code of the above M code

9572

MCNO17

MCNO17

: M code that is displayed at the right of the seventh line


and is output to the target device

9573

MCN321

9588

MCN336

MCN321 MCN336

: Character code of the above M code


535

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

9589

MCNO18

B62444E1/04

MCNO18

: M code that is displayed at the right of the eighth line


and is output to the target device

9590

MCN341

9605

MCN356

MCN341 MCN356

: Character code of the above M code

9606

MCNO19

MCNO19

: M code that is displayed at the right of the ninth line


and is output to the target device

9607

MCN361

9622

MCN376

MCN361 MCN376

: Character code of the above M code

9623

MCNO20

MCNO20

: M code that is displayed at the right of the tenth line


and is output to the target device

9624

MCN381

9639

MCN396

MCN381 MCN396

: Character code of the above M code

536

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.5
REGISTERING THE
TOOL MATERIAL
9640

TLNM01

9645

TNM06

TLNM01 TNM06

: Character code of the material for the special tool


When all the parameters are set to 0, SPCIAL is
displayed.

A.6
USER PARAMETERS
9646
Bit parameters
9655

9656
Word parameters
9685

NOTE
For details of parameter Nos. 9646 to 9685, refer to the
manual supplied by the machine tool builder.

537

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

A.7
ENTERING
SUBPROGRAM
NAMES ON THE
SUBPROGRAM
CALLING SCREEN

B62444E1/04

Four subprograms which can be called on the conversational screen can


be registered using up to 12 characters for each.

9700

SBPR01

9711

SBPR12

SBPR01 SBPR12

: Character code of subprogram 1

9712

SBPR21

9723

SBPR32

SBPR21 SBPR32

: Character code of subprogram 2

9724

SBPR41

9735

SBPR52

SBPR41 SBPR52

: Character code of subprogram 3

9736

SBPR61

9747

SBPR72

SBPR61 SBPR72

: Character code of subprogram 4

538

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.8
TOOL POST NAME
PARAMETERS

For twopath lathes, each tool post can be named by using the following
parameters:

9748

HNAML1

9753

HNAML6

HNAML1 to HNAML6

: Character code of tool post 1

9754

HNAMR1

9759

HNAMR6

HNAMR1 to HNAMR6

: Character code of tool post 2

539

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.9
PARAMETERS
NECESSARY FOR
USING THE
CONVERSATIONAL
AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION
(BITTYPE)
Bit No.
9765

SLW
CBR
BSH
DRS

RND

RKB
OPR

OPB

NOTE
Parameters for the conversational programming function
for Caxis or Yaxis machining must be set to 0 if the
corresponding option is not provided.

#7
OPB

#6
OPR

#5
RKB

1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:

#4
RND

#3
DRS

#2
BSH

#1
CBR

#0
SLW

The throwaway drilling function is enabled.


The throwaway drilling function is disabled.
The Caxis boring function is enabled.
The Caxis boring function is disabled.
1: Shift is made in the negative () direction in Caxis boring.
Shift is made in the positive (+) direction in Caxis boring.
The shoulder of the drill is regarded as being the end point in
turning/Caxis drilling.
0 : The tip of the drill is regarded as being the end point in turning/Caxis
drilling.
1 : Pressing [PREEX] or [TOOLING] does not result in the following
NC data being rewritten:
(a). Workpiece shift amount
(b). Toolchange position (coordinates of the second reference
position)
(c). Chuck barrier data (second stored stroke limit data)
(d). Chuck/tailstock barrier data (when the corresponding option is
provided)
(e). Radius of the tool tip of the tool used and the virtual tool tip data
0 : Pressing [PREEX] or [TOOLING] results in the above NC data
being rewritten.
: Not used
1 : Override teaching in memory protect mode is enabled during override
playback.
0 : Override teaching in memory protect mode is disabled during
override playback.
1 : The override playback function is enabled.
0 : The override playback function is disabled.

540

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

Bit No.
9766

SC2

#7

#6

#5

#4
SAP

#3
US2

#2
OSV

#1
TYP

#0
SC2

Single action II is enabled.


Single action II is disabled.
TYP
No TYPE data item is indicated in the process data for single action II.
A type data item is indicated in the process data for single action II.
OSV
Offset data can be saved and restored during machining simulation.
Offset data is neither saved nor restored during machining simulation.
US2
If auxiliary and transfer processes are converted to an NC program,
the resulting program will be as shown below.
G#10700 A#10701 B#10703 C#10705 I#10707 J#10709 K#10711
D#10713 E#10715 F#10717 H#10719M#10721 Q#10723
R#10725 S#10727 T#10729 U#10731V#10733 W#10735
X#10737 Y#10739 Z#10741 ;
(G#10700 means that following address G, a value in #10700 is
output.)
0 : The function described above is disabled.
Note 1 The auxiliary and transfer processes are created by each machine tool
builder independently. For parameters related to these processes, refer to
the applicable manual supplied by the respective machine tool builders.
SAP
1 : In a singleoperation process, the tool does not move to a transit point.
0 : In a singleoperation process, the tool moves to a transit point before
staring the process.
Note 1 This parameter is invalid for single operation II.

9767

SFC

SGT
PAP

NCR

MTA

1:
0:
1:
0:
1:
0:
1:

#7
WDM

#6
NT0

#5
SFG

#4
MTA

#3
NCR

#2
PAP

#1
SGT

#0
SFC

1 : For arcs created in bar material machining by pattern repeating, arc


radius compensation is applied using both tooltip radius and
finishing allowance.
0 : The compensation stated above uses only the tooltip radius; the
finishing allowance is used as a shift amount for compensation.
1 : Compensation based on the cutting edge angle is enabled.
0 : Compensation based on the cutting edge angle is disabled.
1 : In machining by pattern repeating, the X and Zaxes move to the
beginning of the shape, one at a time.
0 : In machining by pattern repeating, the X and Zaxes move to the
beginning of the shape simultaneously.
1 : G41 or G42 is not used in the finishing phase of bar material
machining by pattern repeating.
0 : G41 and G42 are used in the finishing phase of bar material machining
by pattern repeating.
1 : Multiple threading is carried out by specifying an angle (address Q).
0 : Multiple threading is carried out by shifting the beginning of the start
point of each thread.

541

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

SFG

B62444E1/04

1 : Bar material machining for contours containing very small steps is


enabled.
0 : Bar material machining for contours containing very small steps is
disabled.
1 : An offset cancel command in a conversational program is issued
using T**00 (where ** is the tool selection number).
0 : An offset cancel command in a conversational program is issued
using T0.
1 : The Xcoordinate of a cutin start point in machining the inner
surface is calculated from the blank inner surface machining process
or a drilling process.
0 : The Xcoordinate of a cutin start point in machining the inner
surface is calculated from the minimum Xcoordinate of the contour
in machining the inner surface.

NT0

WDM

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

9768

#1
NBC

#0
SBC

SBC

1 : Characters in the title bar of the contour data input window are
displayed in black.
0 : Characters in the title bar of the contour data input window are
displayed in white.
Note 1 This parameter is valid on the Super CAP II T.

NBC

1 : Characters in the title bar of the guidance window are displayed in


black.
0 : Characters in the title bar of the guidance window are displayed in
white.
Note 1 This parameter is valid on the Super CAP II T.

Bit No.
9770

#7
NM7

#6

#5

#4

#3
NM3

#2
NM2

#1
NM1

#0
NM0

NM0NM7 Distribution for the NC statement program area and conversation


program area
NOTE
According to parameters 9970, the number of proccsses
that can be registered in the conversational program is
changed as follows:

542

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

D When T80/T99(V2) is 0
Length of tape used for storage

160m

320m

640m

1280m

Number of processes

115

270

575

999

Length of tape used for NC program


storage

10m

20m

40m

80m

Number of processes

105

250

535

999

Length of tape used for NC program


storage

20m

40m

80m

160m

Number of processes

95

230

495

999

Length of tape used for NC program


storage

30m

60m

120m

240m

Number of processes

85

210

450

940

Length of tape used for NC program


storage

40m

80m

160m

320m

Number of processes

67

125

285

610

Length of tape used for NC program


storage

60m

160m

320m

640m

Number of processes

130

NM0NM7=0

NM0=1
(Other bits are 0)

NM1=1
(Other bits are 0)

NM2=1
(Other bits are 0)

NM3=1
(Other bits are 0)

NM7=1 (V2)
(Other bits are 0)

Length of tape used for NC program


storage

Bit No.
9771

T99

DM2
CLD

CS2
96M

#7
1SP

#6
2SP

#5
96S

#4
96M

#3
CS2

1100m

#2
CLD

#1
DM2

#0
T99

1 : Reaming and boring are enabled, with 99 tools and 24 workpiece


materials registered.
0 : Reaming and boring, with 99 tools and 24 workpiece materials
registered, are disabled.
Not used.
1 : Automatic demonstration function II erases a stored procedure for
automatic demonstration operation. The program is erased at the next
poweron. After the program is erased, the parameter is automatically
set to 0.
0 : Automatic demonstration function IIdoes not erase the procedure for
automatic demonstration operation. <Related parameters: Bit 4
(DMO) of No. 9776, bit 2 (CLD) of No.9771>
1 : Subprogram calling process II is enabled.
0 : Subprogram calling process II is disabled.
1 : Spindle positioning control (96 angular subdivisions) of tool post 1
(main spindle) is enabled.
0 : Spindle positioning control (96 angular subdivisions) of tool post 1
(main spindle) is disabled.

543

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

96S

2SP

B62444E1/04

1 : Spindle positioning control (96 angular subdivisions) of tool post 2


(sub spindle) is enabled.
0 : Spindle positioning control (96 angular subdivisions) of tool post 2
(subspindle) is disabled.
1 : The conversational function for a lathe with a subspindle is enabled.
0 : The conversational function for a lathe with a subspindle is disabled.
NOTE
1 This parameter is valid only for the FS16/18TTA.

1SP

1 : The conversational function for a twoturret onespindle lathe is


enabled.
0 : The conversational function for a twoturret onespindle lathe is
disabled.
NOTE
2 Once bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 has been changed,
the following operations are necessary.

NOTE
3 When the setting of bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 has
been changed, one of the following may have to be
performed:
(1) When changing T99 from 0 to 1
The tool data file and cutting condition data are left as is.
So, no additional setting is required.
(2) When changing T99 from 1 to 0
(a) P/S alarm 101 is issued. Set PWE to 1, then turn off the
NC. Then, hold down the DELETE key and turn on the
NC again (for twopath lathes, hold down DELETE and
1, or DELETE and 2). All machining programs will be
cleared.
(b) The tool data and cutting condition files will all be erased.
So, before setting T99, save the contents of these files
via the reader/punch interface.
Note that up to 40 tools can be registered. Before saving
the files, modify the file contents; delete any
unnecessary tools so that the number of registered tools
does not exceed 40.

NOTE
4 When data has been set in parameter No. 9766, 9770, or
9771, the power must be turned off then on again before
continuing operation.

544

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

Bit No.
9772

#7
INO

#6
DIO

#5
RFN

#4
YMD

#3
RLF

#2
EDM

#1
M50

#0
CM5

CM5

1: If Caxis or Yaxis machining is specified for both the previous and


current processes, M05 is output at the beginning of the current
process.
0: If Caxis or Yaxis machining is specified for both the previous and
current processes, M05 is not output.
M50
1: M05 is output when the spindle rotation is changed and when the
spindle gear speed is changed.
0: M05 is not output when the spindle rotation changed and when the
spindle gear speed is changed.
EDM
1: When an end process is created, M30 is automatically specified.
0: When an end process is created, M02 is automatically specified.
RLF
1: Between the toolchange position and the common safety point, the
tool simultaneously moves along two axes (interpolation is not
executed).
0: Between the toolchange position and the common safety point, the
tool moves along one axis at a time.
YMD
1: The M code to enable or disable the Yaxis machining mode (M code
for calling a subprogram) is automatically output.
0: The M code to enable or disable the Yaxis machining mode is not
output.
<Related parameter: YCANPN bit of parameter 9840>
RFN
1: Semifinish machining is not performed.
0: Semifinish machining is performed
NOTE
According to the positions of the start point of a cut and the
end point of an entered figure, semifinish machining may be
carried out, regardless of the value specified in the
parameter.

Example)

End point of a figure

D Start point of a cut: Machin


ing is performed according to
the parameter.
D Start point of a cut: Semifin
ish machining is performed
unconditionally.
D Start point of a figure

DIO

1 : The batch data input/output function is enabled.


0 : The batch data input/output function is disabled.

545

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

INO

9773

SG3

GRO

OPO

RPT

B62444E1/04

1 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the data of


workpiece shift amount, toolchange position, chuck barrier,
tailstock barrier is output in the G10 block.
0 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the data of
workpiece shift amount, toolchange position, chuck barrier,
tailstock barrier is not output in the G10 block.
#7
TRT

#6
MDL

#5
GTL

#4
TCD

#3
RPT

#2
OPO

#1
GRO

the
and
the
and

#0
SG3

1 : In subprogram calling process II, a return to the tool change point


(G30) is not executed.
0 : In subprogram calling process II, a return to the tool change point
(G30) is executed.
1 : Data required for graphic drawing is not output when an NC statement
is output.
0 : Data required for graphic drawing is output when an NC statement is
output.
1 : When an NC statement is output, a slash (/) is output at the beginning
of the G10 block for graphics.
0 : When an NC statement is output, a slash (/) is not output at the
beginning of the G10 block for graphics.
1 : In pattern repeating, cutting feed is carried out when the direction is
changed from normal to reverse.
0 : In pattern repeating, cutting feed is not carried out when the direction
is changed from normal to reverse.

: Approach

Cutting direction
Cutting direction

TCD

1 : Tcode call is executed instead if Tcode output.


0 : Tcode call is not executed.
NOTE
When a conversational machining program is executed, a
subprogram is called from a storage area on the tape or
system ROM. The T code is not output.
<Related parameter: Bit 7 (CLT) of No. 9778>

GTL

1 : The tailstock is not displayed in the initial stage for graphic drawing.
0 : The tailstock is displayed in the initial stage for graphic drawing.

546

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

MDL

1 : In the NC statement output, a continuousstate G code (G code of the


01 group) and F code are not output if they are the same as those in the
previous block.
0 : In the NC statement output, a continuousstate G code (G code of the
01 group) and F code are output even if they are the same as those in
the previous block.
NOTE
When the NC statement output function is not provided, set
the corresponding parameters to 0.

TRT

1 : When the tool is first moved to the toolchange position after


machining is started, it travels first along the Zaxis then along the
Xaxis.
0 : When the tool is first moved to the toolchange position after
machining is started, it travels first along the Xaxis then along the
Zaxis.
NOTE
After a machining process is completed, the tool always
moves to the toolchange position by traveling first along
the Xaxis then along the Zaxis.

9774

TLC

MLS

#7
AUT

#6
GPW

#5
T0O

#4
M1O

#3
28O

#2
MLT

#1
MLS

#0
TLC

1 : The tool tip radius and virtual tool tip direction held in the
conversational program are different from those in the NC program.
The tool data in the conversational program is copied into the NC
when the program is selected for execution.
0 : The conversational program has the same tool tip radius and virtual
tool tip direction as the NC program.
1 : When the cutter revolving around the milling axis is stopped, a
specified M code is output.
0 : When the direction in which the cutter revolves around the milling
axis is changed, the M code to stop the cutter is not output.
NOTE
When the milling mode is changed to the turning mode, the
M code to stop the cutter from revolving around the milling
axis is output.

MLT

1 : When the cutter revolves in the normal or reverse direction around the
milling axis, specified M codes (parameters Nos. 9877 and 9878) are
output.
0 : When the cutter revolves in the normal or reverse direction around the
milling axis, M03 or M04 is output.

547

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

28O

1 : The program is terminated without executing T0 and G28 at the end of


the program.
0 : The program is terminated after executing T0 and G28 at the end of
the program.
1 : M01 is output after positioning at the tool changing position at the end
of each process.
0 : M01 is not output after positioning at the tool changing position at the
end of each process.
1 : T0; is output immediately before a return to the toolchange position
(G30).
0 : T0; is not output immediately before a return to the toolchange
position (G30).
1 : The drawing screen is displayed when the first graphic screen is
selected after turning on the power.
0 : The graphic parameter screen is displayed when the first graphic
screen is selected after turning on the power.
1 : Of tools satisfying the desired conditions, the tool having the smallest
tool management number is automatically selected.
0 : Of tools satisfying the desired conditions, the tool that minimizes the
cutting time is automatically selected.

M1O

T0O

GPW

AUT

9775

IGM

PRD

IGT
THT

B62444E1/04

#7
LOD

#6
RVX

#5

#4
CRS

#3
THT

#2
IGT

#1
PRD

#0
IGM

1 : In tooling, the tooling data is unconditionally created with T codes


specified in the program. The T codes specified in the tool file are
automatically rewritten.
0 : In tooling, the tooling data is not created if the T codes specified in the
tool file do not agree with those in the program. In this case, the
machining program cannot be executed.
1 : On the presetting screen, a workpiece shift along the Zaxis is
specified by bringing the tool in touch with the end face of the
workpiece.
0 : On the presetting screen, a workpiece shift along the Zaxis is
specified by entering the difference between the desired value and the
current value.
1 : A tool is not automatically determined.
0 : A tool is automatically determined.
1 : The cut count is displayed at the top of the process data for threading.
0 : The depth of the first cut is displayed at the top of the process data for
threading.
NOTE
The cut count and depth of cut can be switched by pressing
the corresponding soft key.

CRS

1 : Cross editing is valid.


0 : Cross editing is invalid.

548

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

RVX

1 : When an NC statement is output, the righthand coordinate system


(+X for the upper) is changed to the left hand coordinate system (X
for the upper).
0 : When an NC statement is output , the righthand coordinate system
(+X for the upper) is not changed to the left hand coordinate system
(X for the upper).
1 : The cutting power is checked.

LOD

NOTE
If bit 0 (T88/T99) of parameter No. 9771 is set to 0, the
system checks only whether the cutting condition data is 0.
If the parameter is set to 1, the system checks the cutting
power with parameters Nos. 9885 to 9887.
0 : The cutting power is not checked.
#7
9776

TRD

STM

#6
BIS

#5
SP6

#4
DMO

#3
CGR

#2
MTS

#1
STM

#0
TRD

1 : In automatic scheduling, threading is incorporated into the finishing


cycle.
0 : In automatic scheduling, threading is always scheduled as the last
process.
1 : When the spindle is switched to the Cf axis, the NC program O9994 is
called and no M codes are output.
0 : When the spindle is switched to the Cf axis, the M code (STMMCD)
is output.
Example)

When STMCAL is 0
M1 ;
G00 ;
M5 ;
M45 ;
G28 H0 ;

When STMCAL is 1
M1 ;
G00 ;
M5 ;
M98 P9994 ;
G28 H0 ;

MTS

1 : When the Cf axis is switched to the spindle, the NC program O9995 is


called and no M codes are output.
0 : When the Cf axis is switched to the spindle, the M code (MTSMCD)
is output.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 0 if the conversational Caxis
programming function is not provided.

549

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

CGR

B62444E1/04

1 : The upper side of the screen corresponds to the +Z direction in


animated simulation in cylindrical machining.
0 : The upper side of the screen corresponds to the Z direction in
animated simulation in cylindrical machining.
CGRPDR=0
Program reference position =
workpiece end

CGRPDR=0
Program reference position =
chuck end

+C
Material surface

+C

+Z

+Z

CGRPDR=1
Program reference position =
workpiece end
+Z

CGRPDR=0
Program reference position =
chuck end
+Z
+C

+C

NOTE
The above diagram shows the workpiece coordinate
system
DMO

1 : The automatic demonstration function is enabled.


0 : The automatic demonstration function is disabled.
NOTE
For the automatic demonstration function, see the
corresponding manual.

SP6

1 : A subprogram calling process can call six subprograms.


0 : A subprogram calling process can call four subprograms.
1 : When a machining program is created, the initial data is not
automatically determined.
0 : When a machining program is created, the initial data is automatically
determined.

BIS

9777

SB1

#7
ACC

#6
NCF

#5
SB6

#4
SB5

#3
SB4

#2
SB3

#1
SB2

#0
SB1

1 : Subprogram 1 called by the subprogram calling process is held in the


ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : Subprogram 1 called by the subprogram calling process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
550

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

SB2

1 : Subprogram 2 called by the subprogram calling process is held in the


ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : Subprogram 2 called by the subprogram calling process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
1 : Subprogram 3 called by the subprogram calling process is held in the
ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : Subprogram 3 called by the subprogram calling process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
1 : Subprogram 4 called by the subprogram calling process is held in the
ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : Subprogram 4 called by the subprogram calling process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
1 : Subprogram 5 called by the subprogram calling process is held in the
ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : Subprogram 5 called by the subprogram calling process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
1 : Subprogram 6 called by the subprogram calling process is held in the
ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : Subprogram 6 called by the subprogram calling process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
1 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the delivery and
auxiliary processes are converted to a subprogram calling sequence to
be called.
0 : When NC program conversion is carried out, the delivery and
auxiliary processes are converted to the NC commands to be
executed.
1 : The function to cancel idle cutting for a molding material is enabled.
0 : The function to cancel idle cutting for a molding material is disabled.

SB3

SB4

SB5

SB6

NCF

ACC

9778

TRS

#7
CLT

#6
NAX

#5
NPS

#4
SMS

#3
SSM

#2
DIE

#1
AUX

#0
TRS

1 : The macro program for executing the delivery process is held in a


storage area on the tape.
NOTE
The number of the macro program is O9018.

AUX

0 : The macro program for executing the delivery process is held in the
ROM module by the macro compiler.
1 : The macro program for executing the auxiliary process is held in a
storage area on the tape.
NOTE
The number of the macro program is O9019.
0 : The macro program for executing the auxiliary process is held in the
ROM module by the macro compiler.

551

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

DIE

B62444E1/04

1 : The conversational mode is selected by pressing the soft key.


0 : The conversational mode is selected by an input signal (G062.4).
1 : The subprogram for switching the mode from turning to milling is
held in the ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : The subprogram for switching the mode from turning to milling is
held in a storage area on the tape.

SSM

NOTE
The number of the macro program is O9994.
SMS

1 : The subprogram for switching the mode from milling to turning is


held in the ROM module by the macro compiler.
0 : The subprogram for switching the mode from milling to turning is
held in a storage area on the tape.
NOTE
The number of the macro program is O9995.

NPS

1:
0:
1:
0:
1:

The delivery process menu is not displayed.


The delivery process menu is displayed.
The auxiliary process menu is not displayed.
The auxiliary process menu is displayed.
The program to be called by a T code is held in the ROM module by
the macro compiler.
0 : The program to be called by a T code is held in a storage area on the
tape.
<Related parameter: Bit 4 (TCD) of parameter No. 9773>

NAX
CLT

NOTE
When CLT is set to 1, the numbers of the above subprogram
and macro variable are O9000 and #149, respectively.
When CLT is set to 0, the numbers of the above subprogram
and macro variable are O9003 and #20300, respectively.
When NC program conversion is carried out, the T code is
directly output.

9779

CRF

#7
MRO

#6
G32

#5
MNU

#4
TLF

#3
TLP

#2
CEM

#1
CRC

#0
CRF

1 : When the command for rotating the Caxis end facing tool specifies
normal rotation, the M code for reverse rotation is output. When the
command specifies reverse rotation, the M code for normal rotation is
output.
In Caxis tapping, the M code specified in parameter No. 9861
(CRVMCD) is output immediately before the tapping command.
0 : The above function is disabled.

552

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

CRC

CEM

1 : When the command for rotating the Caxis side facing tool specifies
normal rotation, the M code for reverse rotation is output. When the
command specifies reverse rotation, the M code for normal rotation is
output.
In Caxis tapping, the M code specified in parameter No. 9861
(CRVMCD) is output immediately before the tapping command.
0 : The above function is disabled.
1 : A subprogram stored by the macro compiler is called from the ROM
module according to the M code output at the end of the end process.
NOTE
When M02 is output, O9020 is called; when M30 is output,
O9021 is called. In the NC program conversion, the M code
is directly output.

TLP

0 : The above M code is directly output.


1 : The setup guidance screen created by the machine tool builder is
displayed.
0 : The FANUC standard setup guidance screen is displayed.
NOTE
For a lathe with a subspindle or a onespindle twoturret
lathe, the FANUC standard setup guidance screen is not
displayed.

TLF

MNU

G32

1 : The tool life management data screen created by the machine tool
builder is displayed.
0 : The tool life management data screen created by the machine tool
builder is not displayed.
1 : The main menu screen created by the machine tool builder is
displayed.
0 : The main menu screen created by the machine tool builder is not
displayed.
1 : When G32 is output, tapping is performed on the lathe.
0 : When G84 is output, tapping is performed on the lathe.

Example)

MRO

G32=0

G32=1

X0. M8 ;
Z6. ;
G99 G84 Z30. R0. F0.5 P225 ;
G80 ;

X0. M8 ;
Z6. ;
G32 Z30. F0.5 M5 ;
Z6. M4 ;
G99 ;

1 : The command to rewrite the offset of cutting in Caxis notching is


output by a subprogram when NC program conversion is carried out.
0 : The command to rewrite the offset of cutting in Caxis notching is
output by the offset rewrite command of the G10 block.
553

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.10
PARAMETERS
NECESSARY FOR
USING THE
CONVERSATIONAL
AUTOMATIC
PROGRAMMING
FUNCTION
(COMMON DATA)
9780

OTSFPX

OTSFPX: Distance along the Xaxis from the maximum outer surface to the
common safety point (passing point 2, V2) in outer surface machining
(diameter)
Pass point 2 is automatically set based on this data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9781

OTSFPZ

OTSFPZ: Distance along the Zaxis from an end face to the common safety point
(passing point 2) in outer surface machining
Pass point 2 is automatically set based on this data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

Common safety point (passing


point 2)

SFPNTX
Cutting start point

SFPNTZ

9782

Not used

9783

INCLRZ

INCLRZ: Distance along the Zaxis from an end face to the common safety point
(passing point 2) in inner surface machining
Pass point 2 is automatically set based on this data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
554

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

INCLRZ

Cutting start point

9784

Common safety point (passing


point 2, V2)

SFCLRX

SFCLRX: Clearance to the cutting or machining start point along the Xaxis
(diameter). The cutting or machining start point is automatically
determined based on this data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9785

SFCLRZ

SFCLRZ: Clearance to the cutting or machining start point along the Zaxis. The
cutting or machining start point is automatically determined based on this
data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
NOTE
The cutting or machining start point is calculated as follows:

1. Bar machining
(1) [Outer surface]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
(2) [Outer surface + automatic residual machining]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece (or +
[Parameter No. 9784])]
Z = [End face of the workpiece (or + [Parameter No. 9785])]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour]
(3) [Inner surface]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter NO. 9785]
555

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

(4) [Inner surface + automatic residual machining]:


X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour (or
[Parameter No. 9784])]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour (or + [Parameter
No. 9785])]
(5) [End face]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of start point on the contour] + [Parameter
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] (Subspindle)
(6) [End face + automatic residual machining]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of start point on the contour (or + [Parameter
No. 9784])]
Z = [End face of the workpiece (or + [Parameter No. 9785])]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face (or [Parameter No. 9785])] (Subspindle)
(7) [Outer surface (reverse direction)]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece]
Z = [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] [Parameter
No. 9785]
(8) [Outer surface + automatic residual machining (reverse direction)]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece (or +
[Parameter No. 9784])]
Z = [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour (or [Parameter
No. 9785])]
(9) [Inner surface (reverse direction)]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour]
Z = [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] [Parameter
No. 9785]
556

B62444E1/04

APPENDIX

A. PARAMETERS

(10) [Inner surface + automatic residual machining (reverse direction)]:


X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour (or
[Parameter No. 9784])]
Z = [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour (or [Parameter
No. 9785])]
(11) [End face (reverse direction)]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour]
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] = [Length of the workpiece]
+ [Cutting allowance on the end face] (Subspindle)
(12) [End face + automatic residual machining (reverse direction)]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of minimum point on the contour (or
[Parameter No. 9784])]
Z = [End face of the workpiece (or + [Parameter No. 9785])]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face (or [Parameter No. 9785])] (Subspindle)
2. Pattern repeating
(1) [Outer surface near the edges]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
(2) [Outer surface away from the edges]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] (Subspindle)
(3) [Inner surface near the edges]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
557

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

(4) [Inner surface away from the edges]:


X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
= [Z coordinate of start point on the contour] (Subspindle)
(5) [End face near the edges]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
= [Start point X on the contour] + [Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
(6) [End face away from the edges]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
= [X coordinate of start point on the contour]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785] =
[Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
3. Residual machining
(1) [Outer surface, end face, and inner bottom surface]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
(2) [Inner surface]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
4. End facing:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] = [Length of the workpiece]
+ [Cutting allowance on the end face] (Subspindle)

558

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

5. Threading
(1) [Outer surface]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
(2) [Inner surface]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
6. Grooving and necking
(1) [Outer surface and end face]:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
(2) [Inner surface]:
X = [Minimum inside diameter of the workpiece (or [Maximum
diameter of a hole drilled in the workpiece])] [Parameter
No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
7. Drilling:
X = 0
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece] + [Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
8. Caxis drilling:
X = [Maximum outside diameter of the workpiece] +
[Parameter No. 9784]
Z = [End face of the workpiece] + [Parameter No. 9785]
= [Length of the workpiece]+[Cutting allowance on the end
face] [Parameter No. 9785] (Subspindle)
9786

ZEROPT

ZEROPT 0 : The program reference position is on the end surface of the workpiece.
1 : The program reference position is on the end surface of the chuck.
559

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

9787

B62444E1/04

HLSFPX

HLSFPX X coordinate (diameter) of the common safety point (passing point 2, V2)
in drilling (turning)
Pass point 2 is automatically set based on this data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9788

HLSFPZ

HLSFPZ Z coordinate of the common safety point (passing point 2, V2) in drilling
(turning)
Pass point 2 is automatically set based on this data.
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9789

CUTOV1

CUTOV1 Ratio of the depth of an actual cut to the depth of cut programmed for each
process (For the FS16/18TTA, data of tool post 1).
If the parameter is set to 0, the system assumes that the ratio is 100%.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: %
9790

CUTOV2

CUTOV2 Ratio of the depth of an actual cut to the depth of cut programmed for each
process on tool post 2 (for the FS16/18TTA only).
If the parameter is set to 0, the system assumes that the ratio is 100%.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: %
9791

CAXLS1

CAXLS1 Caxis machining menu selected for tool post 1


0 : The Caxis machining menu and Yaxis machining menu are not
displayed.
1: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces) are enabled.
2: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving are enabled.
3: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis notching are enabled.
4: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis cylindrical machining
are enabled.
5: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Caxis
cylindrical machining are enabled.
6: Yaxis machining is enabled.
7: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces), and Yaxis machining are enabled.
8: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
9: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Yaxis
machining are enabled.
10: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis cylindrical machining, and
Yaxis machining are enabled.
11: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, Caxis
cylindrical machining, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
560

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

NOTE
The machining that can be executed depends on the
specifications of the machine.

9792

CAXIS2

CAXIS2 Caxis machining menu selected for tool post 2


0: The Caxis machining menu and Yaxis machining menu are not
displayed.
1: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces) are enabled.
2: Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving are enabled.
3: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis notching are enabled.
4: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Caxis cylindrical machining
are enabled.
5: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Caxis
cylindrical machining are enabled.
6: Yaxis machining is enabled.
7: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving (only regular grooves on side
surfaces), and Yaxis machining are enabled.
8: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
9: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, and Yaxis
machining are enabled.
10: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis cylindrical machining, and
Yaxis machining are enabled.
11: Caxis drilling, Caxis grooving, Caxis notching, Caxis
cylindrical machining, and Yaxis machining are enabled.
NOTE
The machining that can be executed depends on the
specifications of the machine.

9793

TLPOSX

TLPOSX X coordinate of the toolchange position to be automatically specified on


the presetting screen.
If the parameter is set to 0, the data is not automatically specified.
9794

TLPOSZ

TLPOSZ Z coordinate of the toolchange position to be automatically specified on


the presetting screen.
If the parameter is set to 0, the data is not automatically specified.
NOTE
For the 2 PathLathe, specify parameters Nos. 9793 and
9794 for each tool post.

561

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.11
PARAMETERS FOR
BAR MACHINING,
PATTERN
REPEATING, END
FACING, AND
RESIDUAL
MACHINING
9795

CUTCHG

CUTCHG Rate of change in the depth of cut in bar machining, pattern repeating, and
residual machining. If the parameter is set to 0, the depth of cut remains
unchanged.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: %

Example)
When the depth of cut is 5 mm, CUTCHG is 70%, and CUTMIN is 1.5
mm, the depths of cuts are as follows:
First cut:
5 mm
Second cut:
3.5 mm
Third cut:
2.45 mm
Fourth cut:
1.715 mm
Fifth cut:
1.5 mm
Sixth cut:
1.5 mm
Seventh cut:
.
Eighth cut:
.

9796

CUTMIN

CUTMIN Limit of depth of cut (radius) in bar machining, pattern repeating, and
residual machining
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

9797

RELFX

RELFX X component (diameter) of a clearance from the cutting surface in infeed


machining
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

9798

RELFZ

RELFZ Z component of a clearance from the cutting surface in infeed machining


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
562

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

RELFZ

RELFX

9799

CLRSDX

CLRSDX Clearance along the Xaxis from the line connecting the start point and
the end point of residual machining (end face)
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9800

CLRSDZ

CLRSDZ Clearance along the Zaxis from the line connecting the start point and the
end point of residual machining (outer surface, inner surface)
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

CLRSDZ
X

CLRSDX

9801

TLBACK

TLBACK Angle at which the back of the tool is raised above the workpiece in
intermediate cutting of a bar
Setting range: 0 to 180
Increment:

563

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

""""""""
""""""""
""""""""
""""""""
""""""""
9802

TLBACK

PCOVR1

PCOVR1 Override of the feed amount when the cutting angle of a tool is greater than
90 degrees but less than or equal to 135 degrees.
In case of setting 0, it is regarded as 100%.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: 10%
9803

PCOVR2

PCOVR2 Override of the feed amount when the cutting angle of a tool is greater than
135 degrees but less than 180 degrees.
In case of setting 0, it is regarded as 100%.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: 10%
9804

PCOVR3

PCOVR3 Override of the feed amount when the cutting angle of a tool is greater than
180 degrees but less than or equal to 225 degrees.
In case of setting 0, it is regarded as 100%.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: 10%
9805

PCOVR4

PCOVR4 Override of the feed amount when the cutting angle of a tool is greater than
225 degrees but less than 270 degrees.
In case of setting 0, it is regarded as 100%.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: 10 %
NOTE
The override is invalid when the cutting angle of a tool is 90
degrees, 180 degrees, or 270 degrees.

564

B62444E1/04

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

(1) Generalpurpose tool for


outer surface machining (right hand)

(2) Generalpurpose tool for


inner surface machining (left hand)

90


135

90


135

180

180


225

270

(3) Generalpurpose tool for


inner surface machining (right hand)

(4) Generalpurpose tool for


inner surface machining (left hand)

270

225

225

270

270

225

180

180

135


90

90

(5) Generalpurpose tool for


end facing (negative direction)

(6) Generalpurpose tool for


end facing (positive direction)

225 

270

270




225

90


135

180

565

135

180

135

90

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

9806

B62444E1/04

FSTOVR

FSTOVR Surface speed override for the first cut in roughing for bar machining,
pattern repeating, or end facing (mill scale machining)
Setting range: 0 to 20
Increment: 10%

The override is applied


only to the speed of the
first cut.

9807

ENDECX

ENDECX Xcoordinate for reducing the amount of feed during end facing
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9808

ENDCRT

ENDCRT Override of the feed amount around the center during end facing
Setting range: 1 to 100
Increment: %

F1 = (Feed amount on
the process screen)

F1

F2 = F1 ENDCRT/100

ENDECX
F2
X

566

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.12
PARAMETERS FOR
NECKING
9815

NEANG

NEANG Angle from each coordinate axis in necking


Setting range: 0 to 90
Increment: Degrees

NEANG

567

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.13
PARAMETERS FOR
GROOVING
9820

CLGRVX

CLGRVX Clearance (diameter) along the X axis in outer or inner surface grooving
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9821

CLGRVZ

CLGRVZ Clearance along the Z axis in end surface grooving


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

CLGRVZ
OVLGRV

OVLGRV
CLGRVX

X
Z
GRVBCK

9822

GRVCHG

GRVCHG Rate of reduction in the depth of cut in grooving


When this parameter is set to 0, the depth of the cut remains unchanged.
Setting range: 0 to 200
Increment: Percent

Example)
When the depth of cut is 5 mm, CUTCHG is 70%, and CUTMIN is 1.5
mm, the depths of cuts are as follows:
First cut:
5 mm
Second cut:
3.5 mm
Third cut:
2.45 mm
Fourth cut:
1.715 mm
Fifth cut:
1.5 mm
Sixth cut:
1.5 mm
Seventh cut:
.
Eighth cut:
.

568

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9823

GRVMIN

GRVMIN Clamp value (radius) for the depth of cut in grooving


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9824

GRVBCK

GRVBCK Pecking clearance for grooving (radius)


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9825

OVLGRV

OVLGRV Overlaps between each cutting in grooving (proportion to the tool width)
Setting range: 0 to 100
Increment: Percent
9826

DWLGRV

DWLGRV Dwell time at the bottom of the groove in grooving (spindle speed)
Setting range: 0 to 50000
Increment: Revolutions per 10

569

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.14
PARAMETERS FOR
THREADING
9830

CLSCRX

CLSCRX Clearance (diameter) along the X axis for threading


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9831

CLSCRZ

CLSCRZ Acceleration distance along the Z axis for threading


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

D First threading

CLSCRZ

Height of the
thread plus CLSCRX

D Last threading

CLSCRX

Height of the
thread

NOTE
The length of a part where a threading cycle is performed
along the X axis remains unchanged.

9832

SCWCF

SCWCF Coefficient for the height of a thread


Setting range: 0 to 32767
Increment: 1/10000
The system automatically sets the height of the thread for process data
from the following formula:
Height of a thread = thread pitch SCWCF/10000
Standard set values:
6495 for thread angle 60
6403 for thread angle 55
570

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9833

TRDMIN

TRDMIN Minimum depth (radius) of cut for threading


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9834

TRDFNX

TRDFNX Finish allowance along the X axis for threading (diameter)


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9835

TRDAGL

TRDAGL Threading tool angle to be set automatically


0: The thread angle of 60 is automatically set when a new threading
process is created
Value other than 0: The value is automatically specified as a thread
angle.
Setting range: 0 to 255
Increment: Degrees (angle)
9836

CMFONM

CMFONM M code for enabling chamfering in threading


Setting range: 0 to 999
9837

CMFOFM

CMFOFM M code for disabling chamfering in threading


Setting range : 0 to 999
9838

MTUNCF

MTUNCF Coefficient of thread height (metric thread, unified thread)


Setting range: 0 to 32767
Increment: 1/10000
9839

PTPFCF

PTPFCF Coefficient of thread height (PT thread, PF thread)


Setting range: 0 to 32767
Increment: 1/10000

571

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.15
PARAMETERS FOR
YAXIS MACHINING
9840

YCANPN

YCANPN Number of the compile parameter in which the M code to disable the
Yaxis machining mode is cataloged
NOTE
Catalog the M code to enable the Yaxis machining mode
in the compile parameter subsequent to this one.
Setting range:

9023 to 9031

572

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.16
PARAMETERS FOR
DRILLING
9850

DRLDEC

DRLDEC: Reduced depth of cut in peck or highspeed peck drilling (radius) to be set
automatically
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9851

DRLRET

DRLRET: Return clearance for peck or highspeed peck drilling (radius) to be set
automatically
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9852

DRLMIN

DRLMIN: Minimum depth of cut for peck or highspeed peck drilling (radius) to be
set automatically
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
9853

DRILCF

DRILCF: Coefficient for the depth of cut in peck or highspeed peck drilling
Setting range: 0 to 3000
Increment: Percent
Drilling depth of cut = nominal diameter for the drill DRILCF

Example)

NOTE
The drilling depth of cut must not exceed 99999999.

9854

DRLDWL

DRLDWL: Dwell time at the bottom of the hole in drilling (speed)


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: Revolutions per 10
9855

GRDLCL

GRDLCL: Clearance from each starting point in Caxis drilling and Caxis grooving
(radius)
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
573

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

NOTE
Set this parameter to 0 when there is no optional Caxis
graphic conversation function.

Machining start point


Drilling or grooving start point

Drilling or grooving start point

GRDLCL

9856

TAPCCL

TAPCCL: Clearance at each starting point in Caxis tapping (radius)


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches
NOTE
This parameter must be set to 0 when there is no optional
Caxis graphic conversation function.

9857

TAPCLR

TAPCLR: Clearance at the bottom of the hole when the system automatically
determines a preprocess in tapping
Setting range: 0 to 1000
Increment: Percent

Nominal diameter of the tap TAPCLR

574

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9858

BRSHFT

BRSHFT Amount of shift for returning in boring (radius)


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

BRSHIFT
F

F= F 0.1 REMROV

9859

BRCLER

BRCLER: Clearance for returning in boring (radius)


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inches

BRSHFT

F = F 0.1 RMBROV

Tool width (TW)

Hole diameter (DD)

9860

RMBROV

RMBROV: Amount of feed for returning in reaming or boring (speed)


F = F 0.1 RMBROV
Setting range: 0 to 20
Increment: 10 percent
575

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

NOTE
In boring, the tool normally returns in rapid traverse. When
the hole has a small diameter (TW + BRSHFT < DD), the tool
returns with the speed indicated by this parameter.
In reaming, the tool always returns with the speed indicated
by this parameter.

9861

CRVMCD

CRVMCD: M code for reversing the rotation of the tool around the milling axis in
Caxis tapping
<Related parameters: Bit 0 (CRF) and bit 1 (CRC) of No. 9779>
Setting range: 0 to 999
9862

96OFFM

96OFFM: M code for canceling spindle positioning control (96 angular


subdivisions) by the machine
Setting range: 0 to 999

576

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.17
PARAMETERS FOR
NOTCHING
9865

OVLNTC

OVLNTC: Overlaps between each cutting in side face notching


Setting range: 0 to 100
Increment: Percent

TW

OL
OL = TW OVLNTC/100

9866

APRCFD

APRCFD: Feedrate for approaching and retraching during notching


NOTE
When 0 is specified, the tool moves at the maximum cutting
speed (parameter 1422 or 5462).

577

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

A.18
PARAMETERS FOR
OTHER
CONVERSATIONAL
FUNCTIONS
9870

GERMC1

GERMC1: Mcode output when a lowspeed gear is selected (Main spindle)


Setting range: 0 to 255
9871

GERMC2

GERMC2: Mcode output when intermediatespeed gear 1 is selected (Main


spindle)
Setting range: 0 to 255
9872

GERMC3

GERMC3: Mcode output when intermediatespeed gear 2 is selected (Main


spindle)
Setting range: 0 to 255
9873

GERMC4

GERMC4: Mcode output when a highspeed gear is selected (Main spindle)


Setting range: 0 to 255
9874

TLSKON

TLSKON: Mcode to prepare a tail stock


Setting range: 0 to 255
9875

TLSKOF

TLSKOF: Mcode to store a tail stock


Setting range: 0 to 255
9876

MLSTPM

MLSTPM: M code for stopping the tool rotating around the milling axis
<Related parameter: Bit 1 (MLS) of No. 9774>
Setting range: 0 to 255
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, M5 is output.

MLNMLM: Mcode to rotate the milling axis normally


Setting range: 0 to 99
<Related parameter: Bit 2 (MLS) of No. 9774>
578

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9877

MLNMLM

NOTE
When a value out of the setting range is set, the Mcode is
not output. This parameter must be set to 0 when there is
no optional Caxis graphic conversation function.

9878

MLRVSM

MLRVSM: Mcode to rotate the milling axis in reverse


Setting range: 0 to 99
<Related parameter: Bit 2 (MLS) of No. 9774>
NOTE
When a value outside the setting range is set, the Mcode
is not output.

9879

MILMAX

MILMAX: Maximum rotating speed of the milling axis


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: Perminute
NOTE
If the speed automatically determined as a milling condition
exceeds the parameterset value, the speed is clamped to
the parameterset value.

9880

STMMCD

STMMCD: Mcode to change the turning mode to the milling mode


Setting range: 0 to 99
<Related parameter: Bit 1 (STM) of No. 9776>
9881

MTSMCD

MTSMCD: Mcode to change the milling mode to the turning mode


Setting range: 0 to 99
<Related parameter: Bit 2 (MTS) of No. 9776>
9882

DECEMF

DECEMF: Number of digits in the fraction part of the feed amount (F)
Setting range: 1 to 4 for mm input
1 to 6 for inch input

579

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

9883

B62444E1/04

SQNOIC

SQNOIC: Specification for the sequence number to be output for each block during
NC statement translation
0 : No sequence number is output.
1 to 8999:
A specified value is added to the sequence number
for the first block of each process.
8999 to 1:
The absolute value of a specified value is added to
thesequence number for all blocks.
9000 to 9999:
A specified value minus 9000 is added to the
sequence number, and the calculated number is
output to the first block of each process except the
end process. N9000 is output to the first block of
the end process.
9000 to 9999:
The absolute value of a specified value plus 9000 is
added to the sequence number, and the calculated
number is output to all blocks. N9000 is output to
the first block of the end process.
NOTE
If nonzero data is specified, process names (comment
statement) are output at the beginning of individual
processes of the translated NC program.

9884

GRPMGN

GRPMGN: Scale factor of the blank length and blank diameter in the graphic
parameters for the length and the maximum outside diameter specified on
the initial setting screen
Setting range: 0 to 20
Increment: 10 percent
Blank length and blank diameter in the graphic parameters = maximum
outside diameter and length specified on the initial setting screen *
(GRPMGN)/10
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, automatic setting is not
performed.

9885

MEFICY

MEFICY: Machine efficiency used when calculating the cutting power for cutting
condition check.
Setting range: 0 to 99
Increment: One percent

580

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the cutting power is not
calculated. If bit 0 (T99) of parameter No. 9771 is set to 0,
the system does not check the cutting power using
parameters Nos. 9885 to 9887.

9886

SMTPWR

SMTPWR: Output of the spindle motor used when calculating the cutting power for
cutting condition check
Setting range: 0 to 9999
Increment: 0.1 kW
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the cutting power is not
calculated.

9887

MMTPWR

MMTPWR: Output of the milling axis motor used when calculating the cutting power
for cutting condition check
Setting range: 0 to 9999
Increment: 0.1 kW
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, the cutting power is not
calculated.

9888

TLFLNO

TLFLNO: Number of the file containing tool data in the FANUC Cassette
Setting range: 0 to 9999
9889

MFNCTM

MFNCTM: Average time required to execute the miscellaneous function


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 10 ms
NOTE
This parameter is used to calculate the machining time in
machining simulation.

9890

SFNCTM

SFNCTM: Average time required to execute the spindlespeed function


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 10 ms
581

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

NOTE
This parameter is used to calculate the machining time in
machining simulation.

9891

TFNCTM

TFNCTM: Average time required to execute the tool function


Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 10 ms
NOTE
This parameter is used to calculate the machining time in
machining simulation.

9892

NCPRGN

NCPRGN: Program number to be searched for automatically when the


conversational mode is switched to the NC mode
Setting range: 0 to 9999
NOTE
This parameter prevents a machining program from being
accidentally executed when machining is started after the
conversational mode is switched to the NC mode.
If this parameter is set to 0, the system does not search for
programs.

9893

GERM1S

GERM1S: M code to be output when the low gear is selected (subspindle)


Setting range: 0 to 255
9894

GERM2S

GERM2S: M code to be output when medium gear 1 is selected (subspindle)


Setting range: 0 to 255
9895

GERM3S

GERM3S: M code to be output when medium gear 2 is selected (subspindle)


Setting range: 0 to 255

582

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

9896

GERM4S

GERM4S: M code to be output when the high gear is selected (subspindle)


Setting range: 0 to 255
9897

ANGNTL

ANGNTL: Angle of turret (tool post 1)


Setting range: 0 to 99
NOTE
This parameter is used for the tool/chuck interference check
function.

9898

DTCTRN

DTCTRN: Distance along the Xaxis between the center of the turret and the tip of
the turning tool
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inch
NOTE
This parameter is used for the tool/chuck interference check
function.

9899

DTCMIL

DTCMIL: Distance along the Xaxis between the center of the turret and the tip of
the milling cutter
Setting range: 0 to 99999999
Increment: 0.001 mm
0.0001 inch
NOTE
This parameter is used for the tool/chuck interference check
function.

583

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

A.19

B62444E1/04

The following parameters in the NC must be set when a conversational


function is used.

SETTING
PARAMETERS IN
THE NC
1022

Setting axes in the reference coordinate system

To determine the following planes for circular interpolation and tool tip
radius compensation, set each control axis to any one of axes, X, Y, Z in
the reference coordinate system, or an axis parallel to one of the reference
axes. Only one of the reference axes can be specified. Two or more axes
parallel to any of the reference axes can be specified.
G17:
G18:
G19:

XpYp plane
ZpXp plane
YpZp plane

Setting

Description

Axis which is neither a reference axis nor a parallel axis

X reference axis

Y reference axis

Z reference axis

Axis parallel to the Xaxis

Axis parallel to the Yaxis

Axis parallel to the Zaxis

D Set the parameter corresponding to the first axis (Xaxis) to 1, and the
parameter corresponding to the second axis (Zaxis) to 3. Set the
parameter corresponding to the third axis (Caxis) to 6 if the Caxis
graphic conversion function is provided.
#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

1300

OUT

3401

#0
OUT

1 : The outer end of the second stored stroke limit is treated as the
prohibited area.
0 : The inner end of the second stored stroke limit is treated as the
prohibited area.
D Always set this bit to 0.
#7
GSC

#6
GSB

#5

#4

#3

#2

#1

GSB and GSC: Any one of the G code systems is specified.


D Always set both bits to 0 (G code system A).

584

#0

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

#7

#6

#5

3405

CCR

#7

#6

LD1

1:
0:
D
1:

LGN

0:
D
1:
0:

LGT

D
1:

LGC

0:
D

GRN

SP2

GUL

DPA

#3

#2

#1

#0

To specify a corner radius during chamfering,


1 : Addresses I and K are used. In direct programming of a drawing
dimension, ,C or ,R are used.
0 : Addresses C and R are used. Address C cannot be used as the name of
a Caxis.
D Always set this bit to 0.

5002

6500

#4
CCR

#7
ANM

#5
LGC

#4
LGT

#3

#2

#1
LGN

#0
LD1

The offset No. of tool offset is specified by one digit after the T code.
The offset No. of tool offset is specified by two digits after the T code.
Always set this bit to 0.
The upper two digits in the T code indicate a tool geometry
compensation No.
The lower two digits in the T code indicate a tool geometry
compensation No.
Set this bit corresponding to the PMC.
The tool geometry is compensated according to tool movement.
The tool geometry is compensated according to the shift of the
coordinate system.
Always set this bit to 0.
Tool geometry compensation is canceled by specifying 0 for the offset
No.
Tool geometry compensation is not canceled by specifying 0 for the
offset No.
Always set this bit to 1.
#6
NZM

#5

#4
CSF

#3
DPA

#2
GUL

#1
SP2

#0
GRN

On the twospindle graphic display of the FS16/18TTA,


1 : Tool post 1 is shown on the right and tool post 2 is shown on the left.
0 : Tool post 1 is shown on the left and tool post 2 is shown on the right.
The graphic display of the FS16/18TTA shows:
1 : One spindle.
0 : Two spindles.
On the onespindle graphic display of the FS16/18TTA, the X1 and X2
axes are displayed:
1 : After they are exchanged.
0 : As they are.
The current position shown on the graphic screen is:
1 : The programmed position.
0 : The actual position obtained after the tooltip radius compensation is
applied.
D Always set this bit to 0

585

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

CSF

During NC program conversion, NC program display and product figure


drawing are:
1 : Enabled.
0 : Disabled.
Screen magnification according to the specified coordinates of the center
of the screen and magnification is:
1 : Enabled. (The conventional screen magnification is disabled.)
0 : Disabled.
On the graphic screen, the continuousstate G code and remaining
traveling distance are:
1 : Indicated.
0 : Not indicated.

NZM

ANM

#7

#6

6501

CSR

#5
CSR

#7

GRY

6509

#4

#3

#2

#1

#0

The cursor that appears on the magnified screen is:


1 : A cross ().
0 : A square (j).
#6

#5

6502

HSA

B62444E1/04

#4

#3

#2

#1
GRY

#0
HSA

Highspeed machining simulation drawing is:


1 : Enabled.
0 : Disabled.
D Usually, set this bit to 1.
Animated simulation for Yaxis machining is:
1 : Enabled.
0 : Disabled.
D When the Yaxis machining function is supported, set this bit to 1.
Drawing coordinate system: GRPAXS (for onespindle twoturret lathe)

GRPAXS Drawing coordinate system for the graphic function for a onespindle
twoturret lathe (Applicable to both tool posts)
<Related parameter: Bit 1 (SP2) of No. 6500>
11: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the chuck. The X1
axis is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
12: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the chuck. The X1
axis is displayed in the lower part of the screen.
14: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the workpiece. The
X1 axis is displayed in the upper part of the screen.
15: The programmed zero point is on the end face of the workpiece. The
X1 axis is displayed in the lower part of the screen.

586

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

X1

X2
GRPAXS=11

GRPAXS=12
Z

X2

X1
X2

X1
GRPAXS=15

GRPAXS=14
Z

X1

X2

6510

GRPAX:

Drawing coordinate system: GRPAX

Drawing coordinate system in the graphic function (Set the value each tool
post)
D Only the following values are valid for tool post 1 of the 1path lathe
and tool post 1 of the 2 turrets lathe with facing two spindles.
1 : The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and only
the upper half of the material is displayed.
11: The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and the
upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.
4 : The program reference position is on the workpiece end surface and
only the upper half of the material is displayed.
14: The program reference position is on the workpiece end surface and
the upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.

GRPAX=11

GRPAX=1

Z
Z

X
GRPAX=14

GRPAX=4

Z
Z

587

A. PARAMETERS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

D Only the following values are valid for tool post 2 of the 2 turrets lathe
with facing two spindles.
21: The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and only
the upper half of the material is displayed.
31: The program reference position is on the chuck end surface and the
upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.
24: The program reference position is on the workpiece end surface and
only the upper half of the material is displayed.
34: The program reference position is on the workpiece end surface and
the upper and lower sides of the material are displayed.
+X

+X

GRPAX=31

GRPAX=21
+Z
+Z

+X

+X

GRPAX=34

GRPAX=24
+Z
+Z

588

B. ALARMS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

ALARMS

If one or more of the set parameters are incorrect or the machining


program which was created in the conversational mode is incorrect when
an attempt is made to execute that program, the following P/S alarms are
raised.
When an alarm other than the following P/S alarms is raised, refer to the
relevant NC operators manual.
Alarm
3000

3001

Description
Cause

Some initial setting data is missing. (For example, the maximum


outside diameter or length is not entered.)

Action

On the initial setting screen, check whether all required data is entered. If some data is missing, enter correct data.

Reference

Section 6.3 in Part II SELECTING THE CONVERSATIONAL


MODE

Cause

The value of process data such as the machining area, tool number, or spindle gear is incorrect.
Example) A negative value is entered for an item that must be
positive.

Action

Reference
3002

3004

On the process data screen corresponding to this alarm, check


the entered process data values. If there is an incorrect value, enter a correct value.
Section 6.4 in Part II CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM
Part III TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS

Cause

Some figure data is missing.

Action

On the figure data screen for the process corresponding to this


alarm, check the entered data. If some data is missing, enter correct data.

Reference

Section 6.3 in Part II SELECTING THE CONVERSATIONAL


MODE
Part III TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS

Cause

On the initial setting screen, the value for the maximum spindle
speed is missing or set to 0.

Action

On the initial setting screen, enter a correct value for the maximum
spindle speed.

Reference

Section 6.3 in Part II SELECTING THE CONVERSATIONAL


MODE

589

B. ALARMS

APPENDIX

Alarm
3005

Description
Cause

On the process data screen, the value for the feedrate is missing
or set to 0.

Action

On the process data screen corresponding to this alarm, enter a


correct value for the feedrate.

Reference
3006

On the process data screen, the value for the depth of cut is missing or set to 0.

Action

On the process data screen corresponding to this alarm, enter a


correct value for the depth of cut.

3012

On the process data screen, the value for the feedrate is missing
or set to 0.

Action

On the process data screen corresponding to this alarm, enter a


correct value for the tool speed.

3015

Section 6.4 in Part II CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM


Part III TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS

Cause

The graphic conversation function does not operate normally.


This alarm is raised when the NC internal memory is damaged and
the graphic conversation function cannot operate normally.

Action

Contact FANUC.

Cause

The tool data is missing.


This alarm is raised when the data for the tool specified in the process data is not registered in the tool file.

Action

Check the tool management number for the process corresponding to this alarm. If the tool management number is incorrect, set
a correct value or register tool data with a correct tool management number in the tool file.

Reference
3014

Section 6.4 in Part II CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM


Part III TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS

Cause

Reference
3011

Section 6.4 in Part II CREATING A MACHINING PROGRAM


Part III TYPES OF MACHINING PROGRAMS

Cause

Reference
3007

B62444E1/04

Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Cause

The program is not selected.


This alarm is raised when a cycle is started without any program
being selected.

Action

Select a program and start the cycle.

Reference

Section 12.1 in Part II DIRECT OPERATION FOR MACHINING


PROGRAMS CREATED CONVERSATIONALLY

Cause

The finishing allowance or radius of the tool tip specified for bar
machining, pattern repeating, or grooving is too great. Normal
rough machining cannot be executed.

Action

Reduce the finishing allowance. Alternatively, use a tool with a


smaller radius at the tool tip.

Reference

Sections 1.1, 1.2, and 1.6 in Part III BAR MACHINING, PATTERN
REPEATING AND GROOVING

590

B. ALARMS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

Alarm
3020

Description
Cause

Cutting in bar machining is impossible because of the relationship


between the tool angle, cutting edge angle, and clearance angle
(parameter 9801) for the tool used.
This alarm is raised when the sum of the above three angles is less
than or equal to 90 or is greater than or equal to 180.

Action

Check the tool angle and cutting edge angle or parameter 9801.
If the angles are incorrect, set correct values for the angles. If the
parameter is incorrect, set a correct value in the parameter.
If the sum of the three angles is less than or equal to 90 or is greater than or equal to 180 even after the change, change the tool.

Reference
3021

Cause

The part to be left in automatic residual machining cannot be determined.


This alarm is raised when the intersection of the end point of the
part to be left and the figure cannot be calculated (the part to be
left is determined by the tool angle, cutting edge angle, and clearance angle (parameter 9801)) for the tool used.

Action

On the figure data screen for the process corresponding to this


alarm, check the machining figure. If the figure is incorrect, enter
correct figure data. If the figure is correct, the tool cannot be used
for that figure. So, change the tool for the process data or change
the clearance angle (parameter 9801).

Reference
3022

The figure data is incorrect in intermediate bar machining. If there


is a figure whose Xcoordinate is greater than that of the starting
point in bar machining, the Zcoordinate of the start point must be
on the end surface of a workpiece after end cutting. Conversely,
if the Zcoordinate of the start point is not on the end surface of a
workpiece after end cutting, there must be no figure whose X
coordinate is greater than the Xcoordinate of the start point. This
alarm is raised when an attempt is made to execute a figure violating the above conditions.

Action

On the figure data screen for the process corresponding to this


alarm, check the figure data. If there is incorrect data, enter correct
data.
Section 1.1 in Part III BAR MACHINING

Cause

The figure data for automatic residual machining in bar machining


is incorrect.
This alarm is raised when the change of the X and Zcoordinates
for the figure for automatic residual machining is not monotonous.

Action

On the figure data screen for the bar machining process corresponding to this alarm, check the figure.

Reference
3025

Section 1.1 in Part III BAR MACHINING


Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Cause

Reference
3024

Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Section 1.1 in Part III BAR MACHINING

Cause

A correct tool trace cannot be calculated in bar machining.


This alarm is raised when there is an error in the result of internal
calculation (for example, when the value under a square root sign
is negative because of an error in calculation).

Action

Contact FANUC.

591

B. ALARMS

APPENDIX

Alarm
3026

Description
Cause

The groove width or tool used is incorrect in grooving.


This alarm is raised when the width of the tool used is smaller than
the groove width.

Action

On the process data screen for the grooving process corresponding to this alarm, check the groove width. If the width is incorrect,
enter a correct value. Otherwise, select a tool whose cutting edge
width is smaller than the groove width.

Reference
3027

The cutting edge width of the tool used in grooving is 0.

Action

Enter a correct value for the cutting edge width for the grooving
tool in the tool data file.

Cutting in trapezoidal grooving is impossible because of the relationship of the groove bottom width and the tool width.
This alarm is raised when the cutting edge width of the tool used
is smaller than the groove bottom width in trapezoidal grooving.

Action

Check the figure, on the figure data screen for the grooving process corresponding to this alarm. If the figure is incorrect, enter
correct data. Otherwise, select a tool whose cutting edge width is
smaller than the groove bottom width.
Section 1.6 in Part III PATTERN REPEATING
Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Cause

The start point for threading coincides with the end point.

Action

On the figure data screen for the threading process corresponding


to this alarm, enter correct data for the figure.

Reference
3030

Section 1.6 in Part III PATTERN REPEATING


Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Cause

Reference
3029

Section 1.6 in Part III PATTERN REPEATING


Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Cause

Reference
3028

B62444E1/04

Section 1.5 in Part III THREADING

Cause

The cutting edge angle or tool angle for the tool used in necking
is incorrect.
There are some restrictions on the cutting edge angle and tool
angle in necking because of the nature of necking. These limits
are determined by the angle at the necking part set in the parameter.
Normally, the system automatically determines a tool which satisfies the above limits. However, when a tool is manually selected,
that tool may not satisfy the limits. In this case, this alarm is raised.

Action

Check the cutting edge angle and tool angle for the tool used in
necking. If the tool is not suitable for necking, charge the tool. Select the number of a tool appropriate for necking on the process
data screen for necking again.

Reference

Section 1.7 in Part III NECKING


Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

592

B. ALARMS

APPENDIX

B62444E1/04

Alarm
3031

Description
Cause

The chamfering tool is incorrect in Caxis grooving or Caxis cylindrical machining.


This alarm is raised when the smaller diameter of the chamfering
tool is larger than the groove width.

Action

Select a chamfering tool whose minor diameter is smaller than the


groove width.

Reference

3032

Cause

Section 2.3 in Part III GROOVING FOR END FACES


Section 2.4 in Part III CAXIS GROOVING FOR SIDE FACES
Section 2.7 in Part III CAXIS CYLINDRICAL MACHINING
Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA
The relation between the Zcoordinates of the start point and the
end point is set incorrectly in Caxis notching.
This alarm is raised in the following cases:
1) The start point is closer to the chuck than the end point in the
Zaxis in Caxis notching for end faces.
2) The start point is closer to the end face than the end point in
the Zaxis in Caxis notching for side faces.

Action

Reference
3033

The tool radius is set to 0 in Caxis notching.

Action

In the tool data file, check the radius of the tool being used. If it is
wrong, enter correct data.
Section 2.5 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR END FACES
Section 2.6 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR SIDE FACES
Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Cause

The tool cannot enter the section where notching is to be performed.


This alarm is raised when the width of the tool is larger than that
of the section to be notched in the Zaxis.

Action

Select a side cutter whose width is smaller than that of the section
to be notched. The width of the section to be notched is the difference between the Zcoordinates of the start point and the end
point in Caxis notching for side faces.

Reference
3040

Section 2.5 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR END FACES


Section 2.6 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR SIDE FACES

Cause

Reference

3034

Check the Zcoordinates of the start point and the end point in C
axis notching. If the relation of the values is incorrect, enter correct
data.

Section 2.6 in Part III CAXIS NOTCHING FOR SIDE FACES


Section 13.1 in Part II SETTING DATA

Cause

Data of an incorrect format was input from an external memory


unit. This alarm is issued, for example, when the format of the data
output by the batch data input/output function is converted to an
invalid format by a remote unit.

Action

Check the input data.

Reference

Section 14 in Part II BATCH DATA INPUT/OUTPUT FUNCTION

593

Index

B62444E1/04

Changing screen display colors (Super CAP II T), 237


Changing the figure, 101

Adding a figure, 103

Changing the process data, 98

Adding a new process, 97

Checking a machining program, 8

Alarms, 589

Checking input figures, 74

Alarms during conversion of the machining program into the


NC program, 124

Checking machining programs, 73

Alternation of G30 command in macro program, 90

Checking machining programs using the simulation, 77

Animated simulation, 484, 519

Chuck barrier, 146

Animated simulation function for machining with the


subspindle, 463

Chuck data extension function (optional), 224

Another setup operation for machining, 486

Chuck/tail stock figure data, 223

Automatic output of the M code for controlling the subspindle


(and the M codes for calling subprograms), 465

Chuck/tailstock barrier, 155

Chuck figure data, 223

Clearing setting data, 226

Automatic pretool determination function, 364

Coefficients, 211

Automatic pretool selection function, 384, 390, 433, 442

Compensation by tool cutting edge, 287, 296

Automatic residual machining function, 274

Conversion of machining programs, 457

Automatic reverse machining, 296


Automatic scheduling, 111

Converting a machine program in the righthand coordinate


system to that in the lefthand coordinate system, 454

Automatic tool selection, 351

Converting a machining program to an NC program, 121, 122

Automatic tool specification function, 194

Converting machining programs into NC programs, 120

Auxiliary and transfer processes, 374

Coordinate system for Caxis machining with the subspindle,


462
Copying a process, 109
Copying a program, 72

Creating a machining program, 7, 57, 476, 510

Back machining functions for a lathe with a subspindle, 459

Creating a new program using other programs, 72

Back machining with the subspindle, 461

Creating machining programs, 53

Bar and pattern repeating finishing processing without using


G41/G42 command, 290, 304

Creating machining programs for a lathe having the Yaxis


machining function, 424

Bar machining, 247

Creating machining programs for lathes with the Caxis, 505

Batch data input/output function, 227

Creating machining programs for twopath 4axis (X1, Z, X2,


and Z2) lathes, 469
Cutting condition data for Caxis/Yaxis machining tools, 209

Cutting condition data for drilling tools, 207


Cutting condition data for grooving tools, 206

Caxis cylindrical machining, 418

Cutting condition data for tapping tools, 208

Caxis grooving for side faces, 398

Cutting condition data for threading tools, 205

Caxis machining function under control of spindle positioning,


464
Caxis notching for end faces, 405

Caxis notching for side faces, 415

Data input, 234

Calculation functions similar to those of a handheld calculator,


12

Data output, 229

Calling display color data, 241

Data that can be entered and output, 228

Calling subprograms, 370

Deleting a figure, 105

Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping (on the side face),
434

Deleting a process, 97, 110

Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping for end faces, 378

Deleting machining programs, 116


Description of coordinate systems, 43

Center drilling, drilling, reaming, and tapping for side faces,


385

Description of the keyboard, 21

Center drilling, drilling, reaming, boring, and tapping, 354

Details of automatic scheduling, 113

Changing entered figure data, 99

Details of bar machining, 276

Changing figure data other than contour data, 105

Details of Caxis notching, 411

Changing part of the contour data, 99

Details of Caxis notching for side faces, 417

i1

INDEX

B62444E1/04

Details of contour calculation, 260

Example of creating a program for notching and cylindrical


machining around the Caxis, 509

Details of conversion to machining program in the lefthand


coordinate system, 457

Example of inputting contours for bar machining and pattern


repeating, 487

Details of cylindrical machining, 423

Examples of programs for machining the cylindrical surface of


bars, 476

Details of end facing, 314

Executing machining programs, 156

Details of figure data, 256, 308, 323, 337, 352, 366, 382, 388,
394, 400, 408, 416, 421
Details of grooving, 343

Execution of a conversational machining program after


conversion to an NC program, 159

Details of necking, 352

Execution selection state display, 89

Details of pattern repeating, 294


Details of process data, 306, 313, 316, 330, 346, 365, 370, 379,
386, 392, 399, 407, 416

Details of residual machining, 312

Figure data, 430, 439, 446, 452

Details of set data, 419

Figure data (for single action II), 369

Details of setting data, 249, 293

Figure data input, 293

Details of settings, 58

Figure data input operation, 367

Details of the automatic setting of tool geometry data for


drawing, 198

Figure data screen, 68


Flowchart from creating a program to executing it, 6

Details of the keyboard, 23

For twopath lathes with one spindle, 50

Details of threading, 326

Format of machining program used for the onepath lathes, 54

Direct operation for machining programs created


conversationally, 126

Format of machining program used for the twopath lathes, 55

Displaying the contents of the machining program, 74

Function for controlling the Caxis brake, 463

Displaying the figure of a product, 483


Displaying the process directory screen, 106

Displaying the registeredprogram directory screen for direct


operation, 127

Grooving, 328

Displaying the tool data directory screen, 163

Grooving for end faces, 391

Drilling parameters (1), 526

Hierarchy of the conversational screens, 15


How to change display colors, 238

Editing a machining program in units of processes (program


screen), 97
Editing machining programs, 94

Editing machining programs in units of processed (process


editing screen), 106
Editing NC programs (cross editing), 117

I/O parameter display, 236

End facing, 313

Improvement of pattern repeating cutting retract movement,


297

End of checking machining programs, 76


Enlarging a figure and displaying other screens, 83

Improving the machining of figures that differ slightly in level,


291

Enlarging the part of the contour, 76

Initial settings, 58

Entering contour data for machining on the 2path lathe with


two spindles facing each other, 279

Input for the end process, 518

Entering contour data for machining on the singlespindle


2path lathe (16TB), 281

Entering initial data, 477

Keyboard types, 22

Entering setting data before execution, 123

Keys for calculation, 14

Entering subprogram names on the subprogram calling


screen, 538
Entering the initial data, 511

Entering the number and name of a program, 57

Mcode and program end processes, 375

Entering workpiece material, 528

i2

INDEX

B62444E1/04

Mcode process, 375

Parameters for conversational peripheral functions, 527

Machine coordinate system, 44, 47, 50

Parameters for drilling, 573

Machining condition data and surface roughness data, 203

Parameters for grooving, 568

Machining condition data for generalpurpose tools, 203

Parameters for necking, 567

Machining programs for 2axes (X and Z axis) lathes, 246

Parameters for notching, 577

Machining programs for lathes with Caxis, 377

Parameters for other conversational functions, 578

Machining simulation based on a solid model (Super CAP II T),


91

Parameters for the Mfunctionlist screen, 532

Machining type selecting, 436

Parameters for Yaxis machining, 572

Machining type selection, 247, 292, 305, 313, 315, 329, 345,
355, 365, 370, 378, 385, 391, 398, 405, 415, 418, 443, 449

Parameters necessary for using the conversational automatic


programming function (bittype), 540

Measuring tool geometry compensation when a tool setter is


used, 143

Parameters necessary for using the conversational automatic


programming function (common data), 554

Measuring tool geometry compensation when no tool setter is


used, 137

Partially enlarged drawing of a contour, 273

Parameters for threading, 570

Pattern repeating, 292

Mounting tools, 135

Pattern repeating approach to shape start point, 300

Moving a process between the two tool posts, 108

Pretool list, 222

Moving a process for a tool post, 107

Process data, 356, 437


Process data (for single action II), 368
Process data (for subcall II), 372

Process data screen, 65

NC program conversion for Caxis notching, 413

Processing data, 444

NC program conversion for subcall II, 374

Program coordinate system, 46, 49, 52

Necking, 345

Program end process, 376

Notes on subprograms, 371

Punching out setting data, 226

Null cutting cancel function, 282

Reading machining programs, 119

Offset data save and restore function, 87

Reading setting data, 226

Onepath lather, 44

Registeredprogram directory screen for conversion to NC


program, 121

Onepath lathes, 29

Registeredprogram directory screen for editing, 72, 74, 95

Operation before execution (such as selecting a program,


mounting a tool, etc.), 127

Registering the tool material, 537

Operation for calculation, 12

Residual machining, 305

Operation for data other than contour data on the figure data
screen, 70

Restrictions on conversion to machining programs in the


lefthand coordinate system, 458

Operation for initial settings, 64

Returning to the main menu, 484, 521

Operation for the process data screen, 66


Operation modes, 26

Operation of automatic scheduling, 111


Operation on the contour data screen, 68

Searching for a process (editing), 110

Operations on the tool data directory screen, 164

Selecting a machining program, 78, 96

Outputting machining programs, 118

Selecting a machining program to be executed, 9

Override playback function, 157

Selecting a machining type, 426

Overview of the procedure, 19

Selecting the conversational mode, 56


Selecting the machining program to be edited, 95
Selecting the menu and inputting data, 10

Selecting the subspindle, 460


Selecting the type of machining (for subcall II), 371

Parameters, 525

Selecting the type of machining (single action II), 368

Parameters for bar machining, pattern repeating, end facing,


and residual machining, 562

Setting, 427, 450

i3

INDEX

B62444E1/04

Setting cutting condition data, 475


Setting data, 160

Tail stock figure data, 225

Setting data on the setting screen before execution, 129

Threading, 315

Setting parameters, 470, 506

Tool changing position temporary setting, 90

Setting parameters in the NC, 584

Tool data file, 162

Setting the reader/punch interface, 125

Tool data for boring, 192

Setting the workpiece shift amount, 485

Tool data for center drills, 180

Setting tool and cutting condition data, 507

Tool data for chamfering, 188

Setting tool data, 474

Tool data for drilling, 176

Setting tool data and cutting condition data, 474

Tool data for end mills, 184

Setting tool data for machining around the Caxis, 507

Tool data for external threads and internal threads, 170

Setting up machining, 485

Tool data for grooving on outer surfaces, inner surfaces, and


end faces, 172

Simulating a cutting operation based on a solid model, 91


Simulating machining, 80

Tool data for machining outer surfaces, inner surfaces, end


faces, and inner bottom faces, 166

Simulation of C/Yaxis machining, 91

Tool data for reamers, 190

Simulation of Yaxis machining, 85

Tool data for side cutters, 186

Simulation of Yaxis machining by a onepath lathe, 85

Tool data for tapping, 178

Simulation of Yaxis machining by a twopath lathe, 86

Tool data for throwaway drills, 182

Single action, 365

Tool geometry data for drawing, 196

Soft keys, 11

Tool post name parameters, 539

Specifying a machining program, 128

Twopath lathes, 37

Specifying a transfer process, 480

Twopath lathes with two opposing spindles, 47

Specifying process 1 (end face and cylindrical surface


machining), 512

Type of screens, 28

Specifying process 2 (notching the end face around the Caxis),


513

Specifying process 3 (cylindrical surface machining around the


Caxis), 516

User parameters, 537

Specifying the primary machining process (for the leftside tool


post), 478
Specifying the program to be edited, 74

Specifying the secondary machining process (for the rightside


tool post), 481

Workpiece coordinate system, 45, 48, 51

Starting execution of machining programs, 156


Storing and calling display color data, 240

Storing display color data, 240


Subprograms to be called (subcall II), 373
Surface roughness data, 221

Yaxis center drilling, drilling, and tapping (on the end face),
425

Symbols used, 5

Yaxis milling (on the end face), 443


Yaxis milling (on the side face), 448

i4

Oct., 97

Dec., 95

Nov., 94

Sep., 94

Date

04

03

02

01

Edition

Contents

Following functions are added.


Offset Data Save and Restore Function
Compensation by Tool Cutting Edge
Bar and Pattern Repeating Finishing Processing without using G41/G42
Improvement of Pattern Repeating Cutting Retract
Movement
Pattern Repeating Approach to Shape Start Point

Series 18TB is added.

Super CAP II T is added.

Series 16TC and Series 18TC are added.

Series 16i/18iTA is added.

Edition

Date

FANUC            


 

Revision Record

Contents

No part of this manual may be


reproduced in any form.

All specifications and designs


are subject to change without
notice.